c ..r.y. IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) /. // ^ .*%^ .^:4^ 1.0 I.I us I IS I ut ■yuu |Z5 ^ ifii L25 lliu IIIIII.6 — 6" 1 /3 V Photographic Sciences Corporation 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N.Y. 145S0 (716)872-4503 mm ril> m CIHM/ICMH Microfiche Series. CIHM/ICMH Collection de microfiches. Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductlons historiques jt*(««i««flew»«ga5iig(»sa«Kw«®*«ss(«!MK'«^^ > -* ' ^ Technical and Bibliographic Notes/Notes techniques et bibliographiques The Institute has attempted to obtain the best original copy available for filming. Features of this copy which may be bibliographically unique, which may alter any of the images in the reproduction, or which may significantly change the usual method of filming, are checked below. Colopjred covers/ Couverture de couleur Covers damaged/ Couverture endommag6e f Covers restored and/or laminated/ Couverture restaurde et/ou pellicul6e □ Cover title missing/ Le titre de couverture manque □ Coloured maps/ Cartes gdographiques en couleur □ Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/ Encre de couleur (i.e. autre que bleue ou noire) D D D Coloured plates and/or illustrations/ Planches et/ou illustrations en couleur Bound with other material/ Reli6 avec d'autres documents Tight binding may cause shadows or distortion along interior margin/ La reliure serr^e peut causer de I'ombre ou de la distortion le long de la marge int6rieure Blank leaves added during restoration may appear within the text. Whenever possible, these have been omitted from filming/ II se peut que certaines pages blanches ajout6es lors d'une restauration apparaissent dans le texte, mais, lorsque cela 6tait possible, ces pages n'ont pas 6t6 filmdes. L'Institut a microfilm^ le meilleur exemplaire qu'i! lui a 6td possible de se procurer. Les details de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-Atre uniques du point de vue bibliographique, qui peuvent modifier une image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger une modification dans la m6thode normale de filmage sont indiquis ci-dessous. I I Coloured pages/ Pages de couleur Pages damaged/ Pages endommagdes I — I Pages restored and/or laminated/ Pages restaur^es et/ou pellicul6es Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/ Pages d6color6es, tachet6es ou piqu6es Pages detached/ Pages ddtachdes I I Showthrough/ D Transparence Quality of prir Quality in6gale de I'impression Includes supplementary materii Comprend du materiel suppl^mentaire Only edition available/ Seule 6ditlon disponible I I Quality of print varies/ I I Includes supplementary material/ I — I Only edition available/ Pages wholly or partially obscured by errata slips, tissues, etc., have been ref limed to ensure the best possible image/ Les pages totalemcnt ou partiellement obscurcies par un feuillet d'errata, une pelure, etc., ont kxk filmdes k nouveau de fapon d obtenir la meilleure image possible. D Additional comments:/ Commentaires suppl^mentaires; This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/ Ce document est filmd au taux de reduction indiqu6 ci-dessoi'. (meaning "CON- TINUED"), or the symbol y (meaning "END"), whichever applies. Les exemplaires origlnaux dont la couvarture en papier est ImprimAe sont filmAs en commen^ant par le premier plat et en terminant soit par la dernlAre page qui comporte une empreinte d'impression ou d'illustration, soit par le second plat, salon le cas. Tous les autres exemplaires origlnaux sont filmAs en commenpant par la premiAre page qui comporte une empreinte d'impression ou d'illustration et en terminant par la dernlAre page qui comporte une telle empreinte. Un des symboles suivants apparaitra sur la dernlAre image de cheque microfiche, selon le cas: le symbole — ► signif ie "A SUIVRE", le symbole ▼ signifle "FIN ". lire Maps, plates, charts, etc., may be filmed at different reduction ratios. Those too large to be entirely included in one exposure are filmed beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to right and top to bottom, as many frames as required. The following diagrams illustrate the method: Les cartes, planches, tableaux, etc., peuvent Atre filmAs A des taux de reduction diffArents. Lorsque le document est trop grand pour Atre reproduit en un seul clichA, 11 est filmA A partir de Tangle supArieur gauche, de gauche d droite, et de haut en bas, en prenant le nombre d'images nAcessalra. Les diagrammes suivants iliustrent la mAthode. by errata led to snt jne pelure, 'apon d 1 2 3 32X 1 2 3 4 5 6 SI] JOl o m In FOl m and Pi 'I Vol. 1.0 ] Vol. n. ( El ] ] J Vol. m. "Ab t J t Loiraui »*f* Ale JOURNALS OF PROCEEDINGS In FOUR VOLUMES, Ato., price £4 4». indudiny Maps and Plans ; or the Volumes can be had separately, viz, SIEGE OF SEBASTOPOL. COXKECTED VriTU TBK I. (vith Maps and Plans) Enoineeb Opeiutions from the lu- vflsion of tlie Crimea to the close of the Winter Campaign, 1864-66, hy Capt. H. C. ELFniirsiosE, R.E. II. (with Maps and Plans) Ekoineee Opbbations from Feb. 1866, to the fall of Scbastopol, Sept. 1866, by MiHor General Sir Habrt Jones, K.C.B., &c. Ac. m. "Abtillert Opebatiovs before Sebas- topol in 1864 and 1865, by W. Edmund M. Bbillt, C.B., Captain Kcyal Ar- tillery and Brevet Major. Prici XI 6 3 10 10 Printed for Ber Majesty's Stationery Office, AMD lOLU BT Loifoju (. Gbeen, Lokomas, and Robebts, Paternoster Bow: and W. H. Allen and Co., 13, "Waterloo Place, London. Also, Alex. Thom and Sons, Abbey Street, Dublin. NEW BDmON OP j'^; i THE INFAI^RY SWORD EXEHCIsl I Cri M n t9 H o M H M a H l^nied un4*r th» Stipmrit^mdMee'qfS. M. SUttUmery Qfflee, ^"■^1^ tS^l!!l!^S°y^4^^^^^^^ ! ^- Ou,WM» uid 8oi ^. «? w". H. AuaiTmd Oo.,la, Wntek(5 II110& Al»ol>yAiJx.THOMMidgoyg, Abbey Street. Dublin. F IE kiKTED DNDEB FIELD EXERCISE ' AHD 'M. M. StatUmery Qfflet, t tnd ; W,. Cluwbs and Soj .Jj W»iterio«) Ptwe. A*" bbey Street, Dublin. EVOLUTIONS ov INFANTRY, i.S BGVI8E0 1 1861, r . \ LONDON : HKTBD DKDEE THE SOPERl NTENDENCF. OF HEB MAJBSTT'S STATIOMEEY OFriCK, AMD SOLD BT PARKER, SON, AND BOURN, «5. West Strand; W. CLOWES AND B0N8, 14, Charing Cross; HARRISON AND SONS, 69, Pall Mall ; and W. H. ALLEN AND CO., 13. Waterloo Place ; ! Also by ALEX. THOM A ND SO NS, Abbey Street, Dubhw. 1862. Price One ShilHttff- l) J 1 (;il,684.— 10,000.— 1/C2 Field been ve^ landing j landa to re of Trooj system now to theii r^esty tr 'licit ob( 'ions, an( of the i by introd has been ( By Co Ge m 5^ v?/" GENERAL ORDER. , Horse Guards, S.W., ^ 1 IE Field Exercise and Evolutions of Infantry" £ug been .evised His Royal Highness the oTn^U Jnunandmg ^n Chief ha, received the Queen^ ^da to require of all General Officera il comL JL ^^' ' ,"**'* ^""'P^lo"^ adherence to " nratem now Promulgated. • to their superintendence and vigilance that ^esty trusts for the enforcenient%f prol plicit obedience to all General Orders and -lon^ and His Royal Highness reminds the 8 of the Army of the reaponsibUity they wiU by introducing any deviation from a syatem has been sanctioned by Her Majesty. By Commajid of His Royal H.ghneaa the general Commanding in Chief. J. YO^KE SCABLETT, A.G. A 2 £Ss=ii£_- CONTENTS. PART I. RECRUIT OR SQUAD DRILL, GENERAL rRINCIPLES. ROS. I, InatracUon of the Recruit • . . II. Duration of Drills, &a • . . III. Mutual Instruction • . . . IV. Division of a Battalion into Drill Classes V. Words of Command - - . . RECRUIT OR SQUAD DRILL WITHOUT Oenkbal DinscTioNS. I. System- ..... IL Formation of Squads .... SQUAD DRLLL, WITH INTERVALS BEOTIONS I. Position of the Soldier ... 9. Standing at Ease .... 3. Dressing a Squad with Interrals 4. Extension Motions .... 5. Saluting . . . . . 6. Facings ..... MARCHING. 7. Length of Step .... 8. Cadence - - • - . 9. The Drum, Plummet, and Pace Stick - , 10. Position in Marching .... 11. RaUutceStep ^^aiurttA inCTIONS m. Blow Stop M». The Halt 14. Stepping 01 13. Stepping t1 ' la. Marking T 17. Stepping bt 18. Changing ] 19. The Quick 90. TheI)oubl( 91. The Side oi Turning wl SQl Pivot and I Formation i Dressing wl Marching t< Wheeling o: Changing L a MoTea' The Diagon Marching a Wheeling a Men, march The Side or IQUAD DR Manual and jMarching w lUAD DI tfVormation o Dressing Marching to Taking Opei 'Manual and of Firing . CONTINTH. ■RCTIONR .JlJ. Slow Stop ■*B. The Halt U. Stepping oat - . . '13. Stepping short - ' la. Marking Time in the Slow Cadence 17. Stepping back in Slow Tinio - .18. Changing Feet - 19. The Quick Step 90. The Double Match - ftl. The Side or Closing Step tt> Turning when on the March - PAOB - 34 • 24 • 9.5 - 25 • 95 • 90 • 96 - 26 - 27 - 28 • »» Br SQUAD DRILL IN SINGLE RANIC 93. Pivot and Reverse Flanks - - - .30 94. Formation of the 8t8 to be quickly remedied Xin. Assembling on CoYerers - - . XIV. Marching on Points and judging Distance XV, Officers to be drilled as PriTatcs - aVT. Officers to be perfectly iostmcted in their Duty Noa. ■XVII. F^amini ■»XVm. Squad J: XIX. General A coa i£CTI0N8 Formation oi Formation of Marching to WB 4. A Company 1 Line - 0. A Company Column 6. A Company ) cither Flanh 7. A Company > 8. Wheeling bac Line - f 9. An Open Coli into Line WHEEL flO. Wheeling ftoi I Column III. Columns chan ■2. A Company ii Column of I Imiscellaneo iS. Murching past l4.TheEchellon Is. Marching on t divisions ^6. A Company in ing to the Re saetTTt: Jl NOS. UONTBNTB. ^^JtVt J^'»^'»»«"n Of Young Offloen *XVm. 8qu«d Drill for Offlccw - ' Line'into 11. Column, changing Direction .'.'.' ^ r^K^i« ^l. .''^^»°'='"K «•»«» a Flank in Open" Column of Sub-division. or Section. *^ 71 78 71 74 76 79 81 as 83 89 8.1 ImISCELLANEOUS MOVEMENTS AND FORMATIONS. ?"^i^''i!W'"' *" ^'°^ ""d Quick Time , . «« 4. The Lchellon March of Subdivisions or SecUon. . 91 Son."" " ^"K""*"* *" Open Column of Snb- ( I I ■111 i i ^ vm BBOnONS 17 CONTENTS. PAOK . A Company marching In Flies or Fours, foiming to the Front, to cither I'lank, or to the Right or I^eft aboat 94 97 97 97 08 B8 99 fi4. S5. 26, li7 - 100 102 103 103 18. The Diagonal March 19. File Marching and Wheeling in File - - - 20. The Formation of Fours , - . - ai. A Company formed in Fours closing on the Flank, or on the Centre, and re-forming Two Deep - » •^a. The Side or Closing Step - - - • Si3. Counter-marching - - - - htcbeasing and DnnNisraNo the front ,op COLUMNS. a Company diminishing Front by forming Sub-divisions from the Halt - - ■ - A Company diminishing Front by forming Sub-divisions on the Ularch ..... Sub-divisions diminishing Front by forming Sections - Sections increasing Front by forming Sub-divisions from the Halt .-.--- 28. Sections increasing Front by forming Sab-divisions on the March ------ 29. Sub-divisions and Sections increasing Front by forming Company -...-- 30. Diminishing and increasing Front by breaking ofif Files, and bringing them again to the Front - i- Sl. Diminishing and increasing Front by breaking into Fours, or Files.and re-forming Sections, Sub-divisions, or Company -.---• SQUARES. 82. Forming Close Column of Sections and Company Square 10 33. Forming Rallying Squares - - - - 1' PROVING AND DISMISSING. 34. Proving a Company - 85. Disaiissing a Company JL^ t!08. I. Names of Fai II. Formation of m. Instructor to ', IV. The Rifle tori V. How to carry SGCTiom 11 iia 1 111 1. Manual Exerc a. The Manual Rank 3. ThcManuall Two Ranks, 4. The Platoon ] 5. To Fire and I 6. Platoon Exen BX 7. Rifle Exercise 8. Review Exerc 9. Modes of firin 10. Manner of Im 1. Bayonet or S^ rxoK Pours, foiming to the Right or I^ft aboat ile - Lon the flank, or on cep - - 94 97 97 97 98 98 99 Ji^ CONTENTS. PART III. RIFLE EXERCISFS. IX General Dibections. SOS. NO THE FRONT OP ronning Sub-divisicnn - 100 brming Sub-divlnioni • l02 ly forming Sections - 103 eg Sub-divisions from - 103 ling Sab-divisions on . 104 ing Front by forming . 10 by breaking off File^ Front - f- 10, nt by breaking into ections, Sub-divisions, . 1 s and Company Square 10( - Ill VAOB • 116 - 116 - 116 - i:6 - 116 I. Names of Parts of the Rifle - _ n . Fonnation of Squad - [TI. Instructor to have Kifle IV. The Rifle to be used vith care V. How to carry the Rifle SECTIOHB MAl^UAL EXERCISES. 1. Manual Exercise with the Long Rifle, in Single Rank - ISl 3. The Manual Exercise with the Short Rifle, in Single Rank 141 3. The Manual Exercise for the Long and Short Rifle, in SMISSING. 11! tsTftm Two Ranks, and Piling y.rms - • - 156 PLATOON EXERCISES. 4. The Platoon Exercise for the Long and Short Rifle - l.'iS 5. To Fire and Re-load Kneeling- - - - 177 6. Platoon Exercise and Firing in Two Ranks - - 182 EXERCISES FOR SERJEANTS. 7. Rifle Exercises for Seijeants - • - - 184 REVIEW EXERCISE. *. Review Exercise ... (iu^^im:: - 186 FIRING. ». Modes of firing - - " a.-fTltft "'88 INSPECTING. 10. Manner of Inspecting a Company on Parade - -197 BAYONET EXERCISES. 190 Hill. Bayonet or Sword Bayonet Exercise ! CONTRNTB. PAKT IV. FORMATION AND EVOLUTK NS OF A BATTALION. GENERAL PHINCIPLES. MOa. FAOG I. Application of Squad and Company Drill - -218 IL Battalions to move as component Parts of a Brigade 218 IIL Words of Command - - - - 219 rV. Mounted Officers - - - - - 219 V. Giving Points ..... 219 VL Alignment and Points of Formation - - 220 yiL Degrees of March . - - . - 221 Vm. Bayonets to be fixed - - - - 221 IX. Covering Seijeants - . - - - 221 X. Order of Companies to be changed- - .221 XL Inyerslon of Companies .... 222 Xn. A Battalion dispersed, re-assembling - . 222 XUL Colour Party - - - - -222 A BATTALION ON PARADE. 8EOTION8 1. Formation of a Battalion on Parade in Open Column, Right in Front ..... 222 S. Wheeling into Line from Open Column - - 227 FORMATION AND MOVEMENTS OF A BATTALION IN LINE, voa. VL Central Bi VIL Points to 1 VnL Closing to ] BECTION8 3. Formation of 4. A Battalion i Close Ordi 5. Advancing ai 6. Charging In '. 7. Dressing a B 8. Advancing ai 9. A Battalion i 10. Battalions in NOS. I. Use and Ac IL Formation i m. Depth of C rV. Apfklicatioi y. Application VL ApplioatioE TIL Applieatioi General Pbincifles. iros. L Formation of Lines n. Marching in Line - . - III. Passing over Inequalities of Ground IV. Retiring in Line ... V. Flank Base Points and Coverers - 8CCTIOK8 II. Formation of 299 IS. Forming Cloe 229 more Open 229 18. A Close or Q 229 Front, Bear 230114. Oolnnuia inoi passing Obe —■■ . II V. [iUTK NS OF A 3IPLES. FAOG pany Drill - - 218 nt Parta of a Brigade 218 • 219 - 219 - 219 • 220 - 221 - 221 - 221 - 221 - 222 - 222 - 222 ation iged- ibling PARADE. tde in Open Column, - 222 dumn - - 227 S OF A BATTALION i>L£8. ound OONTBNTS. DOS. VL Central Base Points VII. Points to be kept clear ... Vm. Closing to correct Distances FOBHATION AND MoVKHKKTS. BECnONS 3. Formation of the Battalion in Line - . > 4. A Battalion in Line taking Open Order and resuming Close Order ..... Advancing and Betiring in Line ... Charging in Line . . . . - Dressing a Battalion in Line ... Advancing and Retiring by Wings ... A Battalion in Line passing Obstacles 10. Battalions in Line relieving each other COLUMN MOVEMENTa Qenbbai. Pkikoifueb. NOS. L Use and Advantages of Columns • n. Formation of Columns .... ni. Depth of Columns . - - . rv. Aiiplication of Single Columns v. Application of Double Columns VL Application of the Quarter Distance Column TIL Application of the Close Column . PASB . 230 . 230 - 231 231 Movements. itOTioirs II. Formation of a Battalion in Open Column • 299 IS. Forming Close or Quarter Distance Column from any 229 more Open Column • • . 229 18. A Close or Quarter Distance Column opening ttom the - 229 Front, Bear, or flvm any named Company - 280114. Oolnnuia increasing and diminishing their Vxoat, wd passing Obstacles . . . . . SM ^Mrifi*. ▲_ i CONTENTS. bfiOnOVS PAOB 19. An Open Column changing Direction, and nukrching on an Alignment, or moving into an Alignment hj the Flank March of Fours - - - -250 16. A Column at Close or Quarter Distance Wheeling on a fixed or moveable Pivot - - - -261 17. A Close or Quarter Distance Column taking Ground to a Flank wheeling to the Right or Left - - 364 18. A Close or Quarter Distance Column changing Front to the Rear by the Wheel of Sub-divisions round the Centre - - - • - •• 364 Columns conntermarohing by Filet and by Ranks - 268 Changing the Order of a Column by the sucoesiiTe March of the Rear Companies to the Front • - 268 Changing the Order of an Open, Half, or Quarter Dis- tance Column, formed upon a Road where the 8p«c« does:;otadmitof the Flank Movement • -271 23. Columns taking Oround to a Flank, by the Echellon March of Sections - . . . . 273 Columns taking Oround to a Flank ■ - . 273 Columus, when taking Ground to a Flank by Fours, closing to less Distance or opening to greater Distance fVom any named Company - . . . 274 35. Application of the Flank March of Columns by Fours - £75 FORMATIONS OF COLUMN FROM LINR 36. A Line Wheeling back into Open Column firom the Halt 277 37. A Line Wheeling into Open Column on the March - 279 23. A Battalion moving in Ci>en Column from either Flank along the Rear .... - 279 29. A Battalion formed in Line advancing fW>m a Flank in Open Column of Companies, Sub-divisions, or Sections - - • - . - 2fll 30. A Battalion in Line advancing in Double Column of Companies, Snb-divisions, or Sections - - 283 31. A Battalion formed in Line retiring over a Bridge or through a Defile, or Retreating from a Flank or from both Flanks in r<«ar of the Centre - • -287 19, 20. 21, 23. S!4. RxonoKs 32. A Battalioal or Close Coi FORMA' 33. Forming Line named Com S4. An Open Col 35. A Battalion Reverse Fla 36. Forming Lin( 37. A Battalion i Right or Le 136. A Battalion ii ploying into 39. A Battabon ii "ploying on t 40. A Battalion in or Left iu F 41. A Battalion ploying in I 43. A Battalion ii 43. A Battalion ii Formatlbno FO NO8. I. Use of Square IL The Four De« UL The Two De« IV. Solid Squaro SBcrroNS 44. A Battalion it 4A. A Battalion iu rjuaa m, and marcUn; on 1 Alignment by the - 256 ance Wheeling on a - 261 n talcing Qroand to Left • - 364 no changing Front divisions round the •< 264 and by Ranks • 268 1 by the successiTe ;he Front - - 2G8 'ja\f, or Quarter Dis- ad where the Space ment - - 271 k, by the Echellnn - 273 . 273 a Flank by Fours, ; to greater Dutance - 274 Columns by Foim - S7S * FROM USE. >Iumn fhnn the Halt 277 a on the March - 279 n from either Flank - 279 icing from a Flank , Sub-diTiaions, or - 2«! Double Colrnnn of ons - • 282 ig over a Bridge or }m ft Flank or from - 287 mi CONTKKTS. ziii nCOnOKB FAOB 32. A Battalion in Line forming Open, Quarter Distance, or Close Column • • . . . 393 FORMATION OF LINE FROM COLUMN. 33. Forming Line to the Front from Open Column on any named Company - - . . . 84. An Open Column forming Line in Inverted Order 35. A Battalion in Open Column ibrming Line to the Reverse Flank • . . . . , Forming Line to the Front from Double Column A Battalion in Double Column forming Line to the Right or Left - - . . .311 DEPLOYMENTS. 38. A Battalion in Close or Quarter Distance Column de- ploying into Line on the leading Company - 39. A Battahon in Close or Quarter Distance Column de- ploying on the Rear Company 40. A Battalion in Close or Quarter distance Column Right or Left iu Front deploying on a Central Company - 41. A Battalion in Close or Quarter Distance Column de- ploying in Inverted Order - - . . 42. A Battalion in Double Column deploying - . 43. A Battalion in Line chanaing Front by the intermediate Formatibn of Open Column on any named Company 327 FORMATION OF SQUARES. Gbkesai. Piuncipuss. NOB. I. Use of Squares - - . . . 330 IL The Four Deep Square • . . .330 in. The Two Deep Square - . . .330 IV. Solid Square - - . . - - 330 FORHATIONB. SECTIONS 44. A' Battalion in Coinmn forming Square - -333 45. A Battalion in Doable Oolnmn forming Squan • -337 299 303 303 307 315 319 324 324 .^A*. xiT OONTBMT*. •HOnOMB *^^ 46. A Square prepitrlng for Cayalrjr - " ^ . ," *** 47. A Battalion in Square re-fomung Coluna or iXmtue Column - - - - - - ^*5 48. A Battalion in Line forming Square - - - 339 49. A Battalion forming Company Squares - - 339 A Cloae Column forming Square - - - 340 A Square marching in any Direction - • _ - 340 A Battalion forming Square Tvro Deep, and re-fomung Column • - . . - 341 MOVEMENTS AKD CHANGES OF TRONT IN ECHELLON. m. A Battalion li f8.A 60. SI 53 9. 0. 1. GeMBBAI. FBIIICIFI.EB. N08. I. Echelloni - II. Direct Echellon in. Use of Direct Ecliellon IV. 01 Uque Echellon - V. Usv- of ObUque Echellon ■,,„.„ , . VI. Con voanies or Parts of Companies in Echellon to he pa 'allel to each other . . - - VII. Taking Ground to the Hear in Echellon Vni! Wheeung on Fixed and Moveable Piyots MOVBB£B»TB AKD CHANGES OF FBONT IN ECHELLON. 53. A Battalion wheeling forward by Companiei from Ltoe into Echellon - - ,".,,"./ 54, A Battalion in EcheUon of Companies wheeling back into Line parallel to that fW)m which it has Ibrmed - 86. A Battalion in Echellon, halted, fbrming Line in a Direction oblique to that from which It was wheeled into Echellon - - - ',,,"' 66. A Battalion in' Line changing Frtnt on a Flank Com- ■ pany by throwing forward the test of tho liattalioa • 341 342 343 34S 343 343 844 844 pany by thi Battalion in pany or on one Wing a A Battalion ii Echellon of Re-forming Li A Battalion i Oblique Dii 2. Ezceptioaai Mi Noa L iL IIL IV. VI. vn. X. XI. ™ Olgect of Li All Regime; MoTemen Division of ] Relative Sti Reserves' Relative Di Reserves Relative Diai Cover Time of Mo' PoinUof Dii How Arms a Officers and Words of Coj Etres vAoa . 338 Golcma or DoaUe - sas , . . - 339 • 339 • 340 a . • - 340 leep, itnd re-fonning - 341 S OF FRONT IN OONTKNTB. XT LEB. es in Echellon to be !«heUon le PiTOts • SS OF FRONT IN 341 1148 343 34S 343 343 844 844 iiJompanies from Linf aides wheeling baok rhich it has formed - fbnning Line in a rhich it was wheeled nt on a Flank €!om- rest of Um> battalion- -''■'ON* pj^OB . A Battalion in Line changing Front on a Flank Com- pany by throvring back the rest of the Battalion - 389 8. A Battalion in Line changing Front on a Centre Com- pany or on the Two Centre Companies by adTancinv one Wing and re iring the other - - . 353 ■9. A Battalion in Line advancing or retiring in Direct Echellon of Companies from either Flank - -366 0. Re-forming Line from Direct Echellon - . 399 il. A Battalion in Direct EcheUon forming Line in an Oblique Direction - . . . .371 2. Exceptional Combinations of MancBUvres > -371 PART V. LIGHT INFANTRY. NOS. L n. la IV. V. VI. vn. 848 ^• IX. £ GENERAL PRINCIPLES. Ol^ect of Light Infantnr Movements All Regiments to be uutructed in Light In&ntry Movements - - . . . Division of light Troops - - . I Relative Stre^th of Skirmisliers, Sapporti. and Reserves- - - - . . Relative Duties of Skirmishers, Supports, and Reserves - - . - - , Relative Distances - - - * ^^ T Cover - - . . . . Timo of Movement - Points of Direction - . - . . How Arms are carried > - . _ Officers and Connecting Links > . . Words of Couuoaud and Bugle Sounds 373 373 373 374 *^ x,«i:.VTS OF A COMPAQ"?- LIGHT INFAHTKY MOVEMENTS OF ^ ^^^^^^ BKCTIONB , . - * 1. Extending . • 2. ClMiEg " . . - to a Flank - ^ ", T^,.,.„-e Column extentoig, *^»'?'l». nr Look out for Cavalry - * .411 16 The Alarm, or i«oK "«* . - - . 17 riosinK on Supports - . . « II: Flanking P«;«« ^, ;^rt Defile in contact .^^ «« 20. Passing * »'»"» _ . - 42 '^"'.VAKCKUAHDB^GOABDS. PIQUETS. 23. Piquets and their Sentries . 4! .4! ORMATIONS AND GENI K08. I. Application of I II. Divisious of an t ni. Formation in Lu IV. Columns in Line V. Formation of Of VI. MauofColamni VU. Points of Format 'III. Commandt IX. Echellon Format X. Advance and Re I XI. Inversion of the ^11. Movements to b< ^IIL Bayonets to be fi RIGADE MOVEME I AND ( IONS A Brigade in Masi W Distance, wheeli I. A Brigade in Lint Distance Column A Brigade in Mast Quarter Distance Battalion Coltmi: A Brigade in line < Close or Qcartei named Battalion A Brigade in Lim Distan«i« Colunu 1 .OONTBMTS. xm A COMP-WY. Txant 366 399 an C ALIGN. ing Order ftom Dluron extending oiutnn extending, lalf in Support - g Order from Line «^ Skirmishers to a . 41 .4l( • . -411 - 41 ,n contact with an PART VI. 3RMATI0NS AND MOVEMEJI^rS OP THE BRIGADE OR LINE. GENERAL PRINCIPLEb. K0«. FAOB I. Application of Battalion Movementa • • 446 11. DWisioua of an Army - - - - 448 ni. Eormation in Line . . . • 447 IV. Columns in Line ----- 447 V. Formation of Open Column - - - 447 VI. MauofColmnna - - - - - 447 [VII. Points of Formation - - - - 447 i'lU. Commandt - - - - - 451 IX. Echellon Formations - . - - 453 X. Advance and Retreat of alternate Bodies - - 45 J J XI. Inrerrion of the Order of a Brigade or Dhrision - 465 IXII. MoTements to be covered by Light Infontry - 456 7IIL Bayonets to be fixed - - - - 456 B GUARDS. IRIGADE MOVEMENTS OF CONTIGUOUS COLUMNS AND COLUMNS IN MASS. . ONS A Brigade in Mass of Columns at Close or Qaarter Distance, wheeling into a Line of ColnmM A Brigade in Line of conUgmms Close or Qaarter Distance Columns wheeling into Mass ). A Brigade in Mass of Battalion Columns at Close or Quarter Distance deploying into Line of eontiguons 4! Battalion Columns . . . - ^. A Brigade in line of eontiguons Battalicn Colonma tit Close or Qcarter Distance forming Mass upon any named Battalion - A Brigade in Line of eontiguons Cloae or Quarter Disun«e Colnnuis changing Front A 459 - 459 460 469 4C4 rAOK 472'- 472 473 •474 475 '. 476 wlH „^ .,„ TTNT5 01 COLUMNS- MOVEMENTS IN UNE OR LINE Olf ■ pious CoVumnt - . . j^ Line of QoBrtCT- '• ■"■ 1>UU.C«M"7 "ft S;„bl. OoloBU .t ■!► SJ„*o C»tr.. »' «"?£.. rff""!""'?'™ "• *«rsws« ?,;-fo?:src':.s^ «. KCST^i^i^.-F-ffi^Vo™... deploying into lin* ' 477 47' THE FI SEfiTIONB '21). The General A] Foun to the A II, A Brigade formlE M(WEMENTS OF 22. Application of 1 Bodies - R08. I. Formation • II. Regulating Coin m. DiRtance IV. Movementa - V. Relieving Front ■GCTI0N8 23. Two Lines chan Line I94. Two Lines cht of the First L POS RS. FMition of a Ba a Brigade - - 49 491 Of COLUMNS- PAOK . 472' e - - *'' Line of conti- ^^^ ine of Quarter- ance - ,' m Column3 at de- tiring- - *" (Columns from )o«ble Colttiimi ^^^ CompanJrtfrom of the other, or ar of their Centres 476 DOUBLE COLUMN mn of Companies Companies from ^^^ mpanies forming ^^^ f IN COLUMN. ,011 of Comp^es y Companies from ^ d" POSITION, on a named Com- Btaohed Points ' ooMTiMTt. at TirR FLANK MARCH IN F0UK8. BBCTI0K9 TAOH 2U. The General Appllostion of the Tltnk March in Fours to the Adrance of a Brigade - - 499 SQUAIlEa II, A Brigade forming Squares - • > > 403 MOVEMENTS OF DIVISIONS OR LARGER BODIES. 22. Application of Brigade Drill to DlTisions or large Bodies - - - • - - 403 SECOND LINES. Genekal FiinioiPUM. KOS. I. Formation . II. Regulating Column - m. Distance IV. Movements - V. Relieving Front Line ■ 494 • 494 . 494 • 494 . 407 MOTEMBITTS. SECTIONS 23. Two Lines changing Front on the Flank of the First Line * - - - I94. Two Lines changing Front npon a central Point of the First Line - - - - - POSITION OF ARTILLERY. a. FMition of a Battery of Artillery when moving with a Brigade ------ 497 498 408 olumM,«» Close «r o line • . " olomns openmg out tached Poia". •»* B 8 mwM^:ii^Am^^ '' ^wx J k<^^i^ ^^:^ COMTENTi. PART VII. MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS. IW8PECTION8 OR REVIBW& TlMi^tiori or Review of a Battalion - a. BerUw of Two or more Battaliona - ROUTE MARCHING. 8. The Order of March ■ ' * ' i Khin^off: Marchi'ng at Ea«,. and pa«ingWo«U of Command - " ' ?• Satd-incrfJirand d.minUhing Fro'nt - 8. Beirulationi concerning Stragglers - 9. Hurry and Stepping out to be prerented SINGLE RANK AND SKELETON DRILI* 10. Battalion DriU in Single Rank - • ^ 11. Skeleton DriU - " " * GUARDS, la. Guard mounting and trooping the Colour - • 13. Relieving Guard - * * * . 14. Marching Reliefs - . - 18. RelieWng or Postmg Sentries 16. Sentries paying Compliment* 17. Sentries Challenging - ' " 18. Instruction of Recruits as Sentries - 19. Guards Turning out . - • FUNBRALS. ao. Directions for Funeral Parties 1 Txan . fiO'i . sot sn SIS su su su Sl« su Slf Sli ss S2< fiSI &3I S3 ss .S3 53 Regimental Q COLOlfIL . . . . LIEUTEKANT-OOLUM MAJOK . . ADJDTAMT . CAPTAIN . . LIBUTKNANT KNSIOir . . STArV OFFI0KR8 . qukbm's COLODR . BKOIMEMTAI. OOLUU Brig ASSISTANT ADj ASSISTANT QUA IIKIOADB MAJO MOUMTBD OFVI OKIOINAI. SVBMATIO: TF.RMr,DtATE TOR- ("!''«>»"' '»»»*' ^^^~^-^^"-''~i^,'i..'..:Ti~ ^l \ rtov ( Ucnr !' in', ;-...--.;-:/ — ^ Front Bank i in',i.%tevjM>,j ' i\;^:ax. ..".'w. ' ,ata ' .i }^Koar Bank , __^_ i ^ FINAL FORMATION IKEOTION OF H0TBMBNT8 . Col. D. Lytons, dclt. II IWT V xxu EXPLANATION OF PLATES. P*"^'™' .. > * o «f Part IV it has not been considered and Serjeants are tuny exprn yil.. VIII., and tbey are represented m the Plates V ^ L^|^ . TV „f Pni4 TT in the Plates XAlli-. aaiv., ou ofpart W.; ai.d partially in several others, as m Plata ^^^!I"part« V and VI.. on account of the reduced scale. sented by single lines without detail. RECRUIT GENl 1. Instruction qf th this duty is intru8te( their mode of convey attention to their din capacity of the recn and ^ood-will are ap practice, and ought n 2. Recruits must b comprehend one thi When first tauffht thi and the rifle, shottld ut taught to correct ihould not be kept to exercise. Marching th the rifle instruct Duration of Drillt \\vn,ya to be preferre ttention both of the 2S68. ATES. i' i '^ '1 P eight or ten conv Ijht be drawn on as s in the plates of inR only six com- lot been considered ' m hospital, in prfson, or absent from theur duty fwi ^' Ah of time; men of this class will not he dnlled wii je battalion till they are fit to join the second class. 1. Words of Co and distinctly pro 2. Every comn preceded by a cau command must b( or executive part, one wofd or syllal Colony — Halt: 3. Theforegoir numbers giver in where the words i to be quick, and required is of thai 4. When the li preparatory mov( word, and sepan pauE3 as. On the as though there \ caution and execi 6. Officers am quently be practi be found a good commissioned off simultaneously, t instructor. ;II.L. ited with the instrac- pfressively from squad that the quick, intel- t by those of inferior ad should be made an jr. if mutual instruction ; it (fives the young , and prepares him for Beer. Each recruit in I out to put his squad encouraged while so obsen'e in the move- those who show talent by the capttuns, and in Buld be found to create >int out those who were, GBNBRAL PBINOIPLBS. V. U Classes.— A UttJOioi ivho are perfect in evoj und to be awkward oi class will continue t( IS, but will have extri r the first class. ;8, will include any mei 1 their drill from havin itfirom their duty for will not be drilled wil I the second class. 1. Words of Commanrf.— Every command must be loud, and distinctly pronounced as it is ^vritten. 2. Every command that consists of one word must be preceded by a caution ; the caution or cautionary part of a command must be articulated slowly and distmctly, the last or executive part, which, in general, should consist of only one word or syllable.^ustbe given sharply and quickly, as ^mpa^—^lt: Bight Half —Face. 3. The foregoing rule does not apply to the words and numbers giver in the Extension Motions and Balance bte^, where the words must be given sliarply when the motion is to be quick, and slowly and smoothly when the motion lequired is of that nature. .... i r 4 When the last word of a caution is the signal for any preparatory movement, it will be given as an executive word, and separated from the rest of^he command^ a pauca as, On the Wght Backn'ards— Wheel. Quick—March, as though there were Uo separate commands, each with it« caution and executive word. . , j ^ 6. Officers and non-commissioned officers should fre- quently be practised in giving words of command. It will be found a good plan to practise several officers or non- commissioned officers together in giving words of command simultaneously, the time and pitch bemg first given by the instructor. vT ■ ■I'll Ml immnrn 1, 1^: 4 PART I.—^aCAO DBILL< RscRuiT on SauAD Drill withoct Arm* Gbnsral Directions, I. Sw/«m.— The foUowing system wUl be adoi)te«l, both for the instruction of recruits, nnd in the .■ettinR-up or spring drill of a battalion. Recruits should, rf possible, be instructed singly as fur as Section 22. II. FortMtiM ©r SquadB.—\. A few men will be placed in line (that is, side by side) at arm's length apart ; while so fbrmed they will be tenned a " Squad with Intervals. 2 If necessary, the squad may consist of two such Imes of men, in -/hich cas* the men in the second hne wiU cover the inter^Tda between the men ir. the firrt, so that m mareh- ioff they may take their own pomts, as directed in her^t. lu. 3 Ricruits should, in the first instance, be nlaced by the instiuotorwthout any dressing; «*»«« **^); °»^f '^'^ tJdwss. « directed in Section^ they should be tau^tto faU in M above described, and then to dress and to corrert their distances J after they hwt been instructed as far a. Section 24, they may faU in m smgle rank, and then, rf ^iSd to drill with' intervals, be opened out as directed inNo. 6 of these General Directions. Setting^p or Sp-ing Drill.-} . A battaUon wiU Reformed as foUows, in squads with mtei /als, for spnng or setting upl 2. Ckimpanies will be arranged, with considerable intervals^ between them, in lines parallel to each other. oi 3. Captains will c Iplace a subaUem ofl |iu instructor. 4. Oil a signal Arc will be opened out of companies, and ^ Istructors when at su 5. Each squad ml M fil wi th cc m th th sq th JU fil rai rm fai th th th hii rei ha nu hi< lef From the Right (QitIj^)Form J Single Rank,— * Qtiiek^Sfaroh. .L. rHOUT Arms. 18. 11 be adoi>te(], both I the «etting-up or lultl, if possible, be ■n will be placed in ^h apart; while so nth Intervals." it of two such lines econd line will cover st, BO that in march' directed in Strt. 10, ice, be placed by thi 1 they nave leanie< should be taught to dress and to correct instructed as farai B rank, and then, i ned out as diiectet talion will be formed, r spring or setting up jonsidcrable intervals! o^er. OBNBBAL DIRBCT'ONe. 5 3. Captains will divide their companies into squads, and place a subaUem officer or seijeant in firont of each squad, m instructor. 4. Oil a signal from the commanding officer, the squads will be opened out to the right and left from the centres of companies, and will be halted successively by their in- structors when at sufficient distances from each other. 5. Each squad will be formed into single rank, thus t '' If forming from the rights on the word March the front rank man of the right file viU stand fast, the rest of the squad will close to the left by the side step ; the rear rank man of the right file will come up on the left of bis ftont rank man m soon as there is room for him ; the front rank man of the next file n-ill then holt, and so on to the left of the squad, each rear rank man moving up on the left of his front rank man. If forming from the 1^, on the word March, the rear rank man of the left file will step ap on the left of his flront rank man, who will stand fiut; the rear (Wik man of the next file will also stand fiast, the rest of the squad will close to the right ; as soon as tnere is room for the rear rank man of the 2nd file from the left, he will move up on the left of his front rank man, who will halt; the rear rank man of the 3rd file will then halt, and so on to the right ; each rear rank man moving up on the left of his firont rank man, all feeling to the left. From the Right (otL^)Form Su^le Rank.— Quick-March. I 3SSSE II i i ill, 1. f e PAinr i.~«auAD dbill, R TK« .rniAdB when formed in ringla nak wiU be told oinJm ri'^Tto iS'the instructor «m '^^.J^. ?he SSe between odd numbers and even numbers, Md proceed u follows : — Odd NunJ>fr8 ~\ One Pace As the men take their pace to the front Forward. [ ^, ,e„ they will turn the pahns of their Even Numbers P-jjands full to the front, keepmK their One Pace pibows close to their sides. Step Back. ^ T^S^Ueutinant-colonel. assisted by the majors, his commandmg officer w^UiM P ^^ ^^^„ jr t to p^S: 'nelrd n"o instructor wiU .o beyon^ or Ja^from Te movement or exercise thus or&»red until further instructions are given. , , 9 Awkward men will be marked for the seconddM d^, w^Kuads must not be kept back on theur account 10. The following signal, oa l^e^m may be used ^ ri L «rjf« drum wiU sijmify that the instructor soldier. The heels Three taps on the ^I^^,^J^%r^rD»cUng. HaU straight ; the toes 4 ^ to give the words %««' «^^^«^^^ °J4ed at thf extes sngl^ of 60 degrees Dress, Stand at Ease. « squaos n ^^^ ^^ shoulder,^ »f'S?oVn7wS^ iiSrtb^J-wiU be f^d abo, before they are dressed OddNmtbena' Pace Step Back. Even NiuAers a Pace Forward. Slow-March. Eyes Right — Dress. Eyes — Front. On the Right (or Left) Form Two Deep. Quick — March. < 13. After this, c< dismissed without the parade may dir Squad 5.1 The exact squar front is the first „jfore they are dresseo. instructors si the front, with the Twice three tops wdl "8«|7 »^"« *g ^_g „ i nmst be rather dm to give the words S'«"f jS^f '^'/^f^j f"^^ ' without constraints the shouldbr, the el in open files the p& WITH INTERVAM. ;laniikwiU be ioUMOdd NunAert a Ul explain to leoruits Pace Step Back. i even numbers, uid Even Nwnbers a Pace Forward. Slow-March, Eyes Right — Dress. Eyes — Front. On the Right (or Left) Form Two Deep. ihei? pace to tbe front ■n the palms of their front, keeping their : aides. [ by the miyoTS, his ake general superin- rill superintend their ut the battalion, the captains, while their novement or exercise ructor will go beyond for the second dan bac^ on their account rum may be used :— fy that the instructo or, if marching, HaU ire arrived at the exter ey will be faced aboi nstructoT soldier, :teii angle I at the instructors md Stand Easy i or. Stand Easy. lify that the instructor itiwt-tttm. ^ 11. When a drill is concluded, squads will be closed and re-formed two deep. ructor wiu g" ucjuuu -. — ise thus ordered untD ti»o pan«le may direct 12. On the words Form two deep, the original rear rank men will take one ^pace to therear. On the word March, the whole will close on the flank named, the rear rank Quick— March. J '?^" covering correctly. . If closing on I the left, the rear rank man of the left file will take a pace to his right, in order L to cover his front rank man. 13. After this, companies will be re-formed, or the squads dismissed without re-forming, as the officer commanding SauAD Dmill wira Intervals. S. 1. Position of the Soldier. The exact squareness of the shoulders and body to the front is the first and great principle of the position of a soldier. The heels must be m line and closed ; the knees straight } the toes turned out, so that tha feet may form an angle of 60 degrees ; the arms hanging straight down f^m the shoulder, the elbows turned in and close to the sides ; in open files the palms of the hands are to be tiu-ned full to front, with the thumb close to the forefinger; the hips must be rather drawn back, and the breast advanced, but without constraint; the body straight and inclining forward, 10 that veight of it may bear principally on the fore part of tht «t ; the head to be erect, but not tluown back. ai the i^ smmfmmmmm \ [ '( 9 PAMT L-riaWAD oi»:i.L, the chin ilightly dnwm in, wd the eyee looking atnight to When "the soldier fitlla in for instruction, he will be taught to place himself in the position ahove dsscribed. ^iUt>^* N.B.— The words in the maigrin printed in Ualici, aw the commands to be given by the -nstructor. S. 2. Standing at Ease. Soldiers will first be taught the motions of the bauds and of the foot by numbera, then judging their own time. 1. By Numbers. 'ITie caution,— Stand nt Base by Numbers, must first be given. ' On the word One, raise the arms from the elbows, left hand in front of the centre of the body, as high as the wMst, palm upwards; the right hand as high as the right breast, pahn to the left front ; both thumbs separated from the fingers, and the elbows close to the sides. ' On the word Two, strike the palm of the right hand on that of the Im, drop tho arms to their extent, keemng ih- hands together, and passing the rigL. hand over the back of the left as they fall; at the same time draw back the right foot six inches, and bend slightly the left knee. When the motions ara completed the arms must hang loosely and easily, the fingers pointing towteds the ground, the right thumb lij ofthe left hand; t being on the rigl constraint. One. Two. Squad-Atlen' tUm. {: Caution, — Stt Stand at-Ease {: } Squad-Atten- tion. If the comman word Stand Easy, their limbs, but wil the word Attentioi dressing in line. I accurately, thqr sb feet. Before oolling n --r easy, the caution J w» every wddier will i ;hti$/aiu2 at-Ea$0, mu 8. 3. Di Eyet-Bijfit. 1 1 I looking atnightto on, h« will be taught i.'isoribed. rinted in Uatiei, *n uctor. im. ons of the hauda and heir own time. nberi, must first be , raiae the arms from nd in front of the as high as the waist, I right Iwnd as liigit Hblmtothe left front; ited from the fingers, e to the sides. a, strike thb palm of that of the Uf^ drop extent, keeping " kd passing the ligl- k of the left as they time draw back the ei, and bend slightly wrru iNTinvALS. 9 the tight thumb lightly held between the thnmb and palm of the left hand ; the body must incline forward, the weight being on the right leg and the whole attitude without constraint. .•^.> n.. On the word Attention, spring up to the position described in Section 1, lettiug the arms fall, by the shortest way, to the sides. the arms mvst hang { towlurds the groUnd, Squad-AtttM' turn. I 2. Judging the Time. Caution, — Stand at Eaae, judging your own Time. r On the word Ease, go through the Stand ttt-Eau \ "otions described in the standing at ease ' 1 by numbers, distinctly but smartly, and L without any pause between them. ^m^ *'"la^"'"- } A- before. '"^ If tile command to Stand at-Bate is followed by the word Stand Eaty, the men will be permitted to mo\-c their limbs, but without quitting their ground, so that upon the word Attention no one shall have materially lost his dressing in line. If men are required to keep their dressing accurately, thqr should be cautioned not to move their left feet. Before coiling men to attention, when tiiey are standing easy, the caution ^e$-Front must be given, upon which sddiep will resume his position as desorioed in the at-Eme, $nd remain steady. the tveiy ht Stand S. 3. Dressing a Squad with Intervals. « ». . r On the words Eges-Bight, the eyes will Eyes-IUght. < be directed to the right, the head being I slightly turned in that direction. SBlw; 10 PAM< t.-«MI«AD DnTLL, On the word Dreu, each loldiep, except the right hand man, will extend his rignt arm, ptdm of the hand upwards, nails touching the shoulder of the man on his right, at the same time he will take up his dreising in line b^ moving till he is just able to distinguish the lower part Dreit. ^ of the face of the second man beyond him; care must be taken that, in so doing, he carries his body backward or forward with the feet, moving to his dressing with short quick steps, that his shoulders are kept perfectly square, and that the position of the aoldi?i- is retained _ throughout. r On the words %«/> -Front, the eyes and ■a rv < J ^^^ "^ *" ^ tiriiiid to the front, the Etfea-tYont. -j ^j^ dropped, aiid the first position of L the soldier reiUDied. Dieenng by the left wiU be pnwtised in like manner. S. 4. Extention Moiifm, In order to open his ^jhest, and give freedom to his musoles, the soldier will be practised in the Allowing exten- sion motions. , Men formed in squads with intervals, will b. faeed a face to the right, betore commencing the followivg practices. First Practice. On the word Ons, bring the hands and anna to tiie front tiU the fingers meet at the pointa, nails downwards, then isisi them in » drctdar d^ection over **"' Otu. < h4 ai tt re d< «1 l' 7^0. < til th ei ell w el th to ^tl tl ai Fotmr. < bi a ai N.B. The foregoi haU|tl)&t the muscles nil Three. One. I over thM ai m ■ariO , each aoldier, except trill extend his rignt »nd upwards, nails r of the man on his me he will take up >T moyin^ till he is ush the lower part econd man heyond taken that, in so hody backward or set, moving to his [uick steps, that his lerfectly square, and tia aoldi'Si- is retained ' -Front, the eyea and id to the front, the Dhe first position of in Uke manner. give freedom to hii the iT'llowing exten- !, will Ix llMed a haU|tbat e followii'g practices. , bring the hands and 1 the fingers meet at Dwnwards, then misi r dfroction over tl WITH INTIRVALI. U head, the ends of the fingers still touching and pointing downwards so as to touch the forage cap, thumbs jiointing to the rear, elbows pressed back, shoulders kept down. On the wor ^Bume the position of attention. . B. The foregoing motions are to be done slowly, so the mnsoles wUl be exerted throughout. Second Practice, On the word One, raise the hands in fimnt of the body at the full extent (rf the arms, and in line with the mouth, palms meeting but withoat noise, thumbs close to tha forefingen. VKKI I.p-»%WAD OSaL, Two. One. Two. Three. {i I t| On iht word T09, Mptrfcta th« handi Rinartly, throwing them well bMk, ilmt- ing downw»«i«, at the same time raise the body on the fore uart of the feet. On the word One, bring the arme for- ward to the poeition above described, and On the word Three, >marlljr rewme the \ position of attention. In thi» practice the second motion may be continued without repeating the words On*, Two. bv giy.ng th« order Continue the Motion. - the .quad will then take the time from the right-hand man 5 on the ''^^^'"'^yJ'S^J^JIZ remain at the eecond pontoon, and on the word Three they will leiume the position of attention. Third Praetiee. The squad will make a half face to the right into file, nrewus to commencing the third practice. . .„^. •„ ' r On the word One, raise the hands m \ fiont of the body, as in the second prac I tioe, but witii the hands clenched. r On the word Two, separate the haodi I smartly, throwing the arms back in, bn« i with the shoulders back of the hand L downwards. r On the word Three, swing the mnu \ round as quickly as posable fhim front I to rear. r On the word Steadif, resume the second \ position. / On the word Fbiir, let the arms m \ smartly to the posWon of attention. Om. IVw. T%rH. Steedji. Fomr. When neceuar rith clubs. Soldiers will bo l\en judging theii he right-nand sali Big, J, One. < 1 Two. Three. Four. Right-hau \hight-httnd Salute, {, tlLL, «, Mpwkte th« handi ;hem well back, alnit- the same time raise e part of the feet. t, bring the arms for- n above desoribed, and ■w, smartly reauma the n. on may be continued ro, by giving the order ill then take the time rd Bttady the men will •n the word Tkm they I WITH INTBRVALR. IS to the right into file, actice. ynt, raise the hands m as in the second prac hands clenched. \bo, separate the handi the arms back in line nra, back of the hand Thre«, swing the J™"! ' as posdble from firontl When necessary, the third practice may be performed itii clubs. S. 5. Saluting, Soldiers will bo practised in saluting, first by numbem, hen judging their own time, being fiircd to the right lot he right-nand salute, to the left fur the left-hand salute. R^ht-hand Salute by Numbfm. r On the word One, raise the ri^ht hard J smartly, without bending the elbow, as One. < high as the mouth, pointing in the suiic direction as the right foot, knuckles _ upwards, tliumb close to the forefinger. On the word 1\oo, bring the hand slowly round till the jjoint ot the thunijt and the side of the forefinger touch tl ) Two. ■< lower edge of the cap or peak, wrist find fingers slightly bent, at the same time turn the head a little to the left, and look _ towards the person saluted. On the word Three, bring the hand and arm slowly to the position attained by the first motion, turning the head anil . eyes to the front. r On the word Four, bring the arm down < smartly to the position of attention, with- l out bending the elbow. !ea<^,r«sume the second! Right-hau . Salute, judging your oum Time. XV 1^ *i.» «««. fiiul%*^-*'"»<^ / On the word Sfl/utf, go through the two 14 PART I.— SaUAD DRILL,— WITH INTERVALS. r On the word Attention, come to the | Attention. \ position of attention, by the two motir - L described in three and/oar. Soldiers wiU be taught to salute with the left hand in like j Soldiers if standing still when an officer approaches, will face towards him, come to attention, and salute^f sitting, they will rise, stand at attention, and salute. When walk- ing, thev will salute an officer as they pass him, commencing their sidute six paces before they come up to him; they should therefore be practised in marching two or thrw together round the drill ground, saluting points placed on either side of them, caro being taken that thw always salute with the hand furthest from the point saluted ; when several men are together, the man nearest to that point wUl give the time. , , ., ■, i. i. Soldiers will invariably salute anybody they know to be an officer, whether he is in uniform or not. S. 6. Foctn^rs.— Platr II. In going through the fecings, the left heel must asrer quit the ground ; but the, soldier must turn on it as on a jrivot, the right to(A being drawn back to turn the body to the right, and carried forward to turn it to the left : the body must incline forward, the knees being kept straight. To the Right- f On the word Face, place the hoUow o face. Fig. 1. TO THK BIOHT- FACE. RIQHT ABOITT-F; Two. the right foot smartly against the left heel, J keeping the shoulders square to the front. S On the word Two, raise the toes, and turn a quarter circle to the right on both heels, \rtuch must be pressed together. ¥ Fig. BIOHT HALF- FACE. — ~^ ITH INTERVALS. IttentUm, come to the I on, by the two motions] and /our. ith the left hand in like| I officer approaches, will , and salute ; if sitting, d salute. When walk- f pass him, commencing lome up to him; they narching two or three salutinff points placed t«ken that they always bhe point saluted ; when 1 nearest to that point lyhody they know to be or not. -ATR II. left uGCl *A***MW *•*/» Ct «J*llv turn on it as on a pivot, » turn the body to the it to the left: the body ng kept straight. ^ace, place the hollow ol artly against the left heel, ilders square to the front. Two, raise the toes, and ircle to the right on both st be pressed together Fig. 1. TO Tmi BIOHT- FACE. TWO. PLATE n. Fig. 2. TO THE LRFT- TWO. FACK. Fig. 3. BIOHT ABOUT-FACE. TWO. TRBEE. r o -^ 'A' Fig. 4. BIGHT HAUF- FACB. TWO. Fig. 5. I.GFT HAU'- TWO. FACE. THBEK. Fig. 6. TWO. LEFT ABOnT THBBB qUABTEBS-FAOE. ^--..^ XI ffn ~MJ... 'JX. PART I.— 80UAO DRILL, "'sssssmesmmn*-'^ To tke iMsft- ^ face. Two. Right about-face. Two. Three. Ltft tAout-face, Two. Three. Right {or Left) f iwnt ^01 Ha\f-faee. Two, Right (or Left) about, three- < quarters-face. imnm-m^'M ,44 RILL, To the L^- face. Two, Right about-face. Two. Three. Ltft about-face. Two. Three. Right {or Left) Half-face. Two, Right (or Left) about, three- quarters-face. WITH INTBkVALS. 17 On the word Face, place the right heel against the hollow of the left foot, keep- ing the shoulders square to the front. On tho word Two, raise the toes, and tuni a quarter circle to the left on both ^ heels, which must be pressed together. ^ On the word Face, place the ball of the right toe against the left heel, keeping the shoulders square to the front. On the word Two, raise the toes, and turn to the right about on both heels. On the word Three, bring the right foot smartly back in a line with the left. '" On th? word Face, place the right heel against «he ball of the left toe, keeping the shoulders square to the front. On the word Two, raise the toes, and turn to the left about on both heels. On the word Three, bring up the right _foot smartly in a line with the left. On the word Face, draw back (or advance) the right foot one inch. <{ On the word Two, raise the toes and turn an eighth of a circle to the right (or }^tt\ on both heels. When it is necessaiy to perform the diagonal march to the rear the soldier will receive the words Right (or Left) about, three-quarters face, upon which he will bring the ball of the nght foot (not the ball of the toe) to the left heel, or the right heel to the baU of the left foot, and will make a three-quarters face in the given direction, in the same manner as _ he faces about. )) 18 PAinr I.— •QOAD DRILL, When it ic intended to naume the original front, rfter any going facings, Squad-Front. •> after any of the fore- g„„.„ ,. g., the word of command Front may be given, on which the whole will fece, as accrrately as possible, to their former front. Whether the soldier has pr«Tiously faced to the right or left about, he will always front by the right about. But if he has faced to the right about three- quarters, he will front by the left about ttiree-quarters, and vice versft. At squad driU with intervab, the fiacings will always be dona ^ numbers, except when the word Fyont is given, in which cose the soldier will judge his own time, which must be a pause of slow arae between each motion. . The fbot in the first of the above motions is to be cameO back or brought forward without a jerk; the movement lieing from the hip, so that the body may be kept perfectly steaoy untU it commences to turn. Mabching. 8. 7. Length of Step In slow or quick time the length cf a pace is 30 inches, *"! :_ «.«2«™T,ff nnt." when it is 38 inches, and m except in "stepping out," when it is 35 inches, and in "steuping short 10. . o/? • i. In "double time " the length of the pace is 36 inches. The length of the side step, which is always taken in quick time, is 10 inches. . ^ , _„„ n!b. When a soldier takes a side pace to fkar or cover another, as in forming four deep, wTiichwill be herettftei described, the pace wU be 21 inches. _ In slow time J Inouicktime 11 in double time 1{ S. 9. Thi The proper cad the mind of the i drum. Tlie lengl df a pace stick; taught to march < pace stick ; the d 11 halted, never superintendent oi time, every squa beating the men t»dence; when r their squads in m tions, which wot soldier from the t In order to I "Plummet" mi plummets have fa none of these can may be adopted, itnng that is not measured from tl b^, must be as Thus arranged, required. Slow ti Quick Double The correctne tested by refcr&n tlLL, snded to iMume the nr anv of the fore- word of command a, on which the whole rately as possible, to oldier has pi«viously or left about, he will >e right about. But if he riffht about three- tont by the left about , vice versft. filings will always be rord Frmt is given, in own time, which murt i motion. notions is to be carried . jerk ; the movement y may be kept perfectly Step. 1 cf a pace is 30 inches, it is 38 inches, and in the pace is 36 inches, is always taken in quick 3 pace to clear or oovei which will be hereiiftei I. In slow time In quick time 110 in double time 150 S. 9. WITH INTBRVALB. 19 8. 8. Cadenee. 75 steps f 62 yards 18 inches'! an taken \ 91 „ 24 „ V ■-- L150 „ — „ J m a minute. The Drum, Plummet, and Pacs Stick. The proper cadence in marching must be impressed on the mind of the recruit by beating the time for him on a drum. Ttte length of his pace is to be corrected by means df a pace stick ; no recnut or squad of recruits must be taught to march without the constant use of the drum and pace stick ; the drum to beat the time only when the squad ig halted, never when it is in motion. Whenever the Buperintendent of the drill considers it necessary to give the time, every squad will be halted, and while the dnmi is beating the men will give their whole attention to the tadence ; when it ceases, the instructors will at once put their squads in motion, without further cautions or instruc- tions, which would tend to distract the attention of the soldier from the time given. In wder to beat the time correctly on a drum the « Plummet " must be used. A variety of pendulums or plummets have been constructed for this purpose. When none of these can be procured, the following simple method may be adopted. Suspend a spherical ball of metal by a rtrmg that is not liable to stretch ; the length of the string measured from the point of suspension to the centre of the ball, must be as follows for the different degrees of march. Thus arranged, the plummet will swing the exact time required. Inches. Hundredths. Slowtime- . - - 24 • 96 Quick - - . " H : §5 Double - - - - \' 26 ^, - The correctnesj of the plummet should frequently be tested by refcroiice to a watMi. 90 PART I. — SQUAD DRILL, *l The knj.th of the pace in mBTohing will be mcasufed withl the pace stick, which is simply a large pair of wooden oom-l passes, witli leRs about three feet lon^, and furnished %i^h aal iron rod or wing and screw to fix it open at the di^rei^l lengths of pace. The correctness of the pace stick should occasionally be tested ; for this purpose the length of th« several paces sliouid be cut on a board or a stone, to which] the points of the pace stick may be applied. S. 10. Position in Marching. In inarching, the soldier must maintain the position of the body as directed in Section 1. He must be well balanced on his 'limbs. His arms and hands must b< kept steady by his sides, and on no account suffered to vibrate ; care must bo taken that the hand does not clinjf to the thigh, or partake in the least degree of the move- ment of the leg. The body must be kept erect and squars to the front. The movement of the leg must spring firom the haunch and be free and natural. Both knees must be kept straight, except while the leg » being carried from the rear to the front, when the knee must necessarily be a little bent, to enable the foot to be raised sufficientty high to dear the ^und without grazing it. The foot must oe carried straight to the front, and, without being drawn back, placed softly on the ground, so as not to jerk or shake the body, the toes turned out at an angle of 30 degrees. The head to be erect, as described in Section 1, and the eyes looking straight to the front. Although several men may be drilled together in a squad c'th interv^•'^ they must act independently and in everyway as if they wore berog instructed singly ; each soldier must be tavght to march m a straight line, and to take a correct pace, lioth as regards time and length, without being in the slightest degree influenced by the other men of the squad. Before the squa^ fiun that the men i but in oorreet Une taught to take up down the centre o bis eyes und fixini gtnught to his fro: will then observe i line, such as a sto about 70 yards die The object of tli free movement of feet squareness of body. No laboui most essential obj( tionof good marcl the solmerdoesno back a shoulder 1 1. Caution, — Balanc Front. .^^a^:}^ma'i l 4itiyjt ILL, will be measured with| B pair of wooden oom< and fumiahed mth aal open at the different! the pace stick shouldl pose the length of thel d or a stone, to which | ppUed. irching. lintain the position of I. He must be well i and hands must b< 10 account suffered to lie hand does not clinx t degree of thu move- kept erect and square ! leg must spriog from except while the leg is I front, when the knee I enable the foot to be (round without graaing Ight to the iVont, ana, oftly on the ground, so the toes turned out at o be erect, as described ;raight to the front, lied together in a squad tdently and in every way jly; each soldier must :, and to take a correct )h, without being in the her men of the squad. WITH INTERVALS. 21 Before the squad is put in motion the instructor will take jean that the men are not only square in their own persons, but in ooneet hne with each other. Each soldier must be taught to take up a straight line to his front by looking down the centre of his body between his feet, then lifting bis eyes iind fixing thein upon some object on the ground atraightto his front at a distance of about 150 yards; he will then observe some nearer point in the same strttight line, such as a stone, tuft of grass, or other casual objec«, jftbout 70 yards distant. .9. II. Balance Step. I The object of the balance step is to teach the soldier the free movement of his legs, preserving at the same time per- fect squareness of shoulders, and the utmost steadiness of Jbody. No labour must be spared to attain this first and most essential object, which forms, indeed, the very founda- tion of good marching. ITie instructor must be cajreful that the solmer does not contract a habit of drooping or throwing back a shoulder luring these motions. 1. Without ffaining Oromd. Caution,— Balance Step without gaining Ground, commencing mth the Left Foot. ' On the word Front, the left foot will be raised from the ground by a sUght bend of the knee, and carried gently to the front witho-at a jerk; the knee being „ , I gradually straightened as the foot is rrmx. -^ brought forward, the toe turned out at an angle of 30 degrees, the sole of the foot kept about thrw) inches from the ground and parallel to it; the left heel in line witii the right toe. ~M -ft— II Rear. Front. Bear, Halt. PABT I.— BOUAD DRILL, When steady, on the word Rear, the left foot will be brousht gentljr back (without a jerk), till the toe ia in linel with the riKbt heel, the left knee a littlt bent. The left foot in this position will not be 60 flat as when in front; the tot will be a little depressed. When steady, the words fVoii* and Rear will be repeated several times, and the motions performed as aboTe described. On the word Halt, which should alwaya be given when the moving foot is in rear, that foot will be brought to the ground ^ in a line with the other. The instructor will afterwards make the soldier balance upon the left foot, carrying the right foot forward and backward. Accustoming a soldier to stand on one leg and swing the other backward and forward without constraint, is an excellent practice. 2. Gaining Ground, First Practice. Caution,— Batonce Step, gmning Ground by the Word Forward. On the word Front, the left foot will be carried to the front, aa described in the balance step, without gaining ground. ■ As soon as the men are steady in the above position, the word Forward will be given, on which the left foot will be brought to the ground at 30 inches dis- tance from heel to heel, toes turned out at an angle of HO degrees, and the right foot will immediately be nused, and held extended to the rear, the knee slightly Front. Forward. Front Halt. 3. C Caution, — Bt Front. Front. ".iatg p DRILL, , on tha word Rear, thel M brouffht gentljr backl ;), till the toe ii in linel leel, the left knee a littltl foot in this position will i8 when in front; the toe epressed. y, the wordi Front and peated several times, and Uirmed as aboTe described. Halt, which should always ;he moving foot is in rear, « brought to the ground 16 other, make the soldier balance ) right foot forward and d on one leg and swing without constraint, is an ''irft Practice, ig Ground by the Word I Front, the left foot will e front, as described in the ithout gaining ground. ;he men are steady in the , the word Forward will hich the left foot will be I ground at 30 inches dis- i to heel, toes turned out 'dO degrees, and the right diately be raised, and held w rear, the knee sligbtly WITH INTBRVALS. 23 Forward. * bent, toe in line with the left heel. Great care mutt be taken that the knees are kept perfectly straight as long as both feet are touching the ground; that the toea remain throughout at the proper angles ; that the body accompanies the leg, and that the inside of the heel is placed on the imaginary straight lino that passes through the points on which the solder Ja marching; that the body remaina straight, but inclining forward ; that the head is erect, and turned neither to the right nor left. . ■ On the word Front, the right foot wiU be brought forward, and so on. ' On the word Halt , which should always be given when the moving foot is to tne t front, that foot will complete its par- and the rear foot will be brought up in line with it. 3, uaming GrounS, Second Practice. Caution,— JBotonce Step, gaining Ground by the Word On the word Front, the soldier will take a ft U pace slowly with his left foot; raise hii right foot and carry it to the front, heel in line with the left toe, foot turned out at an angle of 30 degrees; and then pause till the word Front is repeated, on which the right foot will be brought to the ground 30 inches to the front, and the left immediately brought forward, and so on. When the soldier becomes steady m this practice, he will gradually be carried Front HaU. Front. Front. 1 (U M PAKT I.— raUAO DBILL, I Shno, Halt. I on to the slow inMch, br repeating thel word Front quicker ana quicker, until 11 Slow-March. the cadence of the riow inarch is attained, when the initruetor will give the word Stoic, on which the soldier will move on steadily in slow time. iiB». ' As in gaining ground, first practice In this practice great care must be takea that the bodj is kept well forward, and that the soldier does noi contract a habit of leaning or swinging backward. 8. 12. Slow Step. The instructor must bear in mind that the three most imporUnt objects in this part of the drill are, cadenw, kngth oif pace, and direction. '' 'I'ho time havmg been given on the drum, on the word March, the left foot will be carried 30 inches to the front, and, without being drawn back, will b« {tlaced softly on the ground so as not to erk or sha'ke the body; the right foot will be carried forward in like manner, ,_Bnd so on. The soldier must be carefully trained and thoroughly instrurted in this step, as an essential foundation for arriving at accuracy in the paces of greater celerity. S. 13. The Halt. {On the word Halt, the moving foot will! complete its pace, and the rear foot bel brought up In line with it. 1 After the word Halt, men will stand perfectly steady, inl whatever position they may be, unless ordered to Dress. ■ Step-o»t. This step is nc ront is requirec inic; at the wo trill be resumed. Step-thort. * This step is ui S. 16. Mark-lime. If n.rn are r from the halt, t' DBILL, march, br repeating tlnl ckor and quicker, until le slow inarch is attained, ictor will give the word the soldier will move on{ time. ground, first practice be taken that the bodjl soldier does not contract kward. lind that the three most f the drill are, cadence ving been given on the ^ord MorcA, the left foot 30 inches to the front, eing drawn back, will b« the ground so as not to the body; the right foot forward in like manner, trained and thoroughly essential foundation for )f greater celerity. fall. Halt, the moving foot willl &ce, and the rear foot be| line with it. stand perfectly steady, inj nless ordered to Draa. WITH INTERVALS. 38 S. 14. Sttpping out. ' When marching in slow time, on the words Step-out, the soldier inust l)e taught Step-out. < to lengthen his pace to liii inches by leaning forward a little, but without _altering the cadence. This Step is necessary when a temporary exertion to the rent is required, and is applied both to slow and quick imc ; at the words Slow (or Quick) the pace of 30 inches vill be resumed. S. 15. Sttpping short. ■ On the words Sttp-ikort, the foot ad- vancing will finish its pace, and after- wards each soldier will take paces of ten inches until the word forward is given, when the usual pace of 30 inches will lie ^resumed. This step is useful when a slight check is required. Step-ihort, S. 16, Marking Time in the Slow Cadence. On the words Mark-Time, the fbot then advancing will complete its pace, i^r whieh the oadence will be continued, « I HB J without gaining ground, by alternately Mark-lime. < throwing out each foot and bringing it back square with the other, keeping the body steady ; at the word Forward, the usual pace of 30 inches will be resumed. If n.->n are required to mark time in the slow cadence from the halt, the word of command will bo Mark Time- ilow. . PART I. — naUAD DRILL, 8. 17. Sttfping Back in Slow Time. r In Btepuinff back, the. jiace will !» 30 inches, and tne cadence the same as in the Step Back slow inarch. Soldiers must be tau^lit Slow-Marck. J to move straight to the rear, presemn ] their shoulders square to the front an Halt. their bodies erect. On the word Halt, the foot in front must be brought back I square with the other. A tew paces only of the step back can be necessary at a time. S. 18. Changing Feet. ' To change feet in marching, the ad- vancing foot will complete its pace, and the ball of the rear foot will be brought _, p . J up quickly to the heel ofthe advanced one, l.MMge-re«t. ^ ^^j^j^ ^Jj instantly make another step forwards, so that the cadence will not l)e lost, in fact two successive steps will be taken with the same foot. This mav be required when any part of a battalion or a single soldier ia stepping with a different foot from the rest. In marking time • brown out and brc limply be nused alt ground. Prom the halt tlte Quick. The directions foi tpply in » great degi Double-'Mareh. * or to til wi cl ar k( tfa b< ot C8 P' in Quick-Marek. Sqwd^Halt. As ling the hands and 'rhe soldier will 8. 19. TAe Qitiek Step. The eadence of the slow march having become perfectly familiar to the soldier, he will be taught to march in quick time. 'I'ljQ I The thne having been given on a d«m «lence in the same on the word Marc^ the squad will move ^^ j^^ ^^^^ y^ ^ d!, conforming to the directions given m ^^ ^y^^ ^j^^ j^, „ L Section 10. v n«onnd . Whrn a soldier is perfectly grounded in marching in n^kjnatnne ir a nick time, all the alterations of step laid down for i ill bo Mar* Time- Step. by nilmbew, then imberi. tie right foot will be to the right, the tng kept perfectly the knees straight. 3 left foot will be right foot, heels WITH IMTBBVALB. ^ r On Ae word H«», the men vnM cam- SimaJ^Halt. \ plete the pace they are taking, and lemam * I iteady. Soldiera wiU be practised in clonng to the left by c^iven LuX^f l^^e. toother Sank, ar-d £«« h^t ng withou^ woSof command; the command to be given thus. Three rThJ^frci'g^JSm^Siinthesid^ each pace USd b! c^?Sed K same time that a pace « taken to the fifont in the qnick march. the repeated, the right on ten inches as tsS-«« , -nil '-■: ■':'•""■"''-• .S. 22. IVjmfnjr when W» the March. 80 on. lalt is given, the left to the right as on yoitf ot»» Time. Quioh-March, each right foot ten inches ,, and instantly close thus completing the id to take the next pace ; shoulders to be kept ^^^nt, unless on rough The direction must rht Bne to the flank, > the front nor rear. Sfik^'miist be practised in turning to the right and ♦„ t^; ^ ^uminK a half turn to the nght and left, and L {JS£S to thTrlg&U left about on tie march. 1 -ninntw to the Riffht md theHto the Front.— On the word Turn, which should be given •■ the left foot is coming to the ground, each vMmt wll turn hia bodyat right angles to tiic duection io which he ha» been moving, and move on at once, without checking his pace, in the new direction. On the word Turn, which ihould be jriven as the right foot ia coming to the [round, each soldier wiU turn again to le froAt and move on without oheckmg the pace. Squad. I To the Right" Turn. Sqtiad. , Fremt^Tiim. ^li itvn v-f^i ''.•■;^*.."*;v „"■-■ <&. liv-oiit.— Soldien in Uke manner, the wortt oevng b.vc» « ihe SlA foot is coming to the gfouni- *'Ll!*Z;ni, thwwUl tumtojhe fro^nt, "^ '5S.Sf J the right foot -com^^ Frmt-Tum. I coming to the ground^ ^^^^ ^^^^ . 3 Turnin;, a Ha^ T*^"" 1-.{S« a half tnm to the right must also be Vr^^^^aZ^^^i^oyxt checking the pace) t;:iao^i£t"on?K upf^eah point., at once, to dsobetaattotumaWon^^^^^ ^^^ ^^^_ done in three short pM«s ^^" ^^^^i at once move Having completed the tm^.tlie^«o .^ ^^.^^ ^^ oif in the opposite f"'^.^" J°pJce heingafull pace of previously marching, the fourtn pace .» 30 inches. The right-hand t remainder wll fpJl ' very lightly towai-d 6tructedin"TheTc the principal gmde man when properlj hand man (towards arm, immediately b served in the positii of the hands will close to the sides, thft trouBCre, and cl S. Soldiers will firs ea( he Squad Drill in Singlk Rank. S 23 Pivot and Reverte Fktnks- in dressing, flank to which — , the head, as durec backward or forw with short quick i be avoided j his « and the position ing Section, retail VI ier. s Two men on the right and one on the left. " pace and a h f to thefrijiit._ Slow-March. IN SlNOIiK RA.NK< 81 h^ and tlm to ill tium to tli« kft ord being given as ig to the around— turn to the front, as the left foot is ht on the left foot ; leword Turn is not to the ground, the then turn, and Wt.-Soldiers If turn to the right checking the pace) points, at once, to a6o«*.— Solvere will arch, which mart be losing the cadence, ierwill at once move it in which he was , b«ingafull pace of \A Rank4 mk the flank towards »lled the Fivot Flank, te Flank. 1 1« Bvh^^ Ron** . Itors will he formed in », touoluDg each other The riJtht-hand or left-hand man being first plfce• lej- Wl man (towards the pivot flank at the thick part of the im^mme&e5belo^/the elbow, the Ijodym^^^ served in the position described in Section I, hut t lie paims Ke hands wiU be turned flat to the thighs ; the elbows doS to tSe Bils. the thumbs as far back as the seams of th« trouBOrB,and close to the fore-finger. S. 26. Dressing when Halted. Soldiers will first be taught to dress man by man. then Itk^'d S ttrd with ^^^^^{;^lZ7:r^^^ with short quick steps; ^^ending back^U °^Jg^" to teaching a souad to dress by the riffht. the drill Instructor must order rtfe two men on the right, and one on thb left, to take a pace ^jf / ^^^^J^ the front; hav^"?, e^¥«**J ^u taC and a half, the rigSt-hand man wU take four side paces to his nght; and th« a in tier. J s Two men on tke right and one on the left. " pace and a I' f to the front. _ Shno-March. PA«r I.— iatJAD DBILL, ♦h«« tM)int8 thus placed wiU raise their *rS E2 from thJ elbow at right angle, -*^ ^^inS^r having aacertainedth^ I the Joints are inline, will ojd«hv»q«ad to dresB up man by man. The thira «»" Wsts or feet, are tue line of dressing. Sman is to be able iustto distmguiSb tti^low part of the U of the second V°* W&th?Siructor is satisfied that ftheirneir wect hejvJH P^e the words Bt/M-FVonf, on which the menT^",*?™ J fher heads and eyes to the flmnt^the right and left. . j ^,e taught to «*« Hiyftt (or Lef»)— !>•<■«» f^"^*;; .. ,o^oi„ff principles. Eye»-FVo»». B^J,A^ (or L^^) Dre Dress only will be gi back to their places su on the flank from whl When no mar is i instmcttHT should inva which to dress his line S. 26. Mar The soldier will nes the different marches learned singly, or ins rules being observed. Before a sauad is ( be indicated by the c( During the march bead nor the eyes i that the dressing is shoulders are kept p The squad will i tbe front, both by \ time} it will then ' and in marldng tii will be exercised in i The soldier must without halting, fr< Blow time, as well double to quick : QuJtik, the arms wil The instructor si of the pivot man, dnect ascertain if th When a soldier behind or before t IN 8INOLB BANKi 33 will nuBe their ir at right anglM ascerttdned that [order his sqnwl The third man one pace to his and shuffle up Iready described; he next man will and so on to the len, ^nd not their line of dressing, just to distinguish ace of the second . is satisfied that ill give the words the men will turn to the flront, the their right hands, m will close on the ht to dress up^man nan by man, i>f the t next be taught to e pace together, but same points being ; words of command )— Dress Up, or By oregoing principles, hey have to occupy ctcd, the words By" ItLkt for Left,) Dress, or after the word Halt, the word K' iSy% be Riv^n, on which they will shuffle up or back to th«r pbwes successively, commencmg with the man on the flank from which they are dressed. When no mar- is placed for that purpose, the officer or instructor should invariably fix upon some casual object on which to dress his line. S. 26. Marching to the Front and Rear. The soldier will next practise in squiid 'rithout interviOs the iffwent marches aid varieties of step which be has £L^3y. or in squad with intervals ; the same general ™ BefotS ;jSdU ordered to march, the pivot flank mmt beSted V the caution. Bytl^ Sight, or By */.e L.//. During the march, care must be taken that neither the head nor the eyes are ever turned towards either flank, that trdSsing is kept by the touch onlv, and that the shoulders are kejt perfectly square and the 'body steady. The MMd will first be taught to march strmght to the freKth by the right and left, in slow and quick time. S will then bo practised in aU the varieties of step „d in tnSkinJ timc^in both cadences; after which it will he exerdsed in the doubla time. , . .. ^ TSfoSmust be practised in cbwiging the pace, without halting, from slow to quck, and from quick to Tw time aTwell as from quick to double, and from doubU £ qukkVin the case last mentioned, on the word oTt the arms wiU be dropped and the fingers extended. The instSor shouW occLionally remain halted in rear rf^i'e ^v5 man. and by fixing hfs eye. on «.me d«tont obiect ascertain if the squad is marching staught to itsfron-- IvhSHwldier losSi his touch, or finds himself a little behind or before the other men of his squad, he must be 34 VKV.T I.-SaUAD DRILL, rifle wll raise his "gl^* . ''™ *^"'.'i :„ ^ keSn < his sLuldere square r- hue j Sd ng must be carefu^y avoided 5 to this e»# each man must yield to wy 1 Xu^ that may come f""; ^^ P^ Sank, and resist all p«s««e that comes ^^^Tn 'he W Hatihe men wiU h^t Ling by the right, 08 already described. A squad will wb Nothing will soi the length of step pivot, than contin revolutions of the On the Bight, baokviarii- J Wheel. ^ Slow-March. Bqttad-'Malt. Dress. Eye»~Frmt. A squad No rank 1 backwards ; I forwards, e_- 1 which will be i WheeUng to wheeling backw slow time. IwiU' the excef of he h Vi raduslly.andonno Duld make Vum un- it of the squad. from the Halt. rds.—On the word ad man, caUed the to the right, tnd U armcdwith the long riBht arm &*•■'»' t^e 8 to his body; if in » ,e short riae, he wjU like manner. C^ **« uad will step off.tM [t eyes to the left itward flank), except ?ho will look inwaxds, aace of 30 inches, the ifftheirlengthofpace listance from the pivot they wheel. Dunng ,n must touch hflhtiy t, or standing flank, Iders square if- ^^e; carefully avoided ; to n must yield to any r come from the pivot U pressure that comes lalt, the men will h^t 38 to thB front; on the wiUtakeupthdarireBS- is already desoribod. 35 IM gINOl.* BANK. Dress. i ^ord JDrrn, they will look to tne pw Eyet-Frokt. I flank and dress. A squad wiUwh.1 backwards on the Ijjmhke m^«in«. No mnk of "^^ i?be flidaSout^d then wheeled backwards; they *«™^^„^«>d to wheel a few paces only, slow time. 36 PART I.— iOUAO UWLt, When 8 iquad marcliing to the front iB required to change durection Riaht-wheel: on which the men will Xl "o the Tight on the principle. Right-wheel. < explained in Section 27. the pivot m-n ' hS^ his shoulders gradually round S ffi squad, at the same time curcling Sund thrwheehng point with very short paces. Fig. 1 KiaUT HAUf-F. NiS r On the word Forward, the whole will F^ard. \ turn their eyes to the front and step off I The instruc JwiU give £word For.«r J when be ««, that the men '»'•% ^^f^^.S^'^'Ke S^ '''r;ir'manner. the squad will be taught to cbang. 8. 29. The Diagonal March.-VLKrK III., Fig JL FILl I Fig. 2.— FBOKT FOI ./> ./ ' Fig. 4. — ON THE LI BIOHT FORM-I A, OUDU I-, \ qf a Singh Rank marcliing to the change direction receive the word lich the men will on the principles 27, the pivot rcuttt n gradually round ! same time circling oint with very Bhort Bard, the whole will B front and step off inches. rward when he sees e that will bring the iie direction in which done at any degree le taught to chang? at have been taught i and double time. ,ATB III., Fig. 1. lommencing fr*"? *J[* arching in line will be lly to cither flank, by squired. ( On the word Face, cis a half face to the void March, each man IN BINOLB RANK. PLATE III. Fig. 1.— THK DIAOONAL HAIICU. KiaUI HAUf-FACB, (JUICK-MAKCU. UAUf-FUONT. 37 ,'v>^y#<«^'^ ■>'•■' ^* \:::l::v.:l.^■r/x:r^r^l:•v■.:r.I:::::r.'.r.:\ FILES FORMING SQUAD Fig. 2.— ITROMT FOUM-WJUAD, Fig. .1. — IN DOUBLE TIME, FRONT roRM-SgUAI). ■/ ■v5£u i i P 4 -ON THK LEADINQ MAN, Fig. 5.-0N THE UADINQ MAN, HIOHT FORM-8Q0AD, KIOllT ABOUT FOHM-SQUAD. n a D Rhht half- I'acf. Slow March. wil din Ion in wil rip lat sh of cu bii ra Halt-Front. { If the diagonal n squad when halted line parallel to its oi Right half- Turn. Front-Turn. rn ir tl u t: B J I In like manner 1 the left, from the march will also be During the diagi for the time being ; IM BINOl.8 RANK. 39 Right half- Facf. Slow March. Halt-Front. will Btep ofP and move correctly in the diagonal direction ; the mtn will no longer keep the touch, hut will ninrch in cchellon with each other. Kach man will Rive a Rlance of the eye towards the riaht flank of the squad, and wdl regu- late his pace so as to keep his naht shoulder always behind the left shoulder of his neighbour on that side, taking care that his neighbour's head hides from him the heads of the remainder of the |_rank. r Upon this word the squad will halt, \ and face to its original front. If the diagonal march has been prooerlv perfo™«J' t^° squad when halted and fronted wiU be found to bo m a line parallel to its original position. ' 2. On the March.— When the squad is marching to the front, and is reouired to move in a diagonal direction to the right, the word Right half-Turn, will be given upon which the men will turn the eighth of a circle to the right and move diago- nally in that direction as described from the halt ; when it is intended to re- sume the original direction, the word Front-Turn wiU be given, on which every man will turn to his front and move for- ^ward without checking the pace. In like manner the diagonal march wiU l'ep«rti^d to the left, from the halt and on *»}« «"ft„.,S time^ march ^iU also be practised m muck »"'! double t^?"',. Durina the diagonal march the leadmg flank will direct ifor the tfmc being 5 for instance, when a squad or company Right half- Turn. Front-Turn. 40 PART 1--««»AI» D«ILt. d«p«nd much upon him. S. 30. MorcWniF a« in Fife. each other exactly. 1 he neaa m for marchinK w particularly 1 when marching as in me. diminishinR the <1 »»"f . "Vot on the men covering correctly in WM « ^during the march. (J I FJa/<-Fron<. -( anil perl be I I r 2 iTo <*««« Pif :J;IVi- Thti^e or clos judging their owi n Section 21. bu inly as the foot o ten that the sh ^de in a direct li tight the touch wi mmmfs nt«^ Squad.—' and 5. e, with the originall htin Front, the left I I left-hand man isl nt, and the right is len Right in Front.l Front, right is thej Slmo or Quid Timf larching as in file is he front, the leading ac; the remainder, t, will tnm to the left, ight, lookmg to the feeling inwards, u 27 of this Part. luarter circle is com orward will be given e continued, or Halt- is to he halted. iDottifcTime,— When sin file, righ* in front, to the fifont, in double man will more on, me, the remBinderwiU 9 the left, double up to| »ke up the quick tune f arrive in line with the is formed to the pivoti Front, as described ml IK BIMCiLE RANK. 4^ Bight Form- Squad. On the Leading Man, Right about Form-Squad. r 4. To the Reverse Ftaii*.— When mwcii- l« the Leading ing as in file, right in front, on thw word Ma^ J of command, theleading ™an will turn to - "S the right, take two paces to his front and halt ; the remwnder will form on the lett Lof the right-hand man in succession. „,j| 5. To the Right-about.— On this wofrA the leading man will wheel to the ^nt about, and take two paces to the fWnt after wheeling; the remainder will march on as in file, wheeling to the rijtht on the spot where the leading man has wheeled, and forming to *e ngbt ^successively, as abready described. When marchhig as in file, left in front, a squad wiU be formed to the front, left, or left about, on the same pnncHje C n formed to the front, right, or right about, when the 'right is in front. , ,//, . ... , 8. 33. The Side or Closing Step. m^riarw closing step will now be rn»ct"ed. j^e ™en fudging their own time, on the principles laid down TUion 21. but eBth man ^»i» '*r7 ^^''I^* !f,tt only as the foot of the man next to him. Care must bo en that the shoulders are kept square, and the pa^cs ■made in a direct line to the flanL "{Vhtn closing to the |right the touch «-iU be kept to the right, and vtce versd. ') 44 PART I.— BaUAD DBIl-L, BaUAD DEILt, WITH ARM8. IN SiNGLB Ra«K. S. 34. Manual and Platoon Exercises and Modes of Firing} directed in the foUo\nng Section. I S. 35. Marc)l% with Arm. in Single Rank. butlo mu«c or drums muBt be v««^ d^^. J^^^P^^^^^; J AU the instructions relating to *^\P°r "^ :* p^rt III menta of the rifle when marching wiU be found m Fart WITH SOUAD DbILI'i S. 36. Fan The squad will nc will fall in with shou with ordered arms il places in successioi they are ordered to one pace of 30 inch from heel to heel, a the middle of his r "aFUe." Wheni of men, the odd n of the front rank, i The front rP'^k The rear-rank nu and will cover ana men take up their S.38.J A squad in twc I and varieties of s in single rank. 1. The front 1 and 24. The following to the rear rank. I', llNOLB RaKK. d Modes of firing.] tnicted in the pre- g Sections, will nextl of firing, as dctailedl lav not forget what! ach drill with tBrmsl iifferent marches, as Single Rank, led in the slow, the 1 all the variations of B ; when marching in •arry the rifle will be uring these practices •sition of the recruit. g, that the rifle does the motion of the leg ; refore. when marching arated from the thigh, ihe touch is kept with| 1 may now be praotisedl time, by companies orj ;ime must be beaten onl licit) Mta-ch are given, I during this practice, la position and move II be found in Part III. WITH ARMS, IN TWO RAMK8. ^ SauAD Dbili>, with Abms. in Two Rank.. S. 36. Formation of Squad in Two ««»*»• they «e o'dewd*o form .each r^^^ ^^^ mea-uimg one pace of M inches t>?«^ ^« ^^ correctly, looking, at ^'^"^ •^\**'ihi^ei ihetwo'nen thus plL^d forming f,£r^;:Sr:JtsriSKr/"aBiankF^ S. 37. Dretmy. men take up their drcBsmg. g 38. Marching to the Front and Rear. I '" ftheTo^nt rank will touch a. diiecUd in Sections 23 "^'e foUowing «lditioi«l bstroction. «* applicable only to the rear rank. i i 2. Covering and Distance. —The rear-rank men, while marching to the front in lino, must be careful to preserve aecuratdy their distances and covering. When retiring the same directions apply to the proper front rank. 3. Blank File while retiring.— When retiring in line a soldier being • blank file, after facing or turning about, will step up and occupy the vacant space in the proper rear rank. After halting and fronting, or turning to the firont, he will resume his original place. 4. Marching taith Trailed .4mM.— When a squad in two rankd standing with ordered arms is required to step off without shouldering, the rear-rank men will make their first pace a short one, to give sufficient room for theur rifles when trailed, as described in Part III. When ordered to trail on the march, the rear rank will step short on« pace. When the snuad is halted, the rear rank will reg^n ita^ws- tnnce by taking a long pace as it comes to the halt. When ordered to advance arms or shoulder arms from the trail on the march, the rear rank wilUengthen its pace to regain its distance. WITH S.39. Ttihing 0^ {1. From the Halt.— On the word Order, the flank men uu the right and left of the rear rank will step back two paces, and face to the right. ' On the word March, the flatok Hum will front and .nuse their right hands (or left hands if armed with the short rifle) from the elbow at right angles to thO; body, and the rear rank will sttp back _ two paces. Marclt, Rear Rank- Dreii. Eye$~Froni. ]^ar Rank taie (M$e Ordtr- Marek. Rear Rank take Open- Order. ■1; {; mk r, • Li { Rettr Rank take Close- Order. Ti e aquad will i I and jhoulder ai [ S. 40. Afattua; imi These exercises Ibytheiiquadmtv ,r-rank men, while careful to presen'e When retiring the trank. retiring in line a turning about, will in the proper rear iming to the front, hen a squad in two required to step off will make their first torn for their rifles When ordered to step short one pace, k will regain ita dis- to the halt. When arms from the trail en its pace to regain raeft -On the word Order, be right and left of tep back two paces, ttreh, the flank men their right hands (or with the short rifle) right angles to the^ rank will step back WITH ARU8, IN TWO nAtttH. 47 r On the word Dreu, the rear rank will Bear Rank- J dress by the right. Care must be taken Dreii. \ not to move the flank 4en when dressing t the rear rank. {On the word Ftvnt, the rear-rank men will turn their eyes to the front, and the pivot men will drop their hands. Eyet-Front. Hear Rank taie^ CUue Order- Mareh. {wi! th( th( Rear Rank take 0pm Order. mk r On the word Marck, the rear rank will step forwartl two paces, resuming the regular distance of ckxw order from the front rank. 2. On mmif^^' ;'--f " \ 48 Bight-Wheel. SlowotOmck- Maroh, Sqvad-HaU. Dress. Eyes-'Front. PABT I.— 800AD DRILL, a. 41. Wheeling. 1. Wheeling Forward from the Halt.— On the word Wheel, the right-hand nian of the front rank, called the pivot man, m in single rank, will face to the nght and raise his arm as directed in Section 27, his rear-rank man uncovering by taking a short pace to his rear wth his right foot, and a pace of 21 inches to his left with his left foot. On the word March, the front rank of the squad will wheel according to the instructions Icid down in Sedition 27, the rear-rank man of the pivot file wgainuig his place during the wheel; the remain- ing mm of the rear rank "'ill follow their front-rank men, keeping their proper [_ distances, and covering. {On the word Halt, the squad wdl halt, and on the word Dress the squad wiU dress by the pivot flank, according to the principle already laid down. I A squad will wheel to the left in like manner. 2. Wheeling Backwards from *Ae Ha«.— The squad wiU be practised in wheeUng backwards as directedin section 27 } in this wheel the rear-rank man of the pivot fila wiU not uncover, nor will the pivot man raise his arm. 3. Wheeling on a MooeabU Pivot.-r-A squad will be practised in wheeling on a moveable pivot on the prmoiplrt Iwd down in the first part of this Section, and m bection -». WITH i S.42. The diagonal marc the principles iwd d ground to a flank in t tions already t'Ven, t to preserve their reh men, in order that tl when they are halted S. 43. File Marehinj 1. File Marching. - principles laid down the rear-noik men dn rank men. 2. Wheeling in m on the principles lai lank stepping rathei with the outward foo 3. Files formina i files will form to the Section 32, the reai men ; the front-rank time, the rear-rank i round into his iilace 4. Files forming I h^ About, or to the lin files is required t [right or left about, ' Section 32. Thefr< jipective rear-rank i them. A squad wil halting end fronting ^, dfrmtUttaU.— he right-hand nian d the pivot man, as ce to tne right and jted in Section 27, overin^ by taking & with his nght foot, lies to hiB lefk with ch, the front tank el according to the n in Septicm 27i the pivot file ngaininK wheel; theiemain- tnk "'ill foUow theii iping their propei »g- the squad will halt, resa the s^uad will nk, according to the down. manner. ift.— The squad will I directed in Section the pivot file will not is arm. -r-A cquad will be vot on the piinoiplei m, and in Section 28. WITH ARMS, IN TWO BANKS. 49 S.42. The Diagonal March. The diaaonal march will be practised in two ranks on the principles Irud down in Section 29. When taking irround to a flank in this manner, in addition to the instrnc- Hons already piven, the rear-rank men must be cautioned to preserve their relative nn»=*;ons with their front-rank men, in order that the,r may be found to cover correctly when they are halteil and fronted. S. 43. Kte Marching, Wheelinn in File$, ami Files forming Squad, 1 File Marching.— Tile marching will be practised on the nriiiciples laid down in Section 30, care being taken that the reM-rank men dress correctly by their respective front- ^\ meelitu in Rfc».— Wheeling in files wiU be performed on the principles laid down in Section 31 ; the outward iiink stepping rather longer during the wheel, especiaUy with the outward foot. . 3. FiUi forming to the Front.— A squad marching m files wiU form to the front on the principles laid down in Section 32, the rear-rank men following theur front-rank men ; the front-rank man only of the leading file wiU mark time, the rear-rank man will turn with the rest, and move round into his place during the '"heel. »•„*/ «^ ' 4 Filet formng to the Reverte Flank, or to the Rtghtor ^left About or to the Pivot Flank.-^hm a squad marching m files is required to form to the reverse flank, or to the liiht or left about, the rear rank will form as desmbed in Section 32. The front-rank men will move round tbeare- Lctive rear-mnk men, and form suooessivelv m firont of Ithrai. A squad will form to the pivot flank sunply by halting and fronting. >2 1 .nji iii i» niim\iii,n-;j,j ;.u i . ' .. j .i,;. 'i'i ' PART 1. — SatJAD DftlLt. 8. 44. The FoTTnation of Four*.— Pitatb IV., Figs. 1 , 2, and 3. j The squad should now bo made up to eight or nine files, andnuinWd off from right to left ; a"'' >» "^ust be explajncd to the men that odd numbers are right files and even num- hew left files. But in order that the left faur may always be complete, when there happens to be an odd number on fhe Uof the souad. the left file b"t one, although an even number, wilt be a right file, and the left file of th squad, though an odd number, will be a left fie ;in this Sse the third file from the left, being a r«ht file without a kft file, will be called an " Odd File," whether it is complete or blank. The four men composing a right and left file will be con- eidered as comades i^ the field, and wdl a«t together, not only in forming fours, but on other occasions, such «« taking offlnd puttini on knapsacks; they should therefore take notice of each other when they are told off. r \. On the Halt.— On the word Fours, \ the rear rank will step back one pace of l 12 inches. • On the word Deep, the left files will take a pace of 21 inches to the rear with their left feet, and a pace of 21 inches to the right with thdr right feet. " On the word Eront, the left files \riU move up in line with the right files, Iw taking a pace of 21 inches to the left with their left feet, and a pace of 21 inches to the fi-ont with their right feet j the whole of the rear-rank men will then close up to their proper distances from the front rank by taking a pape of 12 inohe» to the firont with their left feet. Fig. 1.- TKT.MHO OPI ^iJ'ii □caaaaar Fig. 2.— SQi TELUKO OF! •J < f< ^» *S. £^ Fig. 3.- TKUiINO OF 04 t2S ft? H « mo cacsc S Fig. 4. I TWO FILES ON TIIB ! BIOUT-TURN, LEI &S it. v., Figs. 1,2, and 3.1 I eight or nine files, i it must be explwncil | lies, and even num-j eft faur may always! an odd number on I t one, although anl the left file of thcl I a left file; in this I right file without a 1 lietherit is complete j left file will be con- ill act together, not | sions, such as taking] lould therefore take] off. On the word Fours, I tep back one pace of j if, the left files will jhes to the rear with pace of 21 inches to right feet. mt, the left files will th the right files, nches to flie left whl a pace of 21 inches heir right feetj the ik men will then close stances from the front pe of 12 inches to the feet. PLATE IV. TORMATION OF FOUM. Fig, 1. — SQUAD WITH AN ODD FILE. TKIXi'o OFF. rOBM FOCnS-DEEP. A^AAAA^itj^ :-" ig 'B M Fig. 2.— SQUAD WITH TEIXINO OFF. iAmAmmJkAm A DLANK ODD FILE. TOnM FOUBS-DBKF. SB lilSiB Via 3.— SQUAD WITH A IILANK FILE °' «..i>u irniins- TKLLINO OFF. Sea caaacaaeria FonM FOUKS-DEKP. iiSiii DEBAKINQ OFF FILES, Fig. 4. I TWO FILES ON THE LEFT, TO THE BIOUT-TUBN, LEFT-WIIBEL. ggBKOBZSS ■ ^ag"^ ■WITH Form Four*- Ab About. 8qvad-Ftont. Form Fourt- Bight. Squad-Front. \ i Form Fourth ^ Left. Squad-Front. - L 2. On the Marc to form foiiw on i Right, and Form WITH ARMS, IN TWO BANKS. M Form Fcmr»- About. Sqvad-Ftont. Form Fourt- Bight. I-' As •Irewly described, r On the word About, the whole squad wiU face to the right about, and the left files wUl double in the proper rear of the riffht files, by taking a pace of 21 inches to the front with the right feet, anda pace of 21 inches to the left with their left feet. ■ On the word Front, the whole snuad wUl face to the right about, and re-form . two deep as already described. As already described. - On the word Right, the squad will face to the right, and the left files will form on the right «f t»^« »K^* files, by taking one pace of 21 inches to the nght witFx the nght feet, and one pace of 21 inches to the front with theb left feet. ^ On the word Front, the squad wiU J face to the left, and re-form two deep as t already described. As abeady described. r On the word Left, the squad will fiwse to the left, and the left files wiU form on J he left of the right files by taking one ■> nace of 21 inches to the left with their left 1 ?e^t! and one pace of 21 inches to the rear with their rigtit feet. ^ On the word Front, the squad wiU face , to the right, and re-form two deep as already described. 2 On the March.-X squad on the n«aTchj«all be taught Squad-Front. Form Four*' L^. Squad-Front. ri,.„!l.!l' |,"||1.IW1WIW M »AM I.-r»OWAD ORILU 'ii I files will move precisely in the same manner as they do when foSi K ?he haft, the right file. n,«fk.ng t,me two paces to enable them to do bo. , • j„ . On the word ¥ow», the rear rank if the squad is advane- ina or ic uXer froAt rank if it is retiring. wUl step short one pL^iffi word H'^P foUo^vs, the right files wJl mark W two I aces while the left flKs move to their places ; if tune two paces wn ^n the sqnad will first turn m 5: l^^oZ^'^rl^^^^ th2 right files will mark !lme t^^s while the left (Ues move to their places. When raovinK to a flank in fours, on the words FVon/ (or fl*arr7l^"the^ien will turn ns ordered and then form flT.len without further word of command ; the right flics ikSf Se T'o pnces while the left files get mto. their placeHnd^he rear «nk. or proper front rank ,f rotumg. regains its distance. . A sauad moving to the front or rear, or to a flank in ftnVrsmav be ordered to Vorrn Two Deep, on which the left flCvaf brctor step up *« *^- pfr>ht^&;tit rear rank %vlll close on the front rank, the right files mark- ing tune two paces. A squad moving toa flank in file may be ordered to fbm four^Z. OnthewordFoff.therearrank Wlinchnefrom th^fi^iTrank by a lengthened step in the diagonal direc- fon and ^the word Deep, the left files wUl move to their S'es"n fours, the right ^s marking time two paces. Men can never be required to form fours about on the niSn» can they be Required to form ^urs deep from the halt while facing to the rear, as it is a rule that men «o never to be allowed to stand facing to the rear. If men "c Sed to form fours while marking time, the .rew rank or The proper front rank, if they are rear rank in front, will take a short pace to the rear, on the word Fours. WITH ARMfl. tt 8. 45. Fours fVheelini 1 . Wheeling. —K squad taki I will wheel to the right or le I wheels in files, each four wh I same point. 2. Forming to the Front.—'' Itn a flank by fours is order Ittont rank man of the leadin Iniainder will turn, if right is i Ifront. to the right, form two ( |ia Sections 43 and 32 of this I 3. Forming to the Recerge jihut, or to the Pivot Flank.- |orm to the reverse flank, or t^ itonoeform two deep, and Mions 43 and 32 of this I titot flaak simply by halting S. 46. A Squad formed.in t the Centre, and Re For the following practice jogether. A squs must be ta or centre flank or in ^ mainder cl r In re-fc I MarcA, th( IOr the Right \Ufl orCentre) ■ Chie. "^ ck-March. do when jme two advmnc- «p ihort irill mark ilaces ; if it tum in v'\l\ murk M:e8. Front (or hen form ri^ht flics nto their retiring, flank in ih the left B, and tho lies mark- dto Form icline horn me\ direc- ve to their )aces. nut on the deep tnra nt men are If men arc lar rank, or front, will WITH A1IM«, IH TWO HAKKII. S. 46. Fmr$ Wheeling md Forming Squad. Aft I 1 . Wheeling.— \ aquad taking ground to a flank by fours, Uill wheel to the right or left, in the same manner as it ■ wheels in files, each four wheeling successively round the I same point. 2. Forming to the Front.— Vihen a squad tak'ngK'f""'^ ito a flank by fours is ordered to form to the front, the Lnt rank man of the leading file will m"k t'^e- the re- Lainder wiU turn, if right is in, front, to the left, if left w in hont, to the right, form two deep, and proceed as Uescnbca [in Sections 4a and 32 of this Part. I 3. Forming to the Bererse Flank, or to the Bight or Left iiknt, or to the Pivot F/anit.-When a squad is ordered to Irm to the reverse flank, or to the right or left about it will ■it once form two deep, and then proceed ","e»<'nbert m Bictions 43 and 32 of this Part j a squad wUl form to tho toot flaak simply by halting and fronting. S. 46. A Squad formed in Foun elosimg on a Flank, or on the Centre, and Re-forming Two Deep. I For the following practices 10 or 12 files should be put kether. Ion the Right \\j(ft orCentre) Close, ck-Marph. A squad having formed four deep must be taught to close on the right, left, or centre ; tho four men on the named flank or in the centre standing fast, the re- ^ mainder closing on them by the side step. r In re-forming two deep, on the word I MarcA, the toarmen on the named flank, From the Bight {Left, or Centre) Re-form Tvoo Deep. Quick-March. PART I.— SQUAD DBILL, or in the centre, wiU gtand fost, the re- mainder wiU open out from them by the side •tep, and the left files will move up to their places in Une in succeBsion as the intervals are opened for them 5 the rear- rank men will step up to their proper distances at the same time. . rejraining their proper distances at the saniej?™« • J"f" Spletdy forme'd ik two deep, on the word Forward, the squad wiU move on with a full pao«. S. 47. BreaJdnff off File$. A souad must be taught to reduce the breadth of its A squau muoi, uc B ftlwaYS be broken oft front by breaking off hies ; files win aiwyj" r»„tmose fT«m the pivot flank. A certain number of files ("uppose WITH ARMS , The ftont of the squad jnumber of files, suppose t Ont two mo on the left, f o mainde tdready incUne march, files lai \Two Files onthe Left, to the Right-Turn, Left-Whwl. Three Files on the Left, to the Right-Turn. L^t'Wheel. On the word Turn; the named files WiU turn to the right, and on the word Wheel, they will wheel to the left, tol- lowing the left flank of the remaander of the squad. l I Any number of files 't lagtun ordered to the froi IOn will n flank, line, indir with, twof TwoFilestothe- J ' Front, \ Oi files will All the files may be ' [wotAs Files to the front Files that are brokei not interfere with othe f^t, the re- them by the rill move up jession as the ms the rewr- their proper I during the Centre) Close, will continue b pace, the re- march; when aad wil move mtre) Re-form nk or in the with a short y the diagonal e intervals, in rear-rank men lie time ; when 1 Forward, the WITH ARMS, It* TWO HANKB. W , The front of the squad may be farther reduced by any [number of fflee, suppose two. r On the word T»r», (Plate IV., Fig. 4) ■?"»3«, °L»'ll,"?Zk «».. .nd the. breadth of its 8 be broken off ' F files (suppose rot, as follows : he named files ad on the word to the left, fol- he remainder of \two Files onthe Left, to the j mainder of tne squau; "*- •"-: rr" Riqht-Tum. 1 Xady in rear wiU mark time, and then L^t-Wheel. SJto their right, by the iago^^ march, and follow dose m rear of the two Lfiles last broken off. I Any number of files Uat have be«> broken off may be jag^n^ordered to the front, suppose three. IOn the word Front, the named files will make a half turn towards the pivot Ck?and double up into thenr pla^ »| Stthe remaining ffles in the rear wdl Z line to the left by the diagonal march with a lengthened pace tiU they cover the two files on the pivot flank. I r On the word fVon^ the two remaining TwoFUestothe- J files will make ahalf turn to the left, ana ' Front, \ will double up into une. p jjiji. i i.,t .j.Jtg'! I1 )1 ] ! ,'>. ' W-'- '.;■.'»-■ ' J"" fl8 PART I.— BOOAD DBltl" S. 48. Dimitring a Squad, Sr rank wiU ti^ke a s.de pace ^ the thighs, and after a pause the squad wiu I break off. , r 2. H^i/fc^nw.-On^.ewordF«w.the { men wiU face as dii-ected m Section 6. r On the word Arm, ihe men wOl port 1 arms at the same time taking a side pace Lodg^Arm. S S^Ss by ranks, and after* pause they t will break off. When there is only one rank. dtherwiA or without arms, it will take a pace to the left as a front rank. After breaking off. the -- -1hSflt\i?SJ dfat Quiet and orderly manner, p«™y'"8 *'*?L.fl° ^ ff advance, or shoulder with the short nae. To the Right- Face. PA OF THE genera: I Soldiers to be formed «n I been thoroughly groundei \ drill, is now to be instrud IpaTiy, as a more immedia lUttalion} for this purp Ifonnedandtoldoffaaai I I. Sizing a Company^ Iflutks xo centre, the fri I nearly as possible the s I first aized, the following I the men in single rank I on the right, shortest on IniMi to take three paces Iself three paces in front c hleft-handman.the thi ■the inner side of the ri| ■inner side of the left-hJ phey meet in the centre. right, caution the left-hi ihi\ then direct the left Rhe right file* of the lei 69 irord Face, Section 6. front rank % and the ace to the I will strike it of their squad will rd Faw.the BCtion 6. n will port a side pace k pause they thout anns, parade in a if armed) at 5<^,t I! PAET II. OF THE COMPANY. GENERAL PRINCIPLES. fomed and told off aa a company. ' " ; '' lulu «o oentej '\° «^' *vLm mm . eomprw i« h^trri«^Th&ro\&^^^^^^^^^^ Lan to take three g)f«» *°tt iSand^^^^^^^^ rank, as Lelf three paces '" fr°"* PV^alJ^ man to place himself on l» left-hand man, the *«* *^^^* ™*„ ^J fourth on the Ithe inner side of J^e "fJJ'^^J^^ and 'so on Stemately till Inner side of the l^f^^'^'l Z^ whkh numher off from the W meet in the centre. ^Jter which, numoe^ E?f .r *i?^Sth:U SfeH? 2 rSht Sdivision and ^^^?fflS ofXtft'^Swivision'^to take one pace to 60 PABT II.— COMPANY. the ««; lastly. ca«« the whole to clos. -^^^l^^ file and then to ^«« ^y *^" "A'SLTu oZthe thirl correctly, leaving the blank file, tf were « one, w from the left. OINKI I during the ftttaok, and Itlie rear} also to oorr 1 during the movements I much attention cannot 1 III. I 2 Soldiers to know their Plaees.-Aftet *!»« »e'^, «' ^ the eye of the instructor. ing. and wdl be t«W «« J^^^ ^';t ,^ii then be divided described m Part I., *«°*?°? „ ;,p >.„„„ riie comprmes tl,e cautiwi, fELL off as a kighi Cor lkft; coMr V, „ n-„L ^riic- ,„ijaltem officers and tet- Establishtnent of a C« I of officers and seqeanti I subaltern officers, and I will perform the duti I following explanations, I will always oe termed Inumerarv, "the heute I ensign}" but in the al I places wiU be taken by I seijeants, who will perfc Ition as herein describe I no seijeants will ever n I retain the posts they h I oorporals m»m the ran Relative Proportioi^ pies a space or about munber of paces of 3( of flies, multiply the I product by 30} or use 1 that is, multiply by 7^ IbeinK accomplished ^ I multiplied by 3 will 1 useful to remember, tl Ittdsoon— lOOfiles Application cf Squi I for the instruction o tte men of a ler, they should o fall in, in their y be occasioned be remedied by _ OINKRAL PRINCIPLES. 6^ "^^^eXS ItrinTthe movLSrS • Upany or battalion. Too one. the thml a^lttention cannot be paid to these important points. VI. I EidahUshnent qf a Company. -The ordinary estabUshment of officers and seqeants in a company, is one captiu^, two baltem officers. Ind four or five ?eqeanto one of whom ImU perform the duties of covermg seneant. In the GoS explanations, the commanSer of the company SSys L termed "the captain." the semor supw- U«. "the Ueutenant," and the second semor "the lenS^but in the absence of any of the«e ««<=««. *^«^ USmU be taken by the next in rank, whether officers or lEite who will perform aU the duties of the superior posi- IS AS^n desLbed, except, that in taking open order I no serieants wiU ever move out in front of the line, but wiU Pr rjosts they hold in close order. When re^mred oorcorals f^m the jinks wiU supply the places of seijeants. ' VII. Relative Proportion of Paces to Kfcs.— Each man occu- I pk^l'p^f o/abo^ 2J inches ; therefore ^irntlmber munber of paces of 30 inches reouired for a given number T£, multiply the number of files by 21, and dmde the ™S bv 30 s or use the sub-multinies of these numbers, tf is^f m»y V 7 and divide by fo, the k«.r opemtaon \beinK accomplished by cutting off the >«* ^g"^^' ^'g muMpUed by 3 will designate the odd inch«.. It wiQ be luaefi,! to remember, that 10 files require 7 pa*es, 20 files H. l&adao on-lOO files 7« P««s, 1,000 files 700. VIII. . Application of Squad DriW.-All the P^^^^f «Jf ^JX |for iL instrurtion of a squftd in two tanks, are equauy —The company jB lightly touch- lejft, as already then be divided The comprnies nately, as are the mnot be divided i riglU company r, in a J^ com- onger. 'When a nequal strength, f the company it lore a company, itructor will give 5Ft) company. officars and »er- emumerary rank, icipal duiy in this d up tQ tM front I i ^ PA«T II.— COMPANY. ^pUcable to the »7„Xcribe Ihe P^S?.; of the opp«« 3y «eoes8ttry here to *^8»nOe^^ >^ ^^^ ^^ tl^^ j^ a company falls in '^o°«'J* ^c°„ ^nd non-commissioned in line>nt in order to t«^»„'T°^'!iQ oc^^^^ in battalion ofiSs* the difl^-^^nrdr uXCug^ ft were with a drill, a company rHj',„J must state previoxis to each bStolion. T[^«>""^?Jomattn of the battalion, upon onM to their pioper places. ^ ofSie^ubaltems taking his place. muBtTeexercised on rough and broK ^ ^^.^^ ^ „ on smooth and level IP«und ana ^^^ ^^^^^ ^^ rroS,^?"S:«nSrmr£5^^^^^ -5 a matter of cour» of the sections. S to fall into conni service; and it ic: > be so exercised as circumstances, the of the formations Assembling on practised in asser purpose, the com men are scatteret sound The Assemi which they wffl r rifjht in front) o man, who will pn will order their ai Marching on that officers and these important be practised sepa distances. In remain stanuinf that he marches exercise, the insl to prove the of officers or -, another, the nu taken being pre Officers to be the army must ( ilrill prescribed L » I itione of the ofBpere and to add thedi^ le sub-diviflions and lerto been explained. y b^^^^^^^ purpose; they So;ttlSr=raS?^^natattention. MarcWn, -/->'» -'iat?/ tS";My"'t^netin that officers and ^ff'^lX they s^^ulS frequently these important P^f « °™X' on points, and judging be practised separotelv.mmawnmg ^ j^g^^,^, ^^^t distances In *^?, ^""""^ 'thTScer or seijeant to see remam standmg inrear "JJJ^^^, front; m the latter that he marches perfectly "♦""K^* *°,°:'^ ^ mewmiing line exercise, the instructor niu«t inake use ^^^ ^^^^ to prove the ^^^^'^^ ^^'± :^Z:\^Zr^lne h.jond "aL^atr nuEl'^ S'es^'f ^which fhe distance is to be taken being previously nameiK It - 64 PABT II. — COMPANY. covering seijeanta before they are aUowed to do duty in the ranks at officers. OMcerB to be perfectly instructed in their Duty.— An o& ought to know the post which he should occA,py m aU changes of situation, tiie commands which he should Kive. and the general intention of every nw)vement. He should be matter of the principles on which each for- mSon is founded, and be aware < ft^/^"! ^^Jj-i^^^ likely to be committed, in order to avoid them himself, and be able to correct others. These principles are m themselves »o. simple, that with moderate attention, he will soon fix t^;^ in his mind. All the officers, from time to time, when qualified, must be ordered to exercise the battalion. XVII. Examination of Young Q^cers.-Commanding officers of regiments must examn^e their young officers before they are dismissed drill, to ascertain that they fuUy comprehend and axe able practically to apply, all they have been taught. XVIII. Squad Drill for O^cers.-Officers who have been dis- missed drill must be exercised periodically in squads undw Se superintendence of a field officer, and must go through rconJilete course of squad and company dnU annuaUy, previous to the commencement of the spring or setting up driU of a battalion. XIX. General Rules.— The following general rules wUl be observed in the movements of a company, whether alone, or with the battalion; although they may not be repeated in the description of each manoeuvre. _ 1. At all times, when a company, sub-«."J"'!i'°ir^uSm8e mth him: the "r4i»tue:ir;t.c..p.n,,„Mi.i»n,.,»ction gg fA«T «.— COMPANV. therefore, be commenced accordingly. , 8 Tn order to avoid the constant shiftinfj of oncers woi" isTgM infantry ; the latter wiU remain with their swords ""mAfterhaltmg, soldiers will remain perfectly stiU unless "iritSV of the right 8ub.divi3ion is al^vays con- sidered the centre of a company. N.B.-In Parts II. and IV., words of command given by the instructor of the drill or the commander of the bat- Shona^rcapital letters, those given by the coi^nde, of the company or its sub-divisions or sections m italic, IN UNR. 9i give the words Bj/ 1 1 his new place; i(| words will imme- aly to giving a word ler of their compa- m, executive words nmencing the pace jh the command has of the word must, | ?ting of officers firom ny in column takes I red to move by that tenant will move up B proper pivot flank, 8 necessary that the : be described, th unfixed bayonets rifle, with shouldered !, with ordered amis : ;8 before commencing less they are to move nn with their swords n perfectly still unless ivision is al^vays con- of command given by nmander of the bat- n by the commande? ■ sections in italic, I. i;n OKDKB. Ti^- D KIOHT IK rnoHT. i i ^' ■ •" ■■^J3l-'' •*■'■ r ^J<^ -^^^ «o. IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) 4 /. ^/ :/ 4is K S 1.0 !|:ia ISS I.I 1^ 150 Hi us l» u 2.2 1.25 iU 11.6 — 6" 7] "VQ '» / ^^ 4V^ 7 L Photographic Sciences Corporation 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 (716) 872-4503 i' CIHM/ICMH Microfiche Series. CIHM/ICMH Collection de microfiches. Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiques vV ■» S.l 1. F captaii covere* of the place ■ paces second comps dmsic the lei when ingto inrea sectio placet super lespei MAI TAK OI IN L1N«. ^ A Company in Line and Column. 8.1. Fortnation tff a Cotiytafnf m LiiM.— Plate V., Figs. 1, 2, and 3. Caution,— ab a company in link. 1. FomaHon in Close Order.— On the above caution, the cap aSTSl place himself on the "gbt of the front rank covered by his covering seijeant, who wiU be «" thf "8^ * of the reir r«k; therenuuning officers and seijeants wUl Dlace thrives in a third or supernumerary rank, three S from the rear rank; the Ueutenant m rear of the Kdffle item the left, theensign in rear of thecentecofthe company, the third supernumerary P "« °*„J5f i^*'?! ""°f division; the fourth in rear of the n8ht,.the fifth in rear of the left and so on. When a company is formed singly o. when it is nanoemTing. the drummers and pione«jS bao^g- W to it will also be in the supernumerary ™nk. the ftrmer "rear of the second section, the latter in rear of the t.urd i^ion; the Ueutenant and ensign will i^«^7« "'-T f\^' places; the seijeants and men composmg thereat of the Emumerary^rank will divide the space m rear of thenr respective sub-divisions and sections. 2. Taking Open Order.— On the word Order, the officers will recover theu sw^ttds, the captain will move out and place himselt one i»ce in fifont of the second file ftom the nght; the lieutenant and ensign, pass- ing round the left flank of the Mmpany, wm pbwe themselves one pace from the front rank, the former in firont of the second file from the left, and the latter m front of the centre of the company. The flaiJc men of the rear rank will move as directed in Part I., Section 39, and the covering ser- BEAB RANK TAKE OPEN- ^ ORDER. •J 7P i n: -,** MAnCH. Rear Rank- Drem. Eyes-Front. SHjtemwmrary * Eveg-'F\rtmt. I- PA RT. U.-'tCOM PAN Y. eant will take one pace of 21 inches to [lis left, thus occupying the space vacated by the right-hand inan of the tear rank. On the wonl march, the officers will take two paces to the front, look to their right and dress, the covering seijeant will take one pace to his tight with his right foot, and one pace to his front with his left foot, thus filling up the place vacated by the captain; the rear and supernu- merary ranks vim step back two paces, the flank men of the rear rank moving as _ directed in Part I., Section 39. On the word Dress, the rear and supernumerary ranks will look to their rignt and dress. On the words Eyes- Front, they will turn their eyes to the front, and the flank men of the rear rank will drop their aims, as described ^in Part I., Section 39. Steady. {On the word Steady, the oflSoos will port their swords and look to theur front. When a company is formed singly the captun will dress the ofiBcers and give the word Steady: the seijeant on the right of tiie Bupemumerary rank will dress the rear and supenrameraiy ranks, and will give the words Eyes- ty-omt, as the dressmg of each is comptetod. Two or more companies should also be practised together, as described in Part W., Section 4. rear RANK r 3. Restimmg Qlose Order.— On the TAKE i word ORDSR, the officers will recover CLOsti ORDER. I their swords and face to the right. -rCOMPANT. take one pace of 21 inches to w occupjdng tiie space vacated it-hand inaa of the tear rank. ronl MARCH, the ofiBcers will aces to the front, look to their Iress, the covering seijeant will lace to his light with his right ne pace to his front with his lus filling up the place vacated )tain; the rear and supemu- iks vriU step back two paces, len of the rear rank moving as Part I., Section 39. word Dress, the rear and rary ranks will look to their dress. On the words Eyet- y will turn their eyes to the the flank men of the rear irop their arms, as described Section 39. word Steady, the offioos wtll iwords and look to theb front. d singly the captun will dress ord Steady: tne seijeant on nuy rank will dress the rear nd will give the words Eyet- » is contfteted. Two or more aetised together, as described tung Qlote Order. — On the SB, &t officers will reoover Is and face to the right. MARCH. IN COLUMN. 7i On the word march, the roar and su- pemumeraiy ranks will take two paces to their front, the covering seijeant will take two paces to his rear and one to his left, toi make room for the officers to pass ; the lieutenant and ensign will move to their places in the supernumerary rank, round the left flank of the company; the captain will then resume his place on the right of the front rank, all the officers carrying their swords as they take post ; lastly, uie covering serieant will move up to his place on the right of the rear rank. 8. 2. FormattM of a Company i» Co/umn.— Plate V., Rg.4. When the column is right in front, that is, when the company that stands on the right, when in line, is in front, the mt will be the pivot flank of each company ; when the column is left in front, the right will be the pivot flank of each company, on the principles explained in Part I., Section 32. Caution,— AS a company in column bioht {at left) IN PBONT. On the caution, the captain will place himself on the pivot flan]( of tb front rank to lead his company, the lieutenant will place himself one pace in rear of the second^ file from the reverse flank, and ths covering setgeant one pace in rear of the second file firom the pivot flank. The pUtoes of the remaining supernumeraries will be the same as in line, but at one pace distance firom the rear rank. When manoeuvring, the drummers and pioneers will also be in the supemumeraiy rank. -1 ffi PAB* «.— COMPANY. 8. 3. Marching to the Front and Rear. 1. Marching to the Front.— Tha instructor, having stated the supposed order of the battalion, wiU proceed as tbllows. THB LINK (or 1 Qjj ^jjg ^Q,j ADVANCE, the Captain COLUMN) _^^ carefully saleot points to march '^»»'''- upon ADVANCE. "^ BLOW (quick or doudlb)- 2. Marching to the Bear.— When the company is to retire, the caution the line (or column) will kbtire will be given; the men wi" then be feced about. Ihe captain, if the company is in column, will step up in Une with the proper rewr rank and select points to march on ; but if the company is in line, will remain on the flank of the proper front rank. ■ Ab described in Fart I. Wheeling from the Halt. A company, sub-division, or section will wheel trotn columi into line, and line into column, on the principle! laid down in Part I., Section 41, the pivot files movmg as directed in that Section, and in the general rules 1 and J of this part : these instructions will not be repeated. lhe| officers and snjeants will move as follows. B. 4. 4 Company WheeUng,JrA«t it.— COMI^AWT. \\ 3. 5, A Compatty Whetlii^, from tk$ Halt, from Line into Column. Caution, — as a company in line. On the word fkont, the captain will move out and place himself one pace in front of the ceaiic of his company, facing to the front, and the covering seijeant will run to the rear, mA mark the spot on which the right of th^ company will rest when the wheel is completed; he wiU stand with shouldered arms, fttcing in the direction that the column will fac:, and raiM hia left arm. The pivot man will face to the right on this caution. On the T7OTd face, the company will face about ; the pivot man and covering . seijeant remaining steady. J On the w(»d tiarch, the company will commence its wheel, the captain moving to the pivot flank, and the liou- teaxnt moving across to his place in column during the wheeL TLe oaptain having given the words Halt, Vrani, Dreu, wll foil in at once on the left flank of his company looking to his ftont, and Ir-ving the company to dress itself; the coirerine seijeant wiU at the same time move to his propor place in column, and the supernumerary rank will step np to its proper distance from the rear rank. Having completed their dressing, the men will turn thehf eyes to the ftront withotit ftuther word of coro- OrSNCOtUMN, aicnx IN- ^ FRONT. RlGHTABOtJT- FACB. QUICK- MARCH. |liut ; tlie I ompany will then be QUICK-MARCH will be given. teed about before the caution to tion is given while it itt sttoding rank man of the pivot file will the proper front-rank man (if incover, as though the company front. (See Part IV., Section 33, md 59.) 7a PAKT II.— COMfANY. I -COM f ANY. WHBHLINO mOH THB HALT. 79 5, 7< ^ Company Wheeling on the Centre ftmn the Halt. A company, fonned as a compan; in line, must be prac- isod in wneelinK iiuon its centre, one lub-division forward, he other backward. In this wheel, the man on tiie inner lank of the ttoni rank of the •ub'division that wheels urward, will be the pivot man. :!aution from the Instructor, — tub company will WHKBL ON THK OBNTRK TO THB RIOHT (or LirT, Ot — PACIB TO THB RIOHT or LBFT). On the caution from the instructor, the captain will stert out three paces in ft-ont of the centre of nis company, face towards the men, and give the command required, on which the pivot man will face to the direction named, and his rear-rank man will uncover ; the covering seijeant, if the company is to wheel a quarter circle, will move out and align himself with the pivot man, with shouldered arms, mailing the place on which the outer flank of the sub- division that wheels forward is to rest. If the paces are named, he will, with shouldered arms, step them from the eighth file from the centre, counting towards the flank that wheels forward. On the word March, the company will wheel hdf forward, half backward, on the principles laid down in Part I., S. 41, the nurn on the outward flank of the sub- division that wheels forward, will look inwards and regulate his pace so as to keep ihe company in line ; the outward man of On the Centre, Right (or Left)— or on the Centre • — Paces to the Right (or Wt)— Wheel. iuick-Mbrch, * 80 PART II.— COMPANY. Company, Halt, Dress. Eyes-Front. 8TBADY, 8. 8. Wli BY SU mvisu ON THB OACKW/ WU£E QUICl MARC the Bub-division that wheels bftckvwurd,will look inwards and step a full pace of 30 inches; the captain will move to the flank that wheels forward, during the wheel. ^ The wheel being completed, on the word Halt from the captain, the coverei and supernumerary Serjeant will give base pomts at arm's length from the front of the company, facing inw*rds, with recovered arms, holding out their inner arms wth the fist clenched, the former being on the flank that wheels for^vard, the latter on the opposite flank. The raptain will then give the word Dress, dress the company up to the hands of tha base points, and after givmg the words Eyes-Front, will take his place on its right flank. Lastly, the instructor Will give the word STEADY, on which the covering seijeant and supernumerary take post. When the sub-division that is to wheel back is faced about, according to the rule laid down in the preceding Section, the word Front must follow the word Halt. This movement is used only when a battalion in hne w -.~..:.«j *« nVianna trnnt. on a rentTal oompanv. in which case that company will wheel on its centre aa above (iirecteU. See Part IV., Section 58. , , • . Should a company as in line be required '.o wheel into % _ __ Al_ - ^ i— — . ».*»« «A»A.tf 4\ya ina4'yn\r>¥nT will flriVl the himself ... ».v— ./ »/- v — ^ _ - j vj forwards. On the word march^ he will turn towards hu ^nj fjii men, and move to the flunk marked by the covering seqeant ^i^i^. ensisn in Isub-divis Httlt'L 2. Wh _,__J -COMPANY. ision that wheels backward,wiU 'ds and step a full pace of 30 J captain will move to the flank s forward, during the wheel, .eel being completed, on the : from the captun, the coverei rnumerary serjeant will give ts at arm's length from the the company, facing inwmrds, vered arms, holding out their IS with the fist clenched, the jng on the flank that wheels he latter on the opposite flank ain will then give the word ress the company up to the the base points, and after e words Eyes-Front, will take 3 on its right flank. Lastly, luctor Will give the word on which the covering serjeant rnumerary take post, that is to wheel back is faced lie laid down in the preceding Lst follow the word Halt. only when a battalion in line is on a central company, in which b1 on its centre as above directed, WHEELING FBOH THE HALT. 8. BY SUB- DXVISIONS ON TUB LEFT BACKWARD- WUBEL. OUICK- MABCU. line be required 'awheel into 8. 8. Wheeling backward by SiU)-divisim8 or Sections, from Line.— Plate VI., Figs. 3 and 4. 1 . Wheeling back by Sub-divisions on the Left. — On the word wheel, the captain will place himself one pace in front of the centre of the right sub-division ; the co- vering sericant will move back, and mark, with shouldered arms, the spot on which the right of the leading sub-division will rest, raising his left arm ; the pivot men facing as usual. On the word march, tha sub-divisions will wheel backwards, tha captain in- clining to the left. As the leading sub-division is taking the last step that completes the wheel of a quarter of a circle, tne captain will give the words Halt-Dress, to the whole com- pany, and post himself on the left, the § roper pivot flank of the right sub- ivision, the covering serjeant will take his place in column, one pace in rear of the second file from the pivot flank of the same sub-division; and the Ueutenant will take his ^lost on the pivot flank of the rear sub-division, the ensign iu rear of the second file from the reverse flank [_ of the rear sub-division. 2. Wheeling back by Sub-divisions on the Right.- Halt-Dress. < tee versd, the mstructor wiU givi p^^y ^jj ^heelby sub-divisions backwards on the right in iptain, on the caution, wm placi jjj^g manner, the captain placing liimself one pace in front reofthesub-dmsionthatwheeliof tjjgjjgjjt^jjf ^j^^ kft sub-division in the first instance, lARCH^ he wiU turn towards nu ^^d falling in on its right flank when the wheel is corn- marked by the cpvcrmg serjeant pig^^. tijg lieutenant taking post on the right, and the ensiffn in rear of the second filiB from the left, of the .car iBub-oivision. L ^ .MJi 82 PAKT II.— COMPAr Y. 3. Wheeling hackmrds by SecHons.— A company inline will wheel l)ackw»rds by sections in the same manner that it wheels backwards by sub-divisions ; the captam m the tost instance wiU place himself one pace in front of the cratre of the riaht or left section; and on the words Halt-Dress, he will post himself on the pivot flank of the leading sec- tion : the lieutenant will place himself on the pivot flank of the third section from the front, the ensign on the pivot flank of the fourth section from the front, the senior seijeant, if no other ofBcer is present, on the pivot flank of the second section from the front, and the covering seqeant one pace in rear of the second fUe from the pivot flank of the leading section, unless there are only two other supemumeranes counting subalterns and seijeants, in which case he wiU lead tiie second section from the front. , . , », When the sub-divisions or sections exceed twelve flies, they should always be faced about and wheeled rear rank in front. The word of command will then be, open COLUMN OF SUB-DIVISIONS Or SECTIONS BIGHT (OT LEFT IN FRONT, BIGHT ABOUT-FACE, &c., and they wUl wneei in the same manner aa companies wheel. S. 9. An Open Column of St^t-divirions or Sections fneeUM into Une. Platb VI., Fig. 6. *" \. A Column Right m Front vheehng to the Left into litne.— Ontho word line, the captain will fall back and place him- self one pace in front of the second file from the left of the rear sub-division (or section), the pivot files moving accordmg to rule. The leaders of the rear sub- division (or sectiaaf) ■iyill fell back into the supernumerary lank, and the covering seneant will mo»'j out and mark the spot on which the right of the oompany will rest, with shouldered arms, and will wse his left arm. LEFT wheel INTO-LINK. QUIC MAB( Halt-l J?ye*-J 2. A Line. — I sbns or S. 10. ] ■-V 1. Fr€ panies, t wheeled (or LBFI right in straight 08 to m( quarter Iteutenai their pla in front WUIBLINO ON A MOVBABLK PIVOT. 83 -COMPAr Y. Sections. — ^A company in line )ns in the same manner that it isiona ; the captain in the first ne pace in front of the centre and on the words Halt-Dress, pivot flank of the leading sec- le himself on the pivot flank of ront, the ensign on the pivot m the front, the senior seijeant, on the pivot flank of the second he covering serjeant one pace 1 the pivot flank of the leading ly two other aupemumeraries, ijeants, in which case he will the front. )r sections exceed twelve files, about and wheeled rear rank }mmand will then be, open I or 8BCTI0N8 RIGHT (or LBFT) FACE, &0., and they will wheel tanies wheel. of Sidhdintions or Sections . Platb VI., Fig. 6. hhtmn Bight in Front wheeling t into Line. — On the word link, in will fall back and place him- lace in front of the second file left of the rear sub-division (or the pivot files moving according The leaders of the rear Bub- (or sectioiie) .;iig the wheel, and falling in on the right as it is completed, the men coming to the shoulder on the word For- ward. ... ■ When ftt ' paces from the saluting point the captam will give the word Rear Rank take Open Order, on which the men will move as directed m Pan 1., Section 39. The oflBoers will recover their swords, and move out in douhle time to the front of the company, each taking up the slow time and portmg hw Bword as he arrives at his place. The oflBcers' placco will be the same as at open order on the halt; the covering aeijeant will move up to the place vacated by the captain, and will lead the company; the supernumerary rank will mark time three paces. Whsn at ten paces from the salutiag point the officers will salute us detailed in the " Sword Exercise," taking time from the captain, who will give a preparatory signal to hw subalterns by a slight turn of the left hand, two paces before ho commences his salute, ^en at six paces beyond the saluting point, the officers wiu return again to the port, at 20 paces beyond it the captain will give the words Rear Rank /a*e Close Order, on which the men will move as directed in Part I., Section 39, and the officers wUl recover their swwds and return to their places at close order, the captain turning to the right, the lieutenant and ensign to the left, ea«h 90 HART ri.— COMPANY. Cftrryinfir ^'^ sword as he univM at his post, tho ensign movinft in double tiine ; the covering serjeunt will also return to his post, and tne supernumerary rank will ref^in its distance by stepping out. Ltft Wheel. [ The captain will give the command for Forward, the third wheel as his right arm touches by the Left. the third point, and will then change J by the rear to the left of his company, L^ Wheel. 1 the men sloping arms (or trailing arms Forward. with the short rittc) on the word Forward ; « COMPANY- the company will wheel round the fourth HALT. [_ point, and return to its original ground. The captain, as he gives the word Forward at each corner of the ground, must at once observe some object in the straight line between himself and the next point to guide him m marching. When the covering serjeant takes his place at open order he must do likewise. KARCII PAST IN qCIOK TIHK, QUICK-MABCU. Lgt Wheel Forward. Left Wheel Forward, Pu the Right. Left Wheel Forward, By the Lejt. Left Wheel. Y Fonoai-d. 'eOKPANT-HAtT. J After marching past in slow time the company may bti ordered to break into quick time without halting, by the command from the inatruotor, break into avicK TIUE-OUIOK. On tho word march, the whole will step off in quick time, sloping arms (or traiUng with the short nfle) on the first pace, as usual; they will mwc in the same manner as in slow time, except that the company will not take open order. M» -COMPANY. lis tword as he urrivM %i his )nsi((n movin^t in double time ; ng Serjeant will also rutum to and tne supernumerary rank I its distance by steppinff out. itain will give the command for (vhcel as his right arm touches point, and will then change ar to the left of his company, sloping arms (or trailing arms hort riHc) on the word Forward ; my will wheel round the fourth I return to its original ground, he word Forward at each corner ce obsen'e some object in the f and the next point to guide ;he covering serjeant takes his do likewise. the word MARCH, the whole will f in quick time, sloping arms iling with the short nfle) on the ace, as usual; they will mwc same manner as in slow time, that the company will not take rder. slow time the company may [uick time without halting, by struotor, break into quick MISCBLLAKKOUB MOVIMENTS. 91 lUspeotinff the rear and supernumerary ranks locking up, m Part VII., Section 1. S, 14. The Echellon March qf Sub^ivitiont or Sectiont. TAKB OBOUND TO "^ On the word march, the snb- ► divisions (or sections) will wheel towards the named flank. THBRIOHTCortKHT) IN BCHELLON. ON TUB MOVK, BY 80B-DIVI8IONB (ot sections) BIOHT (or LBFT) WHBBl" QUICK-MARCH. 1 Having completed the eighth of a circle, on the word fokwabu, the sub-divisions (or sections) will move . to then front in echellon. If the forward. '<^ movement is to the right, each sub- division or section will march by the right; if to the left, they will Lmarch by the left. fL'^'l^riead the right or Icadi^ action, by the right, tenant will lead ine "B'" " he led by their respective and the remaining ".'^'O"'. ^L^^'l^^ the pivot flank pivot men, each keeping ^fJ^ft^S towards which Sf the section nest to him, »"^/i^^,t "„f*Sn. murt ^;»v¥*y*"w^ ■ ^-? ■IP 99 PA«T II.— COMPANY. RB-PORM- COMPANY. FORWARD. noiition. When » company in line takes ground to th« left in eehellon of Mctionn, all the seotionn will Ik; led lij their pivot men, the cai)tain remainint( on the riglit of the ri^ht I -"ction. Tniu nilc api)Iies rqually to 8u))-(liviiiionii, A company on the march will talcc f^round to a flank iti eehellon in the same manner, the oommand being by min- i)iviHioN8 (or hkctionh) uiuiit (or lekt) whbrl, rORWARD. On the word company, the snlHdivi- sions or sections will wheel Iwck into line on the nivot tianka. . On tne word forward, the company I will advance by the ^iroper pivot flank. On even ground, where the su1>-di\n8ions or sections are not broken, thev may, if required, wheel up into line on the reverse flanks, by the words, by buo-divisionr (or ■■cnoNR), RioHT (or lrpt) whkrl. S, 16. Marching on an Alignment in Open CoJumn qf Sub-divisions. J^n alignment is the imaginary straight line that lies between any two given points, on which a line may bo formed, or the pivot flanks of a column dressed. The company having wheeled backwards by sub-divisions from line, as directed in Section 8 of this Part, and a distant object in the prolongation of the two pivot flanks having been selected as a point ; the commander of the company, who will be on the pivot flank of the leatling snb-di vision , will immediately fix on some intermediate point between himseli' and the distant point to march on. On the word march, given by the mstructor of the drill, both sub-divisions will step off at the same instant ; the leader of the first sub-division will march with the utmost steadiness and equalitv of pace on the points he has taken j MO the eommander of the second sub-dinsion will preserve the leader of the first in the exact line with the distant object ; \t the sai ng into anoe mu The «i murching S. 16. A A com form to 1 HIOUT COM Pi Ijeadini division Wheel, . Font) Ilalt-i Bjfthe dieisto IVketl. For Halt-l — «OaiPANY. \j in line takea ground to th« , all the sections will l>e Ud I17 remaining on the risht of the ilifs equally to sub-divisionii. I will take ground to a flank in r, the oommand being l)y nun- nuiiiT (or left) wheel, word COMPANY, the suli-divi- sctions will wheel l)ack into line 'ut tlanks. word KORWARD, tho company ice by the proper pivot flank, ho sul>-dinsions or sections are squired, wheel up into line on words, nv suB-DivisioNfi (or ') WHEEL. lignment in Open Column qf 'ivtsions. tfrinary straight line that lies nts, on which a line may be if a column dressed, led backwards by sub-divisions Section 8 of this Part, and a longation of the two pivot IS a point ; the commander of \ the pivot flank of the leading ely fix on some intermediate ie distant point to march on. II b^ the mstructor of the drill, off at the same instant ; the m will march with the utmost M on the points he has taken ; cond sub-division will preserve act line with the distant object ; MIMCELLANEOUa MOVEMINTB. 93 Kt the same time keeping the distance necessary for whoel- ng into line, from tfie preceding eub-division, which d.^ ;ance must of course be taken from front rank to front rank. •I'he same princii)le apphes to companies and sections marching in column, on an alignment. 16. A Company in Column of Sub-divinons or Seetiona forming to the Reverie Flank. A company in column of sub-divisions right in front, wiU f.,nn to L ri«ht, which is the averse flank, " /« ows:- HIOUT VOBM- COMFANY. Leading SmA- itirition Right- Wheel, Double, Forward, Ualt-Drus. By the Right. 1f(t Sub- dioinon Right- Wheel, Double, Forward, Halt-Dress up. On the word company, the leaders of sub-divisions will change to the right flanks } the oa{)tain commanding bw mib- Jivision to wheel to the right at tlio double, as he choiiKes, and when it has wheeled the quarter circle, giving the word Forward: the sub-division having gained three paces, the captwn will halt and dress It from the right, the coywing Serjeant running out to mark the left of the company, facing towards the pivot flank with his ritto recovered and bu inner arm extended for the compwiy to dress upon, the supemumerarr soijerat giving a base point on the right of ttio company in like manner. When th« second sub-division arrivea at tne left of the first, its leader will fall to the rear and give the word, W* Sub-dtvmon Right Wheel, Double, and when square, Forward, then Halt-Dreu up, taking cara to halt his lub-division when ita front rank is in line with Uie rear rank of the right sub-division, so thi* the men nay dies* up uito line. 94 PART 11. — COMPANY. Eyet-Front. STEADY. The captain having dressed the whole company, will give the words Eyes-FroHt, and fall in; the coverer and supemu- meraiy seijeant will take post on the word STEADY from the instructor. A column of sub-divisions left in front will form company to the left in like manner. A column of sections will form company to the reverse flank on similar principles. When not required to form at right angles to the direction in which the column is marching, the leading section or sub-division will be ordered to change its direction till it is at right angles with the future abgnment, and then the orler will be given, right (or left) form company; the remaining sub-division or sections wall change direction, as they arrive at the spot where the leading sub-division or section changed direction, and then form in succession, as obready described. 8.17. A Company marching in Files or Fours, fonning to the Front, to either Flank, or to the Right or Left About, —Plate VIII., Fig. 1. These formations will be made as described in Part I., Sections 43 and 46, the word company being substituted for the woid Squad, in the command. "When forming to the front, the captain will move across the front, tmoiing towards his company during the formation, and take his place on the pivot flank when it is completed : the covering serieant passing by the rear. The lieutenant will also move to nis place during the formation. When forming to the reverse flank or to the right or left about, the covering seijeant will mark the outward flank of the company, facing towards the pivot flank with his rifle recovered uid his inner arm extended for the company to dress upon ; the supernumerary seijeant will give a base point at the inner flank in like mann^. The captain will So OH. -COMPANY. ptain having dressed the whole will give the words Eyes-Front, in; the coverer and supemu< erjeant will take post on the :ady Arom the instructor. s left in front will form company A column of sections \vill form k on similar principles, m at right angles to the direction arching, the leading section or to change its direction till it is Future abgnment, and then the IT (or lkft) form company; or sections will change direction, 'here the leading sub-division or wd then form in succession, as Iff in Filca or Fours, forming to mk, or to the Right or Left About. e made as described in Part I., )rd COMPANY being substituted 1 command. When foroaing to 1 move across the front, tiuiiing ng the formation, and take his en it is completed ; the covering '. The lieutenant will also move nation. ^erse flank or to the right or left t will mark the outward flank of ds the pivot flank with his rifle ra extended for the company to nerarjr Serjeant will give a base like manner. The captain wUl MISCBLLANBOUS M0VBM»NT8, 96 PLATE Vni. ■IIIIIIN -b -C H3 nDQQ DDDDDDD o n H h ^ I I I LJ 96 ?ABT II.— COMPANY. ^'viUmdaMa.^ UI8C9LLANfeOOS NOVSHBNT8. 97 dress hitmen file by Ale as thev come up; and when ths company is formed, will give the words Eyes-Front, and fill m in his place ; the coverer and supernumerary seijeant taking post on the word steady fi«m the instructor, llie nipemumerary rank will form with the company, correcting their distances from the rear rank, if necessary, when cleared by the rest of the company. fif. 18. The Diagonal March. As in Part I., Sections 29 and 42. In column, when a company inclines towards the pivot lank, the captain \vill lead ; when towwds the reverse flank, the senior supernumerary will move up and lead, unless the taptain is ordered to change his flank. S. 19. File Marching and Wheeling in File. As in Part I., Sections 30, 31, and 43. For the positions of the officers, see the next Section. If a company is halted or ordered to mark time when only part of the files have wheeled into the new direction, he remainder should be taught, if required, to cover off in 'ear by the side step, on the words. Rear files cover; if he word Front is to follow the word Halt, the rear files leed not be ordered to cover, but will move to their places in the word Dress. S. 20. T%e Fomuttion of Fours. In forming fours the men will move as explained in *art I., Section 44, and the supernumerary rank on the rord Fours, will step back one pace. Both in file marching tnd the flank march by fours, the captain will lead the ;ompany, placing himself next to the front-rank man of he Inaing file or fbur; the covering seijeant will place ^ limself at the liead of the iront rank, the lieutenant will >e on the reverse flank of the second fil? or four from the X m 4 ,y| T 9B PAST XI.— COMPANY. 8.i A com tooouniK COUN1 MARCIi RANI BiaHT LHFP-F nu, the other rapemranenriee wUl dmply fkce with the oomiiany, and ratain their pontioos. j . a i. When a company in close coltimn takes ground to a Bank hy fours, the leader wiU place himself in front of the front- rank man of the leading four. When the captain leads, the covering seijeant will be next to him in front of the second rank. When the lieutenant leads on the proper reyer« flank of the company, the covering seijeant wdl remam in his proper place in column. 8. 21. Company formed iu Fours doting on the Flank, ot OH the Centre, and re-forming Two Deep. A company having formed four deep ^ill be practis^ in dosing on the flanks and centre, and re-forming two deep, both at the halt and on march as described in r«rt 1- Section 46. The officers will close and open out with the company. S. 22. The Side or Clonng Stq>. A company will be practised in the side step, •• H »• exphuned in Part I., Section 33. When a compmy in liM ia ordered to close a given number of paces, the capton wiU lemain in his place and dose with the company j tat if na jciOK-w number of paces is named, the captain, on the cautiOB, wiu place himself three paces in front of the flank of hii bompany nearest to the centre of the hne, facing towarfi hu men ; should that flank be the left, he wUl cross by the Aont, and having given his word Halt, will return by the tear to his post. In column the captain will always rrouin on the flank of his company, and close with it, unleaa he hai previously taken up fresh covering, in which caae he wiu stand fast, and his company will close to hun. Befoje a company, driUing singly, is ordered to dose s» in line, no number of paces being nmed, » pomt wiU be placed to show where it is to be halted. Comp Hait-1 Dre com*' MAR BY FI tries will rimply hee wth the oritioDS. column takes ground to » Cank e himself in front of the hanif t. When the captain leads, the rt to him in front of the second it leads on the proper reverse ;overing seqeant will remain in MISCfiLLXNiedOS MOVJtlAENTS. 99 COUNTER- MARCH BY RANKS. { Fowrt donna ow ike Fkak, ot re-forming Two Deep. d four deep will be practised in sntre, and re-forming two deep, inarch as described in Part I., will close and open out with the RIOHT AND LBTT-FACK. de or Closing Step, ^ised in the side step, M it n 33. "When a company in lin« number of paces, the captain will M with the company ; bat if no iviOK-MARcH. -> the oaptun, on the caution, wll in front of the flank of hu ntre of the line, facing towardi k be the left, he will cross by the is word Halt, will return by the an the captain will always mnun ly, and close with it, unless he hai covering, in which case he will ly will dose to him. ing singly, is ordered to doi« ss «8 being named, s point will be to be halted. 8. 23, Counter-tnarching.—PhATS VIIl., Fig. 2, A company in column right or left in firont, will be taught to counter-march as follows : — 1. By Rania. — On the word ranks, the covering seijeant will step up, and cover bis captain. On the word face, whether right or left is in front, the front rank will face to the right, the rear rank to the left; the covering serjeant will face to the right i^ut, the captain will tal e one pace outwards and fiitce inwards, and then take one loag side pace in the di> rection in which the covering seijeant is facing; the lieutenant will move up and place himself one pace from the reverse flank of the front rank, facing _ inwards. On the word march, the whole will step off together, each rank wheeling dose round to its right, till the pivot man of bhe front rank comes to the covering _seqeant. {On the words Halt—Fhmt, Dreut from the captain, the company will halt, f^nt and dress, the covering seijeuit will drop back to his yUace, and the captain and lieutenant will faJl in, the former looking to his covering. r 2. By Filet. — On the word filbs, the •j covering seijeant wiU move as directed I in No. 1 Ok* this Section. H 2 Compauy- Halt'Front, Dn$$. COCNTBR' MARCH BY FILR8. m % 100 PART n.— COMPANY. PACK. LBFT (or kioht) OOUN- TSa-MARCH, OUICK-MARCH."< Halt-Front, Dress. r On the word pack, the comptnjr will TO THB RIGHT I f^^ ^g ordered, the captain, lieutenant, (or lrpt)- •{ ^nrt covering seiieant moving aa directed in No. 1 of this Section. On the word march, the company will step off, the leading file wheeling short round on the front-rank man, the re- mainder of the company following in file till it reaches the coverufig aeijeant when on the words Halt-Fnmt, Dress, from the captwn, it will halt, front, and ^88 in the new direction. In both counter-marches the file-! must be careful to move up to the Ueutenant as they wheel at the reverseflank, and to lengthen their pace during the wheel, m order not to check the rest of the company. „ * _ *«™.wi. In both cases, the supemnmcrary rank wiU face towards the reverse flank, and will counter-march round that flank, each man marking time successively as he arrives at hu place and halting and fronting with the company. A company in line may also be counter-marched by tUei When" a company is to counter-march by ffles, it wiM always be faced from the pivot flank, and wiU be marched When a company is to counter-march and continue iti itunrch it may move in fours. Imcrramng and Diminishing the Front op Columns S 24. A Company diminishing Front by forming Sm*- divisionsjrom the Hott.— Platr VIIL, Fig. 3. Caution,— AS a company in column bight (or L«piy IN FRONT. r If right is in front, on the command I FORM SUB-DIVISIONS fivm the instructor rORM-l DIVISI LEI SUD-OI^ BIGHT/ THR aOART PAC QUICK-] Halt- Dr If lei luanne The '/f(o Mrtet COMPANY. word FACB, the compMiywUl •derad, the cftptain, lieutenant, ing aerjeant moving as directed >f this Section. word MARCH, the company will the leading file wheeling short I the firont-rank man, the ro- of the company following in ; reaches the covering aeijeant, the words Halt-Frtmt, Drew, captwn, it will halt, front, and he new direction, the file-* must be careful to move r wheel at the reverse flank, and ing the wheel, in order not to ny. mmerary rank will face towards 3ounter-march round that flank, mccessively as he arrives at his ling with the company. also be counter-marched by flies I counter-march by files, it wiH pivot flank, and wiU be marched counter-march and continue its INCRKABINU AND OIMINI8B1NO FRONT. lOl BHiNO THE Front of Columns. inigking Front by forming 8tUh lalt.—VhKTK VIII., Fig. 3. < [Y IN COLUMN RIGHT (or LEFl/ N FRONT. ;ht is in firont, on the command UB-Di VIRIONS from the instructor. ^ the lieutenant will fall back to mark the I spot where the pivot flank of the left sub- mvision will rest. On the word face, from the instruo~ tor, the left sub-division will face as ordered, the captain will face to the right, the covering sefjeant will take a side pace of 21 inches to the left and face to hia right, and the rear-rank man of the left file of the right sub-division will fall back and cover the third file from the left of his sub-division, in order to leave room for the flank of the left sub-division to pass. On the words ouick-march, from the instructor, the left sub-division will march diagonally to the rear until its left file reaches the Ueutenant, who will give the word Halt— -Front, Dress, rsmuning steady on the left of his sub- division. . During this movement the captam ana covering Serjeant will move across to their places on the left of the leading sub- division, and the rear-rank man of the pivot file of that sub-division, as soon as the other sub-division has passed him, will resume hia place. If left is in front, suli-divisions will be formed m asiinilM manner, the right sub-division moving to the rear of the left. The captain may occehionwUy have to give the words, eft (or «Mht) Sub-division, Right (or W*) oo«>»f **"«■ ,arteri-Face, in which case he will first face mwards. ~W FORM «UB- DIVISIONS. LEFT 8UD-DIVI8ION, MOHT ABOUT THRBB- OOARTBRB- FACB. (2UICK-MARCH. Halt— Front, Dress. '% [=M 102 I'ABT II.— COMPANY. S. 26. A Company diminishing Front by formiuy Sub' divisions on tne March. Caution,— AB a company in column «ioht (or l«ft) IN rUGNT. If thp company is marching as a com- pany ^n rohiinn right -in ftont, on th? cauuonary command from the instructor, FOKM suB-DiviflioNB, the captaiD will give the words, Left Sub-diviston Mark- Time, and when the reveroc flank ot POBM— SUB- that sub-division is clear of the other, DIVISIONS. Right half -Turn, on v Vich it will make a half-turn to the right and move on Left Sub- at. once in the diagonal direction, with- division J out the word Forward. The left sub- Mark-Time. ] division badng moved completely behind Right Half- the right, the lieutenant will give th; Turn. words. Front-turn, and place himself on Front-Turn. Ms pivot flank. , During the movement, the captain and covering Serjeant will move across to their places on the left of the right sub-division, and the lieutenant will move across be- tween the sub-divisions, so as to meet the pivot flank of the left sub-division as it _ arrives in colimsn. If left is in front, sub-divisions will be formed in a similar manner, the right sub-division moving to the rear of the left 8. 26. Sub-divisions diminishing Front by forming Sections. The directions that apply to the formation of sub-din aions from a company, apply equally to the formation oi sections from sub-divisions ; if the company is halted the driU kut ■BCTIONI rACC, Ul nive the \ (otLrft) Siving tu eutenan the ensi) moving t moves wl will take 8. 27. i ponM DITI8I LEV BXCTI LCI HALF-I X -COSirANV. Aiiio Front by formiuy Sub' the March. IN COLVMN BIOHT (Of LSPT) rUONT. ompany is marchinit m a com- ■olurnn rifrht in ftnont, on thi command ftrom the instructor, a-DiviHioNs, the captain will rords. Left Sub-diviston Mark- when the reveroc flank of 1 vision is clear of the other, -Turn, on v >ich it will make :n to the right and move on n the diagonal direction, with- ivord Forward. The left sub- anng moved completely behind , the lieutenant will give th* •ont-tum, and place himself on lank. ; the movement, the captun and Serjeant will move across to theii the left of the right sub-division, lieutenant wili move across be- i sub-divisions, so as to meet the ik of the left sub-division as H . column. IN0RRA81NO AND OIMIMMHIMa rRONT. 103 •isions will be formed in a similti ion moving to the rear of the left. thing Front by forming Sections, y to the formation of sub-divi- )ply equally to the formation of 9 i if the company is halted the drill tiutrootoi will give the words, Lirr (or right) ■ BCTION8, RIGHT (or LRfT) ABOUT TIIRRR-aUARTRRa rACi, uuiCK-MAHCH ; bualf -face, he will first fare iftwardi. S. 28. Section* iucrearing Front b^ forming SulHiivitUMU n tht March I A company marching in quick tiim in open column of sections right ii front will receive from the instructor of the drill the cautionary word of com- mand, »OBK 8 'TB-DiviBioMS, on whick the captMn wil. turn inwards, give tht words, Ltft S^'ctions, Lrft Ha{f-Tnr%, Double, and theii move out^vards, (th( lieutCTumt indinii^g outwards at the same time). As soon as the right flanks of thi left sections are clear of the Icfi flanks of the right sections, the ct ■itain aad lieu- tenant will give the word"^ Front-Turn, and when they arc in line, yi«ic*, fallinn in on the pivot flanks of their respeotivi subdivisions ; the leaders of the seconc and fourth scetions will take their places in ttiesupemumcrary rspk on the caotion. Aeoli willfom FORM RUB- D1VI8ION8. L^ Section*, Lrft Htaf-Tum," Double. Front-Turn, Quick. 5.2! llied kions fr compan; A coi on the I tb) caul places I jcant wi mand f LRrr (c will mc halt hi outer fl the nei If tb section on the of the divisloi compai of his I S. 30. Fiks The ca front sojeM -COMVANY. Iff NiJMiit. Ai the flront nnki section! ecme up in line wHh •anki of the ripcht, the cspUin inant will (five the words, He given by the mstructor. If standing as in close or quurior-distance column, the caution would be Advance (or Rt^tire) by Fourt (or Fi7m) from the Bight (or L^l). If on the move. Break into Fours (or Files) from the Right (or Left), &c. A company marching in files or fount wiU form seotions, su1)-divi8ions, or company to the front, as explMned in Part I., Sections 43 and 45, the cantain moving acroaa the leading sub-division or section to nis place, and the leaden of the remaining sub-divisions or sections taking their places on the word forward. 8. 32. Forming Close Column qf Sections and Company Square.— Vlatk IX., Figs. 1 and 2. TSe foUowing direotions are intended more espeeialiy for nfle oorpa and troops acting aa light in£antrr» who itind ▲MB »4 -COMPANY. The instructor will five th« ^Bi, and the captain or lub- executive words. rtaiing Front by breaUnff into forming Sectiont, Sub-diviriont, n of sub-divisions or sections rem the right in files or fours, bv ACK (or I'OBM rOWHB-BIOHT), :h j if the column is left in front, e from the left in likn manner, be done when the colotnn is 9 then being to tub biuht (or ht)-whbbi.; or form koubb- rORM FOUR8-LBPT, KWHT- of coini>aniea, sub-divihions, or ft the foregoing words of com- he given by the instructor. If Lor-distance column, the caution re) by Fours (or Files) /torn the le move. Break into Fours (or ft), &c. lies or fours will form sections, to the front, as expUuned in the captain moving across the tion to nis place, and the leaders sions or sections taking their ID. SaUABBH. UABBS. itmn qf Sections and Company B IX.. Fifls. 1 and 2. are intended more espeoiaUjr for ng M light in&atrr. who sttnd PLATE IX. roRM COMi-ANr sgUARH. t"i(r. 1. f^arm Otvte CoIhuih <\f Stctinn*. Quich-Mareh. ^^An »■ B- aaaaa I'repare/or Cavalr/f- Kea ■ rig. ». VORM BILLTIKO SQUARES. Heady. if® -^B^ c 6 a 106 PART II.— COMPANY. .faf>f/') .— COMPANY. 80UARB8. 109 SQUABK. Form Close Column of- Sectiont. with ordered Mfms and unBxed bayonets or swords. The same instructions wiU, however, be found equally appli- cable to the formation of company BC[uare by men armed with the long rifle while standing with shouldered anns and fixed bayonets, if the directions relating to the fixing of bayonets ai* omitted. The instructor will give the caution— form company " On the word Sections firom the captain, the right section will face to the left, and disengage to the firont by the leading file closing two paces to the right, the front- rtmkman inclining rather back ; the third and fourth sections will face to the right and disengage to the rear, in the same manner. On the word March, the second sec- tion will fix bayonets or swords, the remaining sections will step off, advanc- ing arms or shouldering with the short rifle, and will form close column on the second section, halting, fronting, ordering arms, and fixing bayonets or swords ■i without word of command as they arrive in column: the distance between the sections will be one pace of 21 inches ; the captain will place himself on the left of the front rank of the leading section, covered by his covering seipeant; the re- maining section leaders will be in their proper places in column, and the suner- I nuraeraries will be on the reverse flank of I their respective sections, r The captain will next give the words I Prepare for Cavalry, and together with Quick- March. i4=i>i 110 PART 11. — COIfPANV. the other officers and non>ooxiiiniuioDed Prepare for J officers will move into the centre of the Cavalry. \ column ; the men will then face outwards, so as to show a front of equal strength in every direction, the men in the centre filling up any intervals that may occur. ' On the word Readi/, the men will move as described in Part III., Section 29, the f^nt rank only kneeling if the sides Ready, ^ of the square are two or three deep, the two front ranks kneeling if they are four deep. The men will me and load as directed in Part III., Section 9, No. 3. " After the kneeling ranks have fired and loaded, they wiU order by word of commard, from the capping position ; when they have not been required to fire they will come to the order from the kneeUitg position, the standing ranks in Order-'Arms, either case if armed with the long rifle or J coming to the order from the shoulder Bhonider-Amu. ) at the same time. If the sauare is about to be moved the command to shoulder will be given, instead of to order. As soon as the men have come to the order, or shoulder, they ^ni f^-ont into column, and the officers an*, non-commis- sioned officers will resume their posts on the flanks. Mt-TOSM r On this caution from the instructor, COMPANY. J the captain niH order the men to unfix l/tl/b BayoneU | bayonets or swords, and will then re< (or Swordi). I form the couipany m follows :— Qtnck'l If the into colli companj together S. 33. PO RALL ■au. -COMPANV. tfficen and non-comnuMioDed 11 move into the centre of the be men will then face outwards, low a front of equal strength irection, the men in the centre taj interralc) that may occur. ! word Ready, the men will iscribed in Part III., Section 29, rank only kneehng if the sides are are two or three deep, the ranks kneeling if they are four ;e men will &e and load aa I Part III., Section 9, No. 3. lie kneeling ranks have fired d, they wiU order by word of from the capping position ; r have not been required to fire come to thp order from the position, the standing ranks in e if armed with the long rifle ) the order from the shoulder le time. If the square is about ived the command to shoulder /en, instead of to order. 1 as the men have come to the shoulder, they '-='1 fi-ont into nd the oflBcers an^. non-commis- icers will resume their posts on I. 8 caution from the instructor, in r/ill order the men to unfix or Bwordi, and will then re« CODipaity M follows :— 8CIUARBS. Ill Re-form- Compmj/. {On the word Company, the leadijK section will face to the right, the third and fourth to the left. On the word March, the sections that have faced will move out, advancing armSf or shouldering with the short rifle, the right section will turn to the rear when clear of the second section, and will Qwci-iMarcA. «| halt, front, and dress upon it; the third rnd fourth sections will turn to the front ia succession, when clear, and dress up into line with the second section, all without word of conunand, each section ordering arms as it halts and fronts. If the men count the number of paces that take them into column, by taking the same number when re-forming company, they will be able to turn to the front and rear together. S. 3X POBM RALLYING aOUARE. Forming Rallying Squares. Plate IX., Fig. 3. The instructor ha^-ing caused the com- pany to disperse to a certain distance, will give the word form rallying sauARB, at the same time placing an officer as a rallyinff point, who will hold up his sword and face the supposed enemy; the men will hasten to the person so posted, fixing swords or bayonets and ordering arms as they reach him. The two first who join him will form on his right and left, facing outwards. The three next will pUce themselves in front of those posted, facing to the front, and three others in rear, facing to the rear, thus W'S3 i'Sl 112 PART 11. — COHVANY. forming a square. The inatructor will cause the next four men to take post at the several angles, and three other inen to (_ Rome up betn'cen them on eveiy focfl. A square thus composed of twenty-four men (besides the ra11yin(^ point), and formed two deep, may be augmented to a square three deep, by four more men taking post at the angles, and five others coming up between them on every side to complete the faces as before; the square wll then consist of forty-eight men. It may again be augmented in the same manner to a square four deep, by the angles being occupied by four more men, and tne faces filled up Bii before by seen more men between them on every side ; and the square will then Iw composed of eighty men; the square may be thus increased to any number. A company may be formed into several rallying sqnares on difiPerent points. Caution, — the sovarb will advance (retire, or MOVE TO THE RIGHT Or LEFT). When the squwre is required to maich, the instructor will first give the above caution, whicL will be repeated by the ol&cer on vhom the rquare is formed; l^e Square the latter will then give the executive witt Advance words, (Skoulder-Arriu if the men are (Retire, or armed with the long rifle,) InwanU-Faee, Move to the < on which the sqnan will face in the Itipht at Left), direction named, and the leading ftuse will Imoarda-Face, be ordered by its commander to dress, Quick-March. that it may move with greater regularity. On the word ilforc/i, the square will step off and mareh by the left of the leading fkce if advancing or moving to the right, by the . right if retiring or moving to the left. f Hfe aav WILL H/ Halt, Pj-epare ^avairy-R Order At RE-FOl COM pa Unfix 8u (or Bayot Re-for Compai In this in attack mure squ persed; Every ma After proved w l^oops commenc tommenc Markt tchellou) By Su rime. 1 -COMVANY. square. The initructor will next four men to take post at angles, and three other inen to Btw'cen them on every face, f twenty-four men (besides the two deep, may be augmented ir more men taking post at tiie ig up between them on every 8 before ; the square will then [t may again be augmented in four deep, by the angles being 1, and the faces filled up as between them on every side ; te composed of eighty men; tsed to any number. i into several rallying sqnares rihh ADVANCB (rKTIRB, Of RIGHT or left). le squMre is required to march, stot will first give the above hicL will be repeated by the vhom the pquare is formed; will then give the executive \oulder-Arms if the men are I the long rifle,) Inwanh-Faet, the square will face in the uned, and the leading hee will by its commander to dresi, ' move with greater regularity, d Mwreh, the souare will step Off by the left of tne leading ikce if or moving to the right, by the ring or moving to the left. THfc sauARR WILL HALT. Halt. Pj-eparefor ^tnatry-Ready. Order Arm*. RE-FORM COMPANY. Unfix Swords (or Bayonets). Re-form- Company. PROVmO AND DIBMISBtNO. il.3 Preparing for Cavalry, — On this cau- tion from the insttactor, the captain will give the word Halt, on which the square will halt and face outwards. The men will then proceed as directed in Section 32 of this Part. On this caution ii'om the instructor, the officer or officers on whom the square or squares are formed will order the men to unfix bayonets (or swords), and the covering seijeant will mark the spot on which the pivot flank of the company _ is to rest, facing the supposed enemy. On this command from the captain, the men will form company upon the covering seijeant. In this manner dispersed parties may be formed, to resist in attack of cavalry in an open country, either in one or more squares, according as tney may be more or less dis- persed ; each square consisting of any number of men. Every man will nin to the nearest rallying point. Proving and Dismissing. S, 34. Proving a Company. After a company has been told off on parade, it will be proved with unnxed bayonets, or swords, as follows : — IVoops armed with the long rifle will shoulder before thev commence proving, those armed with the short rifle will tomraence proving from the order. Mark /tf.<>-Qatc>-, By Sub-divisions right-Wheel (when in whellou), Mar* Time. Re-form-CompaHy. By Sidt-divirions left-Wheel (when in echellon), M^rk- Time, lle-formr-Company. jm 114 PABT II. — COMPANY, By StctioHB right-Whetl (when in «chellon), Mark-Timt ^i;^^S"hfi'^heen^hen in echellon). Mark-Time ^/SJ!?"«&Zn.--The company having been turned to thfrightabout. will be wheeled i^ar rank >" ft^n^by .uh- divisions and sections to the right and to the left, by the above words of command without alteration. Halt-Front. Form Fcurs-Deep, Front. Form Fourt-Right, Front. Ihrm Fourg-Left, Front. Form Fouri-About, Front. The company will also be proved, rear i-ank »" front, forming fours deep and fours to the right and left on the march, as follows : — Mark Time— Quick. Right- About— Turn. Form Fours-Deep. Form Two-Deep. Form Fours-Right. Rear-Turn. Form Fours-Left. Rear-Turn. Halt-Front. _ On the leading Company form Square, Quick-March, bee hVT-oXard.. Re-form Column, Qmck-Mareh, Halt- D^est, oT Wording to the position it is to take in column ^ZtsJcti^Tj^stand third. Order-Arms. Left «- applv only to troops armed with thelong rine. ^^plm cW col^n qf Sections, Q*'''*-^?'-^*^,^,^- Bayonets or Swords. Re-f or, n-Cmpany, Quick-March. Right i Stcnd at- Acomp as describ In turn observed. —COMPANY, when in echellon), Mark^Timt vhen in echellon), Mark-Time jompany having been turned to M, rear rank in front, by sub. le right and to the left, by the ithout alteration. PROVING AND 01UII»SU>tO. 115 Right Sub-division, Stand at-Eaae. Stcnd at-Eaae. Left Sub-diviaioH S. 35. Diamiaainff a Company. A company, either with or without arms, will be dismissed as described in Part I., Section 48. In turning in a guard or piquet the same mode is to be observed. le proved, rear rank in front, in irs to the right and left on th(" 'orm Square, Qmck-March. Sec n Column, Quick-Mareh, Halt- position it is to take in column i third, Order-Arms. Left Sec Order-Arms: these command i with the long rifle. Sec/ion*, Qhiidk-Mareh. Unfix 'orm-Campany, (ht^ck-March. mam l2 PART III. RIFLE EXERCISES. . General Directions. AT/,™,. „f Parts ofthe Ri/fc.— Recruits, before they com xneS 'o {I [heCual-rnd Platoon -e^ises must b. teuKht the names of the different parts of the nfle, as shown in Plate X. Formation of Souad.-Soldiers will be formed in squads of • f^nTto learn the Manual and Platoon exercises, afte ^^hfch they X-1^- in t^ ranks what they have learned in one rank, as directed in Part I.. Section 40. III. , . . t i.„«^ niAr ^The instructor should always betSd w thrrifl?&n'aU^^^^ in ord.r that he may be K Pra^^ally, to show the recruit the required pos. Inons and movements. IV. The mne to be used with care. -The rifle must be cai-efully causing the rifle to miss fire, the cap in its place. lava Bn "^' ry ' V '^ ft' c- w !- n i * ' W . SUilt. /. Nipple. a- Ilrrcch, nn. Stock. rt'. Xoie cap. »'. Upp^r band. r'. Middle band. d'. Lower band. #'. ProjeelloB. fr'.Small. r. Butl.-iS'. Heel. (»'. '.uc. cc. Loek. a a Cork. tb Coiub or cock. V. Trigger. v.. Trlusrer-gnard ( . juard. r. Snai rap. GO. Sllut. II. Stopper. KK Ramrod. a. Head or JaET. b. Point. LI. . Bayonet. a. Blade. b. Bend. c. Socket d. Locking ring. U. Srabbard. Barrel. Muaali). Pore tight. Caleb. Back >e. Flap. ■I|llit.i/. Slide. Nipple Breech. Sloek. Hone cap. I'pper baud. Lowe. l-nd. Projection. (y.Small. i Butt.{rMleel. '. Toe. Lock. Cock. Comb of cock. Trigger. Tilggi'r.gnard or guard. Snap eap. Sling. Stoppi-r. , Ramrod. Head or Jif . Point. SKrord. Blade. Hilt. Guard and ring. Spring. Scabbard, The ilde of the rifle on which the lock is placed li called the lock »We. 118 PART III.— HIFLB ■XBBCHIEB. M/ P^mi^msemss ii!AmMmmamiihUim,Mmi-^. i^.j^-^-u.J.^-i' " >" The& Parti., hand, w two joii from th slightly I'uii thifi, shoulde front of Whei Should( on para Securt THB VBK8ENT. TUB TOHT. THE CHAROB. TE XI. MANtAb KXKBCItie rO« THR LONO BlVUJt, Manual Exbrcisbr. 121 KCUKH. TUB OIlDEn. B rOHT. TUB CHAROB. a, 1. Manual Exercise with the Lmy Rijlf, in Single Rank. 1. By Numl)er$. The Shoulder.— The recruit will first fall in m directed in Part I.. Section 24 ; the rifle will then be placed in his loft hand, which will grasj) the inside of the butt with the first two joints of the fingers, the forefinger being half an inch from the heel, the thumb in front of the heel, the wnst slightly turned out, and the .fingers resting lightlv against ilia thigh. The rifle will rest against the hollow of the left shoulder, the fore part of the buti nearly even with the front of the thigh. , , ^^ .. -ru When the rifle has been properly placed M the Shoulder," the recruit will be instructed always to fall in on parade or for drill wi' it in that position. II. r The Secure.— Tarn the lock to the I front, and seize the rifle with the right hand under the guard, without moving it from the shoulder; thumb and fingers round the stock, arm close to the body. Without movinfi; the rifle from the shoulder, turn it, with the right hand, so as to bring the sling to the front, and the cock close to the body, at the same time seize it with the left h^nd, little finger OS high as the shoulder, the left arm to be close to- the rifle. With the fingers of the right hand, give the butt a cant under the left arm. Secure-Arvu. Two. Three. \ I 122 PART III.— BUTLE EXBKCISBS. then drop the right hand to the side ; the cock to be close up under the armpit, the barrel slanting downwards, and in- clining to the right front ; the nfle to be fo^y grasped with the left hand, which is to be in front of, but rather lower than, the hip, left elbow a little to the rear. When standing at ease with arms at "The Secure." the lay hold of the right arm close above the wrist. III. r The Shoulder from the Secure.— Raise the rifle to a perpendicular position with the left hand, bringing the sling to the front, and seize it with the nght hand under the guard, the left arm to be close to the rifle, the right arm close to the °\^ithout moving the rifle from the shoulder, turn it, with the right hand, so as to bring the lock plate to the front ; and, dropping tl»ll«fti»°^^«nf m^^?? as directed in "The Shoulder" (No. I.), but with the knuckles turned to the front. Bring the right hand to the side, and turn the rifle with the left hand without moving it from the shoulder, so as to ^ bring the barrtl to the front. IV. n^j-r ArmM r The Orrfer.— Seise the rifle with the Order-Ami. | ^^^'^^ ^^^^ ^^^^^ the lower band. Shoulder- Arms. Two. Thrte. M EXERCISER. he right hand to the side; tie close up under the armpit, lanting downwards, and in- le right front ; the rifle to be ,ed with the left hand, which ■ont of, but rather lower than, elbow a little to the rear. 1 arms at " The Secure," the le above the lower band, the eft arm, and the left hand to above the wrist. I. ilder from the Secure.— Raise a perpendicular position with nd, bringing the sling to the seize it with the right hand inaxA, the left arm to be close , the right arm close to the moving the rifle from the urn it, with the right hand, so r the lock plate to the front; ma the left hand, seize the butt in "The Shoulder" (No. I.), le knuckles turned to the front, he right hand to the side, and fle with the left hand without from the shoulder, so as to barrfcl to the front. [V. ■der.-^ne the rifle with the d close above the lower band, MANUAL EXERCISE FOR THH LONG RIPLB. 123 keeping the elbow as close to the body as ^^Bring the rifle down to the right side, allowing the little finger to slip behind the barrel as it descends, and place the butt quietly on the ground ; the toe ot the butt to be in a line with the toe of the riffht foot. , „ .1. i. Place the right hand flat on the out- side of the stock, thumb on the sling, and press the rifle to the hollow of the shoulder. V RjFtno Bayonets.— On the word Fix, by a sharp turn of the wrist bring the thumb of the right hand round the rear of the barrel, and grasp the nfle, thumb between the stock and the thigh ; at the same time seize the socket of the bayonet with the left hand, knuckles to the front, thumb to the rew-, fingers pointing to the ground, and elbow to tHe rear. , ., On the word Bayonets, push tfce muzzle of the rifle a little forward ; at the same time draw the bayonet; and as soon as the point clears the scabbard turn it up, keeping the elbow down and the upper part of the arm close to the bodv. Place the socket of the bayonet on the muzzle (the flat part of the blade to the front), and when it fUls on the block of the foresight, turn it with the thumb firom left to right. 134 Shoulder- Arms. Two. Present-Arms. Two. Tkree. PART III. — BIFLE EXRRCIBKg. and press it home ; then, wth the thumb, tum the locking ring in the same direction under the block of the foresight. Lastly, drop the left hand to the side, and bring the rifle to "The Order." VL The Shoulder from the Order.— On the word Shoulder, grasp the rifle as in the first motion of "Fixing Bayonets" (No. v.). , .^ On the word Arms, give the rifle a smart jerk upwards with the right hand, and seize it below the lower band, keep- ing_the barrel close to the shoulder. Bring the rifle with the right hand to the left side, and seize it with the left hand as described in "The Shoulder" (No. I.), droppmg the right hand at once to the side. VII. ' The Present.— Seize the rifle, as in the first motion of "The Secure" (No. II.). Raise the rifle with the right hand perpendicularly in front of the centre of the body, and place the left hand smartly on the sling, the fingers pointing up- wards, the thumb close to the forefinger (its point in a line with the mouth), the wrist on the trigger guard, the left elbow close to the butt, «ie right elbow and butt close to the body. Bring the rifle down close in front of the centre of the body, sling to the front, ,B BXRRCI8K8. home 5 then, wth the thumb, ling ring in the same direction ock of the foresight. Lastly, t hand to the side, and bring •The Order." I. Iderfrom the Older. — On the ier, grasp the rifle as in the n of "Fixing Bayonets" word Arms, give the rifle a upwards with the right hand, below the lower band, keep- rel close to the shoulder. B rifle with the right hand to le, and seize it with the left •scribed in "The Shoulder" oppmg the right hand at once MANUAL BXERC18K FOR THB LONG RIFLB. 125 11. ,enf._Seize the rifle, as in the »of«The Secure" (No. II.). 16 rifle with the right hand larly in front of the centre of nd place the left hand smartly »g, the fingers pointing up- thumb close to the forefinger n a line with the mouth), the e trigger guard, the left elbow ' le butt, «ie right elbow and to the body. he rifle down close in front of of the body, sling to the front. MANUAL KXRBC18B FOB THB LONG BIPLK. 127 as low as the right hand wiU admit without constnunt, and grasp it with the left hand, the Uttle finger touching the projection above the lock plate, thumb between stock and ba 1 ; the right hand lightly holding the small of the butt, fingers slanting downwards ; at the same time place the hollow of the nght foot against the left heel, both knees straight. , 'ITie weight of the rifle to be supported |_by the left hand. VIII. The Shoulder frtm the Present.— hy a turn of the right wrist, bring the rifle to the left side, and seiae it with the left hand as directed in "The Shoulder (No. I.) 5 fingers of the right hand re- maining under the cock (first two joints round the stock), thumb between the stock and barrel, arm close to the body ; at the same time bring the nghi foot to its origin:! position. Drop the right hand to the side. IX. ■ The Por^— Seise the small of the butt with the right hwid, arm close to the body. , . _5^ Bring the rifle to a slanting ponfcon in front of the body, lock to the front, the barrel crossing opposite the point of 128 PART III. — RIKLE BXKRCI8B8. J the left shoulder; and meet it at the same time with the left hand immen>^the S^oue " and "The Order Arms," bs follows : -On the word Order- Arms, Ht^^V the left arm to the full "'f V»," a perpendicular position, ami I seize it with the left liaiid close ahoye the -< lower hand, at the same time raisinj? it I slif^htlv and seixinj^ it with the riffht hand, as in "The Advance" (No. All.). 7\co. L i^'"!' *''® ^*^* ''^"'^ **• ***° "''*''' XXVI. 'rrail-Amiii. The Trail from the yl (/ranee.— Seize the rirte with the left hand. Uttle flnfjer in line with the ri^ht elbow, arm close U , the body. , , . ^u Tvio. -i Raise the right hand, and seize the ' rifle helow the lower band ; then bring it to the iwsitiop described in " The Trail " (No. v.). at i.ie same time dropping the left arm to the side. XXVII. Order— Aims, f The Order from the 7Vot7.— Bring the I rifle to a perpendicular position at the <{ rijzht side, lower it gently to the ^und, 1 and come to the position described in t "The Order" (No. IV.). Arms must never be trailed wth fixed bayonets, except by the front rank before charging. Great care must bo taken to preserve the squareness ot the body and to avoid nusing or sinking either shoulder m the foregoing exercises. t,H BXIRCIHKH. le riflo down with the rijjlit s position deicribed in " Tiic ). XXI.). \\\ wnae from the 7Voi/.— Brinn ) a perpendieulttr position, ond li the left liand close aliove the rl, at the same time raising it nd seiiint^ it with the riffht I "The Advance" (No. XIl.). le left hand to the side. XVI. til from the Advance. — Seize the the left hand, Uttle finger in the right elbow, arm close trd of command, as the right >pped to the side. il from the Slope, or Shoulder. if at the slope, dropped the MOTIONS OF THE LONG RIFLE ON THl MARCH. 13? left arm to the full extent, seize the rifle with the right hand m in the first motion of "The Trail from the Shoulder " (No. XXIV.), then bring it ^ down to the trail as on the halt. Change- ( Changing Arms at the Trail. — On the word Change, raise the rifle to a perpen- . dicular position at the right side. Arms. C On the word Arms, cany the rifle with the right hand to the left side, pass it into the left hand and lower it to the trail, at the same time dropping the right ^hand to the side. Change-Arms. J Change the rifle back to the right side \ in a similar manner. Squad-Halt. J Halt and come at once to " The 1 Order." The Short Trail. — When men standing with ordered arms are directed to form fours, to close to the right or left, to step back, oi to take any named number of paces to the front, they will merely grasp the rifle with the right hand and raise it from the ground, keeping the barrel close to the shoulder ; this position is called The Short Trail. Shoulder-Arms. — As already described. When soldiers standing with shouldered arms receive the command, Quick (or Double)-March, or Mark Time-Quick (or Double), they will slope arms as they take the first step, except in the side step, and in stem)ing back. On the words Slow-March, they will step otl^ remaining at " The Shoulder." When soldiers marching in slow time with shouldered arms are ordered to break into quick time, they will slope arms as they take the first pace in that time. When soldiers marching in quick time with sloped arms are ordered to take up the slow time they will remain at the slope. \m PART 111.— HIFLE EXBRCI8E9. Quick-March, or Mark Time Quirk. fix-Bay the body Pix-Swords. Brimfthe rifle down in the left hand nearly to the «rorxnA'iT''^J^' ^Z and rifle close to the body ; then seize 't wi?h the right hand between he bands, and place the butt quietly on th ^iin,! droonintf the left hand at the E time tWe side. The right arm to be Sitly bent, the thumb pressed Igainst tie Lgh fingers slantmg to- wards the ground; toe of the butt in C with thi toe of the right foot. r Fixing Sworefo.-Placc the nfle with the riglit hand between the knees, MAM Shoulde Arms. Port-Ar m B EXBR0IHR8. {ht foot to its original posi- left hand to the side. [. irt— Bring the butt across, is in front of the centre of kck of the hand to the front, istin.? on the right arm ; and t hand on the right. 'der from the Support.— Qnm " The Shoulder,'' and at the drop the left hand to the 'III. er —Seize the rifle with tl e little finger in Une wth tho ,e right shoulder ; arm close t.' le rifle down in the left hand the ground, keeping the arm close to the body; then sewe he right hand between the 1 place the butt quietly on the iropping the left hand at the B to the side. The right arm rhtly bent, the thumb pressed be thigh, fingers slanting to- B ground; toe of the butt in the toe of the right foot. Sworefo.-Place the nfle with t hand between the knees, MANUA1« aXBRCIHie FOR TUB WHOUT UIPLK. No Shoulder- Amu. Tko. Port-Amu. Two. guard to the front, and seize the scab- bard with the left hand, turning the handle of the sword towards the right front; then seize the handle with the right hand, knuckles downwards, and draw the sword to the ftont; turn the point upwards when it is well clear of the body, and seize the rifle with the left hand at the nose cap. Place the back part of the handle against the lock side of barrel, knuckles to the right, arm close to the body, and sUde the spring on to the catch, and the ring on to the muzzle ; lastly, seize the rifle with the right hand between the bands, drop the left hand to the side, and return to "The Order" (No. VIII.). X. The Shoulder from the Order. — Give the rifle a jerk upwards with the right hand, catch it with the left hand in line with the elbow, and at the same time seize it with the right hand, as directed in " The Shoulder " (No. I.). Drop the left hand to the side. XI. The Port. — Seize the rifle as in the first motion of " The Secure " (No. II.). Bring the rifle to a slanting position in front of the body, lock to the front, the barrel crossing opposite the point of the left shoulder, seize it at the same time with the thumb and fingers of the right I* prTilMftlilWIiiiM 1146 PART III. — RIPI.E IXailOIIIS. hknd round th«> tinall of the butt, the thumb and finffers of the left bftiid remaining round the piece ; left wrist to be opposite the left breast, both elbowi close to the body. XII. As a Front C The Charge.— Turnine on the heels, Rank, point the right foot to the right, the Charge- left full to the front, and bring down Sworda. the rifle to nearly a horizontal position at the right side, with the muzzle in^ dining a little upwards ; the right wrist to rest against the hollow of the thigh below the hip, the right hand to grasp the small of the butt, the thumb and fingers of the left hand to be round the piece. As a Rear Rank, Ckargs-StDords, . Shoutder- Arms, Two. Shoulder- Arms. Remain steady at " The Port." XIII. The Shoulder from the Charge as Front Jl««i.— Raise the rifle to a per- pendicular position at the right side, and seize it witn the right hand as directed in "The Shoulder" (No. I.) } at the same time face to the front, the left hand remaining as described in "The Shoulder from the Secure " (No. III.). Drop the left hand to the side. ■ The Shoulder from tht Port as a Rear Rank. — Brin^ the rifle with the lefl hand to the right side, seize it with th right hand, aa directed in " The Shoul der " (No. I.), the left hand remaining ai FI.K IXHOIIIB. nd th«> nnall of the butt, the id finffers of the left hand round the piece ; left wrist jsite the left breast, both elbowt le body. ill. targe. — Turning on the heels, right foot to the right, the ;o the front, and bring down ;o nearly a horizontal position ght side, with the muzzle in< little upwards ; the right wrist ;ainst the hollow of the thigh hip, the right hand to grasp the the butt, the thumb and fingers ; hand to be round the piece. steady at "The Port." [III. 'toulder from the Charge as n mk. — Raise the rifle to a pei- I position at the right side, and ith the right hand as directed Shoulder" (No. I.) j at the same ) to the front, the left hand If as described in "The Shouldei Secure " (No. III.). he left hand to the side. louldet' from tht Port as a Rem Wn>^ the rifle with the lefl the right side, seize it with th( id, aa directed in " The Shoul >. I.), the left hand remaining ai MA.VUAL EXEBOiai FOB THB SHORT RtFtE. 14? E XIV. MANl'Ab BXKHCIII FOR TH« IMOHT Mtt*. 149 described in "The Shoulder from the Secure " (No. III.). ^ ., Drop the left hand to the Mde. Two. Two. TUK TBAIL. ORDEB. STJUfD AT EABB. XIV. r The Slope.— Sehe the rifle as »n *he firet motion of " 'ITie Secure » (No. II ). Bring the rifle on to the left ehoulder, and eeixe it with the left hand, the tint two joints of the fingers grasping the inside of the butt, the forefinger half-an- inch from the heel, the thumb «" front of the heel, the muwle slanting to the rear, and the guard pressed gent v against the hollow of the slioulder. 1 he upper part of the left arm to be close to the Bide, the lower part of the arm to be horizontal, the toe of the butt opposite the centre of the left thigh; the right hand holding the small of the butt, thumb and fingers round the stock, arm close in to the body. Drop the right hand to the side. XV. The Shoulder from the Slope.— Sd it the small of the butt with the right hard, <* gers and thumb round the stock, arm close in to the body. . , ^ .. i IVio. Bring the rifle to the nght side, and seize it as directed in " The Shoulder " (No. I.) ; the left hand to seize the nfle close above the lower band to steady it I to the shoulder. Drop the left hand to the side. TAr«e. Shoulder- Armi. 16U PART III. — RIFLE BXCRCIBES. Order^Arms. Two. } XVI. Aa detailed in No. VIII. XVII. Unfix- r Unfixing Swords.— Bting the rifle Swords. with the nght hand between the knees, guard to the front. Place the left hand on the guard of the sword, knuckles to the Aront, and seize the handle with the ri(i)ht hand, knuckles to the front, fingers pointing downwards, forefinger on the spring, lighten the knees on the rifle, press the spring, and gentlj raise the sword upwards; when clear of the muzzle drop the point, with the edge to the front, towards the scabhard, raising the right elbow as it falls ; at the same time seize the scabbard with the left hand and guide the sword into it. Lastly, seize the rifle with the right hand, and come to " The Order," taking the time from the right. The foregoing motions, tonly, will be performed in the " Review Exercise." XVIII. Traii-Artns. f The Trail. — Give the rifle a jerk up- wards with the right hand, seize it close behind the back sight, and bring it to a horizontal position at the full extent of the arm, fingers uid thumb round the ^^piece. LE BXEKCIBBS. VI, ed in No. VIII. ^11. Swords. — Bring the rifle ight hand between the knees, le front. Place the left hand trd of the sword, knuckles to and seize the handle with the id, knuckles to the front, inting downwards, forefinger ring, lighten the knees on press the spring, and gently sword upwards; when cleoi zzle drop the point, with the e front, towards the scabbard, B right elbow as it falls ; at the seize the scabbard with the and guide the sword into it. ize the rifle with the right come to " The Order," taking :om the right. nly, will be performed in the mi. lil. — Give the rifle a jerk up- 1 the right hand, seize it close i back sight, and bring it to a position at the full extent I, fingers and thumb round the MANUAI« KXBRQI8C »0» THB SHORT BIPLK. 151 XIX. Sktmlder- C The Shoulder from the Trail— Brmg Arms, the rifle to a perpendicular position, and seize it with the left hand close above the lower band, at the same time raising it slightly, and seizing it as directed in "The Shoulder" (No. L). Two, L Drop the left hand to the side. XX. Trail-Arms, f The Trail from the Shoulder.— Seize the rifle with the left hand, httle finger in line with the right elbow, arm close to the body. . ,^ . a TuoA Seize the rifle with the right hand below the lower band, then bring it down to "The Trail," at the same tune dropping the left hand to the side. XXI. Order-Arms. C The Order from the IVatJ.-Bring the J rifle to a perpendicular position at the S right side, lower it gently to the ground, I and come to " Th? Order." Anns must never be trailed with fixed swords, except by the firont rank before charging. XXII. Skoutder-Arms.^ As detailed in No. X. XXIII. Slino-Armt, C The Sling.— Seize the rifle as in the amg /iiw. | ^^^ ^^^J^f .. ^he Secure " (No. II.). 162 PART III. — r.in.R bxsrcisbb. Tivo. Bring the rifle across the body, turn- ing the barrel to the front, so that the Shng may pass over the left shoulder; ^ then seize the sling with the right hand Three. close over the left shoulder. Bring the rifle down under the left arm, left hand close to the upper band, and resting against the thigh, forefinger slanting downwards, between the stock and barrel; at the same time drop the right hand to the side. XXIV. Shoulder- [ The Shoulder from the Sling.— Baiae Arms. the muzzle and bring the rifle to the W right side with the left hand, seizmg it I with the right hand at " The Shoulder." Two. L ^'^'P **** ^®^* ^*"*^ *° *'*° ^*^®' XXV. Order-Arms. As detailed in No. ^111. Great care must be taken to presej ! the squareness of the body and to avoid raising or sir iig the shoulder in the foregoing exercises. XXVI. Ground Arms.— 'Vum the rifle on the heel, lock to the rear, sink the body, bending both knees ; and place the rifle flat on the ground, the lock up, muzzle inclining to the right front, cock in line with the heels ; rise at once, and return to the position of attention. Ground-Arms. L.R EX8RCI8B8. ! rifle across the body, tum- rel to the front, so that the )as8 over the left shoulder ; he sling with the right hand ;he left shoulder. Bring the mder the left arm, left hand ipper band, and resting against brefinger slanting downwards, e stock and barrel; at the drop the right hand to the IV. \lder from the Sling. — Raise and bring the rifle to the rith the left hand, seizing it ht hand at " The Shoulder." left hand to the side. [V. 5d in No. VIII. to preseT ) the squareness of g or sir iig the shoulder in irms. — Turn the rifle on the to the rear, sink the body, )th knees ; and place the rifle ground, the lock up, muBzle the right front, cock in line eels ; rise at once, and return tion of attention. MOTIONS OF THE SHORT RIFLH ON THK MARCH XXVII. 163 r Take.up-Arm. f Sink the bodv as in grounding arms, \ take up the nfle, and come to Ihe l Order." XXVIII. Stand r Push the muzzle of the rifle to the at-Ett$e. front with the right hand, arm close to the side; at the same time car^ back the right foot as described in Part 1., Section 2. 2. Judging the Time. As described in No. 2 of the preceding Section. 3 MoHottS of the Rijle performed on the March. PfThc recruit will learn to perform the f«ll°'^^g "°X"s? "f the rifle while marching; they may be taught at first while he is marking time; each motion to be Hone on the kft foot. asMescribe^d in No. 3 of the precedmg Section. When sddiers armed with the short nfle stand'^gT^* shouldered arms and unfixed swords receive the command Sk ^double, march, they will trail as they take the ff'sten eMept in the side step, in stepr>mg back, and wh nt¥es, ? either of which ^s they will remain at The "boulder'. When soldiers marching U| l"*/ °;„*°^» flank in fours with trailed arms turn into file, or torm two 3"p, iSey will come to the shoulder as they tuxn or form • when they turn from file into line, or form fours, they win S when Tey halt and front from file they wiU ord^. *^hen soldS standing with B^ouldered arms a d fi j :> V Photographic Sciences Corporation 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N.Y, US80 (716)872-4503 ■" S^V-, <>^lrf«. "^ CIHM/ICMH Microfiche Series. CIHIVI/ICMH Collection de microfiches. \ Canadian Institute for Historicai IVIicroreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiques PLATOON BX»RCI««. 16S arm olow in to tha body, tear off the end of it with care, w bs not to lose any of the powders toy motion which may be necessary should be from the wrist only. , Briniz the cartridge to tlic muzzle of the rifle, and pour the powder into the barrel, inclining the pdm of the hand to the ttoxit, and bringing the right elbow square with the v/rist in so doing. Reverse the cartridge by dropping the hand over the mu«zle, bringing the fingers round the barrel, end the knuckles to the front, and put the bullet nearly its whole Wth int^ the barrel, holding the paper < ffij the point of the buUet between I fbrfor<,flnK« and thumb. stiU keeping tb rig'^i<; elbow square with the wnst. Bv a turn of the wrist flrom left to right, pressing the little^A"?" •B"?"^ the baiiel, and dropping the right elbow to the side, tear off the paper which is held between the forefinger and thumb ; — when ihis motion is completed, the Uttle finger must rest against the side of the barrel, the knuckles incbned toJrards the ground. , , ^ Seise the head of the ramrod between I the second joint of the (onAnget and thumb, knuckles towards th« bqdy. r Force the ramrod up, and seae it in the middle Inrtw"" *« ^ ,*7vr|!;! and thumb of. the i«M hand, the fere- fin*er to be in » lin* ^h the muaile of S^ilfle, th« knueWes towards the body. :-p?fiv;;j. ryu ■ Two. 164 PART m.— BlI'l'B BXEBCIHB8. the remairing fingers closed injj*' l'""^' the "Ib^.w square with the wnstj tne thumb of left hand to point to the ""dtow the ramrod entirely out by straightening the arm, turn it, dropping . JheTead to the front, so that the point ^ will pass close by the side of the left ^, and Jlace it on the ton of the buUet ; the ramrod to be perpendicular and held ir the middle between the first two fingers and thumb, the remaimng fingers closed in the palm of the hand, the knuckles full to the front, the arm to be kept as close to the ramrod as possible without constraint, and without altering the squareness of the shoulders, r Force the buUet straight do\vn the barrel until the second finger touches the muzzle of the riOe, at the same time bringing the elbow down close to the body. Mid inclining the knuckles to the Two. "^Move the right hand smartly to the point of the ramrod and seize it again there, as in the second motion « ^wa. Fowe the bullet steadily straight down to the bottom, at the same time bringing the elbow down close in to the body, and inclininir the knuckles to the ngUt. By two steady and firm pressures (raising the ramrod about '«»e »nch on Uch (J^casion) ascertain that the buUet is resting on the powder; »JJ^«««»*^ whiAmay indent the point of the bullet [_to be avoided. \( 1 Home. Three Four, J In I cam m posaibl should( body ie C ..yf^^yi-i-,'.;/-. VLB RXERCIflBB. ping fingers closed in thi hand, V square with the wrist-, the f left VLATOON KXBRCIBB. hand to point to the the ramrod entirely out oy ling the arm, turn it, dropping to the front, so that the pomt close hy the side of the left aw, , it on the top of the buUet ; the be perpendicular and held ir lie between the first two fingers nb, the remaining fingers closed ,alm of the hand, the knuckles he front, the arm to be kept as the ramrod as possible without it, and without altering the ss of the shoulders, the buUet straight down the i\til the second finger touches lie of the riOe, at the same time the elbow down close to the nd inclining the knuckles to the the right hand smartly to the F the ramrod and seize it again 1 in the second motion of " ^d. the bullet steadily straight down ottom, at the same time bnnging w down close in to the body, and a the knuckles to the right. two steady and firm pressures the ramrod about 'Oe^ inch on casion) ascertain that the bullet ng on the powder; all^«t«>f,e; nay indent the point of the bullet voided. 165 Draw the ramrod halfway out of the barrel, and seize it in the middle, as in the first motion of " Rod.' Draw the ramrod entirely out and turn it over as in the second motion ot " Rod," and put it into Us place at once, pressing it towards the body in so doing, to prevent the point catchmg the band or otherwise doing injury to the stock ; move up the right band smartly, and place the second joint of the forefiuger (the re- maining fingers to be closed in the hand) on the he«id of the ramrod and force it home: then seize it between the second ioint of the forefinger and thumb, and dropping the left hand, at the simie in- stnnt, to its full extent, seize the rifie ; the arm to be close in to the body. In performing the motions of "Rod" and "««;«"». caw S be taken that the ramrod rubs as httie as Sibte against the sides of the barrel or muzzle, that the ShouK™^ preserved souare to the front, and that the body i^ kept perfectly^Wy. ^^^^^^ ^^^^ ^ face; bring the rifle to a honzonfaa position at the right side with the left hand, which is to grasp it firmly, bttle finger touching the projection m tront ot the look-plate, the thumb between stock and barrel, the left arm close to the body as a support; at the same time meet the smaU of the butt with the right hand, elbow to the rear, hold it hghtly with the fingers behmd the tngg«f euard and half cock the iiflc, the thumb to remain on the cock. As a front rank »■'!» ■1^ -Jk. 166 PART in.— BIFLK KXBBCISKS. Three. Fotir. Five. Sia. the small of the butt to 'be pressed against the hip, a« a rear rank four inches above it. , . , , Advance the fingers to the nipple, and with the forefinger throw off the old cap. Carry the hand to the cap pocket, anci take up a cap between the forefinger and thumb, the remaining fingers to be closed in the hand, elbow to the rear. Put the cap upon the nipple, looking down while placing it, and then raising the eyes to the front. . , ^, . . , Press the cap home with the flat part of the thumb, with the fingers closed m the hand and against the lock-plate. Bring the hand to the small of the butt, and hold it lightly, with the fingers behind the trigger guard, thumb pointmg to the muzzle. ' , . , • v* " Having, if necessary, adjusted the sight and brought the right hand back to the small of the butt, full cock the nfle, hold- ing it lightly, with the fingers behind the trigger guard, thumb pointing to the muzzle, and fix the eye steadfastly on I some object in front. ^ i.i The back-sight will be avith the left hand. When gi\ang the command Ready some distance must ,Uway8 b J named ; should, however, the distance be omitted, t.'ie soldier must judge for himself the distance he is from the object he is going to aim at, and adjust his sight accordingly. Too much paiiis cannot be taken to insure that the soldier takes a deliberate aim at some object whenever he brings the rifle to the " Present ;" for this purpose, small bull's eyes are to be marked on the barrack wall for the men to aim at. Partiaalro attmtion is to be given to the folio iring points in the " Present." The body is to be firm and upright, the butt to I as to avo the recoi solidly in but witli in aimini the fore- eye is fix sight, th In delivc alone, wi right eye ascertain trigger ITiep taking a small el( raising t butt by us to ge the baclj raised oi The ; platoon it in rIo out the Front ( Home. Present. motion! resting Whei of "Pr Load, LB SXBRCIHK8. r a pause of slow time, taking om the right, bring the rifle fvith the left id Ready some distance must iwever, the distance be omitted, imself the distance he is from aim at, and adjust his sight be taken to insure that the m at some object whenever he lent;" for this purpose, small iA on the barrack wall for the e given to the folio ving points y is to be firm and upright, the VLATOON BXKRCISE. 169 butt to be pi«Med firmly into the hollow of the shoulder, so as to avoid the kick which will otherwise take place from the recoil on the explosion of the powder; the nfle to rest solidly in the pram of the left hand, and to be firmly grasped, but without rgidity of muscle, tl-i sight to be upright; in aiming, th^i muzzle to be steadily raised until the top of the fore-sight is aligned upon the object on whu .i the right eye is fixed, through the bottom of the notch o." the back- sight, the left eye being closed and the breathing restrained. In delivering the fire, the trigger is to be moved bv pressure alone, without any motion of the baud, eye, or elbow ; the right eye to continue fixed on the object after snapping, to ascertain if the aim has been deranged by the movement of l^e position of the head with reference to the butt when taking aim depends entirely on the elevation used. With small elevation the butt must be brought to the head by raising the shoulder, or the cheek must be so placed on the butt by stooping the head a little forward, (not sideways,) us to get the eye fixed on the object through the bottom of the back-sight ; as the distances increase, the head must be raised or the shoulder lowered. 2. Platoon Exercise in Slow Time. The recruit having been thoroughly instructed in^the platoon exercise by numbers, will next be taught to perform ft in slow time, the following words nnljr being given with- out the numbe s -.—Platoon Exercise «i Sloiv Tme. Asa Front (or Rear) Rank, Prepare to Load. Laaa- ^■ Home. Return. Cap. Fire a Volley, at— Yards. Beady. Present, \fter each word the recruit will go througu the motions described in the Platoon Exercise by numbers, resting a pause of slow time between them. When required to re-load in slow time from the position of " Piepaie to load," the command will be In Shw lime. Load, ; i^'-' '■ 170 VKnr 111.— RIPl-K KXKBCISES. a. Platoon Exercise in Quick Time. When the recniit has become sufficiently famUiw with the motions flf the I'ltttoon Kxerciso to rec-Uect the order in which they co.ne. he will be practised in Quick lime. the ^!lU,;vb.« words only beinR Riven: Caution. ilaoonh.erm<' in QuickTime. jU a Front (or Hear) «'"'^' -^"'"^U J/ T Yards. Reody. Presi-nt. When the recruit has Ere 1. he will brinK his rifle down to the position of prepare to loa , and will proceed with his loading without word of command, and after he has cunped he will remain steady at the caj,- pinK position. In -luick time the recruit wdl perform ewh Sion throughout the exercise distinctly and correctly, Zt as rapidly as nossible. When the recruit is required to reload in quick time from the positron of prepare to pad, eXter having performed the Platoon Kxercise in •low tune, the word will be In Quick Time, Load. 4. To Shoulder, to Order, and to Advance from the Capping Position, When the r.c.nit has loaded and capped, he may be ordered to shou'der. to order, and, if ho is armed with the long rifle, to advance, from the capping position. Shoulder- C To Shoulder with the Long Kj^e.— On the word Shoulder, bring tho left foot back to the ri«ht, placing the heel bo- hinil that of the right foot. ArwA, On the word Arms, come to the Iront ; at the same time bring the rfle with the right hand to the left shoulder, and grasp the butt with tbe left hand at the full extent of the arm, the fingers of the right hand to be under the oock ani ,^ , close to tbe look Bide of the stock, thum) pointing to the muzzle. * 1\ SAoh/c Arm Ord Ar Advma 5. 1 Prepa K BXKHCIHE8. 10 in Quick Time. )me sufflcientiy fajniliw with terciso to reo'llect the order practised in Quick Time, the en: Caution, Platoon Exercise or Hear) Rank, Loud. At — hen the recruit has fired, he e position of prepare to load, ng without word of command, ill remain steady at the cap- the recruit will perform each pise distinctly and correctly, ('hen the recruit is required to ) position of prepare to load, latoon Kxercise in »U»w time, if, Load, i to Advance from the Capping\ ition, I ided and capped, he may be r, and, if ho is armed with the lie capping position. ilder with the Lmy Eifie.—On Shoulder, bring the left foot le ri«ht, placing the heel be- ii the right foot, word Arms, come to the front ; me time bring the rifle with hand to the left shoulder, and butt with tbe left hand at the ; of the arm, the fingers of the id to be under the oock anc' ko look side of the stock, thuml o the muzzle. t Tv)0. Shoulder- Arm$. Two. Order. Arms. < < Advanc»-Arms. PLATOON WlSHOItB. Drop the right hand smartly to the side. . „_ .. To Shoulder viitk the Short Rt«e.— Dn the word Shoulder, bring the left foot back to the right, placing the heel behind that of the right foot. On the word Arms, come to the front ; at the same time bring the rifle to a per- pendicular position at the right side with the left hand, and seize it with the forefinger am! thumb of the right nand round the trigger-guard, the remaining fingers under the cock. Drop the left hand smartly to the To Order with the Lonij or Short BJMe.—On the word Order, bring the lelt foot back to the right (placing the heel behind that of the right foot), and seize the rifle with the right hand close m front of the left, fore-arm close to the On the word ^rms, face to the front, and with the ritjht hand place the butt quietly on the ground at the right side, as detailed in the manual exercise. To Advance with the Long Rifle.— The same as the shoulder with the short rifle. {l 5. To prepare to Load from the Advance, and from the Order. Prepare to- Load, From the Advance with the Long •The same u from the shoulder the short rifle. r From \ Bifle.-' L with th< 172 Pripare to- Load. Two. PAHT III.— KirLlC KXKBClJtKH. FVom the Order with the Long or Short R(/l#.— Turn on the heels u in preparing to load trom the ihoulder, carrying the rifle round with the body, eyes to the front. A» a front rank, ; As a rear rank, carry the left foot carry the left foot ten inches to the six inches to the left front, (viz., six front, moving the body with it; toes pointing to the front ; to the front und eight to the left,) moving the body with it ; toes jjoint- ing to the front ; at the same time square the shoulders to the front from the hip, pass the rifle smartly to the left hand, which will seize it at the nose cup, thumb and finger round the stock, and proceed as in the second motion of preparing to load from the shoulder. G. Cotning to the Beady from Shouldered Arms, from Ordered Arms, and from Advanced Arms. A3 a Front (or Rear) Rank at — yds. Ready. Two. f From Shouldered Arms with the Long jli^e —Turn on the heels as in preparing to load from the shoulder ; at the same time seize the rifle with the right hand at the small of the butt, thumb pointing to the muzzle. Bring the rifle to a horizontal position at the right side, grasping it with the left hand as described in the first motion of "Cap." Ai a Fron Rear) Rt at — yar( Ready Ti As a Fron Rear) Ri at — yar Ready. i KXKRCIMKH. Order with tk» Long or -Turn on the heels u in load trom the ihoulder, rifle round with the body, mt. rank, : A» a rear rank, t foot I carry the left foot to the aix inches to the z., six ' front, moving the t und body with it; toes I left,) pointing to the body front J point- int ; ime square the shoulders to am the hip, pass the rifle e left hand, which will seize )se cup, thumb and finger oclt, and proceed as in the n of preparing to load from \mildered Arms, from Ordered Idvanced Arms. tldered Arms with the Long on the heels as in preparing the shoulder j at the same le rifle with the right hand of the butt, thumb pointing Ic. rifle to a horizontal jjosltion t side, grasping it with the described in the first motion PLATOON ■XRrOHR. 173 J Ai a rear rank, press the small of the butt to the side four ir.uhes above the hip, and carry the left foot six inchea to the front; Ai a Front (or Rear) Rank, at — yards — Ready. Tuo. Asa Front (or Rear) Rank at — yards — Ready. An It front rank, press the small of the butt against the liip, and carry the left foot ten inches to the left front (viz., six inches to the Iront and eight to the left) ; 1 in both cases the body must move with the foot, and the left toes must point direct to the front ; then proceed as de- tailed in the " Readv from the Capping L Position," No. 1 of this Section. From Shouldered Arms with the Short Jlj/Ic— Turn on the heels as in preparing to load from the shoulder ; at the same time raise the rifle by bending the right arm slightly, and seize it with the left hand, the little finger touching the pro- jection. Bring the rifle to a horizontal position at the ngl t side, grasping it with the left hand as describeo in the first motion of " Cap," and proceed as " From Shouldered Arms with the Long Rifle." From Ordered Arms with the Long or Short ili^e.- Turn on the heels as in preparing to load from the shoulder; carrying the rifle round with the body. With the long rifle the thumb of the right hand must be turned behind the barrel, in order to seize it before facing. i ■^fe**' 174 Two. As a Front (o? Rear) Rank PAET III. — HlPLB "IXBIICISES. Brinff the rifle to a horizontal po- sition at the right side, grasping it with the left hand, as explained in the " Ready from Shouldered Arms with the Long Rifle," then proceed as detailed under that head. From Advanced Arms with the Long as from " The Shoulder Rear) Rank I fljfle.— fhe same a< at — yards— ^^j^ t^^ ^hort rifle Ream. i Ready 7, Half -cochin ff Arms. If a soldier is at the ready when ordered to cease firing he will half-cock arms, or the squad may be ordered to half-cock arms, which will he performed as follows :— Half-cock- fl-it 'hU ills';- Place the thumb of the right hand on the comb of the cock and the forefinger on the trigger, and draw both back iintil the sear is disengaged from the full bent of the tumbler; then let the cock gently down (removing the forefinger, from the trigger), and when it passes the halt bent, draw it beck to half cock; after whifh, having, if the flap has been raised, shut it down, carry the right hand to the I small of the butt, thumb pointing to the Linuizle, firgers behind the guaid. pnWjii-r 8. To fire a Volley and Shoulder. Wlien it is not intended to re-load after firing, the com- TB«ad wUl be. Fire a Volley and Shoulder, f-yds. Bec^y. Pmmt. After delivering the voUey, rest a pause, and 1^.. B *^.XBHCI8E8. rifle to a horizontal po- le right side, grasping it ; hand, as explained in the I Shouldered Arms with the ' then proceed as detailed ;ad. anced Arms with the Long ame as from " The Shoulder " rt rifle. PLATOON EXBRCI8K. 175 dntf Arms. when ordered to cease firing le squad may be ordered to lerformed as follows ; — thumb of the right hand on I the cock and the forefinger | er, and draw both back until isengaged from the full bent ler ; then let the cock gently ving the forefinger, from the id when it passes the half it beck to half cock; after ng, if the flap has been raised, n, carry the right hand to the s butt, thumb pointing to the gers behind the guard. l-i;4, A ,.vK> -.1. ,A^--ii^J-':tiJ. t :•! m\ H ley and Shoulder. » re-load after firing, the com- nd Shoulder. At— yds. Ready. ;he volley, rest a pause, and 176 PART m.— BIFLR BXEBCISBS. PLATE XVI. taking th position, ' down, bri On the w andontb i| Cauti \Rear) Re At — y Reac •i^sir^sr "»^"S5s:r LB BXBBCISES. S XVI. TO VIRB AND RB-LOAD KMBELING. 177 AM A. BEAK BANK KNWtUNO, PRESENT (1st Motion). tiikiiig the time from the right, come down to the capping position, then having, if the flap has been raised, shut it down, bring back the right hand to the small of the butt. On the word SAouWer, bring the left foot back to the right; and on tiie word Arms, shoulder and come to the front. S. 5, To Fire and Re-load kneeUng, 1. By Numbers. TWs exercise will first be commenced from shouldered arms. Caution.— By Numbers, Fire and Load as a Front {or Rear) Rank kneeling. At — yards. Ready. Two. AS A REAE HANK KNBEUNO, FRBSENT (5th Motion). With the Long or Short Rifle.— Aa detailed in the first motion of "Ready," from "The Shoulder," standing. Bring the rifle to a horizontal posi- tion at the right side, as e«)lained in the 2nd motion of " Ready " iSrom " The Shoulder" standing; at the same time carry the right foot 12 inches to the rear, and place the toe of the boot aa much to the left of the left heel as will bring the knee of the ftont rank 6 inches to the right when on the ground, and that of the rear rank 12 inches to the right ; the foot to be nearly perpen- dioular, the left leg stnught. N 1 178 PABT III. — BITLB EXBBCIBK8. Thrte, f TAree.— Sink at once on the right knee twelve inches to the rear, as a front Tank six inches to the right, as a rear rank twelve inches 'to the right of the left heel, and square with the right foot; bring the weight of the body on to the right heel, and place the lett fore-arm, as a front rank six inches be- hind and square with the left knee, as a rear rank on and square with the left knee, the butt resting agwnst the right side; then proceed as directed in Sec- tion 4 of this Part. When required to come to the " Ready " kneeling, from the capping position standing, the left foot wU be brought back to the right, and the right foot wiU be earned back before sinking on the right knee. As the length of leg, in very tall men, is greater than the breadth of body, it will be impossible, in close order, to get the knee square with the foot; in such cases, there- fore, the knee is to be inchned to the firont, but not beyond the inside of the right foot of the next file on the right. Prwmt. ^WM Two, Four. *" As detailed when coming to this position standing, without nusingthe body off the heel, and place the left elbow at once over the left knee to form a support. The instructions which follow the first motion of the /)resen< atanding are applicable also to this motion. As detailed when firing standing. Five. Load Bod. I EXBBCI8B8. ik at once on the right inches to the rear, as a t inches to the right, as a .relve inches -to the right leel, and square with the ring the weight of the body ^ht heel, and place the left ; front rank six inches be- are with the left knee, as a and square with the left ;t resting agwnst the right iroceed as directed in Sec- Pari;. he " Ready " kneeling, from the left foot Avill be brought it foot will be carried back e. (y tall men, is greater than B impossible, in dose order, e foot; in such cases, there- to the front, but not beyond le next file on the right. len coming to this position raising the body off the heel, b elbow at once* over the left support. The instructions first motion of the present cable also to this motion. >n firing standing. TO PIBIt AND HB-LOAD KNBBLING. 179 Five. Bear Rank. Load, Rod. Firont Bank. Brlni; the rlHo down to the Mpping iHmlUan, at the gnine tiaa raise the body oflr the right heel, and place the left tore-arm ■quare on the liTiii.ln on the cock ;— the nne to^ir»P«lwith the left hand M deUiloaVhen capping stand- iniTtho butt to be pressed against the side. on tne cock ;— v"o ■ •-" v- be grasped with the left hand, as detailed when cap- ping standing, the butt to be pressed against the side. As detailed when capping standing. r Bring the weight of the bodv.on to the righSel, and place the left fore-arm on At-yds. J "be left leg. the butt resting against the fl*«Sy- 1 right side, then proceed as directed in |_Section4ofthi8Part. Pr<»enf. As already detailed. Load. As sOready detailed. Tho re motions < next be 1 manner a words on' kneeling t Ready, P "When of prepai Load. 3. When the motl the ordei time, th Fire and Rank, a fired he rifle doT his load capped time wil recruit i tion of and loa( In quid 4. First capping right hi side. J of "Pre to the] S EXEBCISKS. lotions, 48 when loading loticns, as when loading TO PIBE AND BK-LOAD KNEELING. ISI tho , and so to Blbow t tho right ing it it tho alders ,plac- onco Inchi'S g the . right old it iehind 1 half mb to le rifle thand gtand- jrossed Sear Sank. Bring the rifle with the left hand to a horiMnW position at the right glde. muzzle to the ftont, and let the body resume the right half-face; place the left fore-arm at once MUjre on the left knee, and «* the same time meet the small of the butt with the right hand, and holding i\}\«^ ly with the fingers behind tlio giiard, hal? cock the rifle, the thumb to rpniain on the cooki-the rifle to he grasped with the left hand, as detailed when cap- ping standing, the butt to be pressed against the side. pping standing. te weight of the body.on to the and place the left fore-am on r. the butt resting as&inst the i, then proceed as dttect«d in of this Part. id. ed. 2. To Fire and Re-had kneeling in Slow Time. Tho recruit having been thoroughly instructed in the motions of firing and loading kneeling by "".mbers wiU next be taught to perform them in sl°^^ ™t,!")^f !!^^ manner as he has learned the platoon exercise, the following words only being given without the numbers -. Ftre and load kneeling in slow time as a front or rear rank. At -yards- Ready, Present, Load, Rod, Home, Return, Cap. ■When requi^d to re-load in slow time from the position of prepare to load, the command wUl be In slow tme— Load. _,. 3. To Fire and Re-load kneeling in Quick Time. When the recruit has become sufficiently familiar with the motions of .he firing and loading kneeling to recoUect the order in which they come, he will be practised in quick time, the following words only being given t—Caution. Fire and Load kneeling in quick time as a Front (or Rear) Rank, at -yards, Ready, Present. When the recruit has £d he wiU rest a pause of slow time and then bring his rifle down to the position of prepare to load proceed with his loading without word of command, and after he has capped win remain steady at the cappmg Pos'tl?."- ^ Jj« time will be the same as in the platoon exercise. When the recruit is required to re-load in quick time, from the posi- tioTof prepare to load, after having performed the firing and loading kneeling in slow time, the command will be— In quick time — Load. 4. 7b Load Standing from the Kneeling Position. First shut down the flap (if necessary) and resume the capping position, then rise to the half-face, brmging the right heel before the left, the rifle remaining steady at the siHe. After which proceed as detailed in the fiW* "»«*•«" of " Present," at the same time carmng the left foot forwara to the position of " Prepare to load." 182 PART III. — RIFLE EXBBCI8KB, Order— y 5. To Shculder, to Order, and to Advance from me Cavp'w '^'ositioH knedint/. Shoulder- r ■ M 'tk the Lony or Short Rj/Ie.-On the word S-.oHlder, sprinn smartly to atten- tici. at the half-face, bringing the nght heel in front of the left, still keepiiiK the J rirte in a horizontal i)osition at the naht Armr, i side. At the word Arms, proceed m de- tailed when coming to the shoulder troni the canpinpc jjosition standing. Two l^i"l> the right hand (or left hand with the short rifle) smartly to the fide. " With the Lorn, or Short Rifle— On the word Order, a\mn^ smai-tly to the stand- ing position at the right half-face, bring- ing the right heel in front of the left, still keeping the rifle in a homonti. positicm at the right side, and at the same time seize the nflc with the nght hand close in front of the left, fore-arm close to the barrel. , » i. o Arm On the word .4ms, face to the front, &c., as detailed, when coming to the order 1 from the capping iiosition, standing, f With the Lony Hifle.—The same as the Advance-Arms. | ghoulder with the short rifle. S. fi. Platoon Exercise and Firing in tico Ranks. When the recruit has learned all the motions of the Pla- toon Exercise, and of the flvirg and re-loading kncehng, in single rank, he will practise them m two ranks. 1 JnMruction for Troops armed mtk the Long «yie.— In corps armed with the long rifle the rear rank will, on the caution, before loading, take a pace of nine inches to the f^ont. Before firing, if not ahready closed, therea* rftnk, unless th manner, kneeling, rank nas will step 1 Cuutioi will close Fc Plati Platom (or Wi Asu With 1 Wlien words Fr for firing After 1 will resu to the rei Soldiei rank knc volleys f and re-lo load km the men, >vill rise In the word Re mence fi kneel J neither ( FIRINQ IN TWO RANKS. 183 t EXERCI8BB. fid to Advance from me nn kneeling, ,0(11/ or Short Ri^e.— Onthc T, spring smartly to atten- lalf-t'ace, bringing the right of the left, still keeping the zontal ])osition at the right 3 word Arms, proceed as de- :onnng to the shoulder from position standing, ight hand (or left hand with e) smartly to the Hide. L,oHf; or Short Rifle.— On the spring smai-tly to the stand- at the right half-face, hring- lit heel in front of the left, X the rifle in a horizontil ic right side, and at the same he rifle with the right hand t of the left, fore-arm close to ird Arms, face to the front, &c., , when coming to the order |)ping ])osition, standing. Lon;/ nifle.—The same as the th the snort rifle. ml Firing in two Ranks. 3d all the motions of the Pla- ,g and re-loading kneeling, in lem in two ranks. armed with the Long Rifle.— ^ rifle the rear rank will, on akc a jiace cf nine inches to t already closed, thereiur tank unless the front rank is to kneel, will close up in like manner. When soldierrs are retiuired to fire, front rank kneelioi?, the rear rank will not close up, and if the rear rank nas already closed up to load, on the caution to Are it will step back a pace of nme inches. Cautions for loading and firing on which the rear rank will closp "1) : — FoK LoAniNO. For Firing. Battalion (Right or Left Wing, or Company, ^c.) Fire a Volley, File Firing from the Right, (or Left, or from both Flanks) of Companies, Sfc. And in Battahon Square Prepare for Cavalry, Platoon Exercise by Numbers, Platoon Exercise in Slow (or Quick) Time, With Cartridge, or As with Cartridge. or With Blank Cartridge, Wlien the soldiers are to fire front rank kneeling, the words Frwit rant kneeling must precede the above cautions for firing, in order that the rear rank may know how to act. After loading, if not required to fire, the rear rank nien will resume their distances by taking a pace of nme inches to the rear as they shoulder, order, or advance arms. Soldiers will be taught to fire standing, with the front rank kneeling, and with both ranks kneehng. After firing volleys front rank kneeling, the front rank men will nse and re-load standing ; but in file firing the front rank wiU load kneehng. After firing volleys both ranks kneehng, the men, unless previously cautioned to re-load on the knee, vnW rise and re-load standing. . , , ^ ji- .. In the case of troops armed with the short ilfle, on the word Ready (in volley firing), or the bugle sound Com- mence firing (in file firing), the front rank wiU mvanubly kneolj consequently as a general rule the rear »nKWiU neither dose up to load nor to fire, and the caution tyont pi ;a 184 PAST III.-— RiriiS ■XKRCIBBB. run* kneeling will be unnocrssary ; but on the caution Both ranks kneeling fire a volley, the rear rank will doee up ; and in aquares four deep, the second and fourth ranks will close up as directed in Section 8, No. 3 of this Part. Troops armed with the short rifle will reload in the same manner as those armed with the lonpr. S. 7. T^ifie Exercises for Serjeants. The seijeants of all infantry regiments mil be taught the manual and platoon exercises for the short rifle. Serjeants when moving with their companies or with the battalion will remain with unfixed swords, excepting while they are escorting the colours, and when they are m a square, in which cases they will have their swords fixed. Seigeants will stand at ease and come to attention with the men, they will also shoulder arms, slope or trail arms, and order arms with tfapir., but will perform no other motions of the rifle with the men. 'ilie Serjeants, during the performance of the manual and platoon exercises by the rtnk and file, will remain steady at the shoulder. Bxcover-Arms. f The Recover. — Seqeants will recover arms as follows : — Seize the rifle as di- rected in the first motion of "the Secure," then raise it periMjndicularly in front of the face, right hand grasping the small of the butt, thum^ as high as the mouth, barrel to the front j at the same time place the left hand under the butt, thumb m front of the heel, first two joints of the _ fingers round the side of the butt. While a seijeant marking a point is extending an arm, as directed in Part IV., General Principle V., he >vill hold his rifle by the small of the butt with the other hand, resting the toe against his chest. Serjeants marking points on which men are to dress when forming line will stand with recovered armsj when they mark th taneousl; their dis they are word St them; h to form they wiL will conn correctl] or rear column front 01 Recover Platom PRBPA LOi Tn ,■ ■XKRCIBIS. ssary; but on the caution /, the rear rank will close uj) ; leoond and fourth ranks will ion 8, No. 3 of this Part, •ifle will reload in the same le long. sesfor Serjeants. regiments mil be taught the for the short rifle. Ii their companies ur with the fixed swords, excepting while and when they are m a square, their swords fixed, and come to attention with der arms, slope or trail arms, but will perform no other men. The Serjeants, during 1 and platoon exercises hy the ,dy at the shoulder. over. — Seqeants will recover Hows : — Seize the rifle as di- B first motion of "the Secure," it peri)ondicularly in fh>nt of ;ht hand grasping the small of mm)) as high as the mouth, lie front; at the same time ft hand under the butt, thumb the heel, first two joints of the id the side of the butt, point is extending an arm, as Principle V., he >vill hold his ; with the other hand, resting 1 which men are to dress when recovered armsj when they ■XBROiaiS to* BBBJIANTa. 185 mark th« points for their comjtanies to form upon simul- taneously in column, as in formmg on parade, they will take tljeir distances and covering with recovere TWO. THBBB. VOVH. KIVK. AT — YARDS HKAUY. I'HKBKNT. TWO. THitKK. VOUK. FIVE. »ABT HI.— Wi"* ■X«»0"«"- ' Carry the oftrtridao to the breech. *n^^\ cloae the breeeh, after which hold the Si of the butt H^thtly with the n«ht hand, the thtiud) to the nwht of the knob and pointing to the um»»le. Proceed a> ^Pl-V"!!,* '",*''", Tji ' ExerciHc," Section 4, No. 1, of this 'hitoon part. BilnR the rifle to the "K^ side, and if the flap has been rai.ed shut it down, , ut without movinn the Bl'd'HR 1"^. i und open the breech, &o.. i« deta'lej in the second motion of " Prej. '.re to Lload." ( Review Exehcibb. S. 8. Review Exercise. to take after wh Caull BR) Siioi o> til Iho I'll SHU 1 Cut 8a< Ai C Ai Bil ft Bl ll RiAl ■ BXSNOIHBH. oftrtri(l(fo to the breech, and let in the chamber, piwhuiK wards as |)o»iiible into the lie tbiiinb or the ri(. Fur lh» Short Ittf'. I. ftUllKll. -MAIiUAI. - Bsmiciis. II. IMDmi' Anm. III. Saoiiipkh-A'""- IV. Uhdik-Ahmi. V. VI. SmoDI'DRII— AllMI. VII. P«»»RNT— ARM*. Vlll 8UOKI.DFH— A»M«. IX. Po»t-AlUI<. X. C«»M1— II*'"""* BiiOTL»B»— Anm. XII. ApTA«r»— ARMI. XIII. 0»I>«l>-A»«l«. XIV. AptAKf" -*"■•'■ XV. iBowi.r.1 II— Anm, XVI. BUPPOKT— Armi. XVII. inoULOvR-Amii. XVIII. »M)P»-A»m. XIX. Sbouidkr—Ahmi. B«AB Rankt»ii»1'i.>»» _ORn>*. Maucu Ciutliin. -Makual- RlHRCItR. II. StflURR -A»>ll. III. 8Hf>i)i.mtR — AJiMi. IV. PRFiUKT— Arm*. V. BiiocLURR— Arm". VI. ItirFoRT— Arm*. VII. BlIoulPRR— ARMi. . VIII. OllDKB -ARMA. IX. Vim— HwoROA. X. tlH«UI.PI»«— ARMfc XI. I'ORT- AWMA. XII. CiiARoR - Sword* XIII. Biiiiui-PRR— Arm* XIV. Otori - Armi. XV. Siiuui.p'B— Arm*. XVI. Orpfr -Abm«. XVII. IIrua— »•"'">•■ flHonl.PBR — Arma. B»ARlUHK''A»Rtil)»« . Ohpfr. Harcb. /wMA/xJRdcMKl Skurl ItiM- C«UlloB.-ri.AT.«» KlIRCliRIN DUW TlMR. , r»ll«»»tR— fc«*«N HAD. Rao. HoMII. RrrcRR. Cai'. FiHR A Vottrr At Mn Yarm. Kraut. PRMiartT. Thtii WRII tat Ihi men lo flr». UM come rtown to nm npiiliK pMlllolii ■tfliir which •«|. tlnu«. _ In QoioK TiMR— I.IIAU. ShouLOHR— ARMi. IIBPAR — ARMA. Ktani-AT-Raim. AftiT whkh th« nwn wmh«illrf.-l«l ti> rrplAcc 'h'lr "Inv- p..,", milw ihpjr ari! tfutng lo Arc. las PART III. — ^BIFLB BZSBCI8BS. S. 9. Modes of Firing. Troops firing in close files at distances of 300 yards and under will not make use of the flap of the back sight, but will take their aim between the flanges which protect it. 1. Volley Firing. — Soldiers must be practised in firing volleys by battalions, \ving8, companies, subdivisions, &c., as described in the foregoing sections. 2. File Firing. — Soldiers will be taught to fire indepen- dently by files in the following manner : — File firing, -> from the right , .„ , (or lejl, or from I On this caution the rear rank will close bothflanki) of | up as described in Section 6. Companies (or 1 Subdivisions, ^c.) J Commence, Cease Firing, ' The flank file or files \rill at once make ready and come to the present, the front- rank man delivering his fire first, to be immediately followed by that of the rear- rank man ; both men will then return to the capping position, and from thence go on with their loading in the quick time, performing their motions together and without loss of time. When the flank file is bringing the rifle to the present, the next file is to make ready, coming to the present when the flank file is in the act of returning to the capping position ; the next file to proceed m like manner, and so continue by files in succession for the first round, after which, each file, as soon as loaded, will fire independently, without reference to the files either on the right or left. Each file, as it completes its loading, will shoulder arms, if armed with the long rifle, or order if armed with the short rifle. LB BXSBCISBS. s of Wiring, it distances of 300 yards and lie flap of the back sight, but lie flanges which protect it. 1 must be practised in firing ompanies, subdivisions, &c., as tions. idll be taught to fire indepen- g manner : — caution the rear rank will close ibed in Section 6. k file or files will at once make come to the present, the front- delivering; his fire first, to be iy followed by that of the rear- ; both men will then return to % position, and from thence go leir loading in the quick time, r their motions together and iss of time. When the flank iging the rifle to the present, le is to make ready, coming to it when the flank file is in the irning to the capping position ; lie to proceed m like manner, itinue by files in succession for )und, after which, each file, as mded, \vill fire independently, iference to the files either on ir left. le, as it completes its loading, ler arms, if armed with the long ler if armed with the short rifle. V lllfll =^. MOD88 or fflHMO. Files that may have made ready, when this command is given will half cock their rifles before they shoulder or order arms. Each man, before full cocking W«rifle "to adjust his MKhtforthe distance he estimates the object at which he intends to fire to be from him. In ffle ^° Jj«"«y f""K' it is to be impressed upon the men, that the tront rank must remain perfectly steady after delivering their fire, otherwise the aim of the rear rank will be deranged. When the command to fire by files is given to a battahon, the commence firing wiU be given on the drum or bugle, instead of the word Commence, and the cease fire wiU also be given on the drum or bugle, after the word Cease F.m« ' from the commanding officer, as he could not be heard I "in ill firing.^t'he officer commanding the company wiU faU to the rear of the centre of his company on the caution, and will return to his post as the men ccme to the shoiUder, 1 order, or advance, after having ceased to fire. 3. Preparing for Cavalry. 1 The recruits, having a thorough knowledge of the pre- ceding portion of the drill, may now be formed Into four rankrand practised to receive cavahy, aa ra square fomr d^p. ' Troops irmed with the long nfle will commence this 1 practice on the halt with shouldered arms and fixed KnetB. Tho«j armed with the ahort nfle wiU com- mence the practice on the march with tniled arms, and will be taught to fix sword* on the word Halt or Halt- maht about-Facej the leading company of a column tuna armed, if halted. wiU fix swords on the word quick m akoh I given to the remaining companies; the men who halt wrtli- lout word of command will fix swords as they halt. . r On this caution the second and team, f rewire Jor^ 1 -^^ y^ t^ke » pwe of nine Inehoj to Cwflky, Ithefconl. i! 192 PART III.— -miVLB BXSBOISBB. Beady. r On this conunand, the fiwt and second rank will sink at once upon the righf knee as a front and rear rank, kneel- ing in the manner prescribed when at the capping position, at the same time placing the butts of their rifles (which will not be cocked) on the ground against the inside of their right knees, locks turned uppermost, the muizle slanting upwards, BO that the point of the bayonet will be about the height of a horse's nosej the left hand to have a firm grasp of the rifle immediatelj above the lower band, the right hand hoMing the small of the butt, the left arm resting upon the thigh about six inches in rear of the left knee. The third and fourth ranks will come down to the ready position. Musales of rifles to be inclined upwards, but the men will Lnot cock. On the word Conmenoe, the standing ranks will commence file firing, as befbre h detailed, the men of each ffla cockiog - . V >.» I their rifles as the file next to them comes r Each file, as it completes its lo«dmg, *'i?^f^ ■{ win shoulder arms. In rifle corps the j<\nng. ^ ^^^^ ^jjj ^^^ ^^ ^^ ^rder. K^eeliiu Bank! r fife Firing from the right {left, or both {or KneeKng Banktt^the— face), fi'e a VMeg. At — yardt TUtOg. This caution will be given, should it be ' deemed neoessaiy to fire a voU^. 'r Come to the ewping ^ I sam« time bring fba Treig< ition. at the it of tiie body Pres Should( c Order Tree to com arms w Ins( resist c For at upei armed with tl With Can L R* Pr ITie which ,B aXBBOIBBB. )nunand, the first and seoond ink at once upon the right front Bnd rear rank, kneel- manner prescribed when at position, at the same time mtts of their rifles (which will id) on the groimd against the eir right knees, locks turned the muizle slanting upwards, point of the bayonet will be leight of a horse's nose; the have a firm grasp of the rifle r above the lower band, the holding the small of the butt, I resting upon the thigh about in rear of the left knee. The ourth ranks will come down \j position. Muzzles of rifles ed upw&rds, but the men will word Commenee, the standing Bommence file firing, as before I he men of each ffle cooking as the file next to them comes ent. e, as it completes its loading, ier arms. In rifle corps the ome to the order. ition will be given, shoold it be cessary to fire a volley. the owping ^ bring w» woght of MOJE8 OP FIRING. ^M Present. Load. < on the right heel, then full cock the rifle, and fix the eye steadfastly on an object in troat. ' After delivering the fire, rest a pause of the slow time, then raise the ■{ body off the heel, and bring the rifle ; .^own to resist cavahr, as before directed, [remaining perfectly steady. '" Spring smartlv to the standing position at the nght hatf-foce, and bring the rifle to a horizontal position at the nght side, seizing it at the same instant with the right nand close in front of the left, and from thence come to the position of pre- pare to load as standing ranks, and go on with the loading in quick time. Shoulder-Arm [ Troops armed with the long nfle wiU or \ shoulder, those armed with the short Order-Arms. [ rifle will ordor. . , u i i.* Troops jmned with the long nfle must also be taught to come to the positions of prepare for cavalry from ordered arms with fixed bayonets. In squares of two deep, the front rank only will kned to resist cavaliy. _ , , . 4. TofireaFeudeJote. For tMs mode of firing the men wiU be drawn up in Une at open order, with shouldered arms, and bayonets fixed if armed with the long rifle, but wth unfixed swords if armed with the short rifle. With Blank 1 In quick time, as per regulation. I Muzzles of rifles to slant upwards when J capping. As per regulation. rretent. Elevated in the air. 1\ti right-hand man of the front rank commences the tue, which ^ run down the front and up the rear, as quick as Cartridge, Load. Ready, Present. 194 PART m.— HIPLH BX»RCI8K8. noHsible When the right-hand man of the «« ™nl^ has Cd the whole wiU glance their eyes to the nghttobnnK ^^liflAto the ronpmff position and from thence to the K^ng po8i?on a'nrMn loaded and capped they w,ll remain steady, waiting for the word- Ready, Present. As before directed. The same to be repeated a third time. , , . xt. ifter the third S. the whole will ve™am steadv at the capping position, and shoulder by word of command. Shoulder- 1 Amu. Preteni- \ ... ArtM. ). As per regulation Shoulder- Arms. Order-Arms. 5£ rS'^ are presentand are ordered to fire Wenty^n. oum, seven Sr&ed before each round of the feu de joie. 5. Street Firing. . A -«!..«,« nf onen half, or quarter distance, fbrmed ma st4ttr„arrow ground wLe deployment is iinp««^;| pini Iwe mS bB rMtdred to fire either when advancing cMl^^^^ Sring It ^viU^e performed in^e following P"^. 'rjthroi \ Street nnna arfra««ny.— Three compames will hfon . J;r2 to aivS from the column, leaving sufficient «.on>r L word THIRB -""^^''^""^V^^rDv L Z C „coNp f ^""'-S^J'/^^d Ve ffl wiU fire over SK^rt se'JndTvUi'lhen receive the word at £ KS. each company loau as Boon « it haa fired The char(i to op be wl to all charg each 2. cornp file t< until in m pany (Unsi by co; other the w paniei nave 1 Iti occuj gainii both throu on ei break to ho land L 1. with mode discn the whon whicl UJLB EXgRCISKS. rhand roan of the rear rank has I 9 their eyes to the right to bnnKl aosition and from thence to the I sn loaded and capped they wiUI the word — ' ■e directed. I a third time. , . xi. I whole will remain steady at thel jlder by word of commana. regulation. nt and are ordered to fire twenty-owl )efore each round of the feu de joie, Street Firing. j • I f or quarter distance, formea m « id whe/e deployment is impiacti- to fire either when advancing oi armed in the following mannw r— tcina.— Three companies wdl , the column, leaving sufacient room smainder of the column for a gnu rm. The secqpd and thtfd com- > first. When required to fire, on ANY FIRE A VOLLEY, flBBT AND r— YABUS-READY, the two front own, and the third wiU fire over i xvill then receive the word at - it will Bpring up, and on the word , fire ; laotlv. the front oompany wiU pa«y lo»^ as soon « It baa fired MODB8 OF FIRING. 195 The leading company may then be ordered to rise and charge, or the first and second companies may be ordered to open out to half distance from the rear, and aJl three then be wheeled back by sub-divisions to each side of the street to allow the gun to fire between them, or the cavalry to charge; it may occasionally be of use to extend files along each side of the street to fire up into the windows. 2. Street firing and retiring. — In retiring, the leading company wiU give its fire, face outwards by sub-divisions, file to the rear, re-form company, load, and remain halted, until its front is again clear, or the whole column is put in motion. The moment the front of the seooud com- pany is clear it will give its fire, face outwards, by sub- (Unsions, and file to the rear as above directed ; and so on by companies in succession ; the companies thus follow each other in succession : when the front of the column occupies the whole breadth of the street, the outward files of com- panies will double in the rear, to give the companies, which nave fired, room to j)as8. It must never be forgotten, in entering towns or villages occupied by the enemy, that the first thing to be done, on gaining a footing in the place, is to clear the houses on both flanks, and the column should on no account proceed through the streets without previously occupying the houses on either hand: the troops employed for that purpose breaking through partition walls, or pushing on from house to house, sp as to accompany the march of the main body and protect its flanks. Applicatioti of the Modes of Firing. 1. General Remarks. — No definite rules can be laid down vith respect to the application, on senice, of the various modes of firing; the commanding officer must use his discretion on this point, being guided in his decision by the nature of the country, the description of troops with whom he is engaged, and the quality of the arms with which they are equipped. o2 ..B^ 196 PART 11!.— KIFLK EXKIiCIHES. 2 Volley Krino.— VoUeys may occasionally be fired with Kood resuft. but this moL of firing must be used with S ^ution. or it may be the means of wastinR ammum- KiXge luantities'to no purpose It must> remem- Kd taat il' you fail in any decided effort »«""* y°" enemy, you wUl produce despondency m your own ranks, and ir.spire him with confidence. VoUe?s should onlT be used at short distances from the eiemy. and when the men happen to be a loaded, for ms^ance when a second line relieves the first hue, and it is n^e Tsa^Tonce to check the advance of the enemv ^S firing by companies may occasionally \>t used during the formation of line, each company firing m succes- ""voUeySb, the kneeling ranks of square mar be used with greit effect and with perfect safety in the follow^ SnTnc«.-when cavalry fall in their charge, and aw SK to retire, or when cavalry break and pass By the sides of the square. , 3 File Firing.-Oa service the usual, and for general punioses the most effective, mode of firing is by files. Fde firing maybe safely used under any circumstances. When small bodies fire by files great care must be taken to prevent soldiers from &ng away their &"* ^^nd too quickly, and thus leaving all or a large portion of the number unloaded and defenceless. 4. Firing Kneeling. -Ymng with the front rank kneebne enables the rear rank to fire with ease and precision, and consequently with greater effect. Firing with both ranks kneeling may be applie' when partrSover can be afforded to the men by that means 5 it , K moreover, been found to be an effective method of firinir even on level country. Bring mth Blank Cartridge m Par«*.-The following reSmay be considered more as suggestions for parade IFLK BXKnCIHES- B may occasionally be fired with e of firing must be used with the means of wasting ammuni- purpose. It must be remem- ,ny decided effort against your •spondency in your own ranks, sed at short distances from the i n happen to be all loaded, for e relieves the first line, and it « the advance of the enemy, inies may occasionally be used e, each company firing in succes- aeling ranks of squares maj be with perfect safety in the foUow- iry fail in their charge, and are valry break and pass by the sides rvice the usual, and for general ] J, mode of firing is by files. Fde mder any circumstances, by files great care must be taken fcing away their first round too J all or a large portion of the [ enceless. L ring with the front rank kneeling are with ease and precision, and effect. 1 kneehng may be applie' when ed to tho men by that means 5 it 1 id to be an effective method of (Wiw As per regulation, except that in per- forming the fourth motion, raise the ramrod about six inches instead of one ; and when completed, drop the ri^ht hand to the right side. ta UAYONKT RXBKCIIK. 199 IFLB rXBRCIAKtf. jmbler, and remove the «nap flap nipple; afterwards resume the le small of the butt, ill now jmss dcnvn the ranks to I sights are serviceable and per- Ipples are free from rust. ! word Springs, each soldier will lis snap cap and let the hammeir reon. ■ regulation. ' regulation. the long rifle, on the word , bring the thumb round the he ba. el. he word Arm», pass the rifle to the left hand, which must at the nose cap, and place the etly on the ground between the toe of it to be in line wivli the hi- boots, barrel to the ft jnt, and icular, the left arm close to the len withdraw the muzzle stopper, to the left hand, iiid carry the ,nd to the pouch or other place , taking therefrom a piece of f, place it in the jag or slit In of the ramrod, and seiie the ireen the forefinger and thumb, r regulation, placing the head of rod m the muzzle, with the rag it and the breech, r regulation, except that in per- the fourth motion, raise the about six inches instead of one ; len completed, drop the ri^ht the right side. The officer will how jirocced to ascertain if the msides of thB bwtels are clean or otherwise. Each soldier, as the offloeTaJpr"ches within two flies of him, w.l draw the Sdt the barrel as in the •' Return" of h« l-Utoon exerciie, and, holding the ramrod m the middle, place it under the right arm, and on the upper bjuss or nose cap to the left of the barrel, with the heacf of it to the left frdnt, ;?^clo^to the side, knuckles of the rif^ht haml tow«ds the ground. If the inside of tlic rifle is clean, no dirt should appear on the rag. . '' As per regulation, removing the »g from the jag, and returning it to the place whence taken, and replace the muBzle stopper; then pass the nfle to the right Bide with tli left hwid, drop- ping the right arm to ihc p.^per extent, quit the left hand, un.t resume the posi- tion of " Order Arm." An inspection of the appointments, rlothing. &o., is how ide. Return. to be mai Unfbi-Sayonets. Rear Rank, 1 take Close Order, > -March. i Stand at-Eate. As per regulation. As per regulation. As per regulation. Bayonet Exebcise. Is. il. Bayonet or Sword Bayonet Exercise. 1. General IHrections. fbrmtion qfSqnad.—SVhen recruits have been thoroughly instructed in the manual and platoon exercises •'"d "aoa^s of firing, they will be taught ttie bayonet f «'"" ' '" J^S purpose they will, in the first instance, be formed m squads of not mora than siarteen men in smgle rank. 1 aoo PART 111.— BirLl IXEBClSKi. Method of TMc»i«j;.-The recniitt will fint be **"«»»» the ..^'■ae in slow and quick time by number., after wh«h theV wUl be taught to perform them, JuiiKm^ thc.r own time Tn the review exercise, and ^vlth such vanat.on from the rS^.l« order of the drill a. the instructor may require, freauently chanirinB quickly from one movement to anotr C2..-In atWninR a Rood and firm position, ca.* must be taken not to allow the limbs to be riRid, as any stiffness will prevent the promptness of action requisite to «'^O.SVlt];''CL.-In order to teach the recruit to deliver the thrust in a proper direction, a cross bar unon poles may be erected, from which balls can be suspended, and a squad beiuR drawn up in front should be practised in aivinR point at them. * 2. Preliminary Drill. The squad having fallen in in single rank as above directed, will be formed into two deep, as follows :— Pr^are for 1 jy 1,4 fljgg gt^nd fast, left flies face to I the right about. r Left files move four paces to the rear, \ halt and front. As usual Bayonet- Exercise. r As usual. In the Bayonet exercise, \ this is called the " First Position." .} Caution. Q»iic/i;-3farcA. Port-Arms. Charge- Bayonets, Preliminary Drill in Slow (or Quick)Time. j . . , , 1 * The feet will be kept at right angles to throughout the following exercises. *„ * ,„ •* r Draw back the right foot twf nty-four inches, the body resting upon It, the J heels in line with each oth<*' both kiM*« "S bent, and kept well apart, the wght directly over the foot, the left easy and { flexible, i)ointing to the front. each other Second' PoiUion. Thii Dc re Sh t lirLI BXSKCIRKR. e recruiU will flr»t be teught the sk time by numben, after which rforin them, iiid((inp their own and with such variation from the as the instructor may require, y from one movement to anoth'T a good and firm position, ea^-e )W the limbs to be ripcld, as any iromptnoss of action requisite to .—In order to teach the recruit [iroper direction, a cross bar unon 1 which balls can be suspended, lip in front should be practised in liminary Drill. len in in single rank as above tto two deep, as follows ;— t files stand fast, left files face to it about. files move four paces to the rear, d front. sual. isuttl. In the Bayonet exercise, called the " First Position." a. t at right angles to each other exercises. w back the right foot twr nty-four , the body resting upon it, the n line with each oth»" both kne^ and kept well apart, the right y over the foot, the left easy and e, pointing to the front. BAYONBT on iWOBn BAYON«T ■XBBCIHK. Third Second- Pontion, Advance. Retire. Dnuble- Advance. Double-Retire, [ 201 r Advance the body by extending the Position. \ right Ug and bending f"'«''^''» ^J" '"^ l leg without moving or raising the feet. As before. Move forward the left foot six InchM, and follow with the right the same length ° Sttp back with the right foot six inchw, and follow with the left the same length ° Bring up the right foot to the left, and step out again with the left to the " Second Position." , ^ ., . i,* Hring the left foot back to the right, and step back again with the right to the t •• Second Position." .v i «» r Bring up the right heel to the left, Fiftt-PotitioH. ■< otraightening the knees. Shoulder-Ayma. As usual, resuming the proper front. Order-Arm. As usual. *in fhtanrihe fotloSg drill, each movement will be related M often as may be^ecessary, but the recruit mut norckept too long in the same position ; and when it is neLssnrfXr an awWard man to repeat any particular por- Son of^ie driU, the rest should be allowed to stand at ease. 3. Guards and Points, by Numbers. AHention. "l Shoulder-Ami». U, „8ual. Pori-ArtM. Charge-Bayonets. J Guards and T Points by Num- L Caution. bers t in Slow [ (or Quick) Time. J te : 20i *. ■= GMard, Point. Jjow-Guard. Point. Tuo. High-Guard. Point, Two. PAST UI.— 'BIVLB ■xaROisasi Fall back to the " Second Position," with the knees well apart, the back and neck bent and chest drdwn in, the rifle retaining the position of " Charge Bayonet," except that the right ^st will be upon 'he upper part of the hip, the left elbow close to and in front of the body, the point of the bayonet directed towards the height of a man's breast. Plate XVIII.. Fig. 1. ' Without quitting the hold or losing the balance of the rifle advance it gradually to the full extent of the arms ; at the same time incUne forwards to the " Thh-d Posi- tion," the right elbow rather under and close to the stock, and lower the her^, as in taking aim. Plate XVIII., Fig. 2.^ Resume slowly the position of" Guard. ■ Bring the rifle to the " LoW Guard " by turning the sling uppermost, and raising the butt and right elbow as high as the head, the back of the hand towards the right ear, and the bayonet pointing down- wards to the front. Plate XIX., Fig. 1. " As before, but downwards, and as the rifle gradually descends, turn the barrel upwards. Plate XIX., Fig. 2. Resume the position of the "Low Guard." „. . >, ,,, Bring the rifle to the "High Gumd" by lowering the right wrist to the hip ; the left hand to be opposite the breasti Plate XX., Fig. I. , As before, but upwards. PlateXX.jFijf .2* Resume the position of th« "High Guard." { { ^a ■xsROtsaSi . to the " Second Position," ees well apart, the bock wad ,nd chest drdwn in, the rifle the position of " Chw^e except that the right Mmst n 'he upper part of the hip, w close to and in front of the loint of the bayonet directed J height of a man's breast. quitting the hold or losing the the rifle advance it gradually xtent of the arms ; at the same forwards to the " Thbd Posi- right elbow rather under and B Stock, and lower the her^, C aim. Plate XVIII., Fig. 2. lowly the position of" Guard." ! rifle to the " LoW Guard" by ! sling uppermost, and raising nd right elbow as high as the lack of the hand towards the id the bayonet pointing down- e front. Plate XIX., Fig. 1. e, but downwards, and as the lly descends, turn the banrel Plate XIX., Fig. 2. the position of the "Lov/ le rifle to the " High Gxuai " 5 the right wrist to the hip ; lud to be opposite the breaati Fig. 1. . . - !, but upwards. PlateXX.,Fi^.2i the position of th« " High BAYONET OR 8WOBD BAYONBT EXBRCI8B. 205 PLATE XIX. Fig. 1. #(^^ \ \ LOW-OUARD. Fig. 2. «f^ VOINT. 9^^T III.— Iil»I'» «»BBCWH8. If LB IKBBCISBB. BAYONET OB BWOBD BAYOKBT MXBBCTSB. 80? roiMT, iioe '»A«T 111.— WPI-* ■X«B018M. T s RIFLB ■XBEOISBS PART III. — RI»LB KXFnCISES. PLATE XXI. '>:-l uiiAU-r-viutv. IVLR BXRnCIRGS. TE XXI. !AU-1'AK11Y. BAYONKT OB 8W0BD BAYONBT KXBBC18B. 211 .;i/iC :rviJ*i •tf..'e. v2 PART III. — RIPLR BXERCI8EB. PLATE XXII. Head- Shorten Ti Gui Should Order Stand i Whe practice instead The : n man when 9' below ; on a li bayone the ril' guards rifle wi PLR BXERCI8EB. K XXII. IBN ABMS. DAYONET OH SWORD DAYONBT EXKIICISK. 313 {Raise the rifle, turning the a,\ii\f( up- wards till the left wrist is as hinh us, and opposite to, the forehead ; the hutt slantint,' downwards. Plate XXI. Two. Return to the " tlixh (Juai-d." Throw back the rille to the full extent of the right arm, lowering the point of the bayonet direct to the front, tliu liarrel resting upon the left arm, just above the elbow ; and carry back the body by extending the left leg. Plate XXII. ■ As before, direct to the front, as in i Plate XVIII., Fig. 2. Return to the " Shorten Arms." As before. Shorten- Arm. * Point. Two. Guard. Shoulder- Arms. ^ Order-Anns. V As usual. Stand at-Ease. J , . t i When it is necessary to repeat a thrust in the above practice, the command "As you were" will be given instcod of " Two." , , , The first guard and point are mteiided to be used against a man on foot, on level ground; the low guard and point when standing on a height, .such as a parajjct, ag.iinst a man below ; the high guard and point against a man standing on a height, or against a mounted man. The thrust of a bayonet or lance can Iw pan-ied by a slight movement of the rille to the right or left when at either of the three guards. In order to protect the head from a sabre cut, the rirte will be raised to " The Head Parrj-." 1. Guards and Points in an Ohlique Direction by Numbers. Attention. Shoulder-Arms. Port- Arms, Charge-Bayonets, J p 3 ■ > As usual. •2\4 rVKT III.— ItltLK BXERCISEg, Vuriiitions of Guard imd Point by Xumltfi- in Sliiu! (or Quick) Time, 11 ne, J Cuiition. As liffori'. r Kcppitij^ the feot steaily, and retainlni^ J ;lic position of "Oiianl," turn the bodj ^ to tlie rli/lit front, so as to present th( L bayonet in that direction. , As bil'ore, to the ri^ht fiont. Uetnrn to " (iuard " to tlic ri^ht fron*. {Turn the body as before, but to tht left front. As before, to the left front. Return to " Guard" to the left front. As before, to the left front. As before, to the left front. Guard, Right. Point. Two. heft. Point. Two. Lf.u-Guard. Point. Two. Hiyh-Guard. Point. Two. Right. Point. Two. Low-Guard. Point. Two. Guard, ^fiouhler-Jrms. Order IStaiid at 6. Points to the Rear by Numbers, In order to bring the body and limbs into equal action on loth sides, the jireceding practices should be perfoiir.cd .... ^ r-Jrms. T -Arms, y ut-Ease, J } r Retaining the jmsition of the " High \ Guard," turn the body to the right front. As before, to the right front, f Return to the " High Guard " to the \ right front. As before, to the light front. As lipfore. As usual. r with thi faced al Altei Shoulde Port' Chn Bay The cxercis Gu( Abot The havini practi in N(i the til part, motic ment. Th rank rank Tl KI.K EXCRCISeg. dilution. { the feet hteady, and retaining DH of " Guard," turn the hodj lit front, so as to jjrcsent th( I that direction. , re, to the ri^ht ftont. to " (iuurd " to tlie right fron*. he body as before, but to thf re, to the left front. to " Guard " to the left front. re, to the left front. re, to the left front. [if{ the jiosition of the " High urn the body to the right front, re, to the right front, to the " High Guard " to the t. re, to the right front, re. !. Rear by Numbers, ly and limbs into equal action : practices should be perfonr.cd nAYONlT OB SWOBO BAYONET BXERCIRR. 215 with the right slioulder and foot foremoit, the squad being faced about, as follows •.— Allention. ^ I'oTt'Armx, VAa usual. Charge- Thc caution will bo given as before, according to the exercise which is to bo performed. Guard, As before. , „ Straighten the knees and raise the rifle per- pendicularly in front of the centre of the body, at the same time turn to the ritfht about upon the heels, the right foot pointing to the rear, the left foot to its left, and smurtlv changing About. •{ the hold of the rifle with the right hand at the balance, and grasping the smiill of the stock with the left hand, sink down again to the position of " Guard," by bending the knees, and bringing the weight of the body on the left leg. 6. Exerciser in Quick Time. The movements detailed in the ]>receding numbers having been taught in slow time, they will next be practised in quick time, that is, the movements explained in No. 2 will ne mode more rapidly, and in Nos. 3 and 4 the thrust will be delivered quicker, enpecially at the latter part, and in withdrawing the rifle on the word Two, the motion will also be quicker, especially at the commence- 7. Bayonet Exercise in Single Rani. The guards and points will also be practised in single rank without intervals, the squad being re-formed in single rank for that purpose. _ The whole of the practices detailed in Nos. 2, 3, and 4 L 'iM' "fliifiBiSl 216 .PABT III.— BIFLB EXKRCI8K8. wiUthen be perfomied. after which the squad will be brought to its proper front from the position of board, asfoUows: — ,. ^ ■, About. As before directed. Shoulder-Arms. "{ - Order-Arms. i^Aa usual. Stand at-Ease. J 8. Hetncto Exercise. In the review exercise the soldiers will perform the second motion, judging their own time without the word Two, the point being Jivin, and the rifle drawn back to the position from which it was delivered in quick, but marked tune. For this exercise the squad, company, or battalion will be drawn up in line. ^^ ^^^^ ^^^ ^^ ^^^ ^^^^^ ^^^ ^^^^^ J fast ; the remainder, including the colour party, the captains, coverers, and super- numerary rank, go to the right about. The files which have faced about will move direct to the rear ; the left files of the front rank, four paces; the right files of +he rear rank, seven paces ; the left files of the rear rank, eleven paces ; the colour party, captains, and coverers eighteen paces, and the supernumerary ranks fourteen paces ; each man halting and fronting at his proper distance. Mid the ranks dressing by the nght : after the captains have moved back as above directed, they will move to the rear of the centre uf their companies. Caution. . , f Seize the small of the butt with the Guard. \ right hand, and come down at once to L the position of "Guard." Prepare for Bayonet Exercise. Qukk-March. * Review Exei'cise. fi EXKRCISRS. BAYONKT OR BWOBD BAYONET EX8RCI8K. 217 which the squad will be tn the position of " «"""1 " ■• Guard,' icted. Exercise, idiers will perForm the second le without the word Two, the J dr&wn back to the position quick, but marked time. , company, or battalion will files of the front rank stand iiainder, including the colour aptains, coverers, and super- ink, go to the right about, which have faced about will to the rear ; the left files of rank, four paces; the right rear rank, seven paces ; the the rear rank, eleven paces ; party, captains, and coverers ices, and the supernumerary teen paces ; each man halting ig at his proper distance, and cTressing by the right : after IS have moved back as above ley will move to the rear of )f their companies. ! small of the butt with the , and come down at once to I of "Guard." Point. ■ Deliver the point to the front, rest a pause of slow time, and return to "Guard," each movement bemg swiftly I and smartly executed. I Tlie remaining' ;ltswillV performed mh^^^^^^ \Guard ^^\Ppf-J2!' pZt Low-Guard, Point. HtyA-Guord, Point. KtpM, rotm. ^ Guard. About. , nerformed with the line will be formed as f«"°';^;-Q„..jt_3/„rc;..-The ranks ' Order-Arm. As usual. Stand at-Ease. As usual. 9 Beview Exercise in two Ranks. The exercise f^^ould al«> be pn^s^d in^^^^^^ out intervals. thu3.= 7*^« tCret£ Section, will receive with intervals descnbed in the Feceonw ^^ ^^ich the front and rewr at the same time. 10 Revifiw Exercise in Quick Time. motion. ai8 PART IV. FORMATION AND EVOLUTIONS OF A BATTALION. GENERAL PRINCIPLES. Application of Squad and Company Drill. — The evo- lutions of a battalion are effected by a combination of the minor movements that have been described in the [ squad and company drill. The rules already laid down in Parts I. and II. for the positions and movements of officers, non-commissioned officers, and privates, are applicable, with very few exceptions, to all the movements of a company, when in the battahon. As they have been fully explahied, it will not be necessary to repeat them in this Part, but .iny deviation from thein will be distinctly specified. n. Battalions to moce as component Parts of a Brigade.-r^ The formations and movements of a company are explained in Part II., as having reference to the evolutions of a bat- talion ; in like manner the evolutions of a battalion should be performed with a constant view to the more extended movements of a brigade. Commanding officers, there- fore, when drilling their battaUons sinj. r, should accustom themselveg to make their changes of pu Mon, and their for- mations, on fixed battalion points, dressed on previously determined alignments. iri.mn"^,"" 919 18 EIT IV. D EVOLUTIONS OF [TALION. PRINCIPLES. I. nd Company Drill. — The evo- . effected by a combination of it have been described in the The rules aheady laid down in tions and movements of officers, Mid privates, are applicable, with the movements of a company, they have been fully explained, epeat them in this Part, but any distinctly specified. II. ymponent Parts of a Brigade.-r^ lents of a company are explained rence to the evolutions of a bat- evolutions of a battalion should itant view to the more extended Commanding officers, there- ttalions sin;, v, should accustom hanges of pc tion, and their for- n points, dressed on previoudy OBNBBAL PBINCIFLHS. III. ^ . WTorrf, 0/ Comm««rf.-Words of commandj^^eg;^^^ a. dScribid in the K/^^^ff^S t g vf^ command 1 commanding f ''^'l^J^^^d tv L^""^'^''' °^ "^^^ "°'^'' ' iniiH pnouiih to ne neara ny !•">- i who mTbe dependent on hjs^movements. , «^ - 1 The field ofiicera and adjutant. Mounted Offieers.-l. ^^''/X times to be mounted, in when with the ^'^"'^^•''"'/rt „o nTs and pivots, correct order to take ui; g™""'^' £ '^ 'They«l>oulcl always know mistakes, and '«rculate orders ii y companies, the number of files in t^« b,^""^^;";^ ^" „iUd for the whole and be able to take up t^^^^^^^.i^'elone by counting the or any part of its front. ^ ^^^ "^^J •„ . ^„t the eye will bo strides of their horses when cantenng^^ .J ^^^ found the most convenient and accurate g .^^ ^^^ distances. The nvajo^s anj ajj;^'^^ ;i^,J;,e to V com- marking pomts, must f "'^'^^^'^'^.^e, and move to their manding officer during a rnancemn, places when it is done. „-p<,pnt the senior captain ^ 2. When only one major '^ P^^^"*,;"^^ 'his cannot bo should, if P''«'ti«'t^^,\\rre Icerf the?^^ done, the acyutantwiU take the ptece rt J^^^ ^^^ ^^^_ if onlyone mounted officer sp^«e";' dress the coverers manding °ffl;«\^^,°i"'XPdSn^ points, as may be re- from either flank or t" 8"^ nisxa i dressing the quired; the commander must also as^^^^^ j^, that coverers, and the seijeant-major wu oe duty so far as it can be performed on toot. ... ^ Gi^n, P-'-When -ointed offl^^^^^^ must place t^"' J°'rdt ftoS^nto or forming bne »or::;^Sdr;v5ne'^dS7atln^^^ fo^ th. 220 PART IV. — BATTALION. alignment. The dismounted points will be given, as described in Part II., General Principles XIX., Rule 3, by the Serjeants, whose bodies wdll be dressed in the same line as the horses' heads. (^ VI. Alignment and Points of Formation. — 1. An ali||^i)ment, as explained in Part II., is the imaginary straight hne that lies between any two given points. The extremity of the alignment upon which a formation is made, and from which all intermediate points are dressed, is called the Point of Appui. 'le other extremity, upon which the line, or inter- mediate 4 jints, are dressed, is called the Distant Point. 2. To enable intermediate points to take up their covering correctly in an alignment, a second point will occasionally be required outside of the point of appui, as a guide to the distant points ; this point must be correctly dressed on the prolongation of the alignment. By means of successive points covering on this base, a formation may be prolonged m a strtught line, to any extent 3. In the deployment of a single battalion the base I)oints of the company of formation, which must be cor- rectly dressed from the point of appui, will be a sufficient guide for the coverers of the remaimng companies. 4. When battalions, or companies of a battalion, t-ome up successively into line, the outward flank of the last formed and halted body is always to be considered as the point of appui for the succeeding one. 5. Soldiers must always look towards the battalion point of appui for their dressing. (). The dressing and covering of all p'-.ots and points must be ccnected by a field officer, from the point of appui. 7. As a genual rule, the nugor nearest to the point of fonnation will dress the coverers or pivots. The senior Ba to be and Part Co capts wiU both man thee Or be a hold L iATTALION. I points will be given, A3 il Principles XIX., Rule 3, wdll be dressed in the some nBNERAL PRINCIPLBS. ^rmation. — 1. An alignment, imaginary straight line that lints. The extremity of the .tion is made, and from which essed, is called the Point of ipon which the line, or inter- called the Distant Point, )ints to take up their covering icond point will occasionally it of appui, as a guide to the at be correctly dressed on the it. By means of successive t formation may be prolonged b- i single battalion the base mation, which must be cor- of appui, will be a sufficient imaining companies, janies of a battaUon, come up rard flank of the last formed >e considered as the point of k towards the battalion point ing of all p'-. ots and points doer, from the point of appui. otgor nearest to the point of erers or pivots. The senior 221 major will dress the coverers or pivots when the formation is on the centre of the battalion. 8. 'ITie adjutant will mark the outward flank of the battalion when a distant point is required. When the formation is on the centre, the junior mi\jor will mark the left and the adjutant the right of the battalion. VII. DegreesofMu)ck.—l. The slow step is only applicable to purposes of parade. 2. The quick march is the usual pace to be applied to all general movements of battaUons or greater bodies in column or line. 3. The double march cannot be applied to the move- ments of large bodies of troops for a longer distance than is required in a charge, or a short rush to seize a position j it may be used occasionally in the movements of companies, sub-divisions, or sections, during the intern J formations of a battalion. VIII. Bayonets to be fixed. — Field movements and firings are to be performed with fixed bayonets, except by rifle corps and by other troops when acting as light infifintry. See Part II., General Principles, XIX., Rule ». IX. Covering Serjeants.— As a general rule, whenever the captain moves from the front rank tho covering seijeant will take his place and preser^'e it till he returns j when both move out during a formation in line, the rear-rank man of the pivot ffle will move up and keep the place for the captain. X, Order of Companies to be changed. — A compAny must be accustomed to move in all the different positions it can hold in the battalion; the order of the oompaniea should 222 PART IT.— BATTALION. therefore be changed freauently, and each company in turn he ordered to lead the column. 'hey may, if 'f.^^'^i^'i/this Lt f in Une, the officers iStion 2 rf this P^. if the battalion is s.mply mverted it is not necessary to re-number. A Battalion dispersed, »-^-«^^««^--,^,^£°redt"!n frequently be practised in XT„vS« sSar^ & confusion ; for this purpose, ^'^^ J";^'?"^^';^^ ^^ing towards he placed at quarter d.«^ |t^* ^^iU then sound thk the supposed ^nen-y 5 Jf J''K''^ J ^^e coverers will ASSEMBLE, or ^\^ ^^'^^ZmY^H form on Hs covering J^feSCdSwi^r^^^^^^^ SSnIit the offi^^ -^"^'- A Battalion on Pabaue. sounded. EH . — BATTALION. ently, and each company in turn mn. -A battalion must be practised in verted order, and in wheelmg into When companies lose their order, ,vill take post as in column right IV may happen to be in front; 11 oif afresh from the front, as his Part ; if in line, the officers leir companies as usual, and they from the right, as directed in f the battalion is simply inverted imber. XII e-asse^iblinc/.—A. battalion should assembling when dispersed or in % the covering Serjeants should farst nee right in front, facing towards he bugle wiU then sound the I S FORM ON THE COVERERS Will company will form on jts covering he general principles of Fart 11. colour' party will always movo formation to another, by word ol r can-ying the Queen's coloitr. LION ON PaBA.uk. ttaU^on Parade in Open Column, ron^— Plate XXIII. jen inspected by squads on their tm company on the Close bemg •K34 •lO-fl -tOfl I— ( -n HO-fi -n o 4-1 •Kf}l £313 Alia ^H iTSrSSihit ^v^sseg^^sszs^i ft . 4. 3^ i"i 'imi/i'iiii'i'i I ' i,A^ dii> A A4 A 6 224 PART IV.— BA+TALIOM. As* open CO Com the bat desirab with CO The directei tion of flanks on an; ■*■- ■ from t being On march wiUbt Eve Seotio forme right, betwe men^ Willi pace andi Th is on ':i' semo y" of th from adjul centi 1 retJn ■ ■ L — BA+TALIOW. BATTAUON OH PABADB. 2!K» As » ifetwnd rule, a battiJion wiU aswnnble on p«»de in open column right in front. SiSirtrat" bSfon should be accustomed to exerc«. wtth companies of unequal strength. beinir wheeled mto Une. . ^fiflh files from the pivot flank. The usual po,.ofthe.»mm«^^offi^^^ is on the pijtJ'SlS^'^^^^v^ Xk 'of the centre Bcmor nuHor, two pacM .V^" . Ve second major, two paoea of the riSht wmg. and *^5,f„*J' "^°^e left ^ng. ^The from tt'^»v«se flarft oMha^B^nJj^f J^ adjui»ntispostedtwop«esfi«m^e«v ^^^ I f iWA'":" ? .rii..i'J'- ?■ ' >."!!'■ ' ' L BAVt {V.-i-BATTALIOM. of the pivot flank of tha Mcond oomoMiy flram the front, to superintend the direction, keeping (dear of the liqe of oQinpany leaderSt When a battalion ii formed sinRly on parade the band and dnimi will be placed in leveral ranks, twelve paoea in front of the Icadinj? companv ; the pioneers, formed two deep, and led by a corporal, will be six paces in front of the band. When i battalion is formed in open column with others, the hand a"d drums will be placed two paces from the reverse flank of the centre of the pattalioq, the pioneer* twp paces frora the reverse flank of the leading companv. When the battalion is manoeuvring the band will remain on the reverse flank, but the drummers, fifera, buglers, and pioneers will join their companies, taking post in the super- numerary rfink. When a battalion is assembled for the purpose of exerdse it will be told off into wings, and the companies numbered from front to rear, odd numbers being right companies, even numbers left. T»LL GPP THB f On the words thlu off thh bat- p ATT A LION. T A LION from the commanding officer, the captains will take one pace to the front, face inwards, and number thusi the captain of the leading company will call out number One, Right company. The captain of number two, number Two, Left company s and so on to the rear of the column, N" 1 , 9, 3, 4, 5, r The oommanding offtcer will pemt name RIGHT wiNQ. the companies which |ure to form the N<» 6, 7, 8, 9, J right wing, and those which are to form lO.LBrr WING. ] the left. He will then give the words ■VIB — FRONT. STES — FRONT, upOR whioD the eaptMM will raaume (heir plaees. ■ATTALION. la Mcond oompMiy flrom the ;tian, keeping luear of the line d siiiRly on parade the band n leveral ranks, twelve paoea any ; the pioneera, formea two vill bo aix paces in front of the formed in open oolumn with will be placeo two pacea bom i of the pattalioq, the pioneera Rank of the leading companT. DEUvrlng the band will remwn druminera, fifers, buglers, and mies, taking post in the super- bled fbr the purpose of exerdse , and the companies numbered mbers being right companies, words TBLL OFF THH BAT- ^om the commanding officer, ns will take one pace to the 5 inwards, and number thusi n of the leading company will tmber One, Right company. The 'number two,»iMmAer Two, Ltft and 80 on to the rear of the nmanding ofiQcer will next name lanies which are to form the tf, and those which are to form He will then give the worda iONT,upon whim the eaptains w tiiw pliMiea. A BAWAMWI OM »A»AD«. **? ^."^rfJn«X »rr .h. c.p.«. m ft""' «' «" ■icond file from the nght, kc ^ On the word march open «'^" ^" ^*^e^^ scHbed in Part II.. ^"^•""pV*'" S'^ll «^ve the stepping back '-"^^'^^..iXinnSwtm during the inspecting olBcer with » "J"*^' '"^^^^ shouldered SJuming their proper places m column. S, 2. Wheelhs into Uwfrm Oftn C"'-™"- ' r Onthewp»dawrr(orRim.T)w^«^^^ INTO WNB, e«ch company will proceed as JtCTQ UNC« wheel ia comptew«; *»'^7'x:-"»-i^„ ^ i. i» FABT rr.—BATTALlOK. T Slitoijf. OUIOK- MAmOH. No—, HaU, Syta—Fnmt. piroto from the war of th« oolamn, and (jive the word Sfadff when they we ia line. On the wordi quick masch, the oom- paniei will wheel as directed in Part II., Section 4 j the covering eeiieantt of all but the leading oompanv, if right ia in f^ont, will wheel with their companieej but if left it in front, they will move up to the right of their oompaniea during the wheel, and preaerve the nlaoe of the captains. The coloun will wneel up into line between the two centre companiee. ^ Each captain will call the numbar of hie company and give the word HaU, followed by the word Dreu, when the wheeling man is two paces firom the flank of the company next in line. Having dressed his men, he will give the word\«ye»-fVoii/, and take post on the right of his firont rank. The pivot man ofeach company must keep up his right arm until the company that has wheeled up to him receives the words Eye»-Front. The captun of the company that wheels up to the centre will oreis the colour party with his own men. A battalion in line mav be told off from the right in the same manner aa it is told oB in column, the oaptaina taking a pace to the (tout and facing to the left. For wheelmg into 0pm Colmmfrom Jam, tee p. 277, f . 26. For eurre< fonuei advan Mt moat uf ni Boldic In 01 it is sionc the ] in n Hon' BATTALION. II the rear of the eolumn. he word Staadff when they ut ordi QUICK MAKGH, the oom- wheel u directed in Part II., the covering sei^jeante of all iding oomi>any, if right ii in wheel with their companiee; it in front, they will move up it of their oompaniea during and pteeenre the place of the The colours will wheel up into in the two centre companiei. ptab will call the number of jiy and give the word Haii, ly the word Dreu, when the man is two paoee firom the the company next in line, essed his men, he will give the kJ^o«<, and take post on the m ftront rank. The pivot mwi mpany must keep up his right the company that has wheded receives the words Evet-Front. in of the company that wheels ) centre will dress the colour I his own men. I told off from the ripht in the in column, the captains taking g to the left. mnfrom Line, tee p. 277, »• 26. LIMI l«OT»»l»NTi. '•^ FORMATION AND MOVEMENTS OF A BA'n'ALlON IN LINE. OKNKRAL PBINCIPLIB. I. jW,i« '/^••iT^t^LeSt^VZunl^uTlL^ E^' r a^Silsf rs Wit tCtroop. could not advance in order. ii r ' , lion when marching m line. III. ^ r; TnTSSeln^thi^ tCusiS pace, to HK l^.^U> te^^p'S'those who are moving on level ground. ^^ for it* instant marob. r 380 I PABT ITt~-BATTAfcIOM. V. . FUmk Bam PoinU oHtf Coii&et».—ln ai deplrtjfmenta, and formations 6i\m6, on either flank ootapany, a Beqeant will be placed in front of each flank file of that company as a base, facing to the battalion point of appui ; a oovermg seneant will also ran out froin eiich company as it wnves within twenty paces of its point of formation, and wiU mark the distance required for his compmY, covarim m the line established by the base points. The base pomts ^11 remain steady until the whole Ime u formed, when the major Who has dressed them will give the word otMdy, on which they will faU in in their proper places. Each covering seqeant who is not marking the base wiU remam hteady Until the secottd cotapany ttom him fBcmVfcU the words E^ei— front, ^hen he will M in. VI. Centtal Ba$i PoiHts.—Vfhm ti litt« is fbrtttfcd oil th« two Mtltft companit* or sub-ditislottll* the centre Mi^^i w«l 0tep tttit, ftKB to hii right, and give ft Centite bM» toMrttj the tfeljeult hi te» ftf hith stepping up to ocottpy ttli pUM*. The covering seijetoits of the two centre contpkiueil Will mark the outward flankc of their reipeotive eoibpiiiiiw, ftwmg inwards; the seqeant-major will move up to the ooverer of the right centre bompany, and will assist m dreMltaR these three base joints. When a ungle •ottpany ttivM • ontral base, a seijeaat will tiurk each of itt fltolis StoiiiR iuwwds. The covering BerieMits of the renuuning mm^iei will take up their covering in gucoewion on tht central base. Points to be kept clear.— A» it is of great importwioe that the base points and coverers of a battahon foftmng line ■hqulci bo JMpt cl«w, oompaniaa must upon aU oco»won« be halted ih twe of ttiem, and tiien be dr«wed up mie line. little di line, tt describt be m&di closing compiU &Bttill battalic and wi^ the wo] tohtdt panics -BATTAblOM. UIHB MOVBMBNTB. Villi B81 1o6itm^.—ln dl deplbyments, bhfflp flank ootapany, a seijeant aoh flank file of that company lion point of appni ; a covering •otn each company as it arrives point of formation, and will for his company, C0Terin|[ in base points. The haae pomts le whole line is formed, when bhem will give the word S«m in their proper places. E it marking the base will remain •inpaiiy from him ffecifiVfcli the ewiUMin. VL \im ft M« is tbimti oft ib« two Wsiottdi the centre B«*j*int will tnd gite ft Centre htM tomMt} the Bppiiig up to occupy his plftbe. the two centre conipftities will of their rMpeotive eottapadies, knt-major will move up to the re tompany, and will assist in joints. When a ringlB wmipany ant trill tttrk each of iti fl«iili0 ring serieMits of the remftining dt covering in lucoewlon on Hm VII. -As it is of great importance that lers of a battidion forining line mnies must upon all ocoftsions be I ihen be drwwd up ioie lin*. villi i little distance h''^S««» *^!lS^d ^tl" side steu. as line* the ert«'J"U ^«^""*o2 Such closing will always descril*d inTar^ II., I'^^^^hfcientK of the battalion. If be made eithCT to or from the o^m« o ^^^ ^.^ closing towards the centre, »«« '^''Pr" «, j,e ^^ stand KlSr^^^a^" r SmtfSame th. .^ paS^ thus, Noi! 1, 2, 3, 4. and 5, &c. FoitMAttoN Arib MoVEMBNtft. •When a battalion is fbrmed »" ^°« *^"" " *°^i be inmJb^L the compajies. ^Ejh -.^P^S ^^ •^^fr.? thfline wwSim Wta UorWm "oiS,'if thetft'of'thXnt rauk, covered by a .Uper^ ""S^loa??^ formed as described in S^onl of this V^lmZ pSS bdjw^n the^° ^'jSdSunt from When necessa^r, a t''**:^""^^;^*"^^ off in column right to left, in the same manner as it is torn on from front to rear. , Viattalion is alone, Fo, the I»«rjLj'SS oSSlyt i« front : W«. FAST IV. — BAlTALlOIf. is ordered to fire or to advance in line, the commMidinK offlW^ usually be in rear of the colours, at about 20 ^e';Scl':Mnr''3r"l' be six P-sin.re-of the centee of the right wing, that of the ««««* ^^^^^ paces in rear of the centre of the left wuig ; the adjutant will be six paces in rear of the colours. . xt,„ «,„*-, „* The pioneers will be assembled m rew of the centee of the right company, formed two deep, and nme paces from ^^'l^Cr^fiT'-and buglers of the b.1^- wjlbe assembled in two divisions, nme paces in rear of the sumt- numa»ry rank of the second compames from the nght ""•The band is placed nine paces from the supemumera^ rank, in rear of the centre of the battahon, two deep, at loose files, occupying no more spwe than is necessMy. The stdf ofacers, consisting of the P^JT^^f/^'B^ assistant surgeon, and quartermaster, wiU be three wces Khind the band. The staff seqeants wUl H f^«f J» »!L of the centre of the battahon in hue with the super- ""bS "mmencing to man(BUV«, the dr«mm«.. fifo^ buglers, and pioneers should be ordered to take post with their respective companies. S. 4. A BattalUm ia IAm tM^ ?P« ^"" ""'^ """"*^ Close Orrfw.— Plate XXIV. ■ 1. Taking Open Order.— On the word ORDEB, each company will proceed as directed in Part II., Section J. except that the right-hand men only, of the rew B.AB BANK rank of each company, »nj *« ^«^°^° TAKB OPKN man of the rear rank of the whole line, "oSr i will ptep back to mark the ground for ■BAVTALION. mce in line, the commajiding t of the colours, at about 20 y rank. for will be six paces in rear of , that of the second nuJor six of the left wing; theac^utant le colours. mbled in rear of the centre of two deep, and nine paces from buglers of the battalion will be nine paces in rear of the super- »nd companies from the tight paces from the supemumeraiy of the battalion, two deep, at re space than is necessary, ing of the paymaster, surgeon, rtermaster, will be three i»ces iS Serjeants will h' formed m attahon in line with the super- aanoeuvre, the drummers, fifers, d be ordered to take post with ►oWnff Open Order and resuming r.— Plate XXIV. nng Open Order,— On the word each company will proceed as in Part II., Section 1, except right-hand men only, of the rear each company, and the left-hand the rear rank of the whole hne, ( back to mark the ground for L . — BATTAtXON. MAKCH. \ UNl MOTHMINTBt the tea nak^ mi thd* flOTerinj #iU be corrected by fue seiieant-major from the riRht; the senior m^or will more up to the right of the front rank , and the iwScona major and adjutant to the lefti ■ On the word march, each company will proceed bb directed in Part II., Sec- tion 1, except that the supernumerary seqeants wiU only dicss the real- ranks of their respective companies. The seqeant- major wfll dress the whole of the Buper- mmerary rank, give t^e words %«- JiVon*, and thenfaU in on the right of the staff seneants. The officers carmng the colours will take three paces to the front, and drcBS with the linn of officers ; the seijeants in their rear stepping up lo replace them in the front rank. The band, drummers, and pioneers Will ifemaln As posted at close ordrar. The senior mrijor will move up on the right of the line of officers, and will dress them; the second major will move up on the left of the line of officers, the adjutant wiU remun on the left ot the front rank* The staff officers, viz., the payiTABter, iilrgeon, assistant surgeon, ind quartermaster, will place themselves on the right of the front rank, at one pace distance. The lieutenant-colonel Wm place himself six, and the colonel, it nresent, ten paces in front of the colours. On the word Steady from the senior mi^or, the flffloers will pert their swords, , wd tvery one will imatin steady. r-i' JSK PA»T IT.— BATTAUOH. d^SSSr.^'iStfo^ed ^o deepjn ej.b flank oMbe Kne, the pioneers wdl bb fomei^ d«^ ^i » '^l of the drummers who are on that flank, »na »«»« ""»* form on the right of the whole, . '2. TaWny CJo«e Order.-On the wort OBD.B. each comimnywiU proved Md^ reoted in Part II., SectioV' P'JkV^X carrying the colours will {««« ^ the ng^ with the rest, the mounted officer. ^ turn their horses' heads to the "g". th« staff and the drummers and pioneers, u on the flanks, fiwe inwards. r On the word march, the whole will re- J sume their places in dose order, each com- 1 pany proceeding as directed m fart 11. BBAR RANK TAKE CL08G- MABCH. BATTAMO HALT, THB u: WILL BB^ ABOUT-i QVIC1 MABC THB LINB WILL AOVANCB. OWICK- MABCU. 8. 6. Advancing and Retiring in Line. 1. Advancing in Line.— On the cau- tion ttom the commanding officer, tM centre seijeant ^ ^^ ,^2^J^ march on, under the supenntei^moe of ft mounted officer, who wiU give the word Steady aa a eigna^ when the hne of direction is determined. On the word MABdta, the whole battar lion win step off, the files touching hghtly towards the centre, the seqeant who is between the colours directing. Ite Bdjeant-major, under the direction of a mounted officer, will remain h^d in rear of the centre, until the "ae hw advanced 20 or 80 paces* to aecettata if 1 ATTAtlOM. wed«ingly.thedivi8ioo8of| , deep on each flank of the. med two dee- on the right ;hat flank, and the staff win ," Close Order.— On the word h company wiU proved Mdi- rt II., Section 1. TheoffloeM rcolourswillfocetothe.igbt sst, the mounted officers w^ .orses' heads to the nght, the ;he drummers and pioneers, u ts, fiace inwards, rord MARCH, the whole wiU re- 1 places in close order, ra^ com- eding as directed m Part 11. fid Retiring in Line. ncing in Lme^On the cau- the commanding officer, tne rieant wiU select points t'l under the superintendence ol ,d officer, who wffl give the idy as a sijpal, when the line tn is determined, word MABCte, the whole battar tep off, the files touching hghtly the centre, the. seneant who n the colours directing, ine oajor, under the dirertion of a officer, will remain ludted in the centre, untfl the tow has 20 or 30 paoea» to ascertain if 1 the direction ot ihe im^'»^ ^" LcSJrect ; he wiU t^'VrtTutSi wiU HALT. \ steady. . . j. Qn the word ' 2. BeHring »» ,^^^^5 face about. RBTii«,thecolow^^^ ^^t. *°^ " ^rSJs tSgh the raTs, «id TQUor will pass ""Tl-^j ;* «» mTienn- ^*^^?fir„Wect^^; THB UMB WILL BB'r"'-^' HtnaT ABOWT-fACK. QUlCK- MABCB. WVTTALION— BAVt—rKOVT VBBPABB TO CHABQB, CBABOB. the former pvmg ^^^^f!^^^. On f^^S«iewordMABCi.thebg^^^ •1 afehe^We%eant in the ViSofthe ««x -Bk^^tK the bat- ,9" *?,,T^?and fi^ ?o the right *^'"i "^^ s^eSnuSTr and mounted about; the seijeani-™^ ,e„ ??''^l.'Sn?thtt^o Vffl« «f *« through the nne, »»» . , j ^^q paces right centre ««»P^y ^^Xards W to the rear, M»done P^ ou ^^ have passed. 8. 6. CTari^i«i? « ^^j.^. j^ Une will r The solders of a battjoninu^^^ charge as descn^d« ?«* *^J;'^„„,is. I, places. BATTALION HALT. PAWf IV.rr-BATTALIQN. ■ On the word iialt> the battalion will hal^ the firont md nsf rank" coining to the shoulder ; and the whole will stand perfectly steady in whatever position _ they may be. 8. 7, Dressing a Battalion in lAne. yf\\m it is necessary to dnss a battalion after aq ^yMC« or fstr^t in line, the oommanding officer will give tOfc words THK BATTALIO?! WILL DBBSB BY THE Biai|T (OT M>t), covkbbbb — packs to thb fbont, on which the oantains, il the battalion is to dress by the right, will take one pace to their front and one pace to thei^ lel^ the coverers moving up into their places; if by the left, the captains will change their flanks, the coverers making way for them by facing to the rear, and then moving up into the places they have left as soon as they have pawed. The captains will remain in rear till the coverers have moved to the f^ont : in both cases the officer on the left of the hne will take one pace to his left, to make room for his coverer to move up into the front rank. Qn the words ouicKr-MABca, the covering seijeants, in- oluding the coverer of the officer on the left of the Une, will saoT9 out straight to their front, with shouldered tufmn, th« K'lVW nwwhw of paces, the captains and the officer on the ft of the line taking ppst as soon as they have moved; the coverers will thai face towwds the named flank, and cover, recovering arms as they face ; when they are in a line, the field officer who has dressed them will give the word Steady. The commanding officer wiU thjn P^e the words auicK MABOH. and enoh c»pt«l», whw within two paces W W»ll pva ^ wflrds No—, Eyes— Front, and fUl in. vcvd HKVPt the battalion will rent and »eap rt^rika coming to ler ; and the whole will stand steady in whatever position )e. BattaHoH tw Line. ess a battalion aft«r aq ^dvfmce manding otBcer will give tbt Ult DBBB8 9Y THE IlIOI|T (OT TO THH FRONT, on whicb tbe to dress by the right, will take id one pace to theiij left, the lieir places ; if by the left, the anks, the coverers making way rear, and then moving up into as soon as they have paq^d. rear till the coverers have moved \^e oi^cer on the left of the line t, to jnake room for his coverer ank- lBcb, the covering seijeants, in- BlceE on the left of the; ^e, will ront, with shouldered VT^S, the captains and the officer on the ; as soon as they have moved ; I tow^u^ds the named flank, and they face ; when they are in a tias dressed them will give the wiU th^n give the words auicK wl)«i| witmn two pacei of ^e mpftny, move oijt, aud ^rw it « d«lfc W will give ^ TWfds Lin. LIN* MOVmBNTS. W1»W »11 have completed their dressing, the field offloer will give » second word Steady, on which the coverers will resume their places in line, the captains makmg way for them, ^ above described, S. 8. Advancing and Retiring by Wings. 1. Firing and Advancing hy Winga.—Tha commanding officer . will give the caution THK hatta- * (.ION WILL riRB AND APVANO« »Y WINGS, on which t> junior qwjor will order the left ' A t' " *W. THB BATTALION WILL riBB AND AD VANCE BY WINGS. Left Wing,— tire a Volley, at — Yards, Jleady-^Pffsent, fiyikt Wing^ By the Left. Quiok — March. f^it Wing^Hait. Shomder—4rm, % the fiight. wick — March. mght Wing^re I Vol' C The instant the ieft iqg bas fired, the senio. iitiiox vilT give the wprds Quick— March to the right wing, and when it baa ad- vanced 30 paces 1 will givfl the word Halt. The left w t, having loaded, will sbooldeF ani dvance, and as the junior major gives the words Qtiiek —March, the senior will order tb« , right wing to fire. In this manner ^ they will move altomatety, each ght Wing F^re passing the other by 30 paoes, the olley at — Yards advanced wing being ordered to &• rr^jp^tidy, frfsent, as the rear wing receives the woids, l_Qu»c* — March. If a battalicn is on the pjarph when required toadvano© by Ws, it wm Pnrt IW hPl^^«'^°* *"J^"L^ oontinue to touch towards the colours ; the centre seijeant leadinir the right wing, and the officer oanymg the wgi- SSS (SJuTthe Irft The adjutant will move in lew of b [ t, ■BATTAUOM. FM»p y ^"K?! ?• C' """* ""^ at any time be brought up in hoe with the other. 8. 9. A BattaUo* in LitupoMring Obstachi. If the obstacles are smaM. and 0PP««*« ,*»^ P^J Pi the battalion, the files whose progress is »nt«~lj« ^ thL, WiU b^eak off in the same "n^"" "^^'^ h*nken dl ftom the flank of a companv m column, me ^™^t thITbstocle is passed, the fOes must move up SSI t£ fr^S ShoulS the breadth of the obst«de be a to d^sS" " the line «lvnce.. the file. vaUform up JnmMsivelv as there is room for them, if it moreasea in JSSS SditionaTflle. wiU at once he broken off. Great SSTusui taken that the men who remam «>«»<»"- Snato move straight to their front, neither closing on the tatS5^ iS byTe men who have fallen to the re«, nor 52Sg Son the remainder of the battalion ahould the obstacle increase in breadth. , ,. . In breaking off. files should turn *owarf».*^ «'[" compaStHuB, i' a« obstacle V^^Si^^SSi^ Xi flanks of two adjoining compames, the files «*™ <»™ SSly TO tlw riJht^U turn to the right and wh«Jto the K^iS thosf of the company ^J^}f^^^ £ Se left and wheel to the right. When theobstade is in fSnt^ the centre of the comply, m a «^!^^^ ^ fflS will turn to the right and wheel to the Irft. aee If a comliany, or subdivUion, is requhed to 1»»«* oj j* wiB i5o~ byf^. « « fl^ ^"^^ successively till they ^^ to a subdivision they will fbrm fbws. 94B PAM IV.-^BATTAL10N. Should a line b« halted while it ia broken bv obitaolei, Huch as ]>oola of water, mnrahes or low bushea, the fllea that are broken off will form in rear of them, in linea parallel to the front ; in thia manner, the line will appear to the enemy as though it were unbroken, and every man will be able to fire. See Plate XXV. When a batteiion is advancing, and the obataolea are auch aa to require all the companies to break into fours, the commanding officer will give the caution, FROM THE RIOHT (or LKPT) OF COM- PANIES. PA88 BY POUHB TO THE FRONT, followea by the words, form fovrs — RIGHT, LEFT — WHEEL, Or FORM FOURS FROM THE RIGHT(orLEFT) OFCOMPANIRB PA88 BT FOURS TO THE FRONT. FORM FOURS — RIOHT, LEFT —WHEEL, or FORM rOURS-LEFT moBT— WBKIL. I — LEFT, RIGHT — WHEEL, and may name < any company to direct thus; No. 4— -COM- PANY OF DIRECTION. The captains will place themselves on that flank of the lead- ing fours v lich is nearest to the company of direction, and keep their distance nrom it, aa fitt as nrcumstances will allow. , When no company is named, that com- pany will direct which would be at the nead of the column if the words front |_ —TURN, were given. When the ground will permit, the companies may be re- formed into line by the words front form — companies, or in DOUBLE TIME, FRONT FORM — COMPANIES; if nccessary, they may be halted and ftvnted into column, and then wheeled into line. When emerging fW)m a wood, the first company that approaches the edge must halt and wait for the rest to come up, they will then move out into the open together. If all »)i« oompanics of ■ battalion letinng in line ne required to break into fSnus, the oommanda wiU be, from TBI pRopiB iuauT'(orfcarr) or ooMFANiifl pam ar BATTALtON. lila it is broken \n olMtMles, es at low Inishet, the flies thftt \x of them, in linee psnllel to 3 line will appe*r to the enemy uid every man will be able to batteiion is advancing, and es are auoh as to require all nies to break into fours, the ig officer will give the caution, RiaiiT (or Lirr) or com- L88 BY FOUHB TO TUB FRONT, y the words, form fours — FT — WHBEL, or FORM FOURS [OHT — WHEEL, and may name nyto direct thus: No.4— COM- )iRECTioN. The captains will selves on that flank of the lead- lich ia nearest to the company a, and keep their distance nrom as nrcumstances will allow. company is named, that corn- direct which would be at the lie column if the words vbomt rare given, mit, the companies may be r^ FRONT FORM— COMPANIES, Or RM — COMPANIES; if necessory, d into column, and then wheeled from a wood, the first company ist halt and wait for the rest to e out into the open together. I battalion retinng in line are \, the oommands wiU be, noU irr) o» coMPAMiB* PAM an ,0«BB TO TH. B.AB. FOBM '""""T^IISbJ""'^ WHBBI,; or »OBM FOUB8-BIOHT. LBFT-WHBBL. When retiring by foure. t^« ^^TS t^wS^ds bS^« to form line, and to <»°^"«?^XTma7 J halted and fronted in column, and *^«°7o£ed to form to the oriffinal front; or they may be ordered t<>««^ ^'^ front by the coinmand woht (« "^^e^" ^^^ sir^? AS cS^;^ resist attack ; it is moreover less liable to loss of distance than the open column, and is applicable to most of the changes of potion of an open column, except the imme- di^ formation of a line to a flank. Movements in quarter distance columns will generally be adopted in the evolutions of a brigade or of larger bodies. VII. Application of the Close Column. — ^The close column will be used when it is necessary to form troops in a small space. It will also be applied when contiguous columns are wheeled into mass, as will hereafter be explmned, but it must not be adopted in the general evolutions of a bzigade or dixdsion. S.\] The ml right in ft cable to tl [solours b from the i S. 12. Fo THK C ytivv c TBK (or TO I man THB CQMPi THE 'WILL TH«: TO avA TAMO RBAB C BBl COK HIGH FA THE V/lhU (or TC DtBI N"— , COM FED ABC 249 BATTAliIOM. J. \umn». — Double colunuia ate attalions, brigades or lines, for icing to the attack, and in cer- lefiles when tiiejr occur in front hat a column in this formation from the centre in half the uld be re-formed from either t is more complicated than a B susceptible of reduction of ed to less than double aectiopa, arise in narrow .pasaes ftosa I- iistance Column,— The qtnrter te convenience of moving in a iity of forming in anr manner ;r less liable to loss of distance is applicable to most of the ten column, except the imme- flank. Movements in quarttt ly be adopted in the evolutions iS. II. Ivmn. — ^The close column will y to form troops in a small ed when contiguous columns 11 hereafter be explained, but the general evolutions of a I COLUMN MOVBM»NTB. MOVKMBNTB. S n. Formatim of a Battalion in Open Column. horn the right of the left centre company. 12. Fofyninff Close or Quarter Distance Column from any more Open Column. 1 1. Closing from the Halt.— A co- ' lumn may ^bi closed to the front rear, or on any named company, it to the rear, or on i. central comp'my, the companies in front wiU be or- dered to face about. , When the column is bemg closed to the front, the covering seijeant of the leading company wil) give abase point, placing lUself six paces m him, and covering on t^e bneof c^- • tains. If it is to be closed to the rear. thecovering ««^««* »{**»? ^"""f: pany wiU place hhnself six paces m J«ar of bis captain, covering m Uke manner. If on ths centi:al company, no point WiU be required as the cap- tains in front and rear of the captain of the named company will be a sut- ficient guide to ea^h other. In each S a field officer will superintend the covering of the captains from t>e battJJion point of appui. THE COLUMN WILL CLOSE TO THK FBONT (or TO aOARTER DISTANCE ON THE PBONT company) ; or THE COLUMN WILL CLOSE TO THE BEAR (or TO aUABTSB DIS- TANCE ON THE BBAB company), BEMAINING COMPANIES MIOHT about- face; or THE COLUMN WILL CLOBU ON (or TO QUABTBR DtBTANCE on) N° — , COMPANY, COMPANIES IN FRONT RIGHT ABOUT-FACE. J iwhe icmaining companies will close on it to thb dis- tance required, and halt as they am v( at their places, by command Arom theii captains. Those which have faced about, if forming on a rear or central company, will be fronted. On the wora Dress, the men will take up their dressing by themselves, the captains looking to their covering. When the movement is completed, the field officer who has superintended the covering wll give the word Steady, and move to his place; the covering seijeant who has given the base point, if one has been required, taking post at the same time. CU>BB TO '. FROMT (or C TO aUARI DISTANCE THE liEAl COMPAI jfo—Ha Dres6 ON THB M. CLOSE TO PRONT (or TO QUAB DISTANCE THE LEA COMPA REMAIN COMPA DOUB 2. Formation of a Close or ^tarter Distance Column.-^ ' The arrangement of a close or quarter distance column will be the same as that of an open column, the distances only being different. The band will be formed in two ranks in the rear when the column is alone or in a line of columns, but in several ranks on the reverse flank when the column is in mass in brigade. In close column the colour party will be formed in single rank, between the two centre companies, the Serjeants of the rear rank being on the right of the front rank if the column is right in front, on the left of it if the column is left in firont. On the march, the m^or of the rear wing will superintend the direction of the column, from the rear of the Ime of captains. S. lb. A QPBt QUARI •WHE? DlgTANl THE- iTVAUOM. word MARCH, the named rill stand fiul, iih« iA:maining will close on it to tht> dis- ired, and halt as they amvi Eices, bjr command ttota theii Those which have faced 'orming on a rear or central will he fronted. On the !S, the men will take up their jy themselves, the captains I their covering, bhe movement is completed, fflcer who has superintended ng wiU give the word Steady, ', to his place; the covering ho has given the base point, been required, taking post at time. COLUMN MOYBIWWW. 0W8B TO THK ~1 3, ^ CohtM on the Mwren ohtingto FRONT (or CI.08. tj^ Fronf.-When " ^olujun on the TO ftUARTJSR march is ordered to close to the front, ISrcaptain of the leading companv. "^on the caution, will give the words No. 1 Halt^Dress. The column will Then be formed as already descnbed. distancb on the lkading company). JJo— Halt- Dress. ON THH MARCH CLOSE TO THB I FRONT (or CLOSE to quarter distance) on the leading COMPANY. REMAINING COMPANIES DOUBLE. |f*_ Qdok. garter Distance Column.-^ or quarter distance column I open column, the distances land will be formed in two ilumn is alone or in a line of on the reverse flank when the In close column the colour rank, between the two centre 3 rear rank being on the right n is right iu front, on the left 1 front. On the march, the perintend the direction of the ine of captains. 4. Closing to the Front without Hali- JOT.-When a column is requured to dose without halting, the eacfing com- «Z will move on steadily in quick- ,C the remaining companies will Zm up in double-time, resummg the nuKei in succession as they gain distance recjuired, by word of com- mand from their captains. « V. A Close or Quarter Distance Column opening from tJie ' *• ^^" ^^1 bS, or from any named Company. ' r I. From the Frmt.-li iromjh. front, on the caution, the covenng fe^ant of the leading. cono^anyw.U felSlnrtoSs^hiStd- distance promI jn/^tA%"V.°' *^:hS • of thecolumn>^rest, his horsey head being also drewed on the line of com- \_panyle»d«9. QPKN to QUARTER (or ■wheeling) IgTANCB PRI TUE-fBONT 262 RBHAININO COMPANIES RIGHT ABOUT — FACK. PART IV.— BATTAMOI*. The leading company will stand fiut,, the remaining companies will be faoed about. itj ' fT'— Halt- Front, Dress. QUICK- r On the word march, the companies MARCH. facing to the rear will step off, the leadei of the rear company marching upon the head of the a4jutant'8 horse. The captun of the second company will count his paoes^ and having gained the distance required, will give the words Halt — Front, Dress, The other captains will commence to count the requisite number of paces, as the previous company receives the word Halt. Each captain, the moment he has ftronted, will correct his covering and remain steady, the company touching Ughtly to him, and taking up its dressing, When the ground is rough the captains of companies may be assisted by their covering seqeants, who will run out in succession, and mark the proper distances, cleat of the flank of the column, the officers halting and fronting their companies when in line with their seijeanta, who will instantly resume their places in the column. 2. Opening from the Rear. — If tiie column is to open ftom the rear, on the caution, the covering seijeant of the rear company will place himself six paces in rear of his captain, covering on him and the other captains, and the a^utant will mark the alignment at the wheeling difl» tance of a company in front of the spot on which the pivot flank of the head of the column will rest. OPXN TO QUARTER (or wherling) distance PROM THE BBAB. TTALIOK. ig company will stand flwt, ig companies will be faced 9rd MARCH, the companies rear will step off, the leadei ompany marching upon the Mutant's horse. The captwn company will count his paces, gained the distance required, 3 words Halt — Front, Dress. captuns will commence tor quisite number of paces, as company receives the word captain, the moment he has{ 1 correct his covering and dy, the company touchmg a, and taking up its dressing. the captains of companies ring seqeants, who will run he proper distances, cleat of )illcers halting and fronting irith their seijeants, who will L the column. J from the Rear. — If the open from the rear, on the covering seijeant of the rear 1 place himself six {wces in aptain, covering on him and ptains, and the a^utant will gnment at the wheeling dia* )mpany in front of the spot e pivot flank of the head of wiUrest. BSMAININO COMPANIES, QUICK — MARCH. N'—Halt. COLUMN MOVBMKNTi. 253 iOn the word march, all but the rrar company will step off, the captain of the leading company marching on the head of the adjutant's horse, each captain in succession will halt the company in front of him, when it has gained its propof distance. He will then fiice about, correct his covering on the base points, front, and give the word Dress to his com- pany. I S Ooenino from a Central Cv»ipany.-lt the column ia r ^Xe a field officer wiU sup«intend the covering lof Se^ptains from the battaUon pomt of appui. I 4 Adeancina in Succession from the fVoB*.— When a Lt*««n Sing in close or quarter distance column, is SSl tol^TSrceTn a more open column, it wiU recewe .a«»i>nNT AT QUARTER (orWHKKLINO) DISTANCE, JMp. amcMAR 'h When the leading company has gamed SSid S^oe, the captain of the B«>ond company L §H PAllt It.— BATTALIOK. the wojdswill be, advancb by succkssivi-. coiipakII|b FHOM THB FBONT, AT auAHTKH (of Will':BLINO) DI8- TANCI, KHAR COMPANIKR -HALT. ITlC mOVemCnt wUl then be perfonned as above described. 6. Opening o» the March by Halting the Rear Company. —When a close or quarter distance column on the inarch is required to open from the rear, on the caution^ opin TO QUAllTBB (or WHEBLINO) DISTANCE PROM TH» RIAR, the rear company will be halted hj the captain. The movement will then proceed as described from the halt. After it is completea, the column may, if nqoired, again be put in motion. 8. 14. Cohmtu inorearing and dintinithing their Fr&Ht, andpaating Obstaolee. 1. Opeti Columnt diminithing Front. — When an op«i column is on the march, each company in succeasion as it arrives at a narrow space or defile, will when necessary diminish its front ; and as each company clears ihe narrow space it must again increase its front. The different methods of increasing and diminishing the front of a company, have been explained in Part II. When halted, the front of all the companies in a column may be diminished to subdivisions and sections at the same time, by word ot command from the commanding offiow, the leaaers of subdivisions or sections giving otaly the words Halt—F^Mt, Brest. When in sections or subdivisions, the boot of companies may again be increased in like mannw, the hiaders of companies or subdivisionn giving the word& Halt— Front, Drat. ^ Cohimna should tlvnjt move t«itn MUrge it front as th# gtoiwd HiH ftdmtt of. 2. Patting < I— When the n Iterrupted byp lare impassaole lobstaclo, whici ■ when practica ■ cloud the line I taken up by tl I a point plaoe( Lhgnment pivc Inecessary. a. Double I double colun I double columi I Part II., Sec i|^ sections n: 'Companies, as Lline or dou files, if r DOUBLB- CiOBS — INI ifT- whe: on as the tfjlour party rank, both r two leading move in one 6 4. Reduct As a genera the pivot £ redueed by i pirotflMikw u lUtiN. UCCKSSIVI'. COiffANllli (or wnt:BLlNO) Dis- t. The movement will ed. Uing the Rear Company, 9 column on the march on the cauttoni opin DISTANCE FROM THI halted b^ the captain, as descnbed from the lolumn may, if nqoired. minithing their FrMt, iaoles. Front. — "When an opm pany in succeaiion as it ue, will when necessary impany clean ihe nanrow nt. lin^ and diminishing the )lained in Part II. le companies in a column and sediions at the same the commandinff officer, ms giving otaly the words tions or subdivisions, the increased in like manner, vidofiuii giving thewoidd IthMliiKeikfitontastiif COLUMN MOVKMKNTfl. 265 12. Pairing Ob»tacle$ when Marching on an Alignment. —"When the march of a column, on an alignment, is m- terrupted by pools of water, or any otlier obstacles which are impassable, the march will be continued direct to that obstacle, which will be passed l)y diverging on all occasions, when practicable, to the reverse flank, in order not to cloud the line of pivots, and the alignment wiU again be taken up by the pivots on the other side of the obstacle, at a point placed for that purpose. When marching on an Alignment pivots should never diverge unless it u absolutely |neces8ary. 3 Double Columns diminishing Front. —A. battalion in double column of companies may reduce its front to a double column of subdivisions or sections, as directed in Part II., Sections 24, 26, and 26, and a double colunm (,£ sections may increase its front to subdivisions, and to Wipanies, as diiected in Part II.. Sections 27, 28, and 29. JVUne or double column may also advance by double fouw t[r flies, if necessary, from the centre by the command bW DOUBLB-rOUKS (or FILKS) FROM THB CBNTRK, FORM «b0B8 — INWARDS (or INWARDS TUBN), BIGHT AND licFT- wheel; but the column should be re-formed as Jwfcn as the ground will admit. In double fours or flies the rSlova party will move between the two centre comprnMcs m &ifflenmk, the front nuik leading, foUowed by the rear rank, both right in front, the Queen'b colour between the two leading fours or files. The supernumeraries wiU also move in one rank between the wings. 4 Reduction of Front to take place on Pivot ^»»*-— As a general rule files should afwavs be broken off from the l«Tot flank. And when the front of a column is iieduWd by formteg subdivisions or sections, those on tac pivot flank will be dfoubled in rear of those on the reverse flank. 2B6 PABT IV.— DATTAIilOM. B. A QtMrler DUtanee Column *"»•»"*'■"«' -'^"!''-r A quarter distance column may ."^Xk bufbton breaking off a file or two from its pivot flank, but beyonu E it Is not Busceptible of a diminution of front A ck'e column cannot ^mini.h it. ftont while it retain, th. formation. ^^^ S. 15. An Open Column c*««?<»^ .^"''''^^ "JlilTi^*/*! on an AUynment, or moving rnto an Alignment by «< Flank March of Fours. . 1. Changing Direotion.-A battaUon mawhing mwluinr ma; change airection by the successive wheel of ita con.. names on moveable pivots round the same point. Shoulc^ thr^Ml bS t« the reVerse flank, the senior »ape™umerane Sttl mrve up and lead during the change of amotion ,bu ^ not necesRa^that they should aU ~verorwhMl o theTsame spot. They wiU retain the reUtive pos tions th^ wereTeld by the reverse flanks when the column «, SSiWM by the pivot flank, and weak companies » ^haWe past the wheeling point before they whe Song companLs will wheel a little before they come up ZXt on the word Forward the pivot flanks will stall "Th;*word FORWARD wiU be given to the le»^ng oomp*L, by the commanding officer ; but each <»J°l»°y *»fJX*M ^U receive that word from its own leader M its ftronf bMomes perpendicular to the new direction. 2 Ckanaina Direction into a n«w Alignment. — H tm chige ofSStion is to bring the IjivotAank of the cohun. onTii alignment, previous to fonnmg hne ; t^a oaptom o the lea^Eg company on entering the •liy™«'* °°^.? Ze iSJIo the^poU of fonnation ^ S^^^? unon them, selecting intennediaw points if necessary, w ^iS'ilptiuns « they enter the dignment must b If ^ATTAIilON. fo/unm tUmnishinff Front.— may reduce its front bj ita pivot flank, but beyoni a diminution of front. A iti front while it retains thu' ging Direetim, and tHaroking mg into an Alignment by tht battalion marching in columr successive wheel of its com' und the same point. Shoulc ak, the senior supemumerariea ( the change of direction ; but r should all cover or wheel oi itain the relative positions th flanks when the column «; nk, and weak companies W eling point before theywheJ a little before they come up ard the pivot flanlu will still' be given to the leading compai! but each company that foUo%i I its own leader aa its twni e new direction. to a tt«to Al^piment. — If thi ig the pivot flank of the columi } forming line ; the captain o tering the alignment must a1 fonnation and march steodil] lediau) points if neceaaaiy ; thi enter the alignment must b< ^, IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) <■ *^.^ A^I^- 1.0 1.1 I^IM 125 ■50 ^^ mHI m 140 12.0 11.8 111.25 1 1.4 ||.6 1111—= 1111== liss < 6" ► r L Hiotographic Sciences Corporation 33 WiST MAIN STRICT WEBSTER, N.Y. MS80 (716) •72-4503 iV k \ ^^ ■nib CIHM/ICMH Microfiche Series. CIHM/ICIVIH Collection de microfiches. jt Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions / Instltut Canadian de microreproductions historlques ! pAbT iv;— BATTAtlON. 1" M n B B) m H p t- H « 'A H Is ' M O i^i H H ^ one « H a d 55 a s g H i H 5- >j Is 3 8«8 §§§ O H g MS MB v- -"" 'i '. ^ ■ ; ' .!. ' -J ■ ljatb4 ^^-^ rt'ii.fi'aiij ,,^' a A la n d ...o, ATTAMON. COLUMN MOVBMKNTB. ^' \--.-ife' 3«) PAlttf IV.— BATTALION. PLATE XXVII. A QCABTBB DISTANOB COLUMN WHBELIiro TO A rLAKK. -ra H -«p -ra -®l ,iS..^_-*(i. -(3 itFi^— -Ka-i^ia).-^ t-:4^ ff at the same moment, each ig round on the circumference , of which the pivot man who to the left Is the centre; nearest the pivot flank of jany must keep up their left as much as possible, at the ment of the wheel, so as to Icient ground to the flank roid diminishing the distance ompanies. The captain of tne )mpany will move oack to his ng the wheel. mmanding officer will ^vt the ,T when he sees that fcie lead- any il cr apleting the wheel, lime the re jr companies should circleG rounJ into the new posi- I heuteaants will resume their column» tl a men will face to per front, and remain steedv i word DRUBS is given, in which wiU take up their dressing by flank. OObVMN MOVBHINTSk 1163 COLUMN— KIOHT or LBPT< •—WHBBl.. COLUHN- rORWABS. ' 2. WTieeHng on a MoMobk Pivot.— 'A column on the march will change its direction on a moveable pivot on exactly the same principles as it wheels on a fixed pivot, the rear companies making a half turn instead of a half fa(?e towards the outward flank, and the pivol man ct the column moving Mrith a very short pace round the wheeling point, keeping nis shoulders square with nis compfuiy. Ilie covering seijeant of the leading company will not move out. On the word forward, eveiy man will turn to his front and move on by . the pivot flank. During these wheels, the outward flank directs, (whether on a halted or moveable pivot,) and to abjure the proper execution of the wheel, it is indispensably requisite that the outward flankL of companies should carefully preserve throughout the wheel their distances, and the same relative positions and covering, on the leading company, that they neld previous to being put in motion; the remaining files will be guided by the outward flanks of their respective companies and wiU. conform to them during the whed. Tne m»or of the leading wing will place himself on the outward flank of the leading company, to regulate its pace, in so doing he must Watth the leaoer on the outer flank of the rear company, who will continue to march with a full pace of 3(^ inches throughout the wheel, and on whose moveirents the march of every man in the column should be ma le to depend. The major of the rear wing will place hnnself in rear of the wheeling flank of the rear company, to gee that the outer files retaSi the relative positions they occupied before commencing to wheel. The at^tant will see that the compaoies close up to theit leading files. The » 2 W' MMi^lW 204 PABT TV.— ■ATTAlilON. mtiot of the Ifading v/ina wUl cover the captains from the front when the column hi3t«. .,.,,, i- 'ITieso wheels should frequently be proctiBca ni double time. A double column when dosed to quarter or close distance may wheel in the same manner as a single column. S. 17. A Close or Quarter Dittance Column taking Ground to a Flank vsheeling to the Right or Left. A column taking ground to a flank will wheel to the right, or left, on the principles laid down in the preceding section, the leading files or fours of aU the compames wheeling round the pivot in the same manner as the lead- ing company of a column is therein directed to wheel, the men on the outward or wheeling flank of the column preserving their distances and covering as therein de- scribed, the remaining men of the column being guided during the wheel by them. When in fours or flies the ofllcer leading each company, if not there already, will place himself on the flunk of the leading file or four nearest to the pivot, in order that he may be able to keep his distance from that point. 8. 18. A Close or Quarter Distance Column changing Front to the Rear by the Wheel of Subdivisions round the Centre.— Plate XXVIII. 1. From the Halt.— On the caution, the coverers of the front and rear com- panies will mark the two points (a. b.) for the subdivisions to wheel upon ; one, in •i front of the inner file of the reverse sub- ' division of the leading company; the other, in rear of the inuor file of the pivot subdivision of tha rear company, both facing u wards towards the column. CHANGE FRONT TO THE RGAn BY THE WHEEL OF SUBDIVISIONS ROUND THE — CENTRE. bAttamow. ill cover the captains from the itly be practiscil in double time, sea to quarter or close distance cr as a single column. istance Column taking Ground to the Right or Left. to a flank will wheel to the es laid down in the preceding r fours of all the companies the same manner as the lead- is therein directed to wheel, wheeling flank of the column and covering as therein de- of the column being guided When in fours or files the , if not there already, will place leading file or four nearest to lay bo able to keep his distance Hstance Column changing Front 'heel of Subciiviiiotta round the I. n the Halt.— On the caution, ers of the front and rear com- II mark the two points (a. b.) for tvisions to wheel upon ; one, in the inner file of the reverse sub- of the leading company; the rear of the inucr file of the pivot 3n of tho rear company, both | wards towards the column. COLVMM MOVBMVNTa. 866 PLATE XXVIII. A COUIMN AT QUAllTKB DISTANCE OIIANOINO FRONT TO TIIK RKAK n\ TIIK WHKICL OF SUnDlVISIOMS ROUMD TUB CBHTRG. ^gliJiWW ' ! wmmim^^msmmm mmt (or LI HUBDIVI BIOHT / — FAC (or Dou MAR HALT— DHE OHAMOB TO Tra BY THE OFBrtBDl HOUNl OXMTBE (OTLGn TIBIOm ABOUT- VKONT- Inti BATTAUOM' OOttTMN MOVlMBim. 2(17 The commanding oScer will then face the reverse subiUvisions to the right about, ^ the lieutenants taking post on their out- ward flanks. On the word march, the subdivisions will step ofP and wheel in succession round tne points, touching to their in- ward flanks ; as each completes its wheel of half a circle, it will move to its front at a full pace, still feeling inwards ; the inner files of the right and left subdivisions ^passing close to each other. " When the countermarch is completed, on the words halt— fkont, dress, the column will halt, the reverse subdivisions will front, the lieutenantp will resume their places in column, and the whole will dress by the pivot flank. 2. On the MnrcA.— If the column is on the march the countermarch will be effected in the same manner as ftrom the halt, the reverse subdivisions turning instead of facing, and the covering Ser- jeants of the front and rear companies giving their points on the words RioHT ABOUT— TURN. The command- ing officer must give the words front — TURN four paces before the sub- divisions of each company arrive In line with each other, in order that they may move on together in the new diiection. In thif movement the front of the column is changed RldHT (or lbft) HUBDIVIRION8 RIOHT AHOUT — FACE. QUICK (or double)- * MARCH. HALT — FRONT,_^ DRESS. ^ OnAMOB FRONT TO THE BEAR BY THE WHEEl. OF SUBDIVISIONS ROmO) THE OEMTBE, RIGHT (orLBrr)80Bm- VIBIOX8 RIOHT ABOUT-TURN, FRONT— TUBN; 268 PART IV.— BATTALION. to tha original rear, but the order of the companies is not changed. A double column will countermarch in the same manner as a single column. • 8. 19. Columns countermarching by Files and by Ranks. Open and quarter distance columns will countermejch by files, close columns by ranks, each company movirig as vlescribed in Part II., Section 23. In open or ajuarter dis- tance colramn the colour party wU countermarch indepen- dently, and niove across to the rear of the leading centre company ; in close column it can only face about and cor- rect its formation when the column opens out. In these countermarches both the front of the column and the order of the companies is changed, a column right in Aront becoming a column left in front, facing to the original rear. S. 20. Changing the Order of a Column by the successive March of the Rear Companies to the Front. When right is in iiront, and the left is to be brought up, on the caution by SUCCESSIVE COMPANIES REAR WING TO THE FRONT, the captuin of the rear company will take one pace to the firont, face to the right about, and give the words W»-, Form Four*— Left, Qimc* — March, on which his company will step off, the captun remaining steady, the ) coveting seqetot stepping shoi^ to (fiin BY SUCCES- SIVE COM- PANIES, BEAR WING TO THE FRONT. W"-, Fonn Fours Left. Qiack— March. ■-■ ">\1^ '. — BATTALION. le order of the companiea is not luntermaroh in the same manner wrching by Files and by Ranks. ice columns will countermejrch by anks, each company movir(g as ion 23. In open or quarter dis- larty vnW countermarch indepen- to the rear of the leadin^^ centre 1 it can only face about and cor- e column opens out. 38 both the front of the column anies is changed, a column right imn left in front, facing to the !r of a Column by the sucoesrive r Companiei to the Front. a right is in front, and the left is brought up, on the caution by I8IVE COMPANIES RBAR WINO TO RONT, the captain of the rear ly will take one pace to the ace to the right about, and give •ds No-, Form Four»—Left, Qutcit ;A, on which his company will step B captun remuning steady, the g Bfnjeteit ttepping 0hor^ to gfcin cOtvMN aIOtbmbnts. 2lSf i g s □ 0UODB ©* J^iwJ^.jui aaf , DnaaO CO*? ■> — -t \4 ■■--:sh V.k. Fron/— "n By /Ae lit ■~; » N»-, Ffl Qttic*— M PVon^— T By «Ae Ai When I to the frc the right, S. 21. CA doesi BY yovBfl THE LIFT, triKO TO raoNi JVb— Jf Right-— J\ "« u«« • COtiUMN MOVBMBWW. 271 his place. When the company is clew of the column he will give the words Front—Turn. Front— Turn, By the Bight, fall in on By the Bight, that flank, and lead his company to the front, passing close by thepivot flanks of the otner companies. The Ueutenant will change his flank on the words Front —Turn. As soon as the flank of the rear com- pany approaches that of the next com- pany, the captain of the latter will take one pace to his ftont, face to the right No-, Form about, and give the command N^-, Form Foura-Left. J Fours— Left, and as the rear company Quic*— Marci.) passes \am,Qttich— March. His company having cleared the column, he will give the Front— Turn. words Front—Turn, fall in on the right By the Bight. of it, and follow the left company at wheel- ing distance. The remaimng compames will follow successively in hke manner. When left is in front, the right companies will be brought to the front in a simitar manner, each forming fours to the right, and coming tip in succession. S. 21. ChangiM the Order of an Open, Half, or Quarter Distance Column, formed upon a Boad where the Space does not admit of the Flank Movement.— P\»i» XXIX. BT FOWMJfHOHT THE MFT, WBAB ^y|jg^ ^jj^ jg Jq flf^nt^ on the Caution wiKO TO THB I ^^ j^ company (6.) will receive from its jy™*Xm f captain the word. I" " " " ^^£^ Lh, Bight-Wheel, Right— WheeL . No — Jibrm Fours— i*i 272 FOURTH HBC- TIONS. RIOUT- WHKBL. QUICK — MARCH. Fourth Section —Halt. No — Form Fours — Left, Quick— March. PART IV.— BATTALION. N'— Front Form — Com- pany. Forward. At the same time the commander of the battalion will give tihe words to the remaining companies, fourth bbctionb RIGHT— WHBBL, and then auicK— MARCH, on which those sections (b.b.b.) will wheel a quarter circle to their right and halt bjr command of their captains ; the rear company will stepoff on the sameword in fours, wheel to tne right, and move straight to the fVont along the rear ranks of the fourth sections. The captain of the next company (6.) will give the word Form Fours— Left, Quick— March to his men in sufficient time to follow the left company without loss of distance; the remaining companies will follow in like manner. The colours will move to the rear of the third section of the right centre company on the word march from the oommandcr of the battalion, and will follow in rear of the left centre company when it passes them. As the left company (6.) clears the former front of the column it will receive the word, No. — Front formr—CoH^Mny, from its captain, who will move across to the right, ^ive the word Forward, and fall in, leading strught to the front} the remaining companies will follow in like manner ; No. 1 company may form to the front as soon as its leading four. has _gainedthe left of the road, . 1 Acoluu the front first seotio The bat of forminf to the froi must be \< 8. 22. Co Wbrait echellon o in Pact II their cove and presei next in fr leadings tomaroh takr gr TO THB I (or LKF FOUI FORM FD RIOH1 LSr (aoic MARC -BATTALION. same time the commander of on will give the words to the companies, fourth bbotionb HBBL, and then auioK — 1 which those sections (b.b.b.) t quarter circle to their right and nmand of their captains ; the nj will stepoff on the sameword 'heel to tne right, and move the front along the rear ranks kh sections. The captain of the >any (6.) will give the word s — Lrft, (biick — March to his Qicienttime to follow the left ivithout loss of distance; the companies will follow in like lurs will move to the rear of the in of the light centre company 'd MARCH &om the oommandcr alien, and will follow in rear of :ntre company when it passes left company (6.) clears the it of the column it will reeaire No. — Front form — CoMfHmy, ptain, who will move across to l^ive the word Forvard, and hng straight to the front] the companies will follow in like 'io. 1 company may form to the oon tm its leading fouv.hu left of the road. . OdLUMN M0VBMBNT8. 273 A column left in front will bring its rear companieK to the fttmt by fours from the right in a similar manner; the first sections being wheeled to the left. The battalion, if required, may move on in fours instead of forming companies ; the rear wing may also be brought to the front by sections, in which case the pivot subdivisions must be wheeled up to ^ye sufficient room. S. 22. Columns taking Ground to a Flank, by the Echellm March of Sections. When a column is required to take ground to a flank in echellon of sections, each company will move as described in Paet II., Section 14 ; the leaders of companies keeping their covering on the leading flank of the leading company, and preserving their distances from the companies that ar next in front of them when in column, the leader of the leading company taking up points, in the diagonal direction, to mMToh on. 8. 23. Columns taking Ground to a Flank. ' After the caution, the commanding TAKK GROUND (jfficer will give the word form fours — TO THB RIGHT RIGHT (or i.BFT),and, if halted, OUICK— (orLBFT)iM MARCH J on which the companies will fours. move to the flank in fours ; if to the re- roRH FOURS — verse flank, the lieutenants will move up RIGHT (or and lead, unless the flank movement is to fcBFT). be of long duration, in which case the cap- (ouicK — < tains may be ordered to lead, and the lieu- HARCu). I tenanta will fall back to thdr places on "^4 PABT IV. — BATTALION. the reverse flaak. Anj company may be named as the company of direction ; but if no company is specified, the leading company of the column 'vill direct. The officers will always lead on that flank oi theur companies which is nearest to the company of direction, keeping their dis- tances from it, and dressing upon it. S. 24. Columns, when taking Ground to a Flank by Fours, closing to less Distance or opening to greater Distance from any named Company, , 1. Closing to less Distance. — ^When an open or quarter distance column is taJdng ground to a flank by fours, on the com- mand CLOSB ON N" COMPANT (or CLOSE TO QUA..ITEB DISTANOB ON N"— CLOSB ON company), the . 'Amed company will con- N<>~coMPANY, tinue to move o.\ mth a snort pace, the or < remaining companies will wheel their CLOSE TO leading fours the eighth oT a circle toward OUARTEB it, the rest following; their leaders, if not DI8TANCB ON there already, will change to that flank N" — COM- of the leading fours which is nearest the PANY. named company. Each company in succession, as it gains viio required distance, will change its di- rection parallel to that of the named comnany, and move with a short pace, When the movement is completed the COLUMN — . commanding officer will give the word roBWABO. ' PORWABD, on which the whole oolumn » will move on with a full pace. OPBN ■ aUAKTBI WHBBLl DISTA^ PBOM ^ CQMPAl colum: FORWA On op may close will then &o. Rbi HALF-TU 8.2b Thefii useful in Abatt or left takings .ft BATTAUOH. flank. Anj company majr be he company of direction ; but lany is specified, the leading F the column 'vill direct. The 1 always lead on that flank of anies which is nearest to the direction, keeping their dis- 1 it, and dressing upon it. Qround to a Fkmk by Fours, or opemng to greater Distance h \g to less Distance. — ^When an arter distance column is taking a flank by fours, on the com- SB ON N" COMPANY (or aUA..tTER DISTANCE ON N" — , the . 'Amed company will oon- love c. < mth a short pace, the companies will wheel their rs the eighth of a circle toward following; their leaders, if not dy, will change to that flank ling fouia which is nearest the ipany. npany in succession, as it gains !U distance, will change its di- rallel to that of the named md move with a short pace, tie movement is completed the ig officer will give the word on which the whole oolunin m witii a Ml pace. CObCUN MOVBMBNTB. 276 ovntt TO OUAHTKR (or WHBELINO) DI8TANCS FROM N"— COMPANY. 2. C^iemng to greater Dittanct.'-Whta a close or quarter distance column is taking ground to a flank by fours, on the command open to ouart*b (or WHBBLINO) DI8TANCB FB^M N»— COM- PANY, the named company will con- tinue to move on with a short pace ; the remaining companies will wheel outwards the eighth of a circle, and their leaders, if not there already, will change to that flank of the leading fours which is neatest the named company. Each company in succession, as it gains the di^nce requued, will change its direction parallel to that of the named company, and move wTth a short pace. When the movement is completed the commanding officer will give the word poRWABD, on which the whole column will move on with a full pace. On open ground, the companies in these movements may close or open by the diagonal march, the commands wJU then be by the diagonal march close (or open), &c. Remaining companies inwards (or outwards) HALF-TURN. N*— RigM httlf-tum. JN*— Left half-turn. 8, 26. Application of the Flank March qf Columns by Fours, The flank march of columns by fours will be found most useful in the advance of large bodies of troops. A battalion in line may advance by fours from the right or left of companies, thereby becoming an o^n column taking ground to a flank. In this formation it may pass COLUMN— FORWARD. 276 M.*V IV.--BATrALION. any obstaoles or broken ground without risk of diaorder or material loss of distance in the general line. If a defile or bridge presents itself, the battalion may close on the company opposite to it ; if a further reduction of ftront is required, when the column is right in front, the right companies may be ordered to mark time, the lefi companies moving on and closing on the centre, the right following ; in like mann tr when the column is left in ft^ut the Icfh rordpanies may be ordered to mark time, the right moving on ; or one wing may move on, the other following; if necessary, on? of the flank companies may be ordered to move on in fours, the remainder following in succession. When the defile is passed, the leading companies mav be ordered to mark time or halt, while the others resume their places if the column has been broken, or, if necessary, the rear companies may be ordered to double instead of the leading ones marking time. The column may then be ordered to open again to wheeling distance ; or while moving by the flank march of fours, may be wheeled in any direction, and then be opened. Companies may afterwards be formed to the firont, into line, in quick or double time, as described in Parts I. and II. Troops in this formation will be found flexible in the greatest degree, and as the companies move independently, they will not be liable to disorder, and the battahon ^vUl at all times be ready to form line or square, as may be required. See Sections 9 and 17 of this Part. 1 FOR S. 26. OPKN CO! RIOHT PRON MOHT A -FAt RIOI WHB OUK MAB L- BATTALION. nd without risk of disorder or le general line. Bnts itself, the battalion may e to it ; if a further reduction 9 column is right in front, the dered to mark time, the left l3sing on the centre, the right len the column is left in firout dered to mark time, the right move on, the other following ; companies may be ordered to der following in succbssion. the leading companies may be I while the others resume their sn broken, or, if necessary, the red to double instead of the The column may then be iling distance ; or while moving lay oe wheeled in any direction, s be formed to the front, into as described in Parts I. and II. will be found flexible in the impanies move independently, irder, and the battalion \vUl at ! or square, as may be required. Part. OPKN OOLVMN mOHT IN FRONT. VORMATIC/a OF COLUMN fBOM LINK. 277 format; ONS OF COLUMN FROM UNE. S. 26. A Line wheeling back into Open Column fi-om the Halt. 1. By CompoHiea iiito Open Column, Right m Front.— On the cautioij, the captains, and pivjt files of all the com- panies, and 1*e covering serjeant of the leading company, xvill move as described in Part XL, Section 6, the remaininff covering Serjeants will stand fast, the officer on the left of the line will faU back into the supernumerary rank, and the senior nugor will move to the right of the Une. , ' On the word pack, the pivot men and covering soijeant of the leading company will stand foot, the colour party will ftoe to the right and disengage to the rear, the remainder of the battalion, induing band, drummers, jmd pioneers, will face about, the junior miyor and adjutant turning their horses' heads to the rear. '■ On the words ooick-mabch, the companies wiB wheel as described in Part II., Section 5, the colour party wiU wheel to the right, and, together with the band, drummers, pioneers, and mounted officers, will move to the pl"cea in column, described in Seotion 1 of tbM Part. T RIOHT ABOUT -PACB. BIQHT- WHBBL. OUICK- MABCH. a7s PAST IV.— BATTAUON. " On the word HaU—Vnmt, Dnu, firom the captain*, the companies will halt, Halt'Frnnt, J fVont, and dress ; the senior mi^ will Dre$$. I correct the covering of the captains from the head of the column, and then move ^to his place. 2. By Compantes into Ope* Column, Lrft in FVont. — Open oolumn, left in front, will be formed in like manner, the colour party facing to the left, when the battalion hen about ] and the junior minor moving to the left of the line to comot the covering of tne captains. 3. By SubdwiiioHS or Sectiom into Column, R^fht in Front.— On the cau- tion, the captains, pivot S\bb, and the covering seigeant of the leading com- panjr will move as described in Part 11., Section 8, the remaining covering Ser- jeants will stand fast, and the senior m^or will move to the right of the line ; the colour part j will face to the right, the band, drummers, and pioneers mil fhce to the right about, and the hinior m^r and adjutant will turn their hoiMa* _ heads to the rear. On the words auicK — maboH; the subdivisions or sections will whejl back, and will be halted as described in Viurt 11., Section 8, the senior mi^or dress- ing the leaders of subdivisions or sections from the head of the column, and the mounted officers, band, &c. moving as in the wheel of companies into column. 4. By Subdivisions or Sections into Column, L^ in Front. — Subdivisions and sections will wheel back on their right in like m»nner,the colour party faoing to the left, and BY BUBDl VI- SIONS (or BBOTIONS) ON THB LnPT BACKWARD- WHItlL. QUICK- MARCH. Halt— Dress. in S.27. 8.2i. BATTALION. ord Halt — Fiimt, Dnu, from I, the companies will halt, dress ; the senior migor will wverinff of the captains from the column, and then move Column, hift in Fnmt. — Open formed in like manner, the )ft, when the battalion fsces moving to the left of the line captains. vihdwiiMiM or SectionB into ght in FVont,— On the cau- ptains, pivot files, and the iijeant of the leadiiw com- love as described in Fart II., the remaining covering ser- stand fast, and the senior nove to the right of the line; larty will face to the right, the imers, and pioneers mil flsce b about, and the iunior m^r mt will turn tncir honwa* 9 rear. words QUICK — MABOH; th« s or sections >vill whejl back, I halted as described in Part Q 8, the senior miyor dress- len of subdivisions or sections lead of the column, and the Beers, band, &c. moving as in F companies into column. ttioHM into Column, L0 m ions will wheel back on their ir party £M»og to the left, and PORMATtONB or OOLCHM VSOM LIMB. 379 the iunior mi^or moving on the caution to the left of the line, to be readj to dress the subdivision or section leaden. When the subdivisions or sections exceed twelve files, they should always be faced about and wheeled rear rank in front. The word of command will then be, opbn COLUMN or SUBDIVISIONS Or BBCTIONS RIOUT (or LBFr) IN raoNT, BioHT ABOUT — PACE, &c., and they will wheel in the same manner as companies wheel. BY COM- PANIBB (sub- divisions or bbctions) RIQHT (or L»rT) — WHBEL. rOBWARD. 5. 27. A Line Wheeling into Open Column on the March. A battalion advancing or retiring in line may wheel by companies, subdi- visions, or sections into column on moveable pivots, as described in Part II., Section 10, the colour party wiU wheel independently, and move by the shortest line to its position in column, the mounted officers, band, drummers, and pioneerB also moving to their places in column during the wheel. When a battalion is required to wheel on moveable pivota from the halt, the caution must be given thus : on thb MOVB BY COMPANIBS, SUBDIVISIONS, Or BECTIONB, right (or lbtt) whbbl, quick-march. 8. 28. A Battalion moving in Open Colvmn from either Flank along the Rear. \. By Companies from the R^ht. — On the caution, all the captains will change their flanks, remaining in rear of the Une, the coverers will as usual chanae with their captains, then move up on tne left of the firont rank of their com- panies; the Bnpemnmerary rank wiU T 2 380 THI BATTA- LION WILL MOVR IN OOLUMN OF OOMPANIRS FROM THUS RIOHT ALONO THB RBAB. N'l. Form Fours — Ufi. Ltft Wheel. Quick — March. Front— Turn. N'2, Form Fours — Lrft tVheel, Quiek — March. hVont—Tum. tfC. IHBBArrAT-OM " WILL NOTB IB COLUMN or COM- r ABiaa vbou TBR USrr ALOKO THB BBAR. iV»— , Form Four»— Right, Ril^Whttl— Qmdt-Mbreh. »ART IV.— BATTALION. oloM to one pace from the K&r rank, »nd the riflfht company will form ftnirg to the left b^ command of the captain, who will f(ive his word aa he is chanpfiojjf his flank, the lendinR fouv disenffaffinj? to the rear. On Hie words .^^< H^**-/, Quick — March, the company will wheel to the left, the captain leading it out perpendicularly to the rear. As soon aa he ia clear of the supemumeraiy rank of the lino he will holt and allow his company to pass him ; and when the retur four reaches him ho will give the word. Front — Turn, and take poat on its right flank, continuing then until ordered to change, which Hiiuuld not be done before all the com])anie8 are in column. The second com])any will form fours to the left by command of its oaptain, diaongage to the rear, and move out in the same manner, the moment the right company pa«8es it ; and thus company after company will follow in succession, the captains taking can not to lose distance. 2. By Companies from the Left. — Companies will move nrom the left along the rear in like manner, the companies y forming fours to the riglit and wheeling to the right, the captains falling to the rear on the caution, (being replaced by their coverers), and luding on the Vm flaokl vbea in colimii. lATTAUON. pace from the reftr rank, «nd !onp»ny will form fours to commsnci of the captain, e his word as lie is rhnnj^ng lie leB(iinf( four (lisenRngin)? On the words 7>^r Wheel, ch, the company will wheel the ca]itain leading it out arly to the rear. As soon r of the supemumeraiy ranl< he will halt and allow his pass him ; and when the ;aoheB him he will give the t — Turn, and take post on lank, contiuuinff there until shange, which Hhould not be all the eomiianiea are in he second coin])any will form he left by command of its engage to the rear, and move same manner, the moment company passes it ; and thus tter company will follow in the captains taking care not uice. Companies from the Left, — will move from the left along 1 like manner, the companies urs to the right and wheeling it, the captains falling to the 8 caution, (being replaced by ers), and leiading on the left lincoliwNL rORMATIONI or OOLUMN rROM LINS. 981 Thia movement will be performed bv aubdirtaions and ■ectious in exactly the same manner, tne captains on the caution placing themselves in rcorof the inner flanks of the subdivisions or sections of their companies, which will be in front when in ooluinn, and which they will lead. 8. 2!). A Battalion formed in Line adeanoing from a Flank in Open Column of Companiei, Subdivisions, or Sections. BioilT ('or LKFT) COMPANY TO THI FRONT, REMAININO COMPANIR8 ON THE MOVE, RIGHT (or left) WHERL. QUICK — MARCH. FORWARD. N'*—, Left (or Right)— Whsel. Leading Com- pany — Forward. #•— , For- ward, fyc. 1. Advancing from a Flank by Com- panies. — The caution will specify ftwm which flank the advance is to be made, and on the word march, the named company will move to the ftront at a short pace, receiving the word Forward from its coptain, ot such tiine during the second wheel of the next company as will prevent distance being lost between them when the latter receives that word. The other coinjianies will wheel towards the flank whence the advance is made, the commanding officer giving the word FORWARD when they are sauare in column ; this word will immeaiatel^ be followed by the word Lqft (or Right) Wheel from the captain of the company next the leading one, which will follow the first in column, the remaining com- panies wheeling successively as they arrive on the ground where the second comiiony wheeled. The captains must take core to preserve their distances. " -"^ 282 PABT ir.— BATTAUOK. If the advance is from the right, the captun and oorering ■eijeant of the named company will change flank on the caution ; the captain and coverer of No. 2 falling to the rear ; if firom the left they will stand fast. In both cases, on the words quick — march, the captain of the named company will leud to the front, and the remaining captains will move as directed in Fart II., Section 10, No. 2, BIQBT (or left) hub- division (or section) to the front, KEMAININQ .;„„„ ^^ scctions from a flank, in the 2. Advancing from a Flank by >A4 i ,«ft* ' -t i | ! JW > J l g ' ■ lATTAUOM. l^r^r-: % FORMATIONS OF OOLUMN VBOM LINS. 286 TWO CENTRE SUBDIVISIONS TO THE FRONT, REMAINING SUBDIVISIONS ON TUB MOVE, INWARDS — WHEEL. the UKtan of the movement requind. The following deseription of an advance by subdivisions will apply equally to an advance by companies, or sections, with the excep- tions that will hereafter be mentioned. r 1. Advancing by Subdinrions. Plate XXX.— On the caution, the supernume- rary rank will take two paces to the front, and the colour party mil step back two paces, the captains of the riglit and left centre companies will move out and plaoe themselves, the former in front of the left file of his right subdivision, the latter in front of the right file of his left sub- division, the remaining captains and the lieutenants will stand fast. The coverers of the flank companies will mark the points (e. e.), focing towards the line, for the subdivisions to wheel on, the ooverer of No. 1 making allowance for the dis- tance the right centre subdivision will have to incline to the left, to join the left centre subdivision. On the word march, the whole bat- talion wUl stejp off, the two centre sub- divisions moving to the firont at a short pace, the right centre subdivision dosing on the left as it advances ; the remaining auicK — subdivisions will wheel inwards, the MARCH. captains and lieutenants moving as di- rected in Part II., Section 10, No. 2j when the subdivisions are square in column the commanding omicer will roRWABD. give the word forward, on which Sn6 PARI* IV.— BATTALION. each wing will move in the same tnanner as a battalion when advancing from n flank, explained in the preceding section, Le/K Subdivi- the corresponding subdivisions meeting aion Left — and following the two centre subdivisions Wheel* in double column; the commander of Right Subdivi- the left centre company will give the sion Right- word Forward to both the centre sub- Wheel.f ^ divisions when the two following subdivi- sions have commenced their second wheel, on which they will move on at a full Udo Centre pace. Subdivisions The captains will lead the l&iding sub- Fonoard. divisions of their companies, the lieu- By the Left. tenants the rear subdivisions; the coloiu *Forward. party will march in rear of the centre tFortrard. of tne two leading subdivisions. The column will move by the left unless ordered to the contrary, the junior miyor placing himself in rear of the pivot flank of the second subdivision from the front of the left wing, to superintend the direction ; th3 senior major and adjutant, after having superintended the second wheels of all the subdivisions will foUow in rear of the column, the band will also be in the rear. When the advance is to be in double column of com- panies, on the caution, the captain of the left centre company ^fHll change his flank, the captain and coverer of the com- pany next on his left falling to the rear to make room for Dim; on tiie words quick — march, the remaining captains fend coTerera and the lieutenants of the left wing will move U diieottid in Part II., Section 10, No. 2. All woi companic getherin who belo S, 31. A thro both rstir: COM PA FROM lrft in or TUB ttbout- Qmck— Lrft- Fom BATTALION. vill more in the same nuuuiei- lion when advancing from a lined in the precedinfif section, onding suboivisions meeting ng thet\vo centre subdivisions column; the commander of sntre company will give the ard to both the centre sub- lien the two following subdivi- coramenced their second wheel, they will move on at a full tains will lead the lex^ding sub- >f their companies, the lieu- rear subdivisions; the colour march in rear of the centre ) leading subdivisions. The ill move by the left unless the contrary, the Junior Tni\jor nself in rear of the pivot flank )nd subdivision from the front ft wing, to superintend the ths senior major and adjutant, ng superintended the second all the subdivisions will follow the column, the band will also eer. te in double column of com- itain of the left centre company .ptain and coverer of the com- to the rear to make room for lARCH, the remaining captains nts of the left wing will move )n 10, No. 2. rORMATIOMB OV COLUMN VBOM LIMS. 287 All wofds of command that wre intended to apply to two companiet, subdivisiocs, or sections, that are moving to- gether in double column, wUl be given to both by the leader who bdongs to the left wing. , S. 31. A Battalion formed in Line retiring over a Bridge or through a Defile, or Retreating from a Flank or from both Flanks in Rear qf the Centre. 1. From a Flank by Companies.— It the deiile is in rear of the right flank, the retreat should commence from the left; if in rear of the left flank it should commence from the right. Supposing the retreat to be from the left in rear of the right, on the caution the captains will fall to the rear, the supernumerary rank will take two paces to the front ; and the coverer of N" 1 will fall back to give a point in rear of the captain of N" 2 company., facing towards him, at a distance equal to the breadth of a com- pany and three paces, for the remaining companies to wheel upon, the remaining coverers taking post in rear of the second files from the right of their companies. The captain of the left company will give the word, N'— Right about — Face, ^ick— March, and on the third pace. Left— Wheel. As soon as his company has completed the quarter circle, he will give the word Forward, pladng himseu on the inward flank, and win Erooeed aJong the rear of the Unb till e reaches the left of the right com. RBTIRB BY COMPANIES FROM THR LKFT IN REAR or THE RIGHT. Ift— Right about — Face. Quick — March. Lift— Wheel. Forward* m .a V. ; rPABT KV.— BAVTAblON. N'—Biakt— Wheel. Forward. By the Right. N*— Right about — Face. Quick-March- L^— Wheel. Forward. pany, when he will order hia company- to wheel to the right, on the point puiced for the purpose, as above described. The captain, followed by his covering seijeant, will change his flank during the wheel; and when his company is per- pendicular to the direction in which it is to move, he will give the word — Forward, Each company in succession, except the right company, will move in like manner, being faced about in sufficient time to step off when the company that has moved from its left is witnin three paces of its right flank. The captain of N° 1 will change his flank and give the word — Right about — Face, to his company, as N° 2 is making its second wheel, and the words Quick — March, three paces before the wheel is completed. The colour party will move indepen- dently in the same manner as the com- panies, following the left centre com- pany; after it has completed the second wheel it will move up to the wheeling point, and then mark time in order to gain its position in the proper rear of the third, fourth, and fifth files from the pivot flank of the right centre company. A battalion will retire by companies nrom the right m rear of the left in like manner ; in this movement the captain of the left company will fall to the rear, his coverer taking post m rear of the second file from the right ; theremaming captains will change flank, remaining in rear of the line, their ooverers taking post in rear of the second file firom the left of their companies ; the capt^ of the right com- BAVTALIOM. ,».!< he will order his oompiaiy to e right, on the point placed irpose, M above described, n, followed by his covering ill change his flank during and when his company is per- to the direction in which it is will give the word — Forward, mpany in succession, except company, will move in like ing faced about in sufficient ofp when the company that from its left is witnin three right flank. ain of N° I will change his jive the word — Bight uiout — company, as N° 2 is making vheel, and the words Quick — ee paces before the wheel is lur party will move indepen- le same manner as the corn- lowing the left centre com- r it has completed the second ill move up to the wheeling then mark time in order to }sition in the proper rear of burth, and fifth files from the of the right centre company, mpanies from the right m rear this movement the captain of > the rear, his coverer taking from the right ; theremauiing emaining in rear of the line, \ rear of the second file from the captfdn of the right com- FORMATION ■ OV COLUMN VROM LINE. any will ''arch as Abatta same mai i^ve the ;ach of hi then tak( IVkeel, Ft wiUalwa^ in order i when it it 2, Frot A battali in doubl) acoordin^ following apply eqii RETIKl SUBDiVI FROM I FLANB REAR Ol OBNT Eight division, about- Quich — Eight- Porw divi*idiTi8ions will ir flanks by the rear during f the right (the proper left), perintend wo direction aa in gor and a^tant will super- tiM sobdiTisbiis, and tnen rOBMATIONS OP JObVMII »0ll LINB. yM In thaaa m&rementa a loss of distanee will lake phea lietween oompaidea or subdiviaioiu i the diatanocs mnst therefoM be Ngained aa soon aa the whole battalion is in columut either by the leading eonpany or subdivisions stepping short or maiking time, for the rest to move up, the whole moving on at the word roBWASD ; or, if necessary to |[aintime, by the leading oompanv or subdivisions moving on m qu^ok time, and the remainoer recovering their dis- tances at the double march, as may be ordered by the com- manding officer. When from want of space <» other causes the retreat can- not be effected by the wheel of companies or subdivisions, it ma* be performed, with equal ncility, by facing them iowara, or forming fours inwards, and moving along the rear of the line, until opposite the defile, when the com- pany or subdivision leaders will give the words Rear-Tum, ind proceed as directed. 8, 32. A BtMalion in Line forming Open, Q-,arter Distance, or Cloae Column. 1. Forming Open, Quarter Dittatue, or Close Column in ^ar of the Right Company. — On the caution, the super* numerary rank will take two poeee to the front, the c|^tun of N" 1 company will change to his future pivot flank, (the captun and eoverer of No. 2 fidling to the rear,) and the covering seijeant of No. 1 will move across by the finnt and plaoe himself aiz paces in firont of his captain. Awing towaids him, with recovered arms. The senior mijor wffl move to the head oi the oolumn to superintend the oovw* ,.ing of the oovcnm mmI cqilaiiit. OFBK (quak- TBR DiSTANCB or clobb) ' COLUMN IN RIAB OP N" I. m MMAININO COMPANIKR < POKM POUIU — moRT. OUtCK— UABCtl. HmU— Front, , Dnu. ^ 8(0iilf. VAVT IV.-oBATVAUOII. On tha WQid moht, oftoh oompMy, acfpt N* 1, wiU form foun to the light, Mkd diMnntg* to the rw, the ookmr pwty wiU w» to the light, U' tb* oovmng todMUit of N* 9 wiU •tap back Mid nuurk tiw spot on which the left of hia compmjr ie to net, eover> _ing on the captwn wd coveier of N* 1. On the word makoh, all the eomt paniee in fbuw will etep off, eeoh eoverinf eerieuit in auooesmon ranning on when within 20 peeee of the eolnmp, and taking np the covering vad dietmce for hie company in rear d' the pirot ilank of the Uwt formed oompaay. Each captain will halt, ae he Maehei hia coverer, his company moving on part the rear of that seijeant, in a line parallel to the leading company. Ai the pivot flank of each company reachea the covering leijeant, the cap- tain will give the words, Halt—Frmt, J)re$$, on which the company will halt, ftont, and take up its own dressing, the coverer fUling Back to his phu» in column, and the captain taking pofi on the exact spot vacated by him. When the fbimation is oompleteJ the nnior miyor wUl give the word Sitady, and move to his plMe i the covering aer- jeant of N' I oompwy taking poet at ^tiha ewiMi tint. lATTAUOW. FORMATIONS OP COLUMN FROM LINR. 296 raid NOHT. MM>h aompMT, L will form fouK to ine oiMnMg* to tha rf«r, tbe r will not to tha irigbt, «B'' ag M^Mot of N« a will nd mwrk the spot on which hit company is to laat, aover- xptain and coveiar of N* 1 • word MARCH, all tha tom-, tovat will itep off, aaeh HMtit in auooesmon runnhiK thin 20 paeea of tha eolamp, ap the covering wd diatMce mpany in rear cf tha pivot I hut formed compaay. ptain will halt, aa he Naohea his company moving on past if that seijeant, in a line the leading company, pivot flank of each company B covering seijeant, the cap- tive the words, Halt—Frwt, rWoh the company will hult, take up ita own dressing, the lUing back to his place in id the ca^n taking pott on pot vacated by him. he fonnation is oompleteJ the |or will give the word Sitady, to his pkoei the covering aer- M' 1 oompMiJ taking pott at OI'KN (UUAU- 'i.i;n UIHTANCK or CLOBU) COLUMN Hi VHONT or NM. RIMAININO COMPAMKH FOKM VOVHN— KIUIIT. QUICK — MARCH. 2. Forming Open, Quarter Distance, or Cloie Column in hYont qf the Rii/ht Com- pany. — On the caution, the supcmuniu- rary rank tvill take two paces to the I'mnt, and the senior Biipcniuiucrary ser- jrnnt of N' 1 company will place him- BL'lf six ))aces in rear of his captuin, with recovered arms, the senior m^jor will place himself in rear of the supemume- rory, ready to superintend the covorinK of the ooverers and captains. On the word rioht, all the companies will fonn fours to the right and disen- gage to the front ; the colour partv will i\u» to the right, and the coverer of N*> 1 will take up his own distance in front of his captain, cover on him^and the super- numerary, and then face to the right about, marking the spot on which the _ pivot flank of N" 2 is to rest. On the word march, all the companies in fours will step off. Each coverer in suc- cession will run on, when within 2() paces of the line of coverers, and will murk the spot on which the right flank of the <>om- pany that is to form in fi"ont of his own IS to rest, covering on the rear base, and then fikcing to the right tbout. Each captain will lead his company to the spot where its left is to r»;st in column, and then change direction and 'sod on ths cover- ing Serjeant, who is marking the spot for his pivot flank, he will thus march his IT SS6 PART IV. — BATTALION. Halt— Front, Dress. steady. I company into oolumn in a line parallel I to the company of fomiation. On the word Halt — Front, Dress, from the captain, each company will halt, front, and take up its own dressing, the covering serjeant moving back to his place in rear of his own company, and the captain taking post on the exact spot ^vacated by him. When the formation is completed, the senior nugor will give the word Steady, tand move to his place in column, the supernumerary seijeant of N" 1 company taking post at the same time. In both the preceding manoeuvres the junior mijor, the adjutant, the lieutenants, and band, &c., will move to their places during the formation, and the colour party will move independently, by files, to its place in column. 3. Forming Open, Quarter Distance, or Close Column in Front or Rear of the Left Company. — A battalion in Une will be formed in column on the left company, in the same manner as it is so formed on the right company, the detains of the remaining companies changing flank on the caution, and their companies forming fours to the left ; the colour party will face to the left, and the junior nugor will superintena the covering of the coverers and captains. When the column is formed in front of the left company, the captain of that company will change to the left flank, on the caution, and his senior supernumerary seneant will mark the base point in rear of him. When it is formed in rear of the left company, the captain will stand fast, uid his covcier will mark the base pomt in front of him. . — BATTALION. ^ into column in a line parallel }mpany of formation, he word Halt — Front, Dress, i captain, each company will halt, id take up its own dressing, the ; Serjeant moving back to his I rear of his own company, and idn taking post on the exact spot by him. 1 the formation is completed, the nt^or will give the word Steady, )ve to his place in column, the imerary Serjeant of N° 1 company post at the some time. nanoeuvres the junior major, the and band, &c., will moA'c to their tion, and the colour party will iles, to its place in column. ter Distance, or Close Column in ft Company.— A battalion in line on the left company, in the same aed on the right company, the ig companies changing flank on npanies forming fours to the left; ; to the left, and the junior migor ring of the coverers and captains. irmed in front of the left companv, any will change to the left flank, senior supernumerary serjeant will 3ar of him. When it is formed in f, the captain will stand fast, and base iwuit in front of him. FORMATIONS OV COLUMN PROM LINK. 297 4. Forminff Open, Quarter Distanee, or Close Column on a Central Company. — In this formation the companies will fom fours inwards, and move into column in front and rear of the named company in precisely the same mamier as they form on the flank companies. If the column is to be right in flront, the captain of the named company will change his flank, on the caution. If left is to be in front, he will stand fast. In either case the covering seijeant will mark the spot on which the pivot flank of that company is to rest, which is to form in front of his own, he will cover on bis captain, placing himself square with the line, and then face about. If the battalion is to be formed in dose or quarter-distance column, the senior mi^or will superintend the covering from the front j but if it is to be in open column, he will place himself on the pivot flank of the company of formation. 6. Adoanoing or retiring from either Flank of Companies. See Section 9 of this Part. 6. Forming Open (Quarter Distance or Close) Colwmt, facing to the Rear. — In the same manner column may be formed facing to the rear ftrom line upon any company j that company, on the caution, counter-marching by files, and the lemaining companies forming fours outwards, ooonter- mawAing to the rightor left,and forming as already described. The company of formation will be so faced and coonter- opBN (quar- ter DISTANCE or close) COLUMN, BIOHT (or left) IN FRONT ON N«— . FORM FOURS — ' INWARDS. OUICK — MARCH. Halt— Front- Dress. Steady. S98 PART IV. — BATTALIOK. marched as to lead to its new pivot, bv command of its cap- tain ; the caution for this manoeuvre will be, open (uuartbk DISTANCB or CLOSB) COLUMN ON N" — COMPANY, RIGHT (or left) in front facing to thb rear. In thiti move- ment the companies which move to the rear of the line will countermarch round the rear rank, which is an exception to the general rule. 7. Forming Double Columns. — Double column of com- panies or subdivisions will be formed from line on the two centre companies or subdivisions, in the same manner as single columns are formed. When the column is formed of subdivisions, the senior supernumerary seijeants will take up the covering and distances for the rear subdivisions of thc^T companies. The covering seijeant of the left centre company will give a base point in front of his captain. Double columns, unless ordered to the contrary, will be formed at the wheeling distance of the companies or parts of companies of which each single column is composed. The caution will be dodble column (or quarter distance, or close, double column) on the two cbntrk com- panies (or subdivisions). On the caution, the colour party wfll step back two paces, and the two centre companies, or Buboivisions, will close inwards four paces each bv com- mand of the captain of the left centre company, who will change to the left of his company or right subdivision. FORMATION OF LINE FROM COLUMN. Wheeling into line has already bieen described in Section 2 of tnis Fart j a column may also wheel into line on the march, each company wheeling as described in Part II., Section 10. For the manner in which a column, taking ground to a flank by foun or fOfiS, fonnm Une, see Sw^ion 9 of this Port. S,3g. I form l thb li COMF 1 rbma COMF. FOUR ON THB BACK> — ^WI aufi MAI Riqht- Bye»- N0-, Dt 2fye»- lATTALIOir. pivot, )^ oonunand of its csp- euvre willbe, open (ouartrk ON N° — COMPANY, BIGHT TO THE REAR. In this move- ove to the rear of the line will rank, which is an exception to IS. — Double column of com- e formed from line on the two lions, in the same manner as When the column is formed lemumerary seijeants will take for the rear subdivisions of ing seijeant of the left centre toint in front of his captain, lered to the contrary, will be mce of the companies or parts ngle column is composed. The UMN (or QUARTER DISTANCE, ) ON THE TWO CENTRE COM- On the caution, the colour party nd the two centre companies, wards four paces each br corn- left centre company, who will pany or right suodivision. [NE FROM COHTMN. dy been described in Section 2 a may also wheel into line on >any wheeling as described in For the manner in which a : to a flank by foun ot files, JofthiaPart. FORM LINE ON THE LEADING < COMPANY. PORHATION OF LINS FROM COLUMN. S, 33. Forming Line to the Front from t'pen Colunrn LINE. QUICK-MARCH. L^ (or Right) Wheel. Forward, Halt Front-Dress tip. Jjtft (or Right) '^heel. Halt-Dress up. Eyes-Front. word Fo and the i Halt, oh coverer i base poii distant £ pleted in If reti formed ii cing, exc on the will giv( companii compan] S. 34. A bat lioe on right cc right. ORDER PANIE8 S. 36. FORM L THE Rl FLA N'—R L^) Dot Fort Halt-E lATTALION. in line with the rear rank of be halted and iironted, before Forming Line on a Central pany. — Line may be formed iny central company, those in of it forming to the front as ribed in No. 1, and those in t of it forming as described in 3 of this Section. The base ts will face inwards, the cover- seijeant being on the left and mpemumerary seijeant on the t of the named company ; the ain of that company dressing nen irom the right, whichever k of the column may be in firont. he senior major will dress the irers from the right of the com- f of formation. The serjeant- ir will move up to the left of company, and will dress the srer of the next company on its t, and then move to the rear. adjutant will mark the right le line, the junior mqor the kft. ! March forming Line on the icing, on the caution, form PANY, the commanding officer AININO COMPANIES LSFT (or le leadi ^ company will con- i-e front, and the remaining >vtable pivots, their captains AVhen they have completed uuuiding omoer will giro the rORMATION or LINE FROM COLUMN. 909 word FORWARD, on which they will move on inechellon, and the captain of the leading company will give the word Halt, change his flank, and then give the word Dress, the coverer and supernumerary seijeant running out to give the base points, and the adjutant will move out to mark the distant flank of the line. ITie movement wiU then be com- pleted in the same manner as it is performed from the halt. If retiring, the first port of the manoeuvre will be per- formed in the same manner as when the column is advan- cing, except that the captains will not change their flanks on the caution, and the captain of the leading company will give the word Halt-Front, Dregs. The remaining companies will then form in the same manner as on ft rear company from the halt. S. 34. An Open Column forming Line in Inverted Order. A battalion in column should be practised in forming line on the ftont or rear companv in inverted order, the right company on the left and the left company on the right. The command wiU be given ;huH, in inverted ORDER FORM LINE ON N" 1 COMPANY, REMAINING COM- PANIES, &C. S. 36. A Battalion in Open Column forming Line to the JUverse Flank. FORM LINK TO THE REVERSE FLANK. J^—Bioht (or Ltfi) Wheel, Double, Forward. Halt^Dress up. On the caution, the captains will change their flanks, their covering ser^ jeants taking the places they leave, and the adjutant will move out to mark the distant flank of the line. The captun of the leading company will at once give the word Bight (or ^ft) Whul, Double, on wbiohlMOomteit and supemumenoy seqeant will nm out 3M PART IV.— BATTAMOR. Riifht or L^ — IVheel, Double, < Halt— Dress up. and mark the base, the former taking the flank farthest from the captain, and both facing towards him; the leading company will wheel on a moveable pivot, and when parallel to the alignment will receive the word Forward, advance three paces, and will then be halted and dressed on the base points by the captain ; the second company will con- tinue to advance along the rear of the first, and on reaching its out- ward flank will receive the words Rwht (or Left)— Wheel, Double, Forward, Halt — Dress up, from its captain j each com- pany in succession will form in like iiiunner on the outward flank of the last halted company, the covering Ser- jeants running; out when within twenty paces of theuT ground, to mark the outward flank of their companies. If the line is formed from column right in front, the senior m^jor will dress the coverers from the right ; if from colunm Idt in front, the junior mtyor will dress them from the left. The supernumeraries in succession will step back to their three paces distance as the rear of the column passes clear of them. When the formation is completed, the m^or who has dressed the coverers will tgive the word Steady, and move to his place, the adjutant and the base points taking post at the same time. When this movement is performed from the halt, the eaptaint will change their flanka on the caution, and on Steady. BATTALIOM. the base, the former tftkinff krthest from the captain, and towards him; the leading ill wheel on a moveable pivot, parallel to the alignment I the word Forward, advance and will then be halted d on the base points hy the le second companv will con- idvance along the rear of and on reaching its out- will receive the words Right -Wheel, Double, Forward, Halt p, from its captain; each corn- succession will form in like 1 the outward flank of the I company, the covering ser- oing out when within twenty their ground, to mark the ank of their companies. If s formed from column right lie senior m^jor will dress the om the right ; if from column at, the junior mi^or will dress the left. The supernumeraries on will step back to their three kuce as the rear of the column t of them. le formation is completed, the has dressed the coverers will rord Steady, and move to his adjutant and the base points it at the same time. Serformed tram the halt, the oka on the caution, and on FORMATtON Ot LINK PROM COLUMN. 30S the won directed. In thi to the d pony is captain ( in ordet and mar lowing c they arri remain change during t Colui the reve in Part BATTALION. ft FORMATION OF LINH FROM COLUMN. 307 tbe words auiOK-MARCH the whole will move aa above directed. In this evolution the line maj be formed at any anglo to the direction of the column, hut if the leading com- pany ii required to wheel leas than the quarter circle the captain of the seccmd companv must be previouoly warned in order that he may change his direction (in the caution, and march on a line parallel to the new alignment, the fol- lowing captains changing their directions in succession as they arrive at he same spot. In this case the captains will remain on their original i>ivot flanks imtil their companies change direction, when they will move across by the rear during the wheel. Plate XXXII. Columns of subdivisions or sections will be formed to the reverse flank in like manner, the instructions laid down in Part II., Section 16, being also observed. 8. 36. Forming Line to the Front from Double Column. When double columns form line to the front in echellon, the movement should always be performed on the march ; the command should therefore be given when the battalion is at sufficient distance in rear of an alignment, to allow of the two centre companies, subdivisions, or sections con- tinuing theur advance, while the remainder are wheeling forw^ into echellon. When a double column is reqoired to form line flrom the halt without advancing the two front companies, subdivi- sions, or sections, it should first be closed to quarter dis- tance, and then be deployed as described in Section 42 of this Part. Line will be formed to the front on the march, from double column, on the saire princii>les as from a single dOB PA«T IV. — BATTALION. THK TWO CBN- TRI SUBDIVI- SIONS, RB- MAININQ SUB- DIVISIONS OUTWARDS — WHBBL. PORWARD. Ttco centre Subilwitions — Hall. Four paces oulwards — Clo$» — Quick — March, Left Sub. dipition, Eyes Len— Dress, Right Sub- division, Eyes Riffht — Dress, Rwkt (or L^) SubfUvisioH, column. The following descnption of the fomwtion from double column of subdivisions will apply equally to the fonnation ftrom double column of companies or sections. roRM LINB ON f On the word whebl, the two centre subdivisions will continue to advance, the remaininff subdivisions will wheel outwards, their leaders changing their flanks hy the rear during the wheel, and the junior miyor and amutant moving out to mark the left and right of the line. As soon as the wheeling subdivisions have completed the eighth of a circle, on the word porwaru from the command- ing officer, they will advance in echellon, and the captain of the left centre com- pany will halt the two centre subdivi- sions, and order them to open out by the side step four paces each to make room for the colour parhr and himself. The centre scrjeant will give a centre base point, facmg to the right, the coverers of the two centre companies will give base points where the outward flanks of their companies are to rest in line, facing inwards ; the captains of the two centre companies will, at the same time, move across by the front, and place themselves l one on each side of the centre seijeant, ' and will mve the word Dress to the two centre subdivisions. 'file remaining subdivisions will form m succession, as described in Section 33 of this Part. ITie lieutenants, as well as the captains, will give the words Right -BATTALION. cription of the formation Arom ons will appl;^ equally to the nn of companies or sections, word WHIRL, the two centre ns will continue to advance, ininff subdivisions will wheel their leaders changing their the rear during the wheel, and mi^or and adjutant moving tfk the left and right of the as the whecUng subdivisions ileted the eighth of a circle, on 'ORWARD from the command- they will advance in echellon, aptain of the left centre com- halt the two centre subdivi- order them to open out by the four paces each to make room lour partv and himself. ITie eant will give a centre base ng to the right, the coi-erers o centre companies will give ! where the outward flanks of anies are to rest in line, facing the captains of the two centre will, at the same time, move he front, and place themselve; h side of the centre seijeant, ve the word Dress to the two livisions. lahiing subdivisions will form on, as described in Section 3;^ "t. llie lieutenants, as well as 18, will give the words Right Kis:^'^^ 310 PART IV. — BATTALION. o I r e g ? 5 •teO;:=;=5:irS^:r>, ■■■V"~"i ■■■" .. * ^. , . a .i. . i, i _,. ■■ i. ' avva Vit'i 'i-'j*^' " ' ^'■'' '^ ' vK ' -'-Mwwwiwwtmwwiv.'W ' W FOBMATION OP MNB FBOH COLUMN. IV. — BATTALION. ? 5 •teO;:=H5::rnEn:r>» ■■■V"~"i ■■■" 'i V"" •I »•*;; -iv ■V""'"'.>""t'? ^^iim^u\iS T--"v=='ni the point of a])pui. DEPLOYMENTS. S. 38. A Battalion in Close or Quarter Distance Column, deploying into Line on the leading Company.— Plate XXXIV. Deployments will invariably be made on a front base, and by the flank march of fours, unless the ground should render it necessary to move in files. 1. From Column Bight in Front.— On the caution the captain of the leading company will change his flank, and the covering and supernumerary seijeants of that company will mark the base points, "^ the former in front of its left flank, the latte* in front of its right flank. The lenior miyor will place himself on the right (b.) of the base points to dress the coverers, the adjutant marking the distant _ flank, as usual. r On the words form fouks— left, the I remaining oompaniea will form fours to KBMAININO I the left, the captain of N" 2 company COMPANIES, ■< will take a pace to hia front, and face to x2 DEPLOY ON THK LKADINO —COMPANY. s\b FORM FOURS —LEFT. QUICK — MARCH. No\. Right — Dress, Eyes — Front. No 2. Front — Turn, Halt— Dress vp Eyes — Front. Front— Turn. Halt — Dress up Eyes — Front. Steady. FART IV.— BATTALION. the right about, and his covering seijeant will run out to mark the left of the com- pany, covering on the base points. On the word march, the companies in fours will step off. The captain of N" 1 will dress his company, and +hen take post. The captrin of N» 2, as the ri| 4 will halt and allow ny to pass him, and as soon as ik is clear of the right of N» 6, }e hdted, fronted, and ordered ■ its captaiR, on which N" 6 will B words By the L^, Qitick— d when at two paces from the it will be halted and dressed le, by its captain, who will run lat purpose; and thus each n Bucceasion will be halted and id then brought up into line as front is clear. kTTAlION. •in « VI to =i ill I ■ I DBPLOVMRNTM. »it\ 'V\i« •ii)M:rnuinerary riink will Ruin Us vith his own men. S, 40. A Battalion in Cloie or Quarter Dialanee Column Bight or Lrft in Front deploying on a Central CoM- patiy.— Plate XXXVI. When a battalion is required to dephvy on a central company, the companies (1. 6. 6.) in rear of the named one will move on the principles already described for a de- ployment on a ftront company, and those in front of the named company (1. 2.) and the company itself (3.) on the principles described for a deployment on a rear company, except that the coverer and supernumerary Ser- jeant of the named company will give the base points in front of the leading company of the column facing inwards, the former on the reverse flank, the latter on the pivot flank, and the scijeant-major will move up to the reverse flank to Maist in dressing the covorers. The senior nu^or (s.) will di«8s the coverers from the centre, and then move to the rear as described in Section 5 of this Part ; the junior i f 324 SOB PART IV. — BATTALIOIf. nuyor and a4iutant will mark the flanks of the line, as usual. The word of command will be, deploy on N" — COMPANY, RBMAININO COMPANIES FORM FOURS OUT- WARDS, QUICK — MARCH. S, 41. A Battalion in Close jr Quarter Dittmice Column deploying in Inverted Order. A battalion in column should be practised in deploying on the leading company in inverted order, in which case the command will be, in inverted order — deploy on the LEADING COMPANY. 8. 42. A Battalion in Double Column deploying. 1. Deploying from Double Column. — A double column at close or quarter distance may deploy on the two centre companies or subdivisions, in the same manner as a single column. The two centre companies or subdivisions opening out, on the caution, four paces by word of command from the captain of the left centre company to make room for the colours and that officer ; the centre seijeant and coverers pf the two centre companies giving base points. If the column is composed of subdivisions, the outward flanks only of companies, when deploying, will be marked by the coverers, and each captun will dress both subdivisions of his company irom the inner flank. 2. A Double Column deploying to One Flank. — If a bat- talion in double coliunn should move up to the extremitv of the ground on which it is to deploy, it may deploy botn wings iu the same direction. Thus, if a double column of BubdMsions moves up to the right extremity of the align- ment which it is to occupy, it wul deploy on the right sub- division of N» 1 company. The right winjf will deploy on its rear subdivision (the right subdivision of N* 1 company) in the usual manner, the captains and lieutenants ti-i —BATTALION. lark the flanks of the line, as and will be, deploy on N"— 0MPANIE8 form FOURS OUT- e jr Quarter Distance Column Inverted Order. lould be practised in deploying inverted order, in which case the ITKD ORDER — DEPLOY ON THE Double Column deploying. 'e Column. — A double column at may deploy on the two centre in the same manner as a single mpanies or subdivisions opening nces by word of command from e company to make room for the he centre seijeant and coverers ies giving base points. If the ibdivisions, the outward flanks eploying, will be marked by the will dress both subdivisions of r flank. 'oyina to One Flank. — If a bat- ould move up to the extremitr is to deploy, it may deploy both 1. Thus, if a double column of bhe ri^ht extremity of the align* , it will deploy on the right sub* . The right win^ will deploy the right subdivision of N' 1 iner, the captains and lieutenants LINE CHANGING FRONT BY OPEN COLUMN. 325 326 PART IV. — BATTALION. d changii ground comple tion of S. 43. diate — Pli OPEN I IN B ofN MAINI PANII FOUR8 OVICK- I i OPEN IN 1 OF WHIC WHEI ON ITI No] B bach Wheel, Maroi Dreu /' REM COM IfUjj jIi ., -rl-' l -' ■'■'.i^ l l l iumwiMM UNE CHANGING FRONT BY OPEN COLUMN. 327 changing places on the caution. The left wing will take ground to the left in fours, and when the right wing has completed its deployment the left will continue the forma- tion of the line by deploying on its leading subdivision. S. 43. A Battalion in Line changing Front by the interme' diate Formation of open Column on any named Company, —Plate XXXVII. OPEN COLUMN IN FRONT OF N» 1, RE- MAINING COM- PANIES FORM FOURS-RIGHT, OVICK-MARCH, &C. Or, OPEN COLUMN IN FRONT OF N» 1, WHICH WILL WHEEL BACK ' ON ITS RIGHT. No 1 OR the Sight backwards — Wheel, Quick- March, Halt— Dreu, Eyes — front. PEMAININQ COMPANIES r 1. To the Bight, Left thrown For- ward, on the Right Company. — In this movement the right flank (a) of the right company, will be the fixed point of appui of the new line, that being the point of intersection of the two lines. If the change of iront is to be at right angles to the old line, the right company will stand fast, buu if oblique, that com- pany will be wheeled back by the captain on its right, till perpendicular to the new aUgnment (ac). In the latter case the direction of the new alignment will be indicated by the supernumerary seijeant, who will, as iisual, give a pomt at six paces from the pivot flank of N" 1 com- pany ; the captain will face towards his company, step back one pace, and give the command No I on tht Fiight Back- wards—Wheel, Sec, his covering seneant taking his place and facing in the direc- tion of the new alignment ; after giving the word Dress, the captun will again take post. The ai^utant will mark the distant point as usual. J 398 rORU VOURS- BIOHT.-QUICK- MARCH, &U. PART IV.— BATTALION. llie lenuuning companies will then form open column left in iVont on the right company, as (luructed in Section 3:.' of this Put. After which the column will be wheeled - into line to the right, as directed in Sec- tion 2 of this Part. RIGHT WHREL INTO LINK. QUICK-MARCH, &e. 8. To the Left, Right thrown Forward, on the Left Com- pany. — A line will change front to the left on the left company in the same manner as to the right on the right company, the captain of the left company changing his flank on the caution, and Lis company being wheeled back on its left, if the new line is to be formed oblic^uely to the old one. The column will then be formed on it right in ftoni, and it will be wheeled to the left into line. OPEN COLUMN IN 3. To the Left, Left thrown bach on the Riffht Company.— la this movement, the left of N' 1 com- pany, to which flank the captain will change on the caution, will be the point of formation for the new line, it being the point of i' "^er- seotion of the t^vo lines. RBAR OF N° 1, RBMAININO COM- PANIES FORM FOURS RIGHT, QUICK — If ARCH, bo. Or, OPBN COLUMN IN REAR OP N* 1, WHICH WILL WHEEL BACK ON ITS LKIT. Nol om the L^Baok- warda-^IVheel, Quioh—Maroh, Halt — Dr««», Bif»»-~FroHt. RBMAINIMG COMPANIES PORM POURS— RIGHT, QUICK-MARCH, &e. If the it, that company will be wueeled back, by the captain, as desoribtd in No. 1 of this Section, . 'ilie remaining companlec will then form open column, %h#in fW>nt on the right company, as dlrectod in Section 32 of this Put. LI lEFT 1 LIMI MA 4. 7b fttny. — J compan; compan; not n&v( obliquel back on in rear ( OPEN c (or rig; ON OPEN C (or BIGl ON r WILL ON I' (or Le^ Qui Hi By RBM' PAl POU9 QUICI BlOt WHEB QUICK- -BATTAfclON. muning companies will then n column left; in fk)nt on the ipany, as dirticted in Ssction 32 krt. hich the column will be wheeled to the right, as directed in Sec- this Fart. own Forward, o» the Left Com' front to the left on the left ner as to the right on the right left company changing his flank pany being wheeled back on its )e formed obliquely to the old 1 be formed on it right in iW>nt, 3 left into line. 3. To the Left, Left thrown back the Right Company. —la this Dvement, the left of N» 1 com- ■ny, to which flank the captain ,11 change on the caution, will be e point of formation for the new je, it being the point of J' "^er- otion of the t^vo lines. If the lange is to be at right angles to e old line, the rirfit o-impany ill stand fast, but if obiJqu* to , that company will be wu?eled usk, by the captain, as desoribid I No. 1 of this Section, . 'ilie remaining companies n^U len form open column, ri^h# in ont on the right company, as irectdd in Seetion 32of thii Ptu^. LINE CHANQINO PBONT BY QWBN COLUMN. lEFT WHIIL INTO LIMB, aVICK — MARCH, &0. Iwl Jdi After which the oolumn will be wheeled into line to the left, as directed in Section 2 of thii Port, 4, Ih the Riffht, Hijr** ^Arown bach on the L^ Com- pany. — A line may change front to the right on the left company, fai the same manner as to the left on the right company. In this case the captain of the left company will not have to change his flank ; if the new line is to be formed obUquely to the old one, his company will be wheeled back on the right, the column will be formed left in front in rear of it, and then wheeled to the right into line. OPEN COLUMN LEFT " (or right) IN FRONT ON N" — &C. Or, OPEN COLUMN LEFT [or bight) in FRONT ON N° — WHICH WILL WHEEL RACK ON ITS RIGHT OR NO— On the Right (or Left) Backwards — Wheel. Quick — March Halt — Dresi Byet — fYont. r8](Ainino com- panies FORM FOURS-INWARDS, OUICK-NARCB, &0, BiaaT (or left) WHEEL INTO LINE, QUICK — MARCH, &C. 5. To the Right c, Left on a Central Company. — In this move- ment open column will be formed on the named company, as de- scribed in Section 32 of this Part. If the change of front is to be io the right, the oolumn will be termed left in front ; if to the left, •J column will be formed right in itont. When the new line is to be formed obliquely to the old one, the named company will be wheeled back until perpendicular to the iJdw alignment, the junior major and adjutant marking ^h« distant points, as usual- After the column is formed it will wheel into line in the usual manner, tL' ■ " ' i i ^ wi t mummmmit 330 PART IV.— BATTALION. It will be useful to remember that when the change cff front is to be to the right, the column will be formed left in front. Wlien the change of front is to be to the left, the column will be formed right in front. Also, when forming in an oblique direction, it the change of iront is to be to the right, the named company will wheel back on its riffht ; if the change of front is to be to the left, it will wheel back on the hft, ____ FORMATION OF SQUARES. GENERAL PRINCIPLES. Use of Squares. — Men are formed into square to resist attacks of cavalry ; care should always be taken not to expose men unnecessarily in this formation to the fire of artillery. II. The Four Deep Square. — The formation of a square four deep is the most eligible for a battalion ; it is sufl&- ciently strong to resist cavalry, and gives space for the officers, seijeants, band, &c., in the centre, and enables every man to fire. III. The Two De^ Square.— A battalion may be formed into square two deep to protect baggage or treasure against infantry only. IV. Solid Square. — Any compact mass of soldiers will be safe against cavalry if the outside men kneel down and slant their bavonets outwards. lATTALION. )er that when the change off B column will be formed left if front is to be to the left, the a front. Also, when forming change of front is to be to ' will wheel back on its right; to the left, it will wheel back OF SQUARES. RINCIPLES. [. B formed into square to resist »uld always be taken not to this fOhnation to the fire of II. -The formation of a square le for a battalion ; it is suffi- alry, and gives space for the in the centre, and enables every [II. . battalion may be formed into baggage or treasure against IV. act mass of soldiers will be safe I men kneel down and slant their 'Mi PART IV.—fcA'WAUoN. PLATE XXXVIII. I ^y OPEN COLDMH FOBMIKO BQUARB OK THE LKADIKO COMPANY- 8. }N THE t .tO COM FORM sai auicK DOUBLE MABCJ L„_.. No— Sections mtwan •ATtALlON. XXXVIII. rAKE OK THE LBADIKO COMPANY- li««A«BS. 3^ Formations. 8. 44, A BattalUm in Cohmn forming Square. 1. Forminff Square on the leading Company (/ an Open Column. — On the word march, the whole of the companies will step off except the leading one, which will stand tut (the flank files facing outwards); the se- cond company vnR close upon it and then halt without word of command (the flank files also facing outwards). The captain, covering serjeant, and super- numeraries of the former company will run to the rear of the latter, on the above command. The remaining companies, except the two in rtfcT of the column, will wheel outwards by sections at the command of their captains, as they arrive suooenively at quarter distance from the eompanies that precede them ; when tiiey have wheeled the quarter circle, the flank sectionfl will halt, without word of com- mand, the two centre sections dosing upon them, all touching towards the leading company, which will now be considered the front of the square. The two rew compeaies will close up and form the rear of the square, being nalted and faced to the i^ht about successively by their zespectiTe eaptuns, the flank ON THE LEAD* I.^O COMPANY rORM SQUARE. auicK (or double) — MARCH. No— Seetione — mtwardt. I Y 'J 3,'34 PART ir.— BATTALION. No — flits facing outwards. The captains, Halt — Right coverers, and snperaumeraries of tne two about — Face. rear companies will run into smiare the moment the third company nom the reiu receives the words Sections out' wards. During the march the colour party will incUne towards the centre of the companr which it is following, and on the words Sections— outwards, it will wheel to the right (or left) and haJt in rear of the pivot subdi^nsion. 2. Forminff Square on the Rear Com- pany of an (^en Column. — Suppose the column to consist of eight oompMiies standing right in iW)nt. On the word FACE, the whole column will be faced to the right about, and on the word MARCH, all the companies will step off except N" 8, which will stand fast, the flank files facing outwards. N" 7 company will close upon it and halt without word of command, the flank files also facing outwards. N° 6 com- pany will close upon N° 7, and will then receive the woras Front — Turn, Sec- tions-Outwards, on which it will turn to the right about and wheel outwards by sections, the flank sections halting of themselves when square, the two centre sections closing on them, the whok touching towards the formed companies. Each company in succession will close or the last halted company, and then re ON THK RKAH COMPANY. FORM— BQUARE. RIOHT ABOUT ' — FACE. ouicK (or ooublb) MARCH. Front—' Sections- ward, \0 _, Pf Turn Sec — Outwt No 2 Halt—F No\ Halt—F If a col leading cc Dress, J rear of thi moving r( retiring, two leadii Dress, am ON THE (or RIO BATTALION. g outwards. The captains, id Biipernumeranes of tne two inieB will run into sauare the le third company from the es the words Sections out- RQUARER. 335 2V6, Front— Turn Sections— Out- wards, )ur party will incline towards [ich it is following, and on the ; will wheel to the right (or vot subdivision. Ing Square on the Rear Com- an Open Column. — Suppose I to consist of eight compuiies ight in front. On the word whole column will be faced ht about, and on the word II the companies will step off 8, which will stand fast, the i facing outwards. N" 7 will dose upon it and halt ord of command, the flank facing outwards. N» 6 com- olose upon N" 7, and will then e woras Front— Turn, Sec- ards, on which it will turn ht about and wheel outwards s, the flank sections halting of 1 when square, the two centR losing on them, the whok owards the formed companies. Mtny in succession will close or alted company, and then te- ceive the words Front — Turn, Sections — Outwards in like manner, with the exception of the two last N<* 1 and 2, whicn will be halted and fronted in suc- cession by their captains as they come up to the square, their flank files facing outwards. The captains, coverers, and supernumeraries of N° 7 and 8 compa- nieswill run round on the words quick- MARCH, and place themselves close to the proper front rank of N° 7 company ; the captains, coverers, and supernumeraries of N° 1 and 2 companies will run into the square as N" 3 company receives the word Front — Turn Sections Outwards, The colour party will incline towards the centre of N* 4 company during the march, and will turn to the front with it and wheel as described in N" 1 of this Section. If a column on the march is ordered to form square, the leading company will at once receive the words N" — , Halt —Dress, from its captain, who will immediately run to the rear of the second company, his coverer and supemmueraries moving round to the rear at the same time. If the column is retiring, the captains, coverers, and supernumeraries of the two leading companies will run back on the words Hait — Dress, and form as described in N" 2 of this Section. iV" — , Front- Turn Sections — Outwards, No 2, Halt— Front, No\, Halt— Front. ON THE LEFT (or right) 3. Forming Square on the Centre from Open Column,— When sijuare is to be formed on the centre, if right is in front aas CBHTIUC COM- PANY rOBM— ■aUARK. aioHT (or l«kt) wino •iqht about •< — rACB. auioK(orDou- blb) mabch. 8iction»-0itt' vardi. Front— Turn StctUmB-Out" wards. 8*etums-0ut' ward$, Ifo. I ART IV.— battalion. the left centre ooinpanjr will be named u the oompsnv of formation, if left is in front the right centre corapanjr will be 8u named. After the caution the leading winff will be faced to the right about, and on the word mabch the whole column will step off, the company of formation at once receiving the words Btctitna out' vardt from its captain ) when the out- ward sections have wheeled the quarter circle they will halt and the centre sec- tions will close on them, the men feeling in to the pivot flanlia. The square will be comjJeted on the company of forma, tion, aa deacnbed in N°* I and 2 of this Section. 4. A Column taking Ground to a Fhnk by Fours forming iDBnding officer will gire the words on tub Lsrr (or rioht) cbntbb coupany fobm SaUARB, WIMOa IM« WABO* TURN, on which the wings will turn inwards, the oa|)tatn odT the named company will give the words Seefimu oiUvardi, and square will be formed as already desoiibed. When the column is right in front the square will form on the left centre company, when left in front, on the right centre company. 6. A Butialion in Qiiar/er Distance Column forming Square.— A column at quarter distance will be formed ioto square in the sain« roannar M »n open oolumu: square. -BATTAMON. ntra ooinpanjr wilt Im named ipanv of fonnation, if lift is I right oentre company will be caution the leading winf( d to the right about, and on MARCH the whole column will ;he company of formation at rin^ the words StcHon* out' its captain t when the out- Dns have wheeled the quarter will halt and the centre sec- slose on them, the men feeling >ivot flanks. The square will ed on the company of forma> isoribcd in N°* 1 vm 2 at this d to a Fkmk by Fours forming in open column taking ground ired to form square, the eom* she words on thb Lirr (or r FOBM SQUAHB, WIMO* IN« 3 wings wiU turn inwarda. the ny win give the words 8eaiian$ I formed as already described. I front the square will form on len left in firont, on the right ter Dtitance Column forming irter distance will b« formed nuHUier •■ an open oolumn, except that th« commanding nffloer will give the word HBCTiONS uuTWAHUH tu all the centre companion, oa the second company closes on the first ; the colours mutt move to the centre of the company they are following, on the caution, or close to that jUace if on the halt, that they may not interfere with the sections as they wheel outward. A quarter distance column taking grntmd to a flunk by fours, should not bo ordered to form 8(|uare on the centre, it should be ordered to turn to the front and then form on the leading company. A quarter distance column retiring should aUio be ordered tu turn to the front before forming square. S. 45. A Battalion in Double Column forming Square, A double column of subdivisions will form square on the two leading subiiiwoions, in the same manner as a single oolumn of companies forms square on the leading company. A double oolumn of companies, when it consists of ten or more companies, may form square in a similar manner, the side fisoes being wheeled outwards by subdivisions instead of sections ; but when it consists of less than ten companies, say six, square will be formed as follows : — The whole will form four deep and dose to the centre, the two leading companies will stand fast, or halt, if on the march, forming the nront faoe ; the two next will move on, and when at subdivision distance ftnm the front will wheel outwards by companies forming the side faces, the two rear com- panies will close on the flanks of the two side faces, halt, hee to the right about, and thus complete the square. mmMta 338 PART IV.— BATTALION. S. 46. A Sfuanprepatinfffor CaptUry. A square will prepare for cavalry aa described in Part III., S^on 9, No. 3. RK-FORH — COLUMN. QUICK-MARCH. No—, Halt — Dress. N'—, Halt— Dress. NO—, Halt— Front- Dress. S, 47. A Battalion in Square re-forming Column or Double Column. 1. Re-forming Colvnm or Double Co- lumn of Subdirisions.— On the caution re- form-column, the rear sections of the side faces will step back to wheeling dis- tance, and the pivot men will facj to the proper front of the column, the flank men of the two leading companies will also face to the front, and those of the two ^rear companies will face to the rear. On the words quick — march, the sec- tions of the side faces will wheel back- wards, and re-form companies, theur cap- tains giving the words. Halt— Dress s at the same time the front company will advance and the two rear companies will retire, receiving respectivsly from their captains the words Halt — Dress, and. Halt— Front, Dress, when at the regular quarter distance. Hie captains must run out the instant the word quick — MARCH is given, and take up their covering on the p^ivot flanks of their companies. A double column of subdivisions will be re-formed in like manner. 2. Re-forming Double Column of Companies. — A square formed from double column of companies, as described in Section 45 of this Part, will be reduced, when it consists of ten or more companies, and has been formed according —BATTALION. trtparingfor Cemalry. avalry fw described in Pwrt III., re re-forming Column or t)ouhle olumn. 'orming Column or Douhle Co- ubdivisions. — On the caution be> LUMN, the rear sections of the will step back to wheeling dis- i the pivot men will fac J to the mt of the column, the flank men ro leading companies will also he front, and those of the two panics will face to the rear. ! words QUICK — MARCH, thc sec- the side faces will wheel back- id re-form companies, their cap- ng the words. Halt— Dress j at 3 time the front company will uid the two rear companies wUl icei^'^ng respectivsly nom their the words Halt— Dress, and. ront. Dress, when at the r^[ular tistance. at the instent the word auiOK — up their covering on the pivot A double column of subdivisions mner. jlumn of Companies. — A squwe a of companies, as described in 11 be reduced, when it consists of Hid has been formed according HOVABBS. 339 to the first method, in a similar manner to that described in No. 1 of this Section, the side faces wheeling back by sub- divisions instead of sections, and the two front and four rear companies moving out to subdi^nsion distance; but when it consists of less than ten companies, and has been formed according to the second method, the two front com- panies will stand fast, the flank men (on the caution) ftwsing to their front, the side faces, on the words Q«tc* —March, will wheel back by companies into column, and the two rear companies will move back, and halt and front at subdivision distance ; the whole will then be formed into two deep, as described in Part I., Section 46. S. 48. A Battalion in Line forming Square. When a battalion in line is requwed to form square, it wiU first move into quarter-distance column on a given company, or into double column of subdivisions at quarter distance, in rear of the two centre subdivisions ; after which square will be formed on the leading company, or two lading subdivisions, as described in Sections 44 and 4o of this Pprt. S, 49. A Battalion forming Company Squares. It may in certain cases be deemed expedient to form all or part of the companies of a battalion into independent company squares. In this case the commanding officer wiU give the caution form company bquabks, on which the captains will proceed as. detailed in Part II., Section 32. When the squares are to be reduced, the commanding officer wiU give the caution re-form companies, on which the captains will re-form their compaui<;s, as detailed in the above-named section. 340 PART IV.'^BATTALION. 8. SO. A Close Cohmn forming Square. A battalion in dose column should first open out to aiuurter distance, and then form square as described in Section 44 of this Part. In case of a sudden attack it may prefiare for pftyalry a* a company in close coluipn of sections, ■ rt,4f(i --t'; ■ • ' ■ '«• '.;' S. 51 . A Square marching in any Direction. THK SQUARE ^/ftET'^iRE^or " I ^ battalion formed in square may be MOVE TO 'the I ordered to march in any direction. RIGHT or left). J On the word inwards-pack, the face that is to lead stands fast, and those on either side of it face to the right and left, in the direction named ; the face in rear ^ of it will face to the right about. On the word march, the square will step off, great care being taken that the men of the faces that are moving in files, remain properly closed up. When the square advances it will march by the left, when it retires it will march bv the right ; when it moves to the right it will march by the left, and when to the left it will march by the right i the seijeant-mejor will move out on the oaution, and plaice himself on the _ directing flank to regulate the direction. On the word halt, the square will halt and fftce outwards, every man standing perfectly steady, unless ordered to close m any oirection, or to dress. S.l 1. Fot column that it f( halting wheeling forming IMG COM 2. Re-. on the 81 company divisions distance. 3. Doi columns single CO two lead aodrfsar wards by 4.4i deep is ordew' rear f e MOVE MeMl ttQTa ]m 'BATTALION. tmn forming Square. [nn should first open out to form square as described in case of & sudden attack it may onipany in close column of hinff in any Direction. ion formed in square may be march in any direction. vord INWARD8-FAC*, the face ead stands fast, and those on of it face to the right and left, ction named ; the fac« in rear a£e to the right about, word MARCH, the square will eat care being taken that the le faces that are moving in n properly closed up. the square advances it will the left, when it retires it by the right ; when it moves t It will march by the left, and ;he left it will march by the seijeant-mejor will move out tion, and plaice himself on the ank to regulate the dureotlon. rojd HALT, the square will halt >utward8, every man standing; teady, unless ordered to close ction, or to dress. BOHBLLON MOV iMENTS. 341 S. 52. A Battalion formnr Square Two deep, and re-forminc Column. 1. Formhuf Square. — ^A battitlioa in op^n ot half distance eolumn may form square two deep on the same principles that it fotms square tour deep, the leading company only halting to form the front face, the following companies wheeling outwards by subdivisions, and the rear company forming the rear face ; the caution will be on the lead- ing COMPANY, TWO DEEP, FOBM-SQUARE. 2. Be-f arming Column. — Columns will also be re-formed on the same principle as from a square four deep, the leading company standing fast, the side faces wheeling back by sub- divisions, and the rear company moving back to subdivision distance. 3> Double Columns forming Square Two deep. — Double colunms ^yiU form square two deep in the same manner as single columns. If the double column is of companies, the two leading and two rear companies will form the front and rear faces, the remainder of the column wheeling out- wards by companies. 4, 4 Square Two deep MaroAi»^.— When a square two deep is required to march, the side faces shoula first be ordeif' to form fours in the required direction, Mid th^ rear f e to face about. MOVEMENTS AND CHANGES OF FRONT IN ECHELLON. OBNB9AI4 PRINCIPLES. EeMUma. — ^Tliereare two descriptions of Echellon formed from \\rw, th9 Direct £cheUf its component parts on any I line cannot be formed from [e to the original alignment jf the distances between the parts. [I. Tie direct echellon is ft.'aied : or refusing a flank. oblique echellon is formed from )r parts of compnoies forwerd I may be formed in obhque original line, less than a right )lace them in opeii column. between comparit^ will of e angle fit which iVx: echellon from the pivot flank cj one [ of the next, will (ilv/ays be 5 c//mpany that would occupy into line ; consequently, a bat- ay be wheeled back into a Une c was formed, at any moment, ique echellon, the pivot flies of >anies must Always be kept at ch other, and ihem dressing, rn iSOHBIiLON M0VEHBNT8. 343 a line parallel to tha original aUgnment, carefully preserved. The leaders of companies, or the pivot files of subdivisions or sections, will look to tki flank towards which the bat- talion is inchning, for their distance and dressing. 3, When oblique echellon is formed of companies, the captains will always, if not there abready, change to the flanks that become the pivots, but when taking ground in a diagonal direction, in echellon of subdivisions or sections, the captains will retain the places they occupy in Une, to whichever flank the battalion may be ordered to incline ; the pivot Jien of all the subdivisions or sections preserving their distances and dressing in the line of pivots, except when inchning to the right, when the captains will keep the distances and dressing of the right subdivisions or sections. V. Use of Oblique Echellon.— 'Vhe oblique echellon is used when a battahon is required to take ground diagonally to the front and to a flank, or v/hen a line is required to change its front. In the farmer case companies may be wheeled up any number of paces ; but when the echellon is formed of subdivisions or sections it will be found most convenient always to wheel them up the eighth of a circle. In the latter case the formation of echellon of companies should gene- rally be adopted. In changes of front the remaining companies must invariably be wheeled up half the angle that the company of formation is wheeled, as will hereanet be described. VI. Companies or Parts of Compunies in Echellon to be parallel to each other, — Each company, or part of a com- pany, will move on a line perpendicular to its own front ; therefore, when moving towards a flank, all the component puts of an echellon must be parallel to each other, in order thai their lines of direction may also be parallel. 344 HART IV.— BATTALlOK. VII. Takitw Ground to the Rear in Eckellon.— When a bat- talion is to take grov.nd in an oblique direction to the rM,r, or when a flank of the battalion is to be thrown back, the companies, or parts of companies, will be faced about, and then wheeled forwards, rear rank in front. VIII. Wheetinff on Fixed and Moveable Piro the named flanka; but if it \h to be (auBDiviBioNs formed of subdivisiong or aeotions they S. 51. A or BBCTioNs). I will remain in their placea On the word march, the companies, ON THE MOVB Bubdivisions.or Sections wiUwheelforward BY COMPANIES into echellon, and having gained the re- (subdivisions quired angle, on the word forward, they or sections) will move on in the new direction, the RIGHT (or < covering Serjeants, if the echellon is formed lekt)whbel of companies, falling in on their reverse QUICK — flanks ; the n\ounte(f officers will act as di- march. rected in the preceding number, and the FORWARD. leader of the leading company, subdivision, [^ or section will select points to march on If a battalion is required to wheel mto echellon to the rear, it will be faced about, and the companies, subdivisions, or sections will be wheeled forward rear rank in front. TAKE GROUND TO THE RIGHT (or left) in ECHELLON OP COMPANIES (SUBDIVISIONS or sections). by companies (subdivisions or sections) RIGHT or LEFT —WHEEL, FORWARD. J In obUque echellon, the colours and centre seijeaiits will wheel up and form a section by themselves. Thus they will occupy the same position, whether the line takes ground to a flank by echellon of companies, of subdivisions, or of sections .'}. Wheelinp into Echellon on the March. — A battalion advancing or re- tiring in line will take ground to a flank > in ecnellon in the manner described in No. 2 of this section, the captains if . ., necessary changing their flanks on the |^^7j,"_f; J^ * caution. Ba into Lit Plate X RK-l'OKM LINE. QUICK— • MARCH. Halt—Drci Eyes — ¥roi The colou lanies, and rheels back This move captains mar hem into lii ORWARD V heir flanks. 66. A Ba Directio Echellot 1 In tills m endicular tc loints of foi ATTAIiIONi (1 flanks ; but if it is to l>e ubdivisions or Mictions they n their places, rord MARCH, the comMnies, ,or sections will wheelforwud 1, and having gained the re- , on the word forward, they n in the new direction, the eants, if the echellon is formed s, falling in on their reverse ^ounteaofBcers will act as di- ! preceding number, and the eading company, subdivision, 11 select points to march on. wheel into echellon to the the companies, subdivisions, rard rear rank in front. ing into Echellon on the battalion advancing or re- will take ground to a flank n the manner described in lis section, the captains if anging their flanks on the ITS and centre seijeants will themselves. Thus they will ler the line takes ground to a )f subdivisions, or of sections KCIIRU/)N MOVUMKNiH. M9 S. 51. A Batlnlion i» lichfllon of Companies whetUng bank into lAw unrallrl to that from tehich it has formed.—^ Plate XXXIX. BE-l'OIlM LINE. QUICK — MARCH. Halt — Dress. Eyes — Front. On the caution, the pivot men will face into the line and ruise their right hands, and the m^or will dress them from the directing flank ; the captains will take one pace to their front, and face _ towards their companies. On the word march, each company . will wheel back on its pivot flank. On the words Halt — Dress, the men will halt and look towards their captains . for the dressing. 'flic captains will give the words Eyes — Front, and move to their places in line. The colour party ^vill wheel back into line mth the com- lanies, and take up its dressing with the company that heels back to it from echellon. This movement may also be performed on the march, the captains marking time and their companies wheeling back on hem into line ; the commanding officer will give the word orward when the wheels are completed, on which the aptains, if the movement has l^nn to the left, will change iieir flanks. i. 66. A Battalion in Echellon, halted, forming Line in a Direction oblique to that from which it was wheeled into Echellon. In this movement, in order to place the com{)anies pe ' ■■ "to the , ^.„ - — , jer- lendicular to the lines by which they must march to their loints of formation, the chief thing to be observed is the r r-^-'"-— VKWr lV.~IIATTAMON. rule laid down in the (Jcncral Principles of Kchellons, \" V, j namely, that the company of formation murt be wheeled up from the original alixnment at double the anRlo that the rcmwning companies are wheeled, or the remaining com- panies must be wheeled to half the angle that the company of formation is wheeled, thus — Jst. If the company of formation (a. b.), Plate XL,, is wheeled up from echcllon into the new alignment, as many more i)8ce9 (c. b.) as it originally wijeeled from line into echellon (d. c), the remaining companies will stand fast. 2ml. If the number of paces (b. d.), Plate XLI., wheeled by the company of formation from echellon into the new ulignment exceeds the number which it wheeled ft-om line into echellon, the remaining companies must wheel up half that excess : thus, if the comimnies originally wheeled up three paces into echellon, and the company of formation is wheeled five more into the new alignment, l)eing an excess of two over the original number wheeled, and making eight in all, the remaining companies must wheel up one pace, half that excess, making four in all. 3rd. If the line is to be formed on the prolongsijon of the front company wit stands, Plate XLII., the remaining companies will wheel back on their pivot flanks half the number of paces they originally wheeled forward from line VOSH Lllfl: OK 1 On the caution, tlie adjutant will mark the distant flank of the battalion, and, the companies having been wheeled ac- cording to the above rules, the covenr vand sujiemumerary seigeant of the com- panjr of formation will give base points on its flanks, facing towards the point of appui, the coverer furthest from the captain. The major nearest to the com Sany of formation will move up an ress the coverera. ■ voBH uvT. on Tttn UUDINO COMPANY, WHICH WILL WHBBL, &C. RE- SUININO COM- FAMES — FACES TO THE mOHT (or left), or on THE BIGHT (or LEFT) BACK. WAHDB-WHEEr,. <)VICK-lI.UtOH, J ' 'riiiciplps of Kclielloiis, \" V. ; Ponnation muat tra wheeled up at double the Bii)(le th»t the eeled, or the remaining com- If the angle that the company irmatioii (a. h.), Plate XL,, is > the new alignment, as many nally wheeled from line into companies will stand fast. r8(b.d.), Plate XLL, wheeled from ecliellon into the new er which it wheeled from line ompanies must wheel up half nponies originally wheeled up the company of formation is ow alignment, being on excess )er wheeled, and making eight lies must wheel up one pace, in all. )rmed on the prolongation of s, Plate XLII., the remaining n their pivot flanks half the lly wheeled forward from line, •ution, the adjutant will nuu-k ; flank of the battalion, and, nies having been wheeled ac- the above rules, the coverc nimerary seijeant of the com- rmation will give base points ks, facing towards the point ;he coverer furthest from thi rhe migor nearest to the codi brmation will move up an )vereri. • ISfc- ,^-. :«aag rass«jiiiBu m Tffarfrrniin-awroj BiiM IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) t ^ ^^O (./ '/.. u. <^ 7. 1.0 I.I l^|28 |2.5 1^ 12.2 14 1^ |i£ 12.0 i 1.8 L25 iu 11.6 d' %^^V ''/A '/ Photographic Sdences Corporalion .W^ '^,* 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 (716) 872-4503 4^' CIHM/ICMH Microfiche Series. CIHIVI/ICMH Collection de microfiches. Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiques ^ u ai 111 -I rk to- .<« n* itl nt t V 352 Pi BT IV.— BATTALIOW. T r." dATTALIOtt. T ECHBLLON MOVfcMRNTS. 858 PLATE XLL A BATTALION IN ECHELLON FORMINO LINK. J- '&<■■■:>•} '^^ >-<.-^^- ^->.---^ c- .'.-^ *^- -----r ^ v^v:.„.^i<-;: -%ig^i-: ^•sriV..^.,^'-*'.-- 1 ■' SS4 PART IV.— BATTALION, .i - ,tt;» y'C:ki^jn- tt. " > . ■ ^-» -. .-:.._■ . ;,:.-,„,-. 'A [V.— BATTALION, t^- 2 ^ S g i^ f4 >1! O 3 s ^ ■< GCIIBLLON MOVEMBNTS. S65 <'-^' ♦^^»< I •;•• \ 'j t! ?^^ 356 PART IV. — BATTALION. FORM OUIC MAh No—R Left) n Halt- up, E Fri iS*i'. ..■*ff and.wi] that wh S. 66. / pai CHA FROK THB 1 (or L COM I LKF RIG THR FOR\ — BATTALION. RCHEIiLON MOVRMRNT8. 367 On the word mauch, all except the company of fonnatbn will step off, the FORM LINE. coverers being on the outward flanks ouiCK — until they arrive at 20 or 30 pmvs from MAUcii. the ground their companie« are to occupy, when they will run en and mark the outward nanks of their respective com- panies. Each company in succession aa • it reaches the rear rank of the previously formed company will receive the words N«— Bight (or Right (or Ltft)— Wheel, Halt— Dress u]). Left) Wheel — from its captain, who will then dress his Halt— Dress men, give the words Eyes-Front, and ■up, Eyes — take post in line, the covering seijeants Front, taking their places in succession, accord- ing to rule. ITie colour party will move up independently into line, and. will be dressed by the captain of the centre company that wheels upon it into line. S, 56. A Battalion in Line changing Front on a Flank Com- pany hy throwi tg forward the rest of the Battalion. CHANGE FRONT ON THE RIGHT (or left) — COMPANY, LEFT (or right) THROWN FORWARD. On the caution, the adjutant will mark the distant flank of the battalion. If the named company is on the left of the battalion the captains will change their fianks, but if on the right they will stand fast ; the mi^or of the inner wing will move up to the point of formation to dress the coverers; the commanding officei, in order to ascertain the number of paces the companies should wheel into 308 or CIIANOR PBONTONTHR HIOHT (or usrr) COM-" I'A.NY IiKKT(or kiqht) TtlHOWN KOR- WARD THK OUARTRll CIRCI.K. No—To the ' H'ujht (or Lfft) Wheel, or N'—, — paces to the Right {or Left) Wheel. Quick — March. Halt — Dres.1. Eyes — Front. REMAINING COMPANIES — PACES TO THE RIGHT (or left) — WHEEl.. QUICK — MARCH, &C. FORM LINK — QUICK — MARCH, &C. PART IV. — BATTAliION. eohellon, will place himself at the point of Bppni. and will direct the coverer of the named company, who will move out for that purpose, to wheel from the eighth file, as directed in I'urt II., Section 'i, and will order him to halt when he reaches the required alignment; unless I'lO change of front is to be a quartCT circle, in which case the company will be wheeled by the cni)1ain in the usual manner. The named company will then be wheeled up to the alignment by its captain, and on the word Halt, the coverer and supernumerary seijeant will i>give the base points of the battalion, the former on the outward flank, the latter on the inward flank of the com- ])any, both facing towards the pomt of formation. On the word wheel from the com- manding officer, the remaining covering Serjeants will move out in front of the eighth Hies from the pivot flanks of their comp'anies, and take the named number of paces, which will be half the number stepped by the coverer of the company of formation ; the captains and pivot men will face, as directed in Part II., Section 6. The companies will then wheel into ^ echellon, and form from echellon into the •^new line, as directed in the preceding section. S. h'l Co OHi PROf THE L RIOII^ PA NY (or THROW orcH FRONT LKF RI0H1 PA NY, (or 1 THROW THE Q1 CIR JV»— I Right ( Backu Wheel, — paci Right ( Baeku W Quiok- Halt- or Righ Face,( March. F\i'unt- Byes- RBMA COMP RIOHT 1 ,— BATTAUOH, , will place himself at the point i. and will direct the coverer df ed company, who will move out purpose, to wheel from the eighth directed in I'urt II., Section (i, 1 order him to halt when he the required alignment; unless ige of front is to he a ciuartw 1 which case the company will ed hy the rni)1ain in the usual lained company will then he up to the alignment hy its and on the word Hull, tlic and supernumerary sergeant will 3 base points of the battalion, ner on the outward flank, the n the inward flank of the com- oth facing toworda the pouit of II. he word wheel from the cora- j officer, the remaining covering I will move out in front of the ilea from the pivot flanka of their ies, and take the named number I, which will be half the number by the coverer of the company of m ; the captains and pivot men I, as directeu in Part II., Section 6. companies will then wheel into , and form from echellon into the e, as directed in the preceding UCilELLON MnVK.MBNTi*. 359 S. T)/. A Buttulimi iu Lint chanying Front on a Flank Company by throwing back the re»t of the Battalion, CHANOB FRONT ON THB LEFT (or Ribirr) COM- PANY niOHT (or left) THROWN BACK, or CHANOE FRONT ON THE LEFT (or right) com- pany, RIGHT (or left) thrown BACK THE QUARTER CIRCLE. JV»— 0« the Right (or Left) Backwards — Wheel, or N"—, — paces on the Right (or Left) Backwards — Wheel. Quick — March. Halt — Dress ; or Right about- Face, Quick — More*. Halt— F\ront — Dress. Eyes — Front. _ RBMAININO COMPANIES RIQHT ABOUT On the caution, the ac^jutant will move out and mark the distant flank of the battaUon. The captains, and the major of the inner wing, will act as directed in the preceding section, and the commanding ^ officer will ascertain the number of paces ^ to be wheeled in the manner therein described, the coverer wheeling from the rear of the eighth file (unless the wheel > a quarter circle), and being halted at sufficient distance beyond the alignment to allow for the depth of the two ranks. llie named company will then be wheeled back by its captain to the re- quired direction, and on the word Halt, the coverer and supernumerary serjeant >■ will give the base points of the battalion, the fonner on the outward flank, the latter on the inward flank of the com- pany, both facing towards the point of appui. The battalion wilt be faced about, and on the word wheel from the command- ing officer, the remaining coverers will cr-r •" 360 rACR, — PACES, RIGHT (or lkft) WIIEBL. fABT IV.—BATTAI-IOK. I move to tlie eighth files fro "i K'^'fi ^h" w'f' J^y** — Front, and take Rigkt (or Left) post in his proper place in line. Each Wheel,Forward. coverer in succession as he arrives at 20 Halt — Front, or .HO paces from the ground his com- i)ress up. pany is to occupy will run out and mark the outward flank of his company, facing towards the jioint of appui, leaving room for his company to pass clear of him, and m* ii n UM W«ww»tw i ' I II' ' ■ ■ -BATTAI-IOK. lie eighth files froA K Ph >! «< L V '■ s, r5--e>a +133 The sectior of the S. 58. pi f\ CH FRC (or< COM RIG left] KOI or c FRON' cent: PAN1 (or THRO WAl QUi CI Comf the Riffht ECHBLLON MOVEMKNTS. 363 when it has gone to the reax taking a pace to his froni without losing his covering, in order not to interfere with the pivot flank of the next company, ITie colour jiarty will move into hne as an independent section in the echellon, and will be dressed by the captain of the centre company that wheels upon it into line. 58. A Battalion in Line changing Front on a Centre Com- pany, or on the two Centre Companies by adoancing one Wing and retiring the other. — Plate XLIII. CHANGE FRONT ON THE CENTRE (or ON N» — company), RIGHT (or left)thro\vn FORWARD, or CHANGE FRONT ON THE CENTRE (or ON N" — com- pany), RIGHT (or left) THROWN FOR- WARD THE QUARTER CIRCLE. Companies on the centre Right (or Left) On the caution the junior major and adjutant will move out to mark the left and right of the line. The commanding officer will ascertain the number of paces to be wheeled in the maimer described in Section 67 of this part, the covering seijeant wheeling from the eighth file from the pivot, count- *ing to'.i'ards the fiank of the company or subdivision that wheels forward ; unless the wheel is to be a quarter circle. The senior mtijor will move to the centre to dress the coverers, and the captains on the right of the company or companies of formation will change their flanks. ' If the change of front is to be on the two centre companies, they will be wheeled by command ol the captain of the left centre company ; the frpnt rank 364 Whtel, at — paces Right (or Left) Wheel. Qmck — March, Halt—Dresi. Eyes — Front. No — on the Right (or Left) centre Wheel, or — paces Riaht (or L^t) Wheel. Quick — March. Halt— Dress. Eyes — Front. LKFT(orRTGHT)' WING, RIGHT ABOUT FACB, or COMPANIES ON THB LEFT (or right) RIGHT ABOUT — FACE. COMPANIES — PAORR RIGHT (or lbft) WHEEL. QVICK-MARCH. VORM LINE. QUICK-MARCH, PART IV. — BATTALION. man of the inner file of the company that wheels forward will be the pivot. On the word Halt, from the captain of the left centre company, the centre Ser- jeant will step out and face to his right to give a centre point, his rear rank man taking his place ; the two covering Ser- jeants of the centre companies will give points on the outward flanks of their companies facing inwards ; the two cap- tains will then dress then- companies from the centre. If the change of front is to be on the centre of a company, that company will be wheeled on its centre into the required alignment by its captain, and, on the word Halt, the coverer and supernu- merary Serjeant will give the base points, as directed in Part II., Section 7. llie companies which are to be wheeled back will next be faced to the right-about by the commanding officer, and on the word WHEEL, the coverers, except those )>of the company or companies of for- mation, will move to the eighth files, and step the ordered number of paces ; the captains and pivot men will face as directed in Part II., Section 6. ' On the word march, the battalion will wheel into echellon, after which Una will be formed as described in Sections 6C .and 67 of this Part. A on a pani cum| that com] eche or 01 mati comi pivo able wore no c this expc eche reve M the I righ cent man ech« orde that QUil E sect reqx tot par( afte into ^— BATTALION. ' the inner file of the company leela forward will be the pivot. 1 word Halt, from the captain of centre company, the centre ser- ill step out and face to his right a centre point, his rear rank man his place ; the two covering ser- )f the centre companies will give on the outward flanks of their lies facing inwards ; the two cap- irill then dress then- companies le centre. e change of front is to be on the )f a company, that company will !led on its centre into the required mt by its captain, and, on the Halt, the coverer and supernu- seijeant will give the base points, 3ted in Part II., Section 7. companies which are to be wheeled ill next be tiaced to the right-about I commanding officer, and on the vHEBi., the coverers, except those company or companies of for- i, will move to the eighth files, ep the ordered number of paces ; >tains and pivot men will uce aa id m Part IL, Section 6. the word march, the battalion will into echellon, after which Una will med as described in Sections 66 ? of this Part. v.r i HCHKLIiON MOVKMBNT8. 366 A battalion on the march may be ordered to change front on a flank company in echellon, without halting, the com- panies wheeling on moveable pivots ; in this case the iiank company of formation will wheel at the double, in order that it may be halted and dressed in time for the remaining companies to form upon it. "When a change of front in echellon is made from the halt, on a flank or on the centre, or on a central comtinny, the company or companies of for- mation may be wheeled into the required aUgnment by command of the captain, either on a halted or moveable pivot, the remaining companies will be wheeled on move- able pivots by the commanding officer, who will give the word FOKW abd when they have gained the proper du-ection, no coverers marking the paces they are to wheel ; in practice this method should generally be adopted, as it is the most expeditious and convenient. When companies wheel into echellon on the march, the coverers will take post on the reverse flanks at the word forward. When a line is ordered to change front at right angles, the company or companies of formation \vill wheel to the right, or left,— to the right, or left^ backwards,— or on the centre to the right, or left, as may be required, in the usual manner ; the remaining companies wheelmg four paces into echellon, or the eighth of a circle on the move, as may be ordered. The commanding officer will state in his caution that the right or left will be thrown forwai-d or back the OUAKTER CIRCLE. During a change of front, as described in the preceding sections, the part of a battalion that is in echellon may, if required, be halted, and wheeled back into a Una, parallel to the original line, at any moment ; thus forming the two parts of the battalion in lines at an angle to each other, after which the oomimnies may again be wheeled forward into echellon and the movement completed. I'K ;wj(5 PART IV. — BATTALION. I At any time during a change of front in echellon, all the companies of the hattalion may be wheeled up into open column towards the point of formation, and then ordered to form square on the leading company, or the companies in echellon may be formed into company squares. S. 59, A Battalion in Line advanciny or retiring in direct Echellon of Companies from either Flank. — Plate XLIV. If it is intended to re-form line parallel to the original alignment, the companies may be ordered to march off at any named distance from each other, but if it is intended to change front to either flank at right angles, they must be marched off at wheeling distance from each other. THE battalion' WILL ADVANCE (or retiiie) IN niRtiCT ECHEL- LON OP COM- PANIES AT WHEELING (or — paces) DIS- TANCE, FROM THE RIGHT (or left). No— By the Right {or Left), Quick — March. No— Right about Face. By the Right (or Left) Quick — March. On the caution, if the movement is to be from the proper left, either in advanc- ing or retiring, the captains will change their flanks, if from the right they will stand fast. The captain of the com- pany on the named flank, if the bat- talion is to advance, will then give his word Q«(cA: — March, and will move straight to his front; when he has gained the ordered distance, the next company will receive the words Quick- March from its captain, and so on in succession till all are in motion. If the movement is to be made to the rear, the companies will be faced about in suc- cession, and marched ofl: one after the other at the ordered distance as above described. A BAr FK« PRl FOI x' L:-.-r-.-: -BATTALION. ange of front in echellon, all the [1 may be wheeled up into open of fonnation, and then ordered ling company, or the companies into company squares. e advanciny or retiring in direct om either Flank. — Plate XLIV. brm line parallel to the original mav be ordered to march off at each other, but if it is intended flank at right angles, they must distance from each other. le caution, if the movement is to the proper left, either in advanc- •etiring, the captains will change nks, if from tlie right they will ast. The captain of the com- u the named flank, if the bat- 3 to advance, will then give his Quick — March, and will move to his front; when he has the ordered distance, the next y will receive the words Quick- horn its captain, and so on in on till all are in motion. If the ent is to be made to the rear, the ies will be faced about in suc- and marched off one after the t the ordered distance as above d. ECHELLON MOVEMENTS. PLATE XLIV. 3(57 BATTALION ADVANCINO IN DIRECT BCHBLLON OF COMPANIES FROM THE LEFT, AND CHANOIXO DIRECTION TO THE RIGHT PRKPAllATORT TO FORHINO LINE, AT RIGHT ANGLES TO THE FOR.MER ALIGNMENT. ,1 T * ■,;r- D-n- 1 i ■^^■^■—^::^l-^vj:^:-:Ar^h-r.-,~::-:,i^r^- -ilJ 368 PART IV.— BATTALION. ..- ■ '■ '■-' ,- ■ > : ..- ■ ' '- ■^' ■■■' ^ •:-.■• ■ ' '■ ■» J-.*.: ,, -, , .% i.:fii.i.t vi -t,'tt-rr.-<^ ,-:. ■. ■ , ■.■ ' ,-'. ''K ' ■•■■:•■ '" -.--■',■ 1* ' ' ' • r t * ' . ■ a ■ - '■' /." • 1,1 < Tlic Hunks the j)i clear o revers( ItVojiei tlE-FO ON TIJ ING C( HKM COMl QUI MA RE-FO ON TI COM REM. COM KIGH1 — I Ut'i MA Halt- Dri Eyes- -BATTALION. ECHELLON MOVEMEN TB, m The covercrs, when it is necessary, will chanffc tlieir llonks on the caution, but they will invariably remain in the proper rear until their respective companies move out clear of the rest of the line, they will then ttike jjost on their reverse flanks. 'ITie captains will move in line with the pi'oi)er rear rank when retiring. 8. 60. RE-POKM I ON THE LEA ING COMPANY. KEMAININO COMPANIES QUICK — MARCH. RE-FORM LINE ON THE REAR COMPANY. REMAINING COMPANIES RIGHT ABOUT — KACE. UUICK — MARCH. Halt— Front- Dress up. Eyes — Front, Jl. Form puny. — If leatlinir co Re-formiiiff Line from Direct Echellon, Formivg Line on the Leudiwj Com- . — If the hne is to be formed on the ing company, the coverer and super- numerary Serjeant of that company will give the base points. On the word march, the remaining companies will mo^'e up in succession into line, the covering Serjeants marking . their out^vard flank. 2. Forming lAne on the Rear Com* pany. — If hne is to be formed on the rear company, the coverer and supernumerary seijeant of that company will give the livse points, and the company will be dressed. The remaining companies will then be faced to the right about ; the _ captains and coverers changing flanks. ' On the word march, tlie companies facing to the rear mil step oflF and form in succession on the rear company, each receiving the words Halt—Front— Dress up, when its proper front rank is in line with the rear rank of the last halted com- pany, the coverers nflining out to mark the outward flanks of their respective _ companies in the usual manner. TART IV,— »BATTAMO»J. :i. i-Vrntwy Line on a Central Coni- panv —When line is to bo formed on a cciitral company, the coverer and super- numerary Serjeant of that company will give the base points, as usual, facing inwards. The companies in front of the nnmed company will then be faced to the right about, their captains and coverers changing flanks, and on the word QUICK-MARCH, line will be formed, as described in the t\vo first numbers of this section. HKFOHM LINK ON N" — COM- PANY. COMPANIES IN KKONT, KIOHT ABOUT — I'.CE. FORM LUsr.— QUICK-MAKCH. Halt—Front— Dress. Eyes — Front — Halt— Dress. Eyes Front, j ,. „ , ,,,•,, i In these movements the distant flank or flanks wiU bu marked by the adjutant, or the junior major and adjutant, 4. Forming on the March.— \ battalion in direct ochellon on the march may form line in like manner ; if to the fiwnt, the leading companv wiU be halted on the caution ; if on the rear or a central company, the named company will be halted on the words bkmaining companiks, or com- PANIB8 IN FRONT, BIGHT ABOUT TUBN. r 5. Forming Une at Rtght Angles to the original Alignment.— \i the battalion has advanced in direct echcUon of com- panies (a.a.a.), Phite XLIV., from the left, at wheeling distance, and is required to form line to the right (d.d.d.), the com- panies will be wheeled the quarter circle to that flank, the capUins changing their flnnka during the whed, after which hnc will be formed en the leading company i(b.c.), Mftbeady described. When the advance has been made from the right, hue may be fonoed to the left in like muiner. FORM LINE TO THE RIOIIT. BY COM- PANIE8, RIGHT -WHBBL, FOB^ARD, &C. —BATTALION. miiiy Line on u Cenfrul Coiii' Vhen line is to be formed on a onipany, the coverer and super- f Serjeant of that company will base points, as usual, facinR The companies in front of the company will then be faced to it about, their captains and changing flanks, and on the icK-MARCH, line will be formed, ibed in the t\vo first numbers !ction. B distant flank or flanks will bu : the junior major and adjutant, ». — A battalion in direct ochellon e in like manner ; if to the front, be halted on the caution; if on pany, the named company will ;mainin'o companjkb, or com- r ABOUT TUKN. nning Line at Right Antflei to mal Align,neHt.—-\i the battalion anced in direct echcUon of com- (a.a.a.), Plate XLIV., from the vheeling distance, and is required line to the right (d.d.d.), the com- nll be wheeled the quarter circle flank, the captains changing their lUring the wheel, after which Unc formed en the leading company ^ ijready described, been made from the right, line in like mMiner. KCMKLLON MOVHMRNTS. 371 S, Mi. A Battalion in Direct Enhellon fornuny Line in an Oblique Direction, When 1* is necessary to form line from direct echellon, at annn(\ to Ibe origmal augnment, the echellon will be wheeled forward into open column, and the captains will be ordered to correct their distances, and their covering in the required directiimj after which the cohtmn will be wheeled into line. 6'. 62. Exceptional Combinationt of Manattvrei. The simple manoeuvres cxpUined in this book will be found SMfTKieiit for all the ordinary movements of troops, and no others must be practised ; it may, however, occa- sionally hap])en that a single manoeuvre will not jdace a battalion in the exact position or formation required, and the commanding officer must i.i such a case be prepared to effect his object by a combination of two or more manoeu- vres. ITiIs may always be done without deviating in any way from the principles laid down, as there is no position or formation which cannot be attained by their proper application. For instance, a battalion in line may change front to the rear on the centre, still preser\'ing its usual order, as follows : — Countermarch the colour party, direct the left wing to face about and retire, and the right wing to advance (Part IV., Section 6) ; when they have marched about four paces wheel both wings by sections to the left (Part II., Section 10), give the word forward, and then order both wings to form line to the reverse flank (Part II., Section 16, and Part IV., Section 3.5). Again, a double column of subdivisions may be converted into a suigle column at quarter distance as follows : — Direct each wing to form companies (Part il., Section 29), then give the i ;C2 I'AHT IV. — BATTALION. caution that on the wovds quick maucii the left wnig will close to (luarter distance on its leoding company (Part n „ Kectioii 12), and the right wing will advance, t-uch company in succession moving into its place in front of the left wing by the flank march of fours at the double. Quarter dis- tance column may also be formed by ordering the men to break off and reassemble on their coverers, the latter bcmg iwcviously placed in their })roper order. The instruction of the officers, non-commissioned otHcers, and men being thoroughly provided for in the manoRuvrcs laid down in the Field Exercise, such combinations of those movements as are above alluded to, and all of which "epenu solely on the intelligence of the coumianding officer, should never be ])ractised in the ordinary parades and drills of a battalion. Obji troops varied is USUI army a of the fantry or cleai themf retreat manoei and at advanc ral oft< to enal All. ments,- fantiy, be full -*i P- Divi ployed — BATTALION. tuicK MAKCii the left wing will its leoding company (Part IV., rtngwill auvance, t-uch company ts place in front of the left wing rs at the douhlc. Quarter dis- fomicd by ordering the men to 1 their coverors, the latter being foper order. krrs. non-commissioned officers, l)rovidcd for in the manoRuvrcs rcisc, such combinations of those uded to, and all of which depend ■ the conmianding officer, should ordinary parades and drilla of a 373 PART V. LIGHT INFANTRY. GENERAL PRINCIPLES. I. Otject of Liaht Infantry Movements.— Thu duties of troops employed as light infantry in the field, are both varied and important ; to them the safeguard of the camp is usually entrusted, and by them, the cantonments of the army are protected irom the sudden or unexpected approach of tne enemy. When the army is in motion, the light in- fantry reconnoitre the country in its front, feel for the enemy, or clear the way for the columns when advancing, and protect them firom being too closely pressed upon or harassed when retreating; they conceal and cover the movements and manoeuvres of the line, watch the motions of the enemy, and ascertain the nature of the ground and country in advance of the main body ; upon their efficiency, the Gene- ral often veiry much depends for the necessary information to enable him to regulate and direct his columns. II. All Regiments to be instructed in lAght Infantry Move- ments, — Although certain regiments are styled "light in- fantry," every corps of infantry, without exception, must be fully instructed in this important branch of its duty. III. Division of Lipht Tro(fs. — When a regiment is em- ployed as light infantry, it is usually dniSed into tbre» A A .'174 PART v.— UOIIT INFANTRY. uarts,— skimishers, supuorta, and reserve; but it mny fro- Iiuently be deemed advisable to cover the movements of a line with Bkirmiehers and supports, or skirmishers only. IV. Relative Strength of Skirmishers, Supports, and Reserves. —The supports should always be composed of numbers equal to the hne of skirmishers; thus, each company that is extended should have a company to support it. Ihe re- serve should be at least one third uart of the who e body, •> If a single company is detached to skirmish at a Uis- tance from the main body, not more than half of the men should ever bo sent forward to skirmish at a time : tlii, Other half must remain formed in support. V. • 1 Relative Duties qf Skirmishers, Supports, and Reserves. —The movements of the skirmishers must depend in a great measure on the position and movements of the enemy, tare must be taken that the skirmishers protect and overlap the flanks of the main body they are intended to cover. 2 It is the duty of the supports to assist and support the skirmishers in every way. The movements of the former rnust therefore correspond with those of the latter. Ea^h support should be, as nearly as possible, in real- of the oentie of Us own skiimishers. The reserve is the point on whirl. both supports and skirmishers may rally. It will also •end reUef to them when necessary; it should therefoje be placed aa nearly as possible in rear of the centre of the TVhen the skirmishers an sent out to a distance, the field officers must take care that they are always Bo«t"ttted aa to protect, in the most effectual manner, the front and flanks of the main body. Reh ikinnii circum ihould the ski For in liiU, an |)orts n Are; h greater u genei and suj and rei main b Cove or in m they an inpr whi take OS that th interfef rororadi 2. Ol the a idvanta IFordin ie dow nust e: fill pro ircventi 3. Tl us men to aallT INHANTBY. rta, and reserve ; but it mny fro- ble to cover the movements of 1 supports, or skirmishers only. IV. mishers, Supports, and Reserves. Iways be composed of numbers ishers ; thus, each company that company to support it. 'Die rc- third part of tlie whole body, is detached to skirmish at a dis- , not more than half of the men ard to skirmish at a time: tk •med in support. irmishers, Supports, and Reserves. ikirmishers must depend in a great d movements of the enemy. Care irmishers protect and overlap the ley are intended to cover, lupports to assist and support the Ihe movements of the former 1 with those of the latter. Each fly as possible, in real- of the centre The reserve is the point on whicli nishers may rally. It will also necessary; it should therefore be tble in rear of the centre of the rs are sent out to a distance, the re that they are always so aituated t ^ectual manner, the firont and ORXBKAL l>niNCll>L.RII. VI. m Relative Distances.— The distance of supports from the skirmishers, and reser^'es from supports, nmst depend on circumstances and the nature of the groimd. The supports ihould always be in the most convenient position to assist the skirmishers, without beinj^ unnecessarily exposed to flre. For instance, when skirmishers have ascended a bonk or liiU, and are halted on the summit, it is evident that the sup- |)orts may approach dose to them, without being exposed to tire; but, on a plain, they must necessiirily be kept at a greater distance i the same remark applies to the reserve. As a general nde, on a plain the distance between skirmishers and supports should be about 200 yards ; between supports and reserves, about 300 yards; between the reserve and main body, 6(X) yards. VII. Cover.— -l. When under fire, skirmishers, whether halted or in motion, must take advantage of all cover, and although they are not required to prescr\'e their distances and dress- ing while so doing, they must, when advancing or retiring, take cai-e that they never get in front of each other, and that they never retain their places of cover so long as to interfere either with their own fire or with that of their rororades. 2. Officers commanding sumjorts must, with due regard the assistance they should afford to the skirmishers, take idvantage of all inequalities of ground and other objects iffording cover to protect their men, and should make them ie down when cover can be obtained by so doing; they nust examine the ground well, and select positions that rill protect them fi^m cavalry, in case of attack, without iroventing the skirmishers frvai forming upon them. 3. The officer commanding the reserve should also keep lis men under cover when practicable ; but, as the reserve A A 2 to 376 PART V. — LIGHT INFANTRY. I is not immediately under fire, his attention should pnn- cipally be directed to the selection of positions, favourable to the relief and assistance of the skirmishers and supports, with due regard to the protection of the main body. 4 When in the presence of cavahry, the reserve should be kept in column ; but under the fire of artillery, it should be deployed into line. V -i VIII. Thne ofMovement—Uaht infantry movements \n\\ usually be performed in quick time, except extensions or closings on the march, the formation of company square from extended order, or i-allyinR squares, and changes of front from the halt, which will be in double time. When more than usual rapidity is required in other movements, the men may fie directed to double by word of command or bugle sound. Although 150 steps arc taken in a minute in the ordinary double time, in hght infantry movements the speed may be increased when necessary, as will be the case when skirmishers close on files that are moving at the double. IX. Points of Direction.— M\ Unes of skirmishers move bj their centre, except when inclining to a flank, in which caseJ they move by the flank to which they are inchnmg. , How Arms are carried.— The skirmishers and supporti ^ will move with trailed arms, except in close column of sec tions, or in close files, when they will move as directed ii Part II., Section 32, and Part III., Sections 1 and 2, ^o. J Reserves armed with long rifles will move with sloped arm and unfixed bayonets; those armed with short ntles, wit trail«d arms and unfijfed swQjds, ,,.., , , extend distani placed mishei a flanli tain si retirinj and f a supp reserve 2. J. freque keep v sioned keep u men w fantry commi every i Thect pass M and fo the sij distan tinctlj delivei tendec 2. i substi unden lOHT INFANTRY. fire, his attention should prin- selection of positions, favourahle of the skirmishers and supports, action of the main body. le of cavahry, the reserve should ider the fire of artillery, it should VIII. tit infantry movements will usually ;, except extensions or closings on of company square from extended , and changes of front from the ble time. When more than usual ther movements, the men may be ird of command or bugle sound, aken in a minute in the ordinary "antry movements the speed may sary, as will be the case when that are moving at the double. IX. All Unes of skirmishers move bj inclining to a flank, in which case, » which they are indining. X. i.— The skirmishers and supporti ms, except in close column of sec .-hen they will move as directed ii Part III., Sections 1 and 2, No. a i( rifles will move with sloped armi hose armed with short rifles, witl swords, GBNBRAL PRINCIPLES. XI. 377 Officers and Connecting Links. — 1. When a cumi)any is extended, the captain should generally be at a convenient distance in reur of the centre ; the supernumeraries must be placed at equal distances along the rear of the line of skir- mishers, the lieutenant being always near the outer flank of a flank company. When a company is in support, the cap- tain should be in its proper front, whether it is advancing or retiring, he \vill thus lead his company when it advances, and follow it when it retires. The supernumeraries of a support will be in the rear as usual. The officers of a reserve will always be placed as in column, right in front. 2. A non-commissioned officer, or more, if necessary, may frequently be sent out with advantage from a support to keep up the connexion with its skirmishers. Non-commis- sioned officers may also be sent out from the reserve to keep up the connexion between it and each support ; these men will be called connecting links. XII, Words of Command and Bugle Sounds. — 1. Light in- fantry movements must in general be regulated by word of command. Commands must be repeated by the captains and every supernumerary belonging to the line of skirmishers. The connecting links may be employed, when necessary, to paas words of command, or convey intelligence backwtords and forwards between the reserve and supports, and between the supports and skirmishers. When on account of the distance, or from noise or wind, the voice cannot be dis- tinctly heard, the connecting hnks should run up and deliver their orders to the officers for whom they are in- tended, and then resume their places. 2. Calls on the bugle may occasionally be necessary as substitutes for the vmce, but as they are liable to be mis- understood, and as they reveal intended movements to the "f- Wil I i\7s PART v.— LtOHT IKfANTRV. enemy, who will soon become acquainted vnth them, they should seldom be used, unless for purposes of drill. 3. Bugle sounds must be as few and as simple as possible. None but the following sounds must ever be used in light drill: 4. One G sounded on the bugle denotes the right of the line. Two G's the centre. Three G's the left. 5. Tlie G's preceding any sound denote the part of the lino to which it applies. For instance; two G's before the Extend, signifies to extend from the Centre, One G fol- lowed by the Close, to close to the Right. One G followed by the Incline, to incline tc the right. Three G's, followed by the Wheel, to wheel to the left. I. EXTBKO. 11. Clobb. III. Advamcs. IV, Rktire, Th« m The i:;ui8hi .tOHT INPANTRV. omc acquainted with them, they less for purposes of drill, e as few and as simple as possible, unds must ever be used in light le bugle denotes the right of tha Three G's the left, ny sound denote the part of the VoT instance; two G's before the J from the Centre. One G fol- le to the Right. One G followed c the right. Three G's, followed the left. EZTIND. Clobb. :f:zfi r- f^^^ f =^ Advamcc. . Rktirb. m OKNBRAL PRIMCIl'LRH. V. Halt. 379 m The Halt annuls all previous Sounds except the Fire. VI. Commence Firing. ^ /?' «» Vn. Cease Firing. p ^ ' ", r ! I Tin. Assemble. ^^^^1 /gg^^fe IX. Incline. The okUs IX. and X. must be preceded by the distia- niishina (Vh. |:;uishing G's. 380 PART v.— LIOHT INFANTRY. XI. Thb Alarm, or Look out for Cavalry. XII. The Quick Timk. XIII. Thk Doublk Time. XIV. Lie Down. XV. Rise. 6. Every regiment should have a well marked and simple regimentu call. i. The Advance or the Retire sounded when inchmng to the flank, indicates that the original dhrection is to be iMumed. «, When moving by sound of bugle, men will wait tiU the bugle has ceased before thej move. 0. When The Fire is combined with any other call, it should always be the last sounded, for if the men com- menced firing they would not hear the second call. 10. foun( only 11, reser Th guidi move circu theg depei judgi oftb Re ment and ( must In reari thefi •n othei thus no n dista: LIOHT INFANTRY. : Look out ron Cavalry. B Quick Time. K Double Time. XV. Rise. lid have a well marked and simple Retire sounded when inclining to i the original direction is to be ound of bugle, men will wait till ire thejr move. I combined with any other call, it Mt sounded, for if the men oom- l not hear the second call. movbmbnth or a company. 381 10. The commanding officer's bugle will generally be found sufficient in light inftmtry drill $ repeated sounds only create confusion and delay. 11. Bugle sounds do not apply to bodies of troops in reserve. Light Infantry Movements op a Company. The following general rules are laid down for the guidance of troops employed as light infantry, but all movements in extended oraer must depend so much upon oircumiitances, which are ever .'arying, and the nature of the ground, that officers and non-commissioned officers must depend to a great extent on their own intelligence and judgment, for the effectual perforn.ance of the duties required of them. Recruits must first be instructed in the following move- ments on level ground, and be made to keep their distances and dressing in extended order; when more advanced they must be taught to apply them practically. S. 1. Bxtendinij. In extending, as a general rule, it is the business of the rear rank man of ei\ch file to regulate the distance, and of the front rank man to look to the direction. The number of paces that files are to extend from each other may be specified in the caution by the commander, thus :— THREE PACES PROM THE RIGHT — EXTEND. When no number is specified, six paces will be the regulated distance between files. ■M2 PART V. — LIGHT IKFANTRY. COMl'ANV FROM TUB RIGHT, (left CBNTRR, or N"— , FILE,) — EXTEND. Bugle Call, G. (G,G,G.or G.G.) EXTEND N° I. 1. From the Halt— On the word EX- TBND, or on tiie Iwrt sound of the bugle, the captain will place himself in rear of the centre of the compwiy, the senior supernumerary in rear of the right, and the second senior in rear of the left. The file on the named flank, or the centre or named file, mil stand fast, the remainder will advance wins (or shoulder with the short rifle), face out- wards, and extend in quick time. The front rank men will move direct to the flank, covering correctly on the march, the rear-rank men will oast thonr eyes over the inward shoulder, and tap their respective front-rank men as a sig- nal to halt, front, and stand at ease, when they have gained their proper distanoes. Men must be taught to extend from any file of a close olumn of sections, without prerously re-forming company} the named file will stand fast, the remainder will face outwards and extend as already described. i-ROM THB 2. On the March.— Oa the word extend RIGHT, (left, or on the last sound of the bugle, the file CENTRE, or on the named flank, or the centre or named N"— •, FILE.)— file, will continue to move straight for- EXTEND. ward in quick time, the remainder wiU Bugle CaU, make a half turn to the flank to which G. (G, G, G. or they are ordered to extend, and move off G, G.) in double time. As soon as each file has Extend N" i. extended to its proper distance, it will turn to its front and resume the quick time; the rear-ranl 'n covering their front-rank men, and ti. -vhole keeping m line vnth the directing i».c. LIGHT IKFANTRY. m the Halt— On the word KX- r on the hurt sound of the bugle, ain will place himself in rear of re of the company, the senior merary in rear of the right, and nd senior in rear of the left, lie on the named flank, or the )r named file, mil stand fast, lainder will advance arms (or r with the short rifle), face out- ind extend in quick time. Tont rank men will move direct flank, covering correctly on the the rear-rank men will oast their BT the inward shoulder, and tap ipcctive front-rank men as a aig- lalt, front, and stand at eaae, when ve gained their proper distanoee. extend from any file of a close it previously re-forming company ; id fast, the remainder will face ready described. (AeMarcA.— Ontheword extend le last sound of the bugle, the file lampd flank, or the centre or named 1 continue to move straight for- 1 quick time, the remainder wiU k half turn to the flank to which i ordered to extend, and move off )le time. As soon as each file has id to ita proper distance, it will > its front and resume the quick ;he rear-ranl 'n covering their ink men, and ti. .yhole keeping m ;h the directing i».c. MOVIMINTS OF A COMPANY. 383 3. Jncreasing Distance bettvfen Files. — Men in extended order may be directed to increase the distance between their files any given nimiber of paces, from either flank, the centre, or any named file. The command will be given thus, to KIOHT PACna FROH THH RIGHT, — EXTBND ; if nO numbci of paces is specified, or if the bugle sounds the extend, the skirmishers will open out one half more than their original extension ; thus, if they are at six paces distance, they will open to nine. 4. A Comptmy halted while estendtHff oh the Mareh.^- When a company, extending on the march, is halted before all the files are extended, the renuinder will make a half torn outwards into file, break into quick time, advance arms, or shoulder arms with the short rifle, and complete their extension as fW>m the halt. 6. Extending from the Eehellon March of Sectiotu. — A company while moving to a flank in eehellon of sections should be practised in extending on the march without previously forming company, the eehellon moving on in double time, each file as it gains its distance turning to the front and breaking into quick time, as directed in No. 2 of this section. 6. Skirmishers to kneel or lie down by Order, — Soldiers in extended order, though not firing, may be ordered to kneel or to He down, when it is deemed advisable that they should do 10. S. 2. Closing. 6KiRMt8HEH8 1, On the Halt. — On the word close, ON the right or on the last sound of the bugle, the (lbpt, centre, file on the named flank, or the centre, or orN" — ^,pile) — named file, will stand at ease; the re* CLOSE. mainder will face towards it, and dose at Buf[fle Call, quick time, halting, fronting, ordering G. (G, G, G. or arms, and standing at ease in succession 384 PART v.— lilOHT INFANTRY. G,G.) CL08K, N" II. 1 .W". ON TUB RIGHT (left, CBNTKK, or N"— .file)— CLOSE. Bugle Call, G. (G.G.G. or G.G.) CLOSE, N° II as they arrive at their places ; the officers will remain in the rear unless directed to take post. . . , , The file on which the skirmishers close may be faced in any direction; the re- mainder will form upon it, facing in the same direction. 2. On the March.— On the word close, or on the last sound of the bugle, the file oil the named flank or centre, or the named file, will move steadily on in quick tin" ; the remainder will make a half turn towards it and close in double time, turning to the front and resuming the :lose, ;^" ii. quick time as they arrive at their nlaces. When a company, closing on the march, is halted betore ail the files are closed, the remainder will make a half turn inwards into file, break into quick time, and complete the formation as from the halt. Skirmishers must also be taught to close while moving at the double, in which case the files that are closing must increase then: speed. S. a. Squares. Company Squares. In liaht infantry movements, company squates will be 'formed as laid down in Part II., Section 32 ; when soldiers run in from extended order, they will order arms and fix bayonets or swords independently as they halt i.na ttont in their places. A company must be practised in closing from extended order into close column of sections on any named file ; when no file is named they will cose on the left file of the second section. If much pressed by cavalry, the first section formed may commence tiring and the remainder form in rear of it, the sections passing eacii other left arm to left arm. lOHT INFANTRY. rrive at their places ; the officers lin in the rear unless directed to le on which the skirmishers close faced in any direction; the re- will form upon it, facing in the ection. the March. — On the word close, le last sound of the bugle, the he named flank or centre, or the lie, will move steadily on in quick he remainder will make a half ards it and close in double time, to the front and resuming the ne as they arrive at their nlaces. ig on the march, is halted before remainder will make a half turn to quick time, and complete the lalt. Skirmishers must also be ing at the double, in which case mst increase their speed. i. Squares, any Squares. iments, company squares m\\ be art II., Section 32 ; when soldiers )rder, they will order arms and independently as they ha.lt t.nd V company must be practised in ier into close column of sections no file is named they will close on id section. If much pressed by formed may commence firing and T of it, the sections passing each MOVRMRNTfl OF A COMPANY. .386 7%e Rallying Square. When the men of different companies are mixed together in extended order, or when detached skinnishers are over- taken by cavalry, they will form rallying squares, as explained in Part II., S. 33. Two men pbced back to back can keep off several cavalry soldiers ; half a dozen stout-hearted men formed into a rallying square would be safe against a body of cavalry. When skirmishers of different companies mixed together are ordered to form rallying squares, they will run to the nearest officer standing as a rallying point, whether he belongs to their own company or not. S. 4. Aihoncing in Skirmishing Order, COMPANY On the word advance, or on the ADVANCE. last sound of the bu^le, the men will Bugle Coll, step off in quick time with trailed ADVANCE, arms, keeping their distance from the N°in. centre. S. 5. Retiring in Skirmishing Order. COMPANY — On the word kktire, or on the last RETIRE. sound of the bugle, the men will face Bugle Call, to the right about, and step off in quick RETIRE, time, rear rank in front, keeping their N* IV. distance from the centre. Men in extended order will invariably face or turn to the right about, whether they are advancing, retiring, firing, or not firing. S. G. Passing Obstacles in Skirmishing Order. Men in extended order must frequently be practised in passing obstacles both in advancing and retiring. When an obstacle, such as a pond or a marsh, presents itself in fropt k r 9M PABT v.— LIGHT IJf rXNTKY. of a line of skirmishew, tho fllet oppoaite to it will open out arftdiuJly M they approach, and will pass on either aide of it, closing upon the remaininif files, which will continue moving straight to their Aront. Having paased the obstacle, the files that have been diverted from their direction, will •gain extend and fill up the interval in the line. A company advMioinff or retiring in skirmishing order, should also be practised in closing on the centre files of sub- divisions or aectiuns, those files continuing to march straight to their firont; after whi< a, the company should be aaain extended from the same files, and if the direction has been propei'ly kept, the intervals between files will still be found correci S. 7- Inclining to a Flank. TO THE BIGHT On the word incline, or on the last (or lept) — sound of the bu-^fle, the skirmishers will INCLINE. make a half turn to the flank to which Bugle Call. they are ordered to incline, and move in G.(orG, G,(i) a diagonal direction, until they are or- INCLINE, dered to resume their original direction N" IX. to the front or rear, by the word or sound ADVANCE. advance or retire. If the skirmishers Bugle Call, hwe made a half turn, and are again ADVANCE, o'dered to incline in the same direction, N" III. oi the bugle sounds the incline a BETIRB. seiwnd time, they will complete the turn Bugle Call, by making a second half turn and will RETIRE, N" IV. take ground to the fiank in file. HALT. If the word or bugle sound halt is Bugle Call, given when men are inclining, they will halt, N" v. halt and front. A two 1 form A angle than 8KII OHAI TO T (or 1 TI CEN'I N'S I Ui M AOHT IWrXNTRY. filet opnoaite to it will open out 1, and will pus on either aide of linini; files, which will continue ont. Having passed the obstacle, liverted from their direction, will le interval in the line. or retiring in skirmishing order, 1 dosing on the centre files of sub- files continuing to march straight h, the company should be wain les, and if the direction has been s between files will still be found ining to a Flank. \o word INCLINE, or on the last )f the bu-ifle, the skirmishers will half turn to the flank to which I ordered to incline, and move in nal direction, until they are or- resume their original direction ront or rear, by the word or sound 1 or retire. If the skirmishers lade a half turn, and are again to incline in the same direction, bugle sounds the inclimb a time, they will complete the turn ing a second half turn and will )und to the fiank in file, e word or bugle sound halt is irhen men are inclining, they will 1 front. MOVRMRNTN OF A COMPANY. 8. 8. Skirmtkert changing Front or Direction. ;W7 AliiM of skirmishers halted, can change firont on any two named files that may be placed as » base for the rest to form upon. A change of front in this manner may be made at any angle, but it is not likely to be required tu a greater extent than the sixteenth, or at most the eighth of a circle. 8KIRMI8HKRS OHANQR FRONT YO THE RIGHT (or lrft) on THE TWO CENTRK (or ON N"-, AND N»-,) FILB8, UOUDLR MARCH. 1. From the Halt. — On tlic caution, the captain will dress tiie two named files in the direction required. On the word march, if all the files are to be tlirown forward on a flank, they will make a half-face inwards, and move across by the shortest way to their places in the new line, dressing on the two base files, as they successively halt. If all the files are to be thrown back on either flank, they will make a three-quar- ters face in the Jirection of the base files, then move across and halt and firont as they arrive at their places in the new line. If the change is on two central files, part of the company will be thrown forward and the rest bacli:, m ftbove described. J im PART V.-^UOHT INPANTHY. Recruits should first l)e taught this movement 't ijiiink time, and by sepi>rate words of command j thus, after pku- ing the base files, LEFT hubdivision riuht half-pack; mOHT HUBDIVISION LKFT ABOUT THRBB QUARTBRB— PACK, TUB WHOLH, UUICK-MARCH. (riqht or LEPT) WHRRti. Hugln Call, G.(orG,G,G.) WHBRI., N° X. PORWAHU. Bugle Call, ADVANCE, N" JII. On the March. — A line of skirmishers on the march may change their direction gradually, on the same principles as s company wheels on a moveanle pivot. Un the word whrbl, or on the last sound of the bugle, iho pivot file will halt, and the remainder will circle round it, the front-rank men looking outwards for the dressinff, and the rear-rank men keeping the distances from the pivot flank. On the word forward, the whole line will advance by the centre. S. 9, Firing in Skirmiahinff Order. The men of a file must always work together. Both men should never be unloaded at the same time; they should load, when practicable, under cover ; before moving to the front, when advancing ; and after falling back, when retiring. When troops in extended order at the halt are ordered to commence firing, whether by word or bugle sc id, they will drop on the knee or lie down if cover can be more ^ectui^iy obtained by so doin^ ; when they cease to fire they will rise. When troops firing on the march are halted ther will kneel. Soldiers, after firing in extended order, will invaiiably pome to the capping position and shut down the flap, if it baa i will sling and CO F Bu CO 1 a; soldi( thiu ]; the b men i positi throu If in he w: rifle li little I COM Fl Bu« COM FI ^ -MOHT INFANTRY. >e taught this movement 't cjiiink rda of command ) thua, after pW-- lUBDIVlSION RIUHT HALP-VACR; eft about thrrb auartbrb— :k-march. I the March. — A line of skinniahen march may change their direction lly, on the aame principle! aa a ny wheela on a moveanle pivot. le word whrbl, or on the last of the hugle, iho pivot file will nd the remainder wiU circle round front-rank men looking outwards 3 dreasing, and the rear-rank men g the wstances from the pivot the word forward, the whole line Ivance by the centre. in SkirmUhinff Order. I always work together. Both men ed at the same time; they ahould nder cover; before moving to the nd after falling back, when retiring, led order at the halt are ordered to er by word or bugle ac id, they » lie down if cover can be more to doins ; when they ceaae to fire lopa firing on the march are halted in extended order, will invaiiably tion and ahut down the flap, if it MOVRMBNTH OF A COMPANY, fl8» COMUBNCK URINO, Bugle Call, OOMMRNCK FIRINO, N" VJ. haa been raiaeduf reiiuired to re-lond 0!i the march thcv will then bring the riffe to the trail in the left hand, the aling upwards nnii the muazle inclining iin to the riirht and proocod with their loadiii,^. '* ' 1. Firivff on the Half.— On t\\o words coMMENCK KiKiNo, Or on the last sound of the bugle, the whole will drop on the knee, the front-rank men will then make reatly, liro, and load j the rear-rank men when their fi'ont-rank men aie in the act of cnpping, will make ready, fire, and then load. A line of skirmishers may be ordered to Ho down, or single soldiers may lie down for the sake of cover. When flrinir in thiu position both elbows mus rest on the ground to support the body and rifle ; the men w ill load on their knees Uifle- raen may Are on their backs in favourable situations ; in this position the feet arc to be crossed, the right foot passed through the sling of the rifle, and the piece supported by it It m very exposed situations a soldier wishes to load lyinir" he will roU oyer on his back, and phiee the butt of his iiHe between his legs, the cock upwards, and the muzzle a little elevated. COMMENCE FIRINO. Bugle Call, COMMENCE FIUINO, N'VI. 2. Firinc/ when Advanoittg, —On the words coMMBNCH FIRING, or OH the last aound of the bugle, the whole of the skirmishers \» ill make a momentary halt; the fW)nt-rank man of each file will fire (kneeling if preferred), and take a side pace to hia left} the rear-rank man will then nasB on, and the front-rank man will follow dose behind him, loading on the march; when in the act of capping n B 390 PAST V. — LIGHT INFANTRY. he will give the word "Ready" in an under tone of voice, on which the proper 'i«ar-rank man will fire, and both men will proceed as above described. When men find difiicvlty in loading on the march, they may hidt and load, and then double up to their file leaders. When cover presents itself, the men must be taught to take advantage of it, by running forward from place to place as soon as they are loaded ; when any large object aftbraing considerable cover comes in their way, several files may run up behind it, fire, load, and then move on and iregain their distances and places in the general line. coMMBNCR 3. Firing when. Retiring. — On the FIRING. words COMMENCE FIRING, or on the last Bugle Call, sound of the bugle, both ranks will halt, COMMBNCR front, and kneel, the front-rank man of FIRING, each right file will then fire, rise, fikje to N" VI. the right about, and retire in quick time, passing by the left of his rear-rank man, and loading as he retires ; the rear-rank man will continue to look to the front till his front-rank man has passed him, and will then rise, face to the right about and follow him. As soon as the left files hear the ramrods of the right files working they will proceed in like manner as the right files. When the loading of the front-rank man of a file is compldK^d, both ranks will halt, front, and kneel, the rear-rank man wUl then fire and proceed os above described. Afler the first round the files will con- tinue to fire and retire, without reference to each other, •I5i4?*i lOHT INFANTRY. give the word "Readv" in an ne of voice, on which the proper : man will fire, and both men eed as above described. r in loading on the march, they a double up to their file leaders. lelf, the men must be taught to ning forward from place to place when any large object aftbrding I their way, several files may run i then move on and regain their general line. ring wheii Retiring. — On the [>MMBNCB FIRING, or on the last f the bugle, both ranks will halt, id kneel, the iront-rank man of ht file will then fire, rise, foce to t about, and retire in quick time, by the left of his rear-rank man, ling as he retires ; the rear-rank 1 continue to look to the front Front-rank man has passed him, 1 then rise, face to the right nd follow him. As soon as the s hear the ramrods of the right irking they will proceed in like as the right files. When the of the front-rank man of a file tlcted, both ranks will halt, front, eel, the rear-rank man will then 1 proceed as above described, le first round the files will con- I fire and retire, without reference other, MOVBMBNTR OF A COMPANY. 391 On rough ground, files will nm back from one place of cover to another, taking care before they leave one station, to select another to fall back upon. One man of each file should fire previous to moving, and re-load when he is again under cover. As the principal object is to keep the enemy in check, skirmishers when retbing, should hold each station as long as possible without risk of being cut off by the enemy, or of being shot by their comrades. When a line of skirmishers halted, is ordered to advance firing, the front-rank men will first fire, the whole will then rise, and proceed as already described. 4. Firing tohile inclining to a Flank, or taking Ground to a flank in Files. When skirmishers are ordered to fire, or the bugle sounds the fire, while they are inclining to the right or left, or taking ground to a flank in files, the front-rank men will halt, take steady aim and fire, the rear-rank men moving on; having fired, the front-rank men will double up to the proper rear of their i-ear-rank men, and then load on the march, or load at the halt, and then double up. When their loading is completed, the rear-rank men will proceed in like manner. When skirmishers either halted, or on the march, are directed to cbasb firing, they will complete their loading, and the rear-rank men will resume their places in the proper rear of their front-rank men, if not there already. Whenever skirmishers are directed to halt, byword of command or bugle sound, they will halt facing to their proper ttant, and if firing, they will drop on the knee and continue firing. B n 2 392 PART v.— LIGHT INFANTBY. MOVEMENTS OF A BATTALION. S. 10. A Battalion extending in Sktrmithinff Order from Quarter Distance Column. 1. A Battalion of Ten Companiet, extending /irom Quarter Distance Column right in front — Plate XLV. Caution, xiik battalion win. skibmish, tukeb companies— EXTEND. Movement! of Left 8kii-muihei'8. i Movement! of | Movements of Right CciitreSkirmUhcrs Skirmishen. Ao.8. Double-JHarch, By Sections U/t-Whcel, Jbnvard (in cciielion); and as soon ns tliey ar« clear of the centre Hkirmishers, Front the Kight— Extend. Movements of Loft Support. ^"0.6. Qitiiik-March. By Sections L^-lVhecI, jbrward (in eohellon); and when in rear of the ; centre of the left skir- ' mishers Be-form Com pany. Forward. No. i. Double-March, Bp Sectiont, Right- Whee, Forward (in echellon); and as soon as they arc clear of the centre skir- mishen, From the Left —Extend. Movements of Btght Support. JN'o. 5. Qiiivk-March.S^ Scctiotis Biaht-IVheel, Forward (in rchelton); and when i n rear of the coiitroof tlio right jMr- mishers, Itf-farmCom- pany, Fui loard. Movement* of Beser%'o. Nog. 7, 8, e, and 10 Companica forni the reicrve, remaining in column, or ueplojrtng into line, as thr .uation may requir-, 2. A BatlaKon of Ten Companies, extendtM from QnarUr Distance Column left in fiont.-ln thU c.so So. 10 C»»»y trill fbrm the centre skirmishen., No. 9 the nght *»«""»«"• No. 8 the left skirmishers, No. 7 the centre support. No. Otte right soppoit, No. 5 the left support 5 the remainder yiU form the reserve. The extension will be performed in the same manner as iv is performed from a column right ia front ^ a ^ ^ LIGHT INVANTKY. OF A BATTALION. iding in Skirmishiiiff Order from Distance Column, mpaniet, extending from Quarter •ight in front — Plate XLV. ILL SKIBMISII, TUUEB COMPANIES— £XT£KD. ovomento of | re Skirmishers 1, Qi( I farch, from ' \e CetUrt— i ^trtend. Movement* of Right Skirmishere. A'l). i. Doiible-Mareh. Bfi Section*, Right' Wnet> Forward (in sohellon); and asi soon as they are clear of t hi> centre sklr- mlHliere, From the Left —Exteml. ovements of ntro Support. . 4. (inich- larch. Movements of Btght Support. Ko. 5. Quick-Match. Su Scctiotis Rinhl-IVheel, Fonaard (in rchellon); and when iiireikrof the con tro of 1 1 ic right »Mr- inishors, ne-formCum- pauDfFoi "'(ird. nenti o f Rasert'o. d 10 Companiet fomi the log ill column, or ueplojrtng .uation may requir-, _ •ronf.— In this esse No. 10 Coxomdj ii«her«, No. 9 the right sklmiAers, , No. 7 the centre support. No. Otlie ft support ; the remainder will form lion will be performed In the same from a column right ia flront MOVKMSNT8 Or TIIR nATTALlON. 393 LIGHT INKANTKY. :ilV^ •i..''«.v, MOVEMENTS OK THE BATTALION. 395 a. A Battalion of Eight or Six Companiu, extending from Quarter Distance Column right in front. Caution, the battalion will bkirmisii, two cohpanies— KXTEND. Movements of Left SkirmiHliore. Movements of Right SkirmiHhera. tfo. i. Quick-Starch, From tlie Slight— Kjeteiul, tlio whole will mal(o n imlftarn to the left nnil move on till clear of the left of No. 1, then extend an UHual. -Vo. 1. Quick-:<= Ltl/t—Jijilenil. 'ch, From the Xovcmentti of Left Support. All. 4. Quick March, Sy Seotion* L^t'Whecl, Fvneard (in oenellon) ; and whon in rear of the centre of the left skir- mishers, Be-form Company, Forward. Movements of Right Support. No. ."}. Quick-March, Jiy Sections Right-Wheel, Foramrd (in crhellon); iind when in rear of the con'.ro of the right sklr- mishurs. Se-form Company, For toe, fd. Movements of Roservc. Xo. 5 and 6 in a six Company Battalion, and Xos. 5, 6, 7, and 8 in an eight Company Bat- talion, form the Reserve, in line or column. 4. A Battalion of Eight or Six Companies, extending from Quarter Distance Column t^t in front. — In this case the com- panies will moTe out as above described, but in the folloving order : — From a battalion of eight companies, No. 8 will form the right skirmishers, No. 7 the left skirmishers, No. 6 the right support, No. 5 the left support; the remainder will form the reserve. From a bitttalion of six oompanies, No. 6 will form the right skirmishers. No. 5 the left skirmishers, No. 4 the right Hupport, No. 3 the left snpport ; the remainder the reserre. ill II 396 PART V, — LIGHT INFANTRY. S, 11. A Battalion in Quarter Distance Column exiendiny to a Flank, Altliough the foregoing methods will usually be adopted in extending a battalion in skirmighing order, it may occasionally be necessary when covering a division or brigade to extend all the companies in the same direction, which will be performed as follows : 1. A Battalion of Ten Companies, formed in Quarter Distance Column, extending from the Lift. If the column is right in front it will extend as follows : — Caution, tiik battalion will sicinMisn, thuke lkadino COMPANIES, FROM THE LEFT, EXTEMJ. 3[0T>m«nt« of L«ft Skirmlahen. lloTements of Centre iikirmishers. Ifo.l. QHKk-Uanh,From yo. i. Doublt-l/arrh, Bu tk* Lift—Exltnd, Secliom. JUuht-IVheel, Foneartt (in ecbellon), when clenr of the left 8kJrmiaber!<, J-Vom tfie Lf/t~ExUnd. Morementa of Uight Shli*ra{Aher8. iVo. 3. DouiU-ltarrH, Bu Herliom Right - WItetl Forward (in evhellon), when altar of the centre skirniiahera. From tlit Ltft^Extenv MoT«mento of Left Support. Movements of Centre Support. Mnremeuts of RiKbt Support. No, 4. Qukk-March^ Bff flections Right -Wherl, /Wwnrr/ (in ecbellon), when in rear of the centre of left skirmisb- ers, Jie-furm-Companj/, Forward. A'o. h. Quirk Unrch, Bii Sections Itighl - Whtcl. Forward (in echellon). when in renr of the centre of centre sklr- mifthers, Ite-fttrm-Com- pany, horxcard. Xo. (1. Qiiiik-Marrh, By Srrtiont Jiight - Wheel, Forward (in ecbellon), when in rear of the centre of the rinht skir- mishers, Jlt-/orm-C»m- panu, Forward. ■ HoTementi of Keserre. No. 7, 8, «, nnd \« will take ground to the right by fours ami torm the reaerre, as ehondjr described. If the column is left in front, No. 10 company will form the left skirmishers, No. 9 the centre skirmishers. No. 8 the right skirmishers, No. 7 the left support, No. 6 the centre support, and No. 5 the right support j the remainder the reserve. 2. A Battalion of Ten Companies, formed in Quarter Distance Column extending from th* Bight. — la this case, whether the .1-. • M • • a ■ a ■ B • • a ■s ■a ■".1 •a «a • 1 ^^ ■ a ■a ■a ■a ao ■ a... • o~— ■ a ■ ■ a ■ B ■ a ■ a ■ oH ■a ■o •a •a ao ■LIGHT INFANTRY. rter Distance Column extetidintj to I Flank, nethods will usually be adopted in rmighing order, it may occasionally I division or brigade to extend all the letion, -which will be performed as mpanies, formed in Quinitr Distance '^i;ft. If the colninn is right in front WILL SKIUMISn, TntlKE LKADIXO OM TIIU LEFT, EXTENIJ. OTements of re ijkirmisheri. •oti6/fl-JArtrrA, By J, Itluht-Whtei, rd (in echellon), clenr of the left iher^, yrom ihe ^IxUnd. Morementa of I Right Kkli-rai.iherii. I iVo. 3. Dottble-ifarrh, /)// ! Herliom liighl - Wlirtl I Forward (in etjhelion), when altar of the centre Biiirniiehers, From tfit Ltft^Extenv ovoments of itre Support. Movements of ItiKht Siipiiort. Quirt March, nil a Highl - Wheel, rd (in echellon), in renr of the of centre «klr- L Jtc-fitrm-Com- 'orward. Xo. a. Qiilik-3far ^^. <■■■ ront, No. 10 company will form the centre skirmishers, No. 8 the right support, No. 6 the centre support, I the remainder the reserve. ■ B BB 398 PART V. — MOUT IMfAKTBY. .W_M t!J.jiiiU{i',i'!.-:j(ll t! ^-^wyl'^-iiV right c skirmi third ( and 80 Wh ports I of sect 3. i Right compa above S. IS 1. . compi the se compi right, suppc suppc |)any, c(mpi tl ? e WILL of eig when ieadir its ri$ panie advai ingc( on th form ingw lilOUT IMfAMTBY. AS . ..■>rj »,\v j- r,. Moremautt of ]ieU Bklrniiiheri. tfo. a Dnuble Mnreh, Bu Steliont, Lr/i-Whetl, FurwarJ (in eulieUon), an Boon lu the centro •kirmUheri are ex- t«nilertvnrd (in eahelton), when in rear of the centre of the rcntre akirminlicrff, Jttform- Compani/, Forward* A'o. 1. Doubh J/ai'cA, By Srelion* JSighi - Wheel, Forward (in acbellon), aa aoon oa the centre akimiiahera lira ei- tended — From th* Lei' —BxUiul. Moretncnta of lligbt Hupport. Ao. 4. Quick-Uarck, Bi .^ecUons Right - Wheel. Forward (in eeheUon) when in rear of the centre of the rifht aklr- miihera, Re-/urm'Com- jiony, Forward, MoTemonta of BaMrre, Xog. 7, 8, 9, and 10 Companiea will form the raaerre, In line or column, and will mora In rear of the centra bjr foura. -LIGHT INrANTRV. tenditiff in Skirmithitiff Order from lAne. directed to extend from line, ttic ilcir- rem either flunk ; the companies oexl supports, tlie remaining companies the will be performed ai follows : — Cumpauien cxUndimj from Line, Three S WILL SKIRMlSIt, THRRK OOUPAKtOS , FROM TUB CKNTHB EXTEND. Al(>TCin«nU of .'•ntxa Skirinitben. !. Qiti'^k-Mitrch, From Ctntre—Jixltnil, MoTenionU of niglit HkirmUhen. Moiementa of Centra Support. B. QuiikMaieh, Bu livm Rigln whetl, nvnrd (in eaheltoD), en in rc«r of the itre of the rcntre rmislicrs, Jttform- npantft Forward* Xo. 1. DouUt J/ai'cA, Bu Srethn* Itiglu - Wherl, Forward (in echeUon), u loon u tlie eentn •kirraiahen «ra ai- tenileil — From th* LtJ' —ExUnd. Moremcnt* of Might Hupport. Ao. 4. Quick-ifarch, Bi l^ecUons Right - Wlutl. Forward (in eehellon! when in rear of the centre of the rifht aklr- miihers, Re-form'Com- jianpt Forward, iremonti of BeMrr*. 9, and 10 Companiea vlll I reserre, in line or column, mora In rear of the centre MOVBMRNTS OP TIIR BATTAUON. 401 111 ( ■• .ft- . • • t ■ 402 PART v.— LIGHT INfANTBY. E\ "•'>; K;-'— i -■*rf h ■u ■a 1 ^' ■u 1 2 ■a ■a t ■^ ■ Q ■a n ■a /' •< 1 Iff ./ D:'*': -LiaHT INFANTRY. MOVRMRNTR Ot THII ilATTAMON. •103 \ V : \. .:l, :.:^, ;,.- . .« . " -tj. ■ ^'r-.--'- 1 .' '"'-., ""■ ■•-■'- :■ / ;i / •* V- /..../ /n ! „ -.,/: / • 0' / ,„ 404 PART V, — LIGHT INFANTRY. ■D kn me to to ■a ■u ■u \ ** '■-,\ ""N, ..r::^:- VVv. ■&..„^fi fci..~ skii mai und T fro 11 mar Kroi rese bef; or d 2. fron Mid exte corn rnisl: in re 3. skin, h:Uf may nam liIOHT INFANTRY. \\ ■^. H^-#fjujffi^arM -TP MOVKMKNTS OF THK BATTAUOX. When the three companies on the left are ordered to skirmish, the extension will be performed in a similar manner. No. »^, 9, and 10 companies skirmishins. No 5 6 ""-r J '"."."PP'J"^' '^•'J 1. 2, 3, and 4 in reserve. ' ' 1 he skirmishing companies maybe directed to extend from their right or left, or from any named file, in the same manner aa they extend from th? centre, according to the ground they are intended to cover j the supports and reserve conforming to their movements. This method mil be found useful when a battalion on the flank of a briaadc or division is ordered to cover the rest of the line 2. A Battalion qf Ekjht or Six Companies exfendinq ■'''Tvix"r'ir '"'' ^"Wnies skirmishinff.—fhU XLVII and XLVIII — A battalion of eight or six companies will extend from line m the same manner as a battalion of ten companies, the two companies on the right (or left) skir- nushing, the two next companies in support, the remainder in reserve. 3. A Battalion erf ending from Line, half its Companies skirmishng.-A batiahon mav be required to seni out init its companies to skmnish, in which case either winij ri;„^fflf IS^^*^ ^'"^ ^^^ ?«^*' l**"' «^"*^' «' f™™ any named file, the companies of the remaining wing forming lupports, in the manner above described. It may occasionally be necessary to order a batlaUon of b whiTof °''%*\'"''* •?,"* ^^'^ companies to skirmish, in which case onlv two will remain with the reserve. «vw.^^" °ir *''''" ^ ^'o^'P^ny ant' » half are ordered to extend in the same direction, unless they we verv weak eompames. It would be unreasonable to expect the men of To^'^y companies to continue at the double march untU they are extended; the commanding officer must therefore c c m— •106 I'ABT v.— LIGHT INFANTRY. use liis discretion in ordering them to move out Irom line or column, in quick time, and in directing the company of formation, when extended, to halt for the remamoer to move up. Before a retreat, if necessary, the skirmishers of a batta* lion may be extended from the halt on their own Rround, the support and reserve retiring to their proper distances and places. S. 14. Setieoiii;/ Skirmishers, When skirmishers have suffered considerable loss, when they are fatigued by continued rapid movements, or when their supply of ammunition is getting low, it will be au- visable to ruieve them. . ,• e • i The most convenient method of effecting the relief, is to order the supports to extend and relieve their own skir- When retiring, the successive relief of the skirmishers by supports, is the most effectual manner of keeping an enemy in check: the officer commanding a support, should, there* fore, be constantly on the look-out for good poBitions» in which he may extend his men with advantage, such at a bank, a ditch, a wall, or such Hke cover. After reheving, the new skirmishers must hold their position untU ordaed to continue the retreat. , . , , - v •_„ The following general rules are laid (Vnvn for relieving skirmishers under diffibrent cuwumstances. I. Rtlieving Skirmishers that are halted.- lo relieve skir- mishers that aw halted, the supjwrts will extend in the war, out of immediate reach of the enemy's fire, and thai run up to the old lino. The old skirmishers on beinj? relieved will run straight to their rear, and when out of immediate LIGHT INFANTRY. ring them to move out from line e, and in directing the company ided, to halt for the remainQer to jssary, the skimushers of a batta* )m the halt on their own ground, retiring to their pi-oper distances \lieeiny Skirmishers, e suffered considerable loss, when [tinned rapid movements, or when tion is getting low, it will be ad- method of effecting the relief, is to ixtend and relieve their own skir- ;cessive relief of the skirmishers by !ctual manner of keeping an enemy oamanding a support, should, there- he look-out for good positions, in his men with advantage, such as or such Mke cover. After reUeving, st hold their position until ordered il rules are laid down for relieving 9nt circumstances. ers that are halted- I'o relieve skir- the supports will extend in the rear, I of the enemy's fire, and then run le old skirmishers on being relieved sir rear, and when out of immediate MOVRMENTS OP THE BATTALION. 4(ff reach of the enemy's fire, will close on the centres of com- panies and form supports. The new skirmishers will usually he extended from the halt on their own ground, but under some circumstances, when they are completely hidden from the enemy, they may be ordered to advance and to extend on the march. Should an immediate advance \k intended, the old skir'- mishers on being relieved, will remain lying down till the new skirmishers have gained sufficient distance to their front ; they will then rise, close on the centres of companies, and form supports. i. Relievim Skimtishers that are advancing. — To relieve skirmishers that are advancing, the supports will extend on the inarch, and then double up to tne old skirmishers, changing into ^uick time as they pass through them, on which, the old line will lie down ana wait tiU the new skir- mishers are sufficiently advanced to protect them from im- mediate fire, when they will rise, and each company will close to its centre, forming supports. |1 Relieving Skirminhers that are retiring. — To relieve skirmishers that are retiring, the supports will halt, ftont, and extend, each man if jMMsible getting under cover. When the old skirmishers arrive mthin about 30 or 30 paces of the new, they will run through them to the rear, until they are out of immediate reach of the enemy's fire, and then close on the centres of companies and form supports, llie new skirmishers should be extended at a considerable distance in rear of the old line, in order that th^ may have time to complete their extension and get under cover before they are required to check the enemy. When skirmishers are reUeved, and they find that msh supports have been sent out from the reserve, th^mll form in rear of them, and afterwards proceed to join the reserve, cc 2 I \ 4(W vxnr V. — UGtit inpantky. forminff fours inwards and moving in tiuick time. If neces- sary, their supply of ammunition can then be rep'iiushed. Fresh companies may be sent out at any time from the reserve to relieve the supports. S. 16. R^ "'orcing, or exlcvdin;/ a Line of Skirmishers io a Flank. 1. Beiw/omui^.-Any part of a line of skirmishers may be reinforced, by tliromngfonvard the supports or naitof them, in the same manner as they are thrown forward when relieving skirmishers, but on joining the old line, both will -emain and skirmish together, dividing the distances. ITie strength of a line may be diminished by ctuling m any Son of the skirmishers, w'o will retire m the same manner as they are brought in when relieved. In ttas "sMhe remaining skirmisliers will divide the space left by those who have retired. j ,i,;,„;.i.„« 2 Extendim.—Vfhen it is necessary to extend skiraii^ers to a flank, without weakening the rest of the Une, tresh skirmishers, with supports ot equal strength, may be ex- tended in the rear, and then ordered to double "P /"f J"'" the general Une; or a support may be ordered to extend and move up on the flank of the 3kirmisher8; m this case fresh supports must at once be sent out Irom the When a captain brings up his company to relieve or rein- force another that is extended, he nan"*u'*",i'"i- •"£« pilose he is come, that the captain of the old skirmishers may know how to act. LtOIlT INPANTRV. I moving in quick time. If neces- niition can then be rep'inished. e sent out at any time from the orts. 'cudiiit/ a Line of Skirmishers to a Flm'ik. lart of a line of skirmishers may J fonvard the supports or pai-t of r as they are thrown forward when ; on joining the old line, both will Ether, dividing the distances. ITie be diminished by caUing in any ers, w'.o will retire in the same lught in when reheved. In this nshers will divide the space left by it is necessary to extend skirmishers cening the rest of the line, fresh rts of equal strength, may be ex- ;hen ordered to double up and jom lupport may be ordered to extend lank of the skirmishers; in this it at once be sent out from the ■ up his company to relieve or »eiu- tended, he must call out for what the captain of the old skirmiahers M0VBMBNT8 OP THE OATTALfON. S. 16. The Alaitn, or Look out for Cavalry. When skirmishers are unexpeclodly attacked by cavalry, the bugle will sound the alakm, or tlie words look out FOR CAVALRY wiL 00 given, on which the skuinishers will at once form close column of sections, and prepare for cavalry, unless in disorder or scattered, in which case they will form rallying squares, which may be signified for parade purposes by the doublb being' sounded after the ALARM. The supports Avill form close columns of sections and advance by commai.J of their captains; the reserve will also advance, the companies forming four deep on the march and closing on their centre by word of the commanding officer. As soon as the cavalry aj proach the skirmishers' squares, which will be signified when at drill by the sound commence firing, the supports will be halted and ordered to prepare for cavalrj-, and together with the skirmishers will commence firing ; the reserve will also be ordered to fonn square on the leading company, which will be halted by its captain ; the centre companies will bie wheeled outwards by subdivisions, the rear company will close up, and will then be halted and faced to the right about. If only two companies are in resevTe, they will form fou;- deep as above directed, and when near the sup- ports will halt at quarter distance, the rear company being faced about, and the flanks of both dressed back till they meet, forming an oval. . The squares of skirmishers and supports will rarely dc found in straight lines or directly one behind another; but, when such is the case, the captains, if time will permit, must endeavour to move them into echellon, in order that they may protect each other mutually by their fire. In the event of the squares being formed exactly in line or one behind another, the observance of the foUowinjr 1 410 PART V.-'IilOHT INFANTRY. 1 general rule Avill prevent o£ficers from acting at cross pur- poses. The skirmishers' squares, which will have but very little time to move, will look only to each other, and if in line the centre and right squares will retire into echellon, the left square standing fast. The supports, which will have more time, will move not only into echellon with each other but also with the skirmishers' squares ; as regards each other, the centre and left supports should advance into echellon, either by continuing to move on after the right support has halted, or by moving to the front at the double ; as regards the skirmishers' squares the right and left supports will take ground outwards, the centre support to the left; thereser\e will incline to the right (Plate XLIX. Fig. 1). The same rule will equally apply when only two companies are skirmish- ing, by omitting the directions to the centre skirmishers and support, and causing the reserve to move straight to its front. (Plate XL^X. Fig. 2.) If a battalion is required to extend again from this for- mation, the skirmishers will extend from the files on which they closed. The supports \vi\\ re-form companies and resume their former places, and the reserve will fall back to its original position, unless the skirmishers are about to advance, in which case, the supports and resen'e may lie down tiU at sufficient distance from the Aront. S. 17. Closing on Supports. 1. The Close. — When skirmishers are to be brought in and collected on the supports (Plate L.), the word of com- mand to CLOSE ON 8UFPORTS, or the Bugle sound close (No. II.), will be given, on which they will rise, face to the right about, and retire, ihe inner files of subdivisions moving at quick time, '>o as to clear the flanks of the sup- ports, the remainder closing upon them in the usual manner as they retire. When at quarter distance in rear of the V. — lilOHT INFANTRY. ent officers from acting at cross pur- srs' squares, which will have but very Ul look only to each other, and if in ight squares will retire into echellon, ig fast. The supports, which will have not only into echellon with each other ushers' squares ; as regards each other, pports should advance into echellon, u move on after the right support has to the front at the double ; as regards •es the right and left supports will take centre support to the left ; the reser\'e t (Plate XLIX. Fig. 1). The same rule en only two companies are skirmish- directions to the centre skirmishers ing the reserve to move straight to its Fig. 2.) quired to extend again from this for- rs will extend from the files on which ipports \vi\\ re-form companies and )laces, and the reserve will fall back 1, unless the skirmishers are about to .se, the supports and resen'e may lie distance from the front. , Closing on Supports. en skirmishers are to be brought in supports (Plat* L.), the word of com- UFPOBTS, or the Bugle sound close n, on which they wiU rise, face to the are, ^he inner files of subdivisions !, FjO as to clear the flanks of the sup- losing upon them in the usual manner n at quarter distance in rear of the fUT.pLATE XLIX. rOBMATION OV B1TTALI0X8 OS TEW OR SIX COMFANISS Titr, ALARM HAS BKKX SorNDKB. AFTER ■J Fig. 2. M .jt- . — LIGHT INrANTHY, MOVKMBNTH OF THE BATTALION. ~Ti ■r^ '\ lifl. \^ K.l 'N, '\^ "■-->X~-x\ «- x\:\-\ ■-, •> ■- > O ""■•-. ""-. '-.^^-"xX r<4 ■o ... ■■■■-.,. ''■--!/x XX Lj (fl '""'*-.. "*»>. *"» '*. e) ■Q -._^__ '"■''---."'""--!?''-' i ~" "^ . "--••* ■n -- "' --^^ ■'=' '^-S^-'^ « W ■= _ ..j>^y^-~^ (O C t lie - "'7- at -" ,.— '■ « itn ■■ ..'-""^'''''' U .-'''' ,--'"' '-''"J^ w -r-— "' ..■■■■'" ..-■'>}', s . --"" .--""-' /v;--' « •0 - ,.--- ,.■■ y / / CO BO'-' ,.'' _,-' / ,' "'' .-''' y'\-^ ,'' .'' / ■"' ,-'' ,-'' ,'' / an-' / / ■a' 8 413 I "'!^---::-'^^i^^i V. — LIGHT INFANTRY. M0VKMKNT8 OV THK BATTALION. 4ir. supports the subdivisions will turn inwards, advancinf{ arms, or shouldering if armed wth short rilles, as they turn } halt, front, as they meet ; order arms, and stand at case, without words of command. If necessary the skir- mishers may be directed to move at the double. 2. The Close and Alarm. — When skirmishers are not closely pressed by cavaLry, the word clome will be given, followetl by look-out kou cavalry, or the bugle sound CL08K (No. II,) followed by the alar.m (No. XI.), on which the supnorts will advance, forming subdivisions on the march, ana the skirmiahers will move to the rear at the double, closing on the inward files of subdinsions, as described in the preceding paragraph, except that the centre files will incline outwards when they commence to retire, in order to keep cleor of the front of their supports, .\s each company of skirmishers approaches its support, the leading subdivision of the latter will be halted by the captain, the rear subdivision closing to the front and halting without word of command ; both will fix bayonets or swords as they come to the halt ; the skirmishers will turn inwards, and form close column of subdivisions in rear of the supports, fixing bayonets or swords as they halt and front. The two companies will then be ordered to prepare for cavalry, in the same manner as a company in close column or sections. In this formation the centre and left squares, if in line, should advance into echellon. If the skirmishers are attacked by cavalry before they reach theii- supports they will form rallying souares; for parade purposes the alarm will be repeated wnen this is to be done. When the skirmishers and supports have been formed separately into close columns of sections in the presence of cavahy, as described in Section 16 of this Part, and there is 4ir> PART V. — LIQIIT INPANYKY. time for the former to move in on the latter, the words on THR KUPPORTM CLOHR, or the hugle sound ulobr(No. II.), will l>e Kiren, on which the supports will advance, and the skirmishers' columns will Im ordered to retire in quirk time, the latter funning on that dank of the former whicli hap|)enB to he nearest to them. The two coin])anies will prepare for cavalry as a comjwiny in close column of sections, lonning one square. After the skinnishers have closed on the supports, if tlip hattalion is again ordered to extend, the old supports will advance and extend from the centre, or from such mo as will cause them to occupy the ground, and the old skirmishers will form companies in sujjport. if necessary the old supports will extend on their own ground from the halt, anci the old skirmishers will re-form company and retire to their proper distance as supports. S. 18. Closiug oa the Reserve. (Plate LI.) 1 . Skirmithers and supports closing independently on reserve. — If wkirmishers and supports in extended order are to be collected on the i-eservc, the reserve, if armed with long rifles, will he ordered to fix bayonets, and the words "ashbmblr ON THE HESERVR," or the bugle SOUnd A8HRMHLR (No. VIII.) will be given; on which, the supports will be ordered to f(ji'm fours inwards, retire in double time, by the shortest lines, and form at quarter distance in rear of the rt8er\'o. The skirmishers will rise, face to the right about, and retire in double time, each com|)anT closing cm its centre as it goes to the rear. An officer will lead each company to the flank of the reserve as soon as it is closed, placing himself on the inward flank ; as they arrive at quarter distance in rear of the reserve, each company will be ordered to turn in- wards by fours, to halt, front, dress in column, and to fix k'.— LIQHT INFANTKY. move in on the latter, the words on t, or the hiigle sound clobk (No. II.), lich the supports will advance, and nns will be ordered to retire in quirk ig on that dank of the former whicli t to them. The two companies will V comjMiny in close column of Boctions, ■8 have closed on the supjiorts, if the ired to extend, the old supports will jm the centre, or from such fllo as will the ground, and the old skirmishers 1 suj)port. I suiiports will extend on their own an(l the old skirmishers will re-form their proper distance as supports. g on the Reserve. (Plate LI.) •pporls closing independetitly oh reterve, supports in extended order ore to be !, the reserve, if armed with long lifles, Jayonets, and the words "ashrmrlp. or the bugle sound asrrmblk (No. n which, the supports will be ordered retire in double time, by the shortest arter distance in rear of the rt8er\'o. ise, face to the right about, and retire jmi)anT closing cm its centre as it goes r will lead each company to the flank 1 as it is closed, placing himself od ;hey arrive at quarter distance in rear impany will be ordered to turn in- t, front, dress in column, and to fix 1-1 Hi Ah 3 H tr, O o i5 o d i § MOVBMBNTB OF TUK BATTALION p. t * / S \ 417 t't ^' > , ./'■ ,.#■ -! A' 418 I'AKT V. — HOHT INCANTRY. ;i* ,i:,: :"»- *,.»*!■ by iiec toi 1 con «ft '1 rese if t froi thej \ (liff. lost (No foni Sho plac 2, -V :c(jii SEM BLB llOV lapt 'ornn ;ime ;anc inpi: bur Voin ^acl vorc ong V. — LIGHT INFANTRY. < -r- ::* ,!i^ MOVKMENT8 OF THE BATTALION. 419 iiayonets; remaining with ordered amis, at attention. When necessary, the skirmishers and supports may be directed to move in quick time. The centre skirmishers and support, when there are three companies skinnishing, \vill move in, passing round the left if the reser\'e, the support in fours right in front. The companies 'vill take their jjlaces in rear of the reserve as they ai-rive, without reference to their numbers ; if two companies from the opposite flanks meet, the one from the right will pass in front of the other, in other words, they will pass left arm to left arm. When skirmishers have been reinforced and the men of different companies are mixed together, or when they have lost their order from other causes, on the sound assemblk (No. VIII.), they will double to the rear independently, and form companies on their covcrers in rear of tlie resene. Should there be no reserve, the commanding ofRoer will place the coverers at his discretion. 2. Skirmishers and supports closing on reserve together. —When the skirmishers have closed in rear of their suppor< s, IS described in Section 17, No. 1 of this Part, and both arc cquired to assemble on the reserve; on the words as- BGMBLE ON THE RESERVE, Or On the bugle SOUnd ASSEM- BLE (No. yill.), thcj' will form fours inwards, each support moving with its skirmishers, by command of the senior japtain of the two, the centre skirmishers and support ■orming fours to the right. They will move in double ime bj the shortest hnes, and form at quarter dis- ;ance m rear of the reser\'e, the centre skirmishers and lupports passing round the left of the column. Should our companies coming from opposite flanks meet, the two iom the right will form in front of those from the left. ^acU captain will halt and front his own company, give the vords Z)res«, and Fix-Bayonet* if the men are armed with ong rifles,»nd the men will then remain with ordered arms. **ff 4:i() PART V. — LIGHT INfANTHY. In tlie presence of cavalry, supports should always ha allowed to wait for their skirmishers before moving into the resers'e. Should any of the companies while they are assembling; be attacked by cavalry, they will at once form square, and prepare to receive them ; for parade purposes the alarm will be sounded when this is to be done. When a battalion, or part of a battalion, coverinff a liiii', skirmishers and supports only being in front, is ordered to assemble in rear of the line, or when the sound assemble (No. VIII.) is given, the whole will move to the rear of the line by the shortest directions, and as quickly as possible, the sujiuorts in fours, the skirmishers indepen- dently, passing through the intervals between battalions. When in rear of the line they will move towards the commanding officer of the battalion, and form quarter distance column wherever he may direct, which should generally be in rear of the centre. If part of tb - battalion is already formed they will form in rear of it. S. 1!). Flanking Parties. Skirmishers with supports, and, if necessary, a reserve, may be extended to protect the flank of a column. In this case, the skirmishers will move in files parallel to the direc- tion of the column when it advances or retires, the supports and the re8er^'e in fours ; the leading file of the skirmishers should communicate with the flank of the advance guard. When the column halts, the skirmishers, supports, and reserve will halt and front. The skirmishers of a battalion in extended order must never be reciuired to change front at right angles ; if it is necessary to protect a flank, fresh skirmishers should be Bcut out firom the reserve or the main body. -LIGHT INPANTKY. cavalry, supports should always hi eir skirmishers before moving into ;ompanies while they are assembling , they will at once form square, and i; for parade purposes the alarm his is to be done. ■ part of a battalion, covering a liiii', rts only being in front, is ordered to ; line, or when the sound assemble he whole will move to the rear of ;est directions, and as quickly as in fours, the skirmishers indepen- [h the intervals between battalions. ! line they will move towards the f the battalion, and form quarter ever he may direct, which should the centre. If part of tb - battalion will form in rear of it. •. Flanking Parties. pports, and, if necessary, a reserve, ttect the flank of a column. In this ill move in files parallel to the direc- n it advances or retires, the supports ) ; the leading file of the skirmishers ith the flank of the advance guard. Its, the skirmishers, supports, and )nt. a battalion in extended order must lange front at right angles ; if it is I flank, fresh skirmishers should be re or the main body. MOVEMKKTS OF THE BAT talion. 421 i rs :>ti "i: 422 I'AKT V. — UGHt INFANTRY. n o Itl O o S <—- h;^ Siiiii; V o H H ■>( n .—LIGHT INFANTRY. 4M I'ABT V. — I.IOHT INrANTEY. w H O Q o u o 'A s o o M Q H H M 13 / o 11 li u (< si pi re di P< th til 86 aa fo ta iiT lit or ha dr ne th ne of nil de: ne fro ml -WOHT INFANTEY. MOVEMENTS OF THE nATTALION. 423 5,20. Passing a Bridge or Short Defile in contact with an hnemy.—VMcs LII. and LIII. 1. Advancing.— The skirmishers, on reaching the margin of the river or the beginning of whatever other impediment may form the defile, will (when the flanks cannot be irained) lie down and cover themselves, keeping up a brisk fire upon the enemy. The supports, on approaching the bridge (or defile) will close upon that support which may be opno- site to it, and supported by the reserve, charge and force the passage witl- nie bayonet; this point gained, and the reserve hMmg crossed the bridge, the supports will gra- duaUy extend from their centre, the reserve maintaining possession of the bridge, the old skirmishers will keep up theu- fire, until clouded in succession by the new line; when the new line has completed its extension the reserve will send out fresh supports, and the old skirmishers will assemble m rear of the reser%'e. The whole will then move torward according to the original fonnation. 2. fle^Jmi^.— In retiring, the reserve will first pass, and take post at the bndgc-head, or the outlet of the defile immediately deteching parties to both flanks to line the uver, in extended order. Tlie supports wiU close upon the one which is opposite the bridge, and in compact order, halt m front of it, until the Une of skirmishers is with- drawn; in order that this may be effected without un- necessary delay, the skirmishers should incline towards the bridge when at some distance from it, and on arrivinff near It, they shouW run briskly over it, and form in rear of the reserve. The supports wiU then cross, and in like manner ioininij the reserve, the whole will be prepared to defend the bridge or to retire, as may be ordered The new line of skirmishers will commence firing as soon as their front 13 clear; and if the retreat is to be continued, supports mil be again thrown out between them and the reserve. D D 2 42g part v.— light infantry. Advanced and Rear Guards. 5. 21. Advanced Guards. 1. General Intention of Advanced OuarA.— Advanced guards are formed in front of a column, or of the columns of an army, for the ^lurpose of feeling the way through a country— to gain intelligence of the enemy and to give timely notice of his vicinity or approach, in order that the main body may have time to prepare either for making or repelling an attack. 2. Their Strength and Composition.— XAvtmnA guard* are sometimes pushed a considerable distance in advance I f the column, for the purjiose of seizing a post, or of anticipating the enemy on some important point; their strength and composition, therefore, must dejjcnd on the distance they are required to precede the mam body, the object contemplated, the nature of the country, and a variety of other circumBtances which can OiCrj be appreciated on the spot. .'J. General Rules applicable to all.— The general rules and principles which should govern an advanced guard in one situation, are, with a few obvious exceptions, applicable to all. To guard against surprise or unexpected collision with the enemy,— to watch his motions, or to gain intelli- gence of his situation,— and to cover and conceal the move- ments and formation of the main body,— are manifestly the great leading principles upon which advanced guards should be conducted, whether the object be to fall suddenly on the enemy's piquets, to dislodge him from a post, or merely to give waining of his vicinity. 4. Speeijic Rules cannot be laid down. — No specific rules can be laid down for the ccmduct of an advanced guard, where every instance of falling in mth an enemy must vary ; the officer in comaiand of the guard must depend mi a] if 1" ui sc PC wi tni ex wJ OCi ad del hei arc a s net pai the fall n'ai 7 spei cea] real nee Jisl 8 vill t^:i^m — LIGHT INFANTRY. AND Rear Guards. . Advanced Guards. of Advanced Ouardt. — Advanced ont of ft column, or of the columns rpose of feeling the way through a ligence of the enemy and to give iinity or approach, in order that the me to prepare either for making or nd Composition. — Advanced guardi a considerable distance iu advance ,e purjiose of seizing a post, or of y on some important point; their tion, therefore, must dejjcnd on the lired to precede the mam body, the le nature of the country, and a variety 3 which can Oi.Vj be appreciated on ppHcable to all.— The general rules should govern an aidvanced guard in 1 a few obvious exceptions, applicable linst surprise or unexpected collision ratch his motions, or to gain intelli- —and to cover and conceal the move- )f the nmin body,— are manifestly the B upon which advanced guards sbould the object be to fall suddenly on the islodgc him from a post, or merely to ;inity. mot be laid down. — No specific rules ■ the ccmduct of an advanced guard, of falling in with an enemy must luawnd of the guard must depend mi ADVANCBD Ot'ARnS. 427 imnn.lllV'^f'l''^'""'', ^"n ''" '"'."P*'" «''«="ltion of this 1.103* important duty and allow nothing to escape liis personal S'rZT7;u ^^' ^f"^''""^ '^""'''^^ ^^»1 ^' found TeS in cases of the more frequent occ urrence. .nniv^/fP'"'"'''*-?^' " yilloye.-kn advanced guard, on Tk^taZ "y"' "'""* r'''^ ^^'"' ^^^' precaution parties on the road must be halted beyor ihe reach of musketry from tlie village, while strong L. .ug . rtS a e sent round the outskirts to threaten the vJ. hccor. poral 8 party on the road may then move i, in Luule lilee exDTdieS.'^^n'HTl!""""' ^'T ^'^I '"PP°'''' ^- "^^"^y ^'^ d««"'e'^ uZn f* V . '^^ s^Pl'T*" a»d '■esene will move forward «hen It has been ascertained that the plac is not in the occupation of the enemy, 6. Enterinff a Defile c- Hollowu -The head of an SSl?""^ ^'^ '""'' ""''■'' '-'"'"'"'t ^^If ^y enter ng a defile or HoUow-way, without previously occupying the aAVLti:?ri''?^*i^"'''"^P"*'^«- Whentye ifeights nAr »i i: 7^!'^ "^'l^ ^^ ^"""^^'^'l ^y °t»»«" J" succession, parties on the heights on either side continuing to orecede Itdlnf?.**'-"^^"?'' '*^*'°"'' «"^ ^*>^^^'h«le move fo,^ Hwd m the original formation. sneaki?/ Z^tt^r"-^ f ^^^''J-' '" *" '«'^«''--«eneraIly speaking the flanks of every object capable of affording con- ealmentto an enemy, will invariablj- be turned, amlThe Zn^th*'"'•^ ^"^^'T}! ^l >'" *'""« '«='* i» f"""* ■' hy this J\i'JZl!T''''^'lt7^'' •'""''"^ t° "* J^'" the flank files >vill first move m both directions round the base; a leading •L>s PART v.— LlOllT INPANTHY. lile will then ascend, creppinj^ up when near the ton so as not to show itself uj)on the summit, but making its onserva- tions from behind the brow ; it will then signal to the rest of the party whether the enemy is in sight or not. 9. Bogf, Morasses, S^c., to be examined. — All bogs, mo- 1 asses, &c. must be carefully examined before they are passed by an advanced guard, lest an enemy should be left con- cealed in them and the advanced guard cut oif. 10, Patroles. — All houses, copses, enclosures, &c. that are too distant to be inspected by the advanced guard, should be examined by patroles, whirh may consist of a subaltern party, a serjeant and twelve, or a corporal and six, according to circumstances ; the rules laid down for advanced guards apply equally to patroles. l\. A good Vieui nf the Conntry to he obtained, — All heights from wliich a view of the surrounding country can be obtained should be ascended by the advanced files of the guard, or by the patroles. 'I'lie top of a church, a tower, a mound, &c., afford good positions for obsen'ations. The inrn thus emi)loyed must take care they are not seen by the enemy. 12. Preconcerted Signals. — The leading files of an ad- vanced guard or patrole should be instructed to give imme- diate intelligence of the presence of an enemy by some ])reconcertea signal. One man of the leading file holding up his cap on a firelock, may signify that a small body of the enemy is in sight, both men holding up their caps on their firelocks, that the enemy is near in force. A firelock held up horizontally may signify that no enemy is in sight. 13. Conduct in case of Attack.— If the front of an ad- vanced guard formed on a road is attacked, the leading files will at once fall back on their support; the commanding oflicer of the guard will then use his discretion in ordering his reaei'TC to move up and reinforce the support, or the support to fall back on the reserve, according to the nature — LlOlIT INPANTIIY. eepinff up when near the ton bo as the summit, but makinjif its oWrva- •ow ; it wU then signal to the rest of lemy is in sight or not. c, to be examined. — All bogs, mo- ully examined before they are passed lest an enemy should be left con- idvanced guard cut oif. uses, copses, enclosures, &c. that are ted by the advanced guard, should s, whirh may consist of a subaltern ;lve, or a corporal and six, according ules laid down for advanced guards s. ■ the Country to be obtained. — All e\v of the surrounding country can scended by the advanced files of the Bs. The top of a church, a tower, a )d jjositions for obsen'ations. The 3t take care they are not seen by the nals. — The leading files of an ad- I should be instructed to give imme- le presence of an enemy by some ne man of the leading file holding up lay signify that a small body of the men holding up their caps on their ly is near in force. A firelock held ;nify that no enemy is in sight. of Attack.— If the front of an ad- 1 a road is attacked, the leading files on their support; the commanding then use his discretion in ordering ) and reinforce the support, or the the reserve, according to the nature i;jo I'ART v.— LIGHT INFANTRY. T PLATIC LIV. AN AIAAMKU GUARD OK THR LUTE OF MAIICII OK A nOAI) 11 M «•>■ j, if i \ !=S3 1\ ti^^.-J^ ' ^ ^ . — LIGHT INjrANTRV. PLATi: LIV. on in* tllTB OF MAIICn OK A IIOAII •ti U. Positions and Conduct of Day OndHiffHt Sentries,— Piquet sentries by day shouM be placed on heights and in commanding positions, whence they may see all the country in their ftront without exposing themselves to view ; but at night they must be placed lower down so as to have the highest ground before them in order that they may see any approaching party against the sky without being th'emselves (iiscoyraed. By day it is not necessary to leave more gentries on duty than are sufficient to watch thoroughly the country in their front ; each sentry should be able to see the files on his right and left, as well as the intermediate country between them; at night or in thick weather a greater number will be reouired, and one man of each file should always remain on his post, looking out vigilantly to his front, while the other patroles to his right, till he comes up to the sentry next to him ; in this mode they will alternately relieve each other. Sentries will also patrole to their front to a distance of twenty or thirty yards. When sentries heat ^eople approaching them by night they must challenge them, order them to halt, and allow only one i)er8on to advance until they are satisfied they are friends. By day sentries must not allow more than one stranger at a time to approach their posts on any pretence. 10. Line of Sentries.— In selecting the line for the chain of sentries, care roust bet>aken not to extend it too much, — to post the men in the most advantageous situations for observing the roads and country in front, and to keep them as much concealed firom the view of the enemy as the nature of their duty will admit. It is very desirable that every elevated spot, which overlooks the communications in the rear, shall be taken within the chain of sentries; but if this cannot be effected without extending the sentries too far, a party must be sent to occupy the height during the day, and care must be taken to support and ensure E E ,x, . ,.. .£^ •440 PART V. — LtOHT INFANTnY. the retreat of this party if attacked. Sentries miiHt be so placed, moreover, as to secure one another from being cut off, and at such distances as to prevent any enemy from passing iinjierceired between tnein during the night. Hentries should never be posted near any copse or cover iTt>m which a sudden nish might be made upon them j bat all woods, ravines, &o., in the neighbourhood of the post, must be watched, anel occasionally visited by patroles, to prevent the enemy from assembling a body of troops, un* observed, in the \'ioinity. 11. Flanks to be protected. — The flanks of a line of piquet sentries should be thrown a little back, and if not protected by the nature of the country, a detached party under the command of an oiRccr should be posted in the most favourable j)osition to prevent the flank from being turned. 12. Connectim Sentries. — Communication should be kept up by means of single sentries, between the front line of scntnes and the supports, also between the supports and the reserve. 13. Officers to examine Ground.— Officers goiog out on piquet duty must examine all the country over which they pass on their way from the camp, and select favourable positions for disputing the ground in case they are driven in by the enemy. 14. Posting a Company on Pto««<.~ When an officer in charge of a company sent on piquet duty arrives on the position he is to occupy, he will first look to the immediate safety of his own party, and place sentries on its flanks and ftront; he will then send a file to the most elevated spot in the vicinity to get a good view of the surrounding country, and proceed himself with a patrole to examine all objeott neiur him capable of concealing an enemy. Having thai secured himself from suqirise, he will proceed to throw out hit ki« stt ski in vh the sui cne to: ran ] to abs for up the »vit ma 1 A) clot exti cun prei 1 piqi are sun 1 one prei con — LtOHT INFANTRY. y if attacked. Sentries miiRt he so ) secure one anotlier from being cut icea as to prevent any enemy from between them during the night, be posted near any copse or cover iish might be made upon them j bnt , in the neighbourhood of the post, I occasionally visited by patrolea, to m assembling a body of troops, un- y- rotected.— The flanks of a line of I be thrown a little back, and if not ire of the country, a detached party f an officer should be posted in the DH to prevent the flank from being ries. — Communication should be kept e sentries, between the front line of arts, also between the supports and line Ground. — Officers goiog out on nine all the country over which they )m the camp, and select favourable K the ground in case they ate driven any on Piowi/.—When an officer in sent on piquet duty arrives on the f, he will first look to the immediat* , and place sentries on its flanks and id a file to tlie most elevated spot in rod view of the surrounding country, vith a patjvle to examine all objeott »ncealing an enemy. Having tbni urprise, he will proceed to throw out PIQUBTS. 441 his chain of sentries, tind commtmioate with the parties on his right and left. 16. tVken Piquets are attacked.— Vfhcn piquets are attacked, the same rule will be observed as in all other skirmishing, and the detached officers' parties will not run in on the main body, but support the skirmishers; and when compelled to retire, they will, if possible, retreat on the flank of the main body, and thereby afford mutual support to each other. When ii sentry is satisfied that the enemy is moving on to the attitck, he should not hesitate to fire at once, although the enemy niay be fiur beyond the range of his musket. 16. An Officer to strenythe* his Post, — An officer ought to strengthen his post when practicable, by constructing abattas, breastworks, &c. ; where the defence of a bridge or ford is intrusted to him, he ought never to omit throwing up something of the kind to protect his men, and impe£ the advance of the enemy. An bfficer ought not, however, without permission, to block up a main road with other materials than such as are easily removed. \T, A Piqmt must not shut itself up without Orders. — A piquet ought not to shut itself up m a house, or an en- closure, with the intention of defending itself to the last extremity, unless particularly ordered to do so, or that cir- cumstances may render it necessary at the moment, for the preservation of the party, in the expectation of support. 18. Under what Circumstances a Piquet should retire. — A piquet may with safety defend its front as long as its flanks are not attacked ; but as soon as the enemy attempts to surround the post, the piquet must begin to retire. 19. Flags of Truce. — On the approach of a flag of truce, me sentry will advance and halt it at such distance as will prevent any of the party who compose it fiom overlooking t^e piquet posts. The other sentry will acquaint the offloer commanding the piquet of the oircomstanoe, who will^ sx 2 442 PART V. — LIOHT INFANTRY. Mcordinfi; to his instructions, eit'irr detain the fla^ of truce at the outpost, until he has reported to the field officer of the day, or he will forward the party blindfolded to the camp, under an escort. If the fla^ of truce is merely the bearer of a letter or parcel, the piquet officer must receive it, and instantly forward it to head-quarters. After havinff fi^iven a receipt, the flag of truce will be required forthwith to depart, and none of the piquet must be suffered to hold any conversation with this party. 20. Precautions to be taken when Fireii art allowed.— "When a piquet is i)crmitted to have a fire, it should nhvavs bo as much as wossible concealed from observation ; and the alarm post of tlie piquet, in the event of an attack at night, should invariably oe fixed at a short distance in the rear of the fire, so as to prevent the piquet from being seen, when drawn up, and to compel the enemy to expose himself while passing the fire shoula he advance. ' . '2\. Advanced Piquets to be under Arms an Hour before Daylight. — Piquets will get under arms in the morning an hour before daylight ; and if everything appears quiet in front, the officer will, as soon as he can mscem objects distinctly, proceed to occupy the same posts that he held the day before; but he must pre^nously send forward patroles to feel his way, and should any change be remarked in the enemy's posts or position, he will report it immediately to the field officer of the day. 22. When advanced Piquets should be relieved. — ^As attacks are most commonly made about daybreak, a de- sirable accession of force will be always obtained by relieving thejiiquets at that hour. Ji'j, Arrival of the flWiy.— When the new piquet has arrived, the officer commanding it will accompany the officer of the old piquet along the chain of posts, and this officer will point oat the situRtion wid strength of all the enemy's of se to of to f h) at hi sv m ti< h< 01 di w th b( th 01 tn bi a( ci Pi t\ d Pi IMI I'. — LtOHT INFANTRY, actions, eit'ier detain the flajf of truce iie has reported to the field officer of 'orward the party blindfolded to the t. If the flag of truce is merely the larcel, the piquet officer must receive ird it to head-quarters. After havint; ig of truce will be re(|uired forthwith f the piquet must be suffered to hold this party. be taken when Fires art allowed. — nitted to have a fli-e, it should alwars i concealed from observation ; and tne let, in the event of an attack at night, ixed at a short distance in the rear of nt the piquet from being seen, when pel the enemy to expose himself while I he advance, ' . 'U to be under Arms an Hour before II get under arms in the morning an and if everything appears quiet in as soon as he can discern objects jccupy the same posts that he held the lust previously send forward patroles lould any change be remarkea in the ion, he will report it immediatdy to day, i Piquets should be relieved. — As imonlv made about daybreak, a de- ce will be always obtained by relieving ir. Relief.— y/hen the new piquet has manding it will accompany the officer g the chain of posts, and this officer ktion and strength of all the enemy's •(Knapwf^pw" piauiTa. 443 IMsts, and afford every other information to the relieving officer in his power. 24, Dutif of the Officer of the old Piquet.—When the sentries arc relieved, and tiie weather ia sutfioiently dear to ascertain that there is no indication of an attack, the officer who has been relieved will forward a written report to the field officer of the day, fall back upon the resen-e piquet, and march to camp in ilie same order as when he advanced; but if the advanced piquets should be attacked before he arrives in camp, he will consider it his duty to face about instantly and march to their support. 25, Palrollintj. — One of the most necessary and effectual methods of preventing surprise and of gaining informa- tion remains to be noticed, viz., patrolling, without which, however active and alert the sentries, the service of the outpost never can be properly performed. The mode of con- ducting these patroles, their strength, and the distance to which they may bo sent, are all necessarily dependent on the ever-vaiying local circumstances in which piquets may be placed j but it muy be laid down as a good general rule, that, when near the enemy, a patrole should be sent out once between every relief during the night. 26. Vigilance, Silence, and Circumspection indispensable in patrolling. — Vigilance, silence, and circumspection must be strictly enjoined upon all patroles ; no noise must on anjr account be made, and when anything is to be communi- cated, it should be done in a whisper. It is not possible to lay down exact rules for conducting patroles in every case that may occur on service, but one or two of the most usual modes of carrying on this important duty may be briefly adverted to, 27. PatroUing in front of the Line of Se/Une*.— The patrole on leaving the piquet, should, whai) practicable, 444 PAKT v.— MOHT INrANTRV. cotnmnnicatn in tlie first instnnm with the next port upon the right (or left), Bnmi^or will, as usual, dress the points and pivots from the point of appui. 4. In the formation of a moss of columns, the leaders of companies \n\l preserve the line of covering, the brigade- major correcting their covering from the point of appui. When the formation is on a central or rear battalion or company of the mass, the leaders in front of the point of appui will face about to cover, and will come to the front again on the brigade-major's word Steady, which may be given to each battalion in succession. The men should not Ite ordered to dress until the leaders of companies have completed their covering. 5. In all deployments or formations into lino, or into line of columns at deploying distance, the general alignment will be presented by mounted officers. The brigade point of appui will be marked by a.me^or of the battalipn of for th( spi the flai cor the adj ren flai req of nea six tow 6 mo' poii forr LX be maj foro C0V( brig nec< 7. wiU in 81 oute the toai FHE BRIOADK OR LINK. ■ deiilojing into a line of contiguous and supernumerary seijeants of the battalions will mark tlie alignment, irm's length iu front of the line on ire to dress, as directed in Part IV., The coverers will mark the outer [npunies of their respeotive battalions ; jeant of the leading company of the I will mark the point of appui ; the ts of the leading companies of the tvill mark the inner flanks of their each preserving the interval of six Hank of the battalion next to him ppui. nass into line of columns, the pivot if the leading companies of battalions, Part IV., Section 16, wU be a sufl5- the alignment. ions the brigade>mi^or will, as usual, ivots from the point of appui. of a moss of columns, the leaders of .^e the line of covering, the brigade- ' covering from the point of appui is on a central or rear battalion or the leaders in front of the point of to cover, and will come to the front major's word Steady, which may be 1 in succession. The men should not ntil the leaders of companies have ts or formations into line, or into line ing distance, the general alignment nounted officers. The brigade point ;ed by a.me^or of the battftUpn of BW- GKNKRAL PRINCIPLKS. 449 formation. When the formation is on tlie right flank of the base battalion, the senior major vrll mark the point of appui, when on the left flank, the junior major will mark that point ; in both cases the adjutant will murk the distant nank. When the formation is on the centre, or on a central company of the ba«e liattalion, the senior major will mark the point of appui, the junior mojor the left flank, and the adjutant the right flank ; in each case the adjutants of the remaining battalions of the t)rigade will mark the outer Hanks of their respective corps. No mounted points will be required on their inner flanks, the supernumerary Serjeant of the company on that flank of each battalion which is nearest to the base battalion, preserving the usual interval of six paces from the outer flank of the battalion next to him towards the point of ajjpui. 6. AVhen a battalion, not being the battalion of formation, moves up, either in single or double column, to a central point of the alignment on which it is required to deploy or form line, as represented by the centre battalion in Plate LX., the central base pointh (h, h, A.) of the battalion will be dressed by the major (I), assisted by the serjeant- m^jor (m), on the points (e, d, or «, n, n,) of the battalion of formation j but the remaining battalion points (o, o, o,) will cover on the centre of their own battalion, as usual. The adjutant (/) will mark the outward flank, dressing on the brigade point of appui, but no other mounted point will be necessar}'. 7. When battalions form line or deploy in succession, they will complete their formation or deployment, each battalion ill succession preserving the interval of six paces from the outer flank of the previously formed battalion, although the adjutants may not have taken correcrt distance; the m^ors will, however, dress all the coverers from adjutant to adjutttnt, in the same manner as a captain in the deploy. 450 l»AHT VI. — THB BHIUAUK OH LINK. ment of a battalion dresses all the men from ooverer to coverer, whether they belonj? to » is company or not. When battalions deploy simultaneously, and the snaoe they have to occupy is consequently limited, as woul» ^» the case were a line of battalion columns formed at lieploying dis- tance required to dw-ploy, they must not go berond their outward points; if the distances are not suincient, tb comjjanies or \)arti^ of companies for which there is no room must be formed in rear of the line, where they will be directed to order anas and stand at ease until space is made for them by order of the general commanding the troops. 8. The foieffoing rules will apply equally to a division or any large body of troops. Only one base battalion, and consequently only one general pomt of appui, will be neces. sary in a line composed of any number of brigades, which may be prolong'>d to any extent by the adjutants, wlic will mark the outer flanks of their respective battalioi A brigade-major, when no general distant point hm breo given, may always use the two outward cnvererp of the brigade next to (lis own towards the point of appui, to assist him in dressing his own mounted points, out he should first ascertain, by looking back over their heads towards the general point of appui, that they are correctlj covered in the alignment. 9. When taking up an alignment for a large body ol troops, the assistant adjutant-general of the base division f will mark the point of appui, and the assistant qnartermas' ters-general will mark the distant points for their respectivi divisions, the adjutant-general dressing them fiom the poiiil of appui. When the troops approach the alignment, thi j, brigade-majors will move up with their foot or mounte< points to take up the ground for their respective brigades under th? superintendence of their assistant a^utant^ general. The assistant qu&rtermasters-general, when thi ari is at fla or >Pi in( wil am suj )oi )a1 fac SU( ma nu^ int 1 Pri mo ro: m] mo bac ri( — THB BHIOAUK OR LINK. dresies all the men from coverer to belon^f to ) IS company or not. When lultaneously, and the snaoe they have lently limited, as woult ^° the case on columns formed at lieploying din- •tloy, they must not go beyond their the distances are not suincient, tb of companies for which there is no in rear of the line, where they will be i and stand at ease until space is made the general commanding the troops. lies will apply equally to a division or roops. Only one base battalion, and B general pomt of appui, will be neces. ed of any number of brigades, whici' any extent by the adjutants, wlic flanks of their respective battalioiis. en no general distant point hiis bren ise the two outward cnvererc of the own towards the point of appui, to ig his own mounted points, out he OSNBltAL l>RlNCtt>LRH, 4tA are dressed, may be replaced by mounted orderlies if it is considered more convenient. 10. When a brigade-major is required to take up ground at a distance, for his brigade, and is not informed on which flank he will have to form, he may be obliged to take two or more majors of the brigade as well 83 the adjutants i"'*h him, in oase he should be required to give the point of .p^ui, 1. It majralso be necessary in some cases to send on mounted pomts to take up ground for a brigade in con- ti^ious columns. In this case one major and one adjutant will usually be enough to mark the flanks of the brigade, and they will be relieved at once when the coverers and supernumeraries move up. 12. Any mounted officers who are not required to mark joints should be sent back by the brigade-major to their )attalions. 13. The dressing of points in an alignment will bo much facilitated by selecting some clearly ilefined distant point, such as a house or a windmill, in its prolongation, which may be used by the assistant adjutants-general or brigade- ra, by looking back over their headslP^ors as the outer point on which they may dress their point of appui, that they are correctlj intermediate points. ent. ''^- Po>nts will be given as di.ccted in Part IV,, General an alignment for a large body.ol J^^.^.^P^LY; ,'^^'^^", ^"'»""*^'* «ffi™', '^T^omp^^ns a " '^ '^ ' " " "jBse division appui, ana the assistant quartermas i„ ii„e with the leading lank of the column. In brigade ahe distant points for their r^pectiv. movements, mounted officers giving points must not% b-general dressing them from the poll, ,,ack to their posts until difmissed^y signal from the s troops approach the ahgnment, th brigade-major J B »' '">" w»c move up with their foot or mounte< ^ " ! ground for their respective brigades, VIII. [idence of their assistant adjutant* Vommands.-h Cautions given by the general to a int quartermasters-general, when th* brigade or division in line, in Une of columns ut deploying >p an alignment tor a large Dody oi movement leads a coh.mn or preserves deploying distance adjutant-general of the base division f^„^ j^ ^hile it is on the march, he will keep^if own face f appui, and the assistant qnartermas. :,, i:„. ^.u xi,„ ,p„Hm„ .«„i, «f +k- .„i..„,i i "ul-™.! 452 PAHT VI. — THK URIOADB OH MNE. distance, or in eohellon, will be itasscd 1)v all tlio mounted officiTs ; but when a caiition is given to a brigade or division in line of contiguous columns, or in mass, i^ will be re- peated only by the conunandcrs of battalions. In order that words of command may bo circtdated with ]>reciflion an«l rapidity, the eye and attention of each battalion leader must be constantly directed to the commanding general, or to the rcgulatinj? battalion when he cannot be heard. Olficcri must take care i)roperly to understand an order before pasning it. 2. On the caution fVom the general of the division or brigade all interior movements of battalions will be made, so that the whole may be ready to step off at the executive command, which each battalion, on all occasions, will receive Itom its own . adtr. 3. To enable the conuuanders of battalions to give their executive words of command simultaneously, the general should give some signal by gesture, such as holding up hi( Bword, or by bugle sound, on which the commanders will give their executive words ; or he may order the commanders to take time from the battalion of direction. 4. The cautions of the general commanding the divimon or brigade must be expressed in terms which cannot bo mis- taken by the soldiers for battalion words cf command. 6. When the progress of an order from battalion to battalion is interrupted by any cause, such as wind or the noise of flre-arms, the commanders will conform as quickly as possible to the movement they see executed by the bat- talion of direction. 6. Generals will also make use of their staff officers to convey orders to distant battalions; the advance or hah may be communicated to large bodies of troops by sound of bugle wlien considered necessary. ini ir< oa litj wj If l>c ad lie ca( foi Irt pit in l)e on da of' ob S. wh wh Pa ant ma vh of bei ccb -TH» UIIIOADK OR MNE. on, will be puaeA hv all the mounted aution is given to a brigade or division I columns, or in mass, it will be re- Boniinandcrs of battalions. In order »nd may lio circulated with jwecidion and attention of each battalion leader irected to the commanding general, or ilion when he cannot be heard. Offlccri perly to understand an order before from the general of the division or lovements of l)attalion8 will be made, y be ready to step off at the executive I battalion, on all occasions, will receive :)nuuanders of battalions to give their lommaud simultaneously, the general nal by gesture, such as holding up his 3und, on which the commanders will ords J or he may order the commanders i battalion of direction. ' the general commanding the divimon pressed in terms which cannot bo mis- for battalion words cf command. jress of an order from battalion to ed by any cause, such as wind or the B commanders will conform as quickly ^•emcnt they see executed by the bat- so make use of their sta£F officers to itant battalions; the advance or hah i to large bodies of troops by sound of d necessary. GKKIRAL PRINCirLUH. IX. ABU EoktUm t'onnatimu. — 1. Kchellon formations and movo- laents are conducted in a lino composed of a largo body of troops, upon the princiules laid down iu I'art I\'. They are oalculatod to place a bodv of troops in an advantageous posi- tion to gain an enemy's flank ; and sometimes they are formed with effect from the centre of a line, by refusing each wing. If an attack made by an advanced corps of a great eohellon 1)0 eft'ectual, each succeeding one moves up to improve the advantage; if it fails, the succeeding bodies are in a situa- lion to protect the retreat; and in gradually retiring upon each other, they afford mutual aid and support. 2. A direct echellon, comjiosed of a large body of troops, is formed by the successive advance of brigades or battalions I'rom either flank, or from the centre of a line, or by columns placed in echellon parallel to the enemy's iMsition; and in both cases, the distance of at least half their front will be preserved between the several parts of the echvllon, in order to give sufficient room for ihe mutual protection of Hanking squares, when such formation is required. 3. A line is thrown into oblique echellon tor the purpose of gaining ground to a flank j in large bodies of troops the oblique echellon should be com]>osed of companies (vide S. 63, Part IV.), as deviating least from the line formation, which can at any moment be resumed by halting and wheeling the companies back upon their pivots, (vide S. 64, Part IV.) These echellons at a distance have the appear- ance of a complete line ; by this means a flank movement mw be made almost imperceptibly to an enemy. 4. When the object is to gain an enemy's flank, Ue whole line will be thrown into echellon towards that flank of the enemy which it is intended to attack or tumj care being taken in such advances that th« outer flanks of the echellon are protected from thd enfiladt of th« enemy. I 4.V1 I'AUT VI. — THE BRIGAOK OB LINK. Wlien It IS necessary to refuse a iiaiik uttucKed liy an encim the line will he jiartially thrown intoechellon from that flarik direct to the rear ; but when the enemy's attack is repulsed a counter attack niiiy be made upon him with advantage, by an ad%'imce in echedon from the other flank, 5. When the flank of u line is refused in this manner bv n partial retreat in echellon of battalions, the flank thnt remains halted should (if jiossible) be posted upon a stroni; position, from which the fire of artillery coulff enfilade the advancinpr enemy. «. In an open country, where the enemy is in a position whence he can observe their intention, eclicllon movements to attack or gain a flank are attended with difficulty and risk; advantage must therefore be taken of any objects, or ground, that may afford the means of partial concealment. • 1. 11 "''^^ battalions, companies, or parts of companies in echellon will move by their directing flanks, as e.«plaineil in 1 art IV . ; columns in echellon will also move by their flanks on similar principles ; l)Ht battalions in line movinir in echellon of battalions will march by their centres, the leading battahon of the echellon being invariably the bat talion of direction. 8. Oblique and direct echellons may be formed of quarter distance columiia. Direct echeUons, whether of lines or columns, maybe composed of small or large bodies moving in concert, according to circumstances and the object con- templated; the chief precaution to be observed, is that the different parts of the echellon are never so far separated ai to prevent their mutually supporting each other. y. It may be assumed as a princi[)le, that great echellon movements, preparatory to action, and previous to comiiii; under the fire of artillery, wU be made in quarter-distance columns; and that echellon movements of the line, when under fire, will be made either in oblique echellon of com panics, or m direct echellon of bottalions or larger bodies. the vht IVOU A idvi line Imtt dow V thej circi 8upj the I retir tv'hoi turn R'ho! 2. wliic Eacl balf vhei read ipor n ita lireci Jni Greai (xten on th ir di^ -TUB BRIOAOK OB MNK. (•refuse a ilaiik nUucKed by unenciiiv, y thrown intoechellon from that flank ; when the enemy's attack ia repulsed, )c made upon him with advantage, by I from the other flank, )f a hne is refused in this manner bv hellon of Ijattalions, the flank that the fire of artillery could rn61adc the try, where the enemy is in a position their intention, eclicllon movements nnk arc attended with difficulty and therefore be taken of any objects, or d the means of ])artial concealment, ms, companies, or parts of comnanios »y their directing flanks, as explained in echcllon will also move by tiieir iples ; but battalions in line movinjf ns will march by their centres, the le echellon being invariably the bat t echellons may be formed of quarter irect echellons, whether of lines or >sed of small or large bodies moving ) circumstances and the object con- recaution to be observed, is that the chellon are never so far separated ai ly supportintr each other. 1 as a principle, that great echelloi: r to action, and previous to coming ry, will be made in quarter-distance lellon movements of the line, when either in oblique echellon of com illon of battalions or larger bodies. OKNGUAL I'RINCII'Lia. 455 llK The attacks of armies are generally conducted on Ihe principles of the echellon. There are few situu'.ions ivherf the whole could act at the same time, or where it ivould be desirable or ]irudent that they should do so. X. ... .,...^, ^..^ „„„^ ^,„„ Advance and Retreat of alternate Bodies. — 1. Tlie (if i)ossible) be posted upon a strong idvance and retreat of alteruule bodies arc ijcrfornied in a line comiMJScd of a large body of troops, either b^ brii,adc8, battalions, or hall' batlulions, according to the pnncip'c laid down for the battalion in Part IV., S. 8. When the retreat is by battalions or brigades, the distance they retire alternately beyond each other must depend on circumstances, but in order to ufford mutual protection and 8U])port, and to ensure a continued and steady resistance to the enemy, it should rarely exceed tv\'o hundred yards. In retiring, one body will protect the retreat ol' another; and fthon the enemy presses hard, the retreating or rear lino will turn to the front and form in the intervals of the fu'st; the rhole being supported by the reser\'e. 2. The intervals left in the front line by the bodies ..hich have retreated will be occupied Ijy light infantry. Each part of the line will move by a directing battalion, or balf battalion, and any faults in either ])art of the line vhen halted should be corrected before the other part reaches it. The retiiing part of the line will march direct ipon the intervals between the battalions or half battalions n its rear, and when it has passed them it will move by its iirecting body. XI. Inversion of the Order of a Brigade or Division. — Great celerity may frequently be given to the movements of Extensive bodies by battalions changing front individually on their own ground, so as to invert the order of a brigade ir division. This inversion can never be attended with any V If 486 PART VI. — THE BRIGADE OR LINE. embamssment or confusion, as tne order in which the bat talions of a brigade are arranged is a matter of no impor tance. A change of front to the rear can by this means h accomplished in a line of contiguous columns, by the coun termai'ch of each battalion on its own ground. XII. Movements io be coverei by Light Infantry — All move ments in line and changes of front or position in presena of an enemy should be protected by light infantry ; the dis tance between the line and the skirmishers must depend oi the nature of the ground and the character of the movement When a line is advancing, and still far distant from tli( enemy, the skirmishers should be at a considerable distanci in front, with supports and reser\'es ; as the Une approache! the enemy, the distance of the skirmishers must be reduced and the line itself will be a sufficient reserve, the skirmisher and supports only remaining in front. When near th enemy, skirmishers may occasionally be used with advantag close in front of the hue, without supports ; they may b directed to lie down whilo the battalions fire over them, am then to run on to cover ■ ;he further advance, or run to th rear through the intervals between battalions. Kill. Bayonets to he fixed. — The rule laid down in Part IV General Principle VIII., applies equally to the brigade o line, but large bodies of troops m reserve mav, at th discretion of the general commanding, be ordered to unfi bayonets. N.B. In this part the words of command to be given b] the general of the brigade or division are printed in capitals those to be given by the commanders of battalions in italici — THE BRIGADE OR LINK. mfusion, as tne order in which the hat are arranged is a matter of no impor 1 front to the rear can by this means b< ne of contiguous columns, by the coun ttalion on its own ground. XII. covered by Light Infantry — All move langes of front or position in presenw be protected by light infantry ; the dis ne and the skirmishero must depend oi Bund and the character of the movement ancing, and still far distant from tin lers should be at a considerable distanci rts and reser\'es ; as the Une approache mce of the skirmishers must be reduced ill be a sufficient reserve, the skirmisher remaining in front. When near th may occasionally be used with advantag le hne, without supports ; they may b whilo the battalions fire over them, aiv 3over ,he further advance, or run to th ervals between battaUons. Kill. xed. — The rule laid down in Part IV 'III., applies equally to the brigade o lies of troops m reserve may, at tb eneral commanding, be ordered to unfi ; the words of command to be given b] rigade or division are printed in capitals r the commanders of battalions in italici ORNERAL PRINCIPLES. 467 F F 2 458 PART VI. — THE BRIGADE OR LINE. PLATE LVI. Fig, 1 . — A MAfcS OF BATTALION COiaiMNS AT QUAKTliH DISTAKCE WllIiKLINO EV BATTALIONS l.NTO A IJ.-'8 dei-lotino into I'ON a fKNTHAL IIATTALION. THE BRIGADE WILL WHEEL [NTO LINE OF CONTIGUOUS COLUMNS. — Battalion Left (or Right) Wheel. Quick-March. 1 . A Brigade in Mass of Columns at Close or Quarter Distance, wheeling into a Line of Columns. — Plate LVI., Fig. L The caution from the brigadier will be repeated by the battalion commanders, after which they will give their battalion cautions, on which the pivot man of the leading company of each column will face, and the coveter «'ill mark the outer flank, as directed in Part IV., yection 16, tbo brigade major (b) dressing the line of pivots and coverers from the flank of the rear battalion of the column. The briga- dier will then give his signal, and each commander of a battalion -,vill wheel his column as directed in Part IV., Section _16. After wheeling into line of columns, the battalions may, if equired, be oroered to close to six paces' interval on any lamed battalion ; in this case the coverers and supemume- ary Serjeants of the leading companies of columns will nark the front of their battalions, facing towards the point »f appui, which will be on the pivot flank of the leading jompany of the battalion on which they close, S. 2. A Brigade in Line of contiguous Close or Quarter Distance Columns wheeling into Mass. A line of contiguous close columns, whose depth does not exceed their breadth of front, can always be wheeled i; 460 PART VI. — ^THH BRIOADB OR LtNB. into mass, each battalion moving as directed in Part IV., Section 16. A line of contigxious quarter-distance columns, or of con- tiguous close columns wnose depth exceeds their breadth of front, ought never to be wheeled by battalions into mass of columns, as it is evident that the distances from pivot to pivot would not be sufficient for both the depth of the columns and the inter>'als of six paces, even were it suffi- cient for the former. When it is necessary, therefore, to wheel contiguous columns at quarter distance, or contiguous close columns whose depth exceeds their breadth of front, into mass, it can only be done by opening them out to a distance sufficient to admit of the wheel, allowing also for the inter- vals of six paces between battalions. Whfn it is intended to move the column as soon as it is in mass, it will not be necessary to dress the pivots, the captains will gain their covering on the march. But if it is necessary to dress the pivots accurately, the captains will be covered from the front by the brigade- major assisted by the commanders of battaUons or the majors, the men standing fast. When the captains arc correctly covered, on the word Dress from the battahon commanders, the men will close to and dress on them. 8. 3. A Brigade in Mass of Battalion Columns at Close or Quarter Distance deploying into Line of contiguous Battalion Columns. \. If on the front Battalion. — On the THE BRIGADE caution being repeated by the battalion ■WILL DEPLOY commanders, the coverer and supemu- INTO LiNE OF merary seqeant of the leading compam CONTIGUOUS of the named battalion will give base COLUMNS ON ^ points at arm's length from the front ■.MMte^MOBMHMHa — THH BRIOADB OB LtNK. alion moving as directed in Part IV,, us quarter-distance columns, or of con- is whose depth exceeds their breadth of t he wheeled by battalions into mass of lent that the distances from pivot to sufficient for both the depth of the en'als of six paces, even were it snffl- 5sary, therefore, to wheel contiguous listance, or contiguous close columns 3 their breadth of front, into mass, it by opening them out to a distance ' the wheel, allowing also for the inter- feen battalions. id to move the column as soon as it is be necessary to dress the pivots, the 'ir covering on the march. [iry to dress the pivots accurately, the crcd from the front by the brigade- le commanders of battaUons or the mding fast. When the captains arc I the word Dress from the battalion 1 will close to and dress on them. lass of Battalion Columns at Close or ! deploying into Line of contiguous i. I. If on the front Battalion. — On the ation being repeated by the battalion mmanders, the coverer and supemu- srary seqeant of the leading compam the named battalion will give base ints at arm's length from the front CONTIGUOUS COLUMNS AND COLUMNS IN MASS. 461 THB LBADINO BATTALION. Form Fours- Right (or Left). Quick — March. Front — I^m. HaU. of their column, being dressed by the brigade-major. The battahons, except the battalion of formation, will receive the commands. Form Fours — Right (or Left), from their respective leaders. '' On the signal from the brigadier, the battalions in fours will receive the words Quick-March, from their commanders, and will deploy in the same manner as the companies of a battalion (see Part IV., Section 38), each column being halted, and dressed if necessary, at arm's length from the coverer and supernu- merary seqeant of its leading company, who will mark its front, covering on the base points, the brigade-major correcting their covering from the point of appui. In this movement, as soon as the second battalion from the front receives the word Front — Turn, the remainder will move across by the diagonal march. As each battalion receives the word Front — 3>«m, the lieutenants will move up on the reverse flanks of their companies to lead them, the lieutenant of the first company marching on the super- numerary Serjeant, who will be marking the inner flank of the column, the other lieutenants retaining the relative positions held by the reverse flanks of their companies when correctly dressed by the pivot flank in column ; thus the captwns of each battalion will be found to cover when the line of contiguous columns is completed. '' 2. If on the rear Battalion. — On the caution being repeated by the battalion commanders, the coverer and supemu- THE BBiGADB merary seqeant of the leading company, WILL DEPLOY of the named battalion, will move up to INTO LINE OF the fron' -f the mass, and give & base CONTIGUOUS ■{ for their column at arm's length from Iv L 462 PART VI. — THE BRIGADB OR LINB. Quick — March. < 3. cohi'JiNH ON the leading company of the leading TiiK itEAii battalion, being dressed by the brigade- UATTAMON. major. The battalions, except the batta- lion of formation, will receive the words Form Fours — Right (or Left), from their ^respective commanders. On the signal from the brigadier, commanders will give the words Quick- March, and the battalions will deploy in the same manner as tlie companies of a battalion (see Part IV., Section 39), tlie coverers and supernumerary Serjeants of the leading companies of battalions giving points for their columns to dress upon, covering upon the base points, the brigade-major correcting their covering _from the point of appui. If on a central Battalion. — ^The coverer and super- numerary seijeant of the leading company of the named battalion will give a base at arm's length from the front of the mass, facing inwards. The coverers and supernu- merary Serjeants of the leading companies of the remaining battalions will give jjoints as described in Nos. 1 and 2 of this Section, (see Plate LVI., Fig. 2,) and the deployment will be performed as described in Nos. 1 and 2 of this Section, See Part IV., Section 40. S, 4. A Brigade in lAne of cmtigumis Battalion Columns at Close or Quarter Distance formitiff Mass upon any named Battalion. rOIlM MASS inI , ,-. .. „. , ^ l.Iftn rear qf the Right Battalion.— The caution from the brigadier having > been repeated, the battalions, except the battalion of formation, will be faced to J the right about by their commanders. REAR OF THE RIGHT BATTA- LION. Right about Face. , — THE BRIGAUB OR LINE. e leading company of the leading ittalion, being dressed by the brigade- ajor. The battalions, except the batta- )n of formation, will receive the words )rm Fours — Right (or Left), from their spective commanders. On the signal from the brigadier, mmanders will give the words Quick- arch, and the battalions will deploy in same manner as tlie companies of a ittalion (see Part IV., Section 39), tlie verers and supernumerary Serjeants of c leading companies of battalions ving points for their columns to dress )on, covering upon the base points, the igade-major correcting their covering im the point of appui. i Battalion. — ^The coverer and super- f the leading company of the named , base at arm's length from the front inwards. The coverers and supemu- he leading companies of the remaining jjoints as described in Nos. 1 and 2 *late LVI., Fig. 2,) and the deployment lescribed in Nos. 1 and 2 of this Section, i40. 'Arte of contigumis Battalion Columns at er Distance forming Mass upon any 1. If in rear qf the Right Battalion.— le caution from the brigadier having en repeated, the battalions, except the ttalion of formation, will be faced to ; right about by their commanders. By the — Left, Quick — March. < CONTIGUOUS COLUMNS AND COLUMNS IN MA.IS. 463 On the signal from the brigadier, the commanders will give the words Quick — March, and as the proper front of each battalion column in succession gains six paces to the rear of the rear company of the battalion that stood next on its right when in line, it will receive from its commander tlie words Form Fours — Left: when its pivot flank is in rear of the pivot flank of that battalion it will be halted and fronted, nil the captains being covered by the brigade-major from the head of the mass, the commander or one of the majors assisting him. 2. If in front of the Right Battalion. — Tlie caution from the brigadier having been repeated, the battalions, except the battalion of formation, will receive the caution from their commanders. Column will Advance, On the signal from the brigadier, the commanders will give the words Quick — March, and as the rear of each battalion column in succession gains six paces to the front of the leading company of the battalion which stood next on its right when in line, it will receive the words Form Fours — Right from its com- mander; when its pivot flank is in front of the pivot flank of the rear bat- talion, it will be halted and fronted, all the captains being covered by the brigade-major from the rear of the mass, the commanders or minors of battalions assisting him, Form Fours— Left, Halt- Front, Dress. FORM MASS IN FRONT OF THE RIGHT BAT- TALION. Column will Advance. Quick — March. Form Fours — Right. Halt — Front, Dress. 'U I 464 PART VI. — THB BKIOADE OB UNK. FORM MASS RIO 1" (or lkft) in ■< front on the — battalion. A brigade in line of contiguous columns mil form mass on the left battalion in the r,aine manner as on the right. 3. If upon a central Battalion, — ^The named battalion (a, Plate LVII.) will stand fast, ar.d the remaining battalions will form in front and rear of it, as described in the foregoing numbers of thia Section, the captains being covered by the brigade-major from the centre of the named battalion. Tlie captain of the leading company of each battalion which forms in rear of another will be responsible for the six jiaces distance from such other battalion ; and the captain of the rear company of each battalion which forms in front of another, will be responsible for that distance. Thi order in which the battalions of a brigade are arranged in mass does not in any way afTcct their pivot flanks ; thus, although the bottahon which stood on the left of the brigade when in line of contiguous columns, may be formed in front of the mass, as in No. 2 of this Section, if each battalion is right in front the left will be the pivot flank of the whole mass. When a line of contiguous columns thus forms mass, the battalions need only move perpendicularly, until clear of the columns on the right or left, when each commander will cut off the right angle by the diagonal march. S. 5. A Brigade in Line of contiguous Close, or Quarter Distance, Columns changing Front. — Plate LVIII. 1. If with Columns whose Depth ex- ceeds their Breadth qf Front. — On the caution the commanders will place them- -THE UKIOADE OR LINK. F contiguous columns mil form mass 1 the fiame manner as on the right. fupon a central Battalion, — ^The battalion (a, Plate LVII.) will id fast, and the remaining battalions form in front and rear of it, as bribed in the foregoing numbers of Section, the captains being covered the brigade-major from the centre of named battalion. leading company of each battalion f another will be responsible for the rem such other battalion ; and the npany of each battalion which forms ill be responsible for that distance. ch the battalions of a brigade are es not in any way afTect their pivot ;h the bottahon which stood on the hen in line of contiguous columns, ont of the mass, as in No. 2 of this ion is right in front the left will be whole mass. tiguous columns thus forms mass, the move perpendicularly, until clear of ght or left, when each commander will i by the diagonal march. Line of contiguous Close, or Quarter s changivg Front. — Plate LVIII. . If with Columns whose Depth ex- is their Breadth qf Front. — On the ition the commanders will place them- CONTIOrOUB COLUMNS AND COLUMNM IN M\HS. 465 PLATE LVII. A tlNB OF CONTI0DOU8 DATTAUON QDARTKR DISTANCE COLUMNS FORMING MASS OF COLUMNS UPON A CENTHAL BATTALION. aw— >$1 i -^ 466 I'ART VI.— THR DIIICADK OB UN«.'''*'^''* ' — TIIK nniOADK OK LINK. CONTIOUOUS COLUMNB AND COLUMNS IN MASH. 4Gt PLATE LVIII. ' A I.INIi OV COilTIOl'Ol'g UATTAMON CDLUMNH AT IjUAnTRR ' UIHTANCK < IIANO.'.VCI VUONT TO TIIM lilOlIT Vl.A.VK. C;--^j ^«i---j ----,■,-- .-_rg_-_i , C;i;rifl |;;IIZ;J ™~Ii il==;;== 4GS PART VI.— -THK BRtOADK OR l.'NR. '.-, ^■ ; t in' j .i\ — THK BRIOADH OR l.>NC. 'I 4i" }<"':'i'f\- I'uih I CONTIGUOUS COLUMNS AND COLUMNS I" MASH. 4fi9 TiiR nKHiADB Bclvcs cIoKO to that flank o ^heir leadiiiff WILL ciiANOK companies which is nearest to the wheel- VKONT 'r()TiiE< ing jwint, and having repeated the cau- RiotiT KLANK tion, the rovercrs and supeiiiumerarv BY ECiiKLi.ON sorjeants will murk the ground on which ON TIIK iiKJiiT the heads of their battalions are to rest BATTALION. in the new alignment, the brigade-inojor (/>) covering them from the wheeling _ point. On the signal from the brigadier, the battalions, e.xcej)t the inward or pivot Quick— March, battalion, will receive the words. Quick — March, on which they will move straight to their front (d, t,) each com- mander looking to the line of jjoints. Halt, (a, a, a,) and giving the word Halt when he sees that the flank of the leading com- pany of his battalion is in rear of his supernumerary seijeant, in a line perpen- dicular to the new Jignraent. The brigadier will pive the annex- THE KCHRL- ed oaution, which will be followed LON WILL by the cautions of i;he commanders WHEEL TO of battalions. At the usual signal, THE RIGHT the commandcrs will give the words AND FORM Quick — March, on which the pivot LINE ON THE Of inword battalion will wheel into RIGHT BAT- the ncw alignment on a halted pivot, TALioN. «x and the remaining columns will wheel Battalion Right on moveable pivots. When the latter Wheel. have wheeled up parallel to the new Halt. alignment they will receive the word Battalion on Forward, and when they have moved the move, up to the hands of the coverers and Right— Wheel, supernumepwy seijeants, Halt^ ITie 470 PART Vi. — THE BRIGADE OR LINE. Forward. Halt. THE BRIGADE WILL CHANGE FRONT TO THE RiOHT(or left). Right (or Left) —Wheel. Quick — March. Halt. Quick — March. Right (or Left) —Wheel. Forward. Halt. battalions will be ordered to drew, if _ necessary. 2. If with Columns whose t)epth does not exceed their Breadth, — The new alignment will be taken up in the manner described in No. 1 of this Sec- tion, but it will not be necessary to halt the battalions in echellon. Each column 'will wheel in succession as it arrives perpendicularly in rear of its super- numerary Serjeant, and when its front is parallel to the new ahgnment it will receive the word Forward, and move up into line. In these changes of front, tlio point at which each wheel is made must be at the intersection of two straight lines (rf, c, and e, e), the one perpendicular to the old line erected at the inner flank {d) of the battalion, the other perpen- dicular to the new line erected at the point of entry (e), where the inner flank of the battalion will rest when the movement is completed. Thus it will be found that all the wheeling points, if the columns are correctly halted in echellon, will be situated on the same straight line drawn from the point of intersection of the old and new alignments, and bisecting the angle formed by those aUgnnients. In changing front at right angles, it is evident that each battalion will be formed, when in echellon, at b distance equal to its own breadth and six paces from the battalion next in front of it ; and the perpendicular lines from the inner flanks of battaUons, and the points of entry, will meet at right angles on the wheeling points. 3. Changing Front on a Central Battalion. — Supposing the change of front to be to the right on No. 3 battalion, tttid thbt the brigade is formed of four battaUons, the 1 —THE BRIGADE OR LINE. mttalions will be ordered to drew, if lecessary. 2. If with Columns whose t)epth does •ot exceed their Breadth, — The new lignment will be taken up in the iianner described in No. 1 of this Sec- ion, but it will not be necessary to halt he battalions in echellon. Each column t'ill wheel in succession as it arrives lerpendicularly in reai of its super- lumerary Serjeant, and when its front is larallel to the new aUgnment it will eceive the word Forward, and move ip into line. if front, tho point at which each wheel the intersection of two straight lines iC perj)endicular to the old hne erected i) of the battalion, the other perpen- line erected at the point of entry (e), ik of the battalion toU rest when the ;ed. Thus it will be found that all the the columns are correctly halted in lated on the same stroight line drawn rsection of the old and new alignments, jle formed by those aUgnments. at right angles, it is evident that each •med, when in echellon, at b distance dth and six paces from the battalion and the perpendicular lines from the ions, and the points of entry, will meet 3 wheeling points. f on a Central Battalion. — Supposing to be to the right on No. 3 battalion, ds is formed of four battalions, the COMTIGUOUS COLUMNS AND COLUMNS IN MASS. 471 movement will be performed as follows : — The right of No. 3 will be the point of appui ; that battalion and No. 4 will proceed as described in Nos. 1 or 2 of this Section- 'Hie supernumerary serjeant of the front company of No. 2 battalion will cover on the base points of No. 3 battalion, at six paces from the supernumerary serjeant, who will be marking the point of appui. No. 2 battalion will be faced about and orclered to retire until its proper front company is one pace beyond its si »ernumerary serjeant ; it will then be directed to ibrm fou:\ to the right; as soon as its leading flank has passed the supernumerary serjeant by an arm's length the column will be wheeled to the li.s^hi, as described in Part IV., Section 17 ; and when square with the new ahgnment it will be halted and fronted, the coverer of its leading company marking the outer flank as soon as the cohiran has wheeled clear of the alifrnment. The supernumerary serjeant of the front company of No. 1 battalion will cover on the base points furnished by No. 2 battalion, at six ])aces from the coverer marking the outer point. No. 1 battalion will be faced about, and ordered to retire simultaneously with No. 2 battalion, and will proceed in like manner. When the depth of the cohir i exceeds their breadth, and the battalions thrown forward are consequently obliged to halt in echellon, those which are thrown back must not retire until the rest commence their wheel ; when the depth of the columns does not exceed their breadth, and the battalion of formation is able to wheel at once, all the battalions may be put in motion at the same time. It may occasionally be necessary to order a battalion that is retiring, to mark time until the outer point of the preceding battalion is placed. »£ ©J? i o o 4/2 part vi. — the bkicade ob line. Movements in Line or Line op Columns. S. 6. Naming the Regulating Battalion. When a brigade is required to ad- vance or retire in line, or in line of columns, a regulating battalion, or bat- talion of direction will be named, to which all the rest will conform j in sub- sequent movements the same battalion will continue to direct, unless another is named. THE brigade WILL advance. THE — regi- ment WILL DIRECT. S. 7' A Brigade Advancing or Retiring in Line. 1. When a brigade advances or retires in line, each battalion will march by its own centre, the commanders only looking to the battalion of direction. The centre seijeant of the battalion of direction will select points to march on under the guidance of the commanding officer or adjutant; these pomts should not be too far oif, as smoke or dust might conceal ' )ipm A-om view ; the direction can be presened to any distunce by taking fresh points, when necessary, in the prolongation of the straight line passing through the original points. The direction of the regulating battalion, when it has been correctly established, should not be altered. The centre Serjeants of the remaining batta- lions will also select points to march upon, but their direc- tion must at once be altered if it is found not to be parallel to that of the regulating battalion ; any deviation fhim the proper direction will be made apparent by the increase or decrease of the inter\'als between battalions. 2. Marching over Heights, 8fc. — When parts of a brigade in line march over heights or across valleys, they will require more time to pass them than the rest who are moving on level ground ; in order to presence a correct line, the uktter should be directed to step short. -the bkicade ob line. Line or Line of Columns. ng the Regulating Battalion. When a brigade is required to od- mce or retire in line, or in line of )lumn8, a regulating battalion, or bat- ilion of direction will be named, to hich all the rest \vill conform j in sub- squent movements the same battalion ill continue to direct, unless another is amed. ) Advancing or Retiring in Line. le advances or retires in line, each by its own centre, the commanders ! battalion of direction. The centre ion of direction will select points to [uidance of the commanding officer or t.s should not be too far off, as smoke I (hem from view; the direction can distunce by taking fresh points, when longation of the straight line passing points. The direction of the regulating I been correctly established, should not tre Serjeants of the remaining batta- points to march upon, but their direc- altered if it is found not to be parallel :ing battalion ; any deviation fi^m the be made apparent by the increase or als between battalions. ieights, &(c. — When parts of a brigade ights or across valleys, they will require em than the rest wno are moving on ;r to presence a correct line, the utter step short. movements in line. 473 3. Attention in Marching. — Too much attention cannot be paid to procure a correct advance in line, which is the movement that immediately leads to the enemy ; no hurry or doubling must be allowed ; if any part of a brigade falls in rear of the battalion of direction, the latter must be ordered to step short till the rest come up in line. No brigade can advance correctly unless the direction of the regulating battaUon is perpendicular to the original front. A central battalion should in general be named to direct. 4. Correct Formation. — No body of troops can advance in line with firmness and order unless the original formation of that line was correct. S. 8. A Brigade Advancing or Retiring in Line of contiguous Columns. 1. In this movement the battalion of direction will march by its proper pivot flank; the remaining battalions will march by the flank nearest to the regulating battalion, preserving their distance from it. 2. When retiring in line of contiguous columns, the leading company of each battalion must be ordered to move in line with that of the regulating battalion, unless the brigade is only required to retire a short distance, in which case they will preserve their relative positions. 3. When ordered to halt and front, the regulating bat- talipn will halt, front, and stand fast, throwing out base points at once. The remaining battalions will move on, turn to the front, and move up, or halt and front at once, as may be necessary to bring their proper front companies in line with the front of the battalion of direction. If the battalions have not altered their relative positions they will holt and front together. c G : 4/4 PAKT VI. — THE BRIOADB OB LINK. S, 9. A Brigade Advancing or Retiring in hine of Quarter- Distance Columns at deploying Distance. 1. When a brigade advances in line of columns at de- ploying distance, if the columns are right in front and the right battalion is named to direct, the adjutants will accompany the movement at deploying distance from the left of their respective battalions. The battalion of direc- tion will move peryjendicularly to its front, the remaining battalions will advance, each preserving the distance of six paces from the adjutant of the battalion next on its right. 2. When the columns are right in front and the left battalion is named to direct, tlio adjutants will not be required to mark the distant jjoints during the advance, but the senior majors will place themselves on the inner flanks of their leading companies, and will regulate the march of their columns so aj to preserve their deploying distances and six paces from the battalions next on their left respectively. 3. When a central battalion is named to direct, the fore- going rules will equally apply to the battalions on its right and left. 4. When the columns are left in fronbthe foregoing rules will apply, the flanks being reversed, and the junior mi^or leading when required. 5. When a brigade is ordered to retire, similar arrange- ments will be made facing to the rear, the majors of the proper rear wings of battalions or the adjutants, as may be rtiquired, moving in line with the proper rear companies, and keeping then: dressing on the proper rear rank of the proper rear company of the battalion of direction. On the words Halt — Front, or Front — Turn, the majors of the front wings, or the adjutants, as may be reqmred, will move up to preserve tne distances in the front alignment, all -THE BRIGADB OR LINE. ncing or Heliring in hine of Quarter- lumns at deploying Distance. ) advances in line of columns at dc- the columns are right in front and . named to direct, the adjutants will ment at deployinpf distance from the ; battalions. The battalion of direc- ndicularly to its front, the remaining se, each preserving the distance of six nt of the battalion ne.\t on its right. mns are right in front and the left :o direct, the adjutants will not be e distaiit points during the advance, s will place themselves on the inner ig companies, and will regulate the ms so as to preserve their deploying iCes from tlie battalions next on their battalion is named to direct, the fore- ly apply to the battalions on its right ms are left in fron b the foregoing rules being reversed, and the junior mj^or rl. e is ordered to retire, similar arrange- facing to the rear, the majors of the battalions or the adjutants, as may be line with the proper rear companies, sssing on the proper rear rank of the of the battalion of direction. On the ir Front — Turn, the majors of the front mts, as may be required, will move distances in the front alignmept, all HOVBMENTS IN LINE. 476 dressing on the proper front company of the battalion of direction. It will usually be found convenient to name the deepest column in the brigade to direct when retreating. S, 10, A Brigade formed m» Line of Double Columns, ul deploying Distance, Advancing or Retiring, 1. When a brigade advances in a line of double columns at deployuig distance, if the right battalion is named to direct, the adjutants will accompany the movement at deploying distance from the left of their respective batta- lions, 'riie battol'on of direction will move perpendicularly to its front, th' dor majors of the remaining battalions will lead thei- .-olumns so as to preserve the deploying distances of their right wings, and six paces from the at^ju- tants of the battalions next on their riglit respectively. 2. When the left battalion is named to direct, similar arrangements will be made, the ae^utants moving at deploying distance from the right of their respective batta- Uons, and the junior majors leading the columns by the left. 3. When a central battalion is named to direct, its junior major and tlie adjutant will both accompany the movement, the former at deploying distance from the lef*', the latter at deploying distance from the right ; the remain- ing battalions will move as directed in Nos. 1 and 2 of this Section, 4. When the brigade is ordered to retire, the same arrangements will be made facing to the rear, and the points will move as directed in the preceding Section. 5. When only one major is present, the commander of the battalion must lead the column when required. ^H 476 PART VI. — THE BRIOADB OR LINK. S. 11. A Brigade in Line advancing in Open Columns from the Flanks of Battalions, or in Double Columns from the Centres of Battalions. A brigade formed in line may advance in open colunms of companies from the right (or left) of battalions, or in double columns of companies or subdivisions from the cen- tres of battalions, the points being placed as described in the preceding Section. For battalion movements, see Part IV., Sections 29 and 30. THE BRIGADE WILL ADVANCE IN UPKN C0LUMN8 OP COMPANIES FROM THE RIGHT (or left) of battalions. THE BRIGADE WILL ADVANCE IN DOUBLE COLUMNS OP COMPANIES (or subdivisions) FROM THE CENTRE OF BATTALIONS. S. 12. A Brigade retiring in Open Columns of Companies from the one Flank of Battalions in rear of the other, or from both Flanks of Battalions in rear of their Centres, THE BRIGADE WILL RETIRE IN OPEN COLUMNS CF COMPANIES FROM THE RIGHT (or left) in REAR OF THE LEFT (or right) OF BATTALIONS. In these movements the points will be placed as directed in Sections 9 and 10 of this Part, and during the retreat they will keep in line with the leading com- > panics or subdivisions, but on the words —THE BRIGADE OB LINE. Line advancing in Open Columns from aliens, or in Double Columnt from the MM. A brigade formed in line may advance in open colunms of companies from the right (or left) of battalions, or in double columns of companies or subdivisions from the cen- tres of battalions, the points being placed as described in the preceding Section. For battalion movements, see Part IV., Sections 29 and 30. N NIES or iNS. .L LE VIES ) OF ring in Open Columns of Companies ': of Battalions in rear of the other, or f Battalions in rear of their Centres, In these movements the points will be >laced as directed in Sections 9 and 10 of his Part, and during the retreat they rill keep in line with the leading com- lanJes or subdivisions, but on the words i im i ,li WW^-«-y M0VEMENT8 IN DOUBLE COLUMN. 477 Halt-Front, they will be given in the proper fVont alignment, and will be dressed on the front company of the battalion of direction. THE BRIGADE WILL RETIRE IN DOUBLE COLUMNS OF HUBDIVISIONS FROM BOTH FLANKS IN REAR OF THE CENTRES OF BATTALIONS. Movements of a Brigade in Double Column. S. 13. A Brigade advancing in double Column of Companies from the Centre, or retiring by Companies from both Flanks in rear of the Centre. 1. Advancing. — A brigade will ad- vance in double column of companies from the centre, in the same manner as a battalion, except that the companies when in column will march by their inner flanks, the lieutenants leading ; the two centre companies of the brigade will move to the front, the remaining com- panies of the battalions on the right wheeling into open column, left in front, and those of the battalions on the left wheeling into open column, right in front. All the lieutenants will keep the distances of their own companies, with- out regard to the position of the cor- responding companies in the double column, the two leading companies of which, only, are required to keep in line. THE BRIGADE WILL ADVANCE IN DOUBLE COLUMN OF COMPANIES FROM ITS CENTRE. 478 PART VI.— TMB BRIGADE OR UNK. When the front of a double column is composed of the »ght company of one battalion and the left company o another, the intervul of aix pacea will be preserved bVec tne columns ; when it is composed of the two centre com- panies of a battal.on. room will be left between them f„r the hcutenanta tomove up and lead on the inner flanks; «^e colours w, 1 drop to the rear, and the remainder of th moveuient will be performed as described in Part IV In ei her cnse the senior major of the centre or left centre bat- Ji"; "'1 ,' 'f ?J''l<=-"i"J">-. ^vill move in rear of the lieu- tenant who leads the column, to superintend the direction. . , When the iiuniber of battalions in a biigade is even the mncr companies of the two centre battalions will be con- Biderecl as the centre ; when the number is uneven, tite two centre comjianies of the centre battalion will be consider «L^^."fV^;'r^^^'' ''"»'^''^' ^"^'»°"t reference to ih strength of battahons or number of companies in them. \ •'■ ^«''''"5' from both Flanks— A brigade m line will retire by com- panies from both flanks in rear of the ( entre, on the same principles as a bat- tahon, exc;pt. that when in column, the companies will march by their inner flanks, the lieutenants leading. \\ hen the wings of the brigade are of unequal strength, as soon as the weaker wing is completely formed into column, the battahons composing it will be ordered by their respective commanders to mark time or halt, until the stronger wing 18 also in column ; the weaker will then be directed to continue its retreat, the lieutenint of the leading company preserving This relative position THE BRIGADE •WILL RKTIHE BY COMPANIES FKOM BOTH FLANKS IN REAR OF ITS CENTRE. d( W cc wl as Stl wi dii th as an 8U sit it: ac CO] Sei for — TMB BRIGADE OB LINE. f a doulile column is composed of tlie ne battalion and the left company of I of SIX paces will be preserved between it IS com|)()sed of the two centre com- I, room will be left between them for uve up and lead on the inner flanks; to the rear, and the remainder of the iformed as described in Part IV. In • major of the centre or left centre bat- le-mujov, will move in rear of the lieu- column, to superintend the direclion. of battalions in a brigade is even, tiie he two centre battalions will be con- ; when the number is uneven, the two the centre battalion will be considerw e brigade, without reference to the 3 or number of companies in them. 2. Retiring from both Flanh.~k Pigade m line will retire by com- mies from both flanks in rear of the ;ntre, on the same principles as a bat- hon, except, that when in column, le comjjanies will march by their ner flanks, the lieutenants leadinjf. hen the wings of the brigade are of lequal Btrength, as soon as the weaker ing IS completely formed into column, e battahons composing it will be dered by their respective commanders mark time or halt, until the stronger ng 18 also in column ; the weaker II then be directed to continue its reat, the lieutentmt of the leading mpany preserving his relative position MOVEMRNTS IN OOUBtB OOtUMN. 479 with the stronger wing during the march ; in this manner the proper wheel- ing distance of companies wll be kept, and the two centre companies of the bri- gade will always be in a line ready to form a base when the column is halted _ and fronted. When retiring, the same intervals will be kept as are descnhed m the advance of double columns; the stronaer wing must of course direct. When a brigade is advancing or retiring in double column of companies, the proper left centre battalion or wmg will direct, unless especially ordered to the contrary, as will be the case in retiring, when the right \nnu is the stronger. " When a brigade in double column forms pari; of a line with other brigades, its flanks wiU be marked and the distances preserved by staff officers, or by the adjutants of the two outward battalions, in precisely the same manner as the deploying distances of a battalion in double column are preserved in a brigade. The major, or brigade-major supcni -ending the direction of the column, will be respon- sible for the distance of the inner half of the brigade when It IS not the regulating brigade. S. 14. A Brigade in dovble Column of Companies forming Line to the Front or to a Flank. 1. To the Front.— Each of the single columns composing a aouble column may form line to the front on the leading company, by the echellon movement described in Part IV. Section 33 ; or the centre battaUon, or battaUons, only, may torm by the echellon march of companies, the remainder ^ 480 PART VI.— TUB BRIOADI OR LINK. th closing^ to quarter distance on their leading companin moving across to the alignment, and then deploying their inner flanks ; or, if necessary, the whole may close double moss at quarter distance and then deploy. -2. To a Flank at Right Angles.—. brigade in double column of companii will form line to a flank in the san manner as a battalion If on the niarri it should first be halted, and as contpanies will in general be of unequi THE nuiOADE Strength, the captains of the inner win WILL KORM of the brigade, who will be on the ouh LINE TO THE ■{ flanks of their companies, should first li RIGHT covered from the ♦■;ont, by the brigaih (or left). major previously to forming ; this doni the inner wing of the brigade will whe into line, and the outer wing will fori to the reverse flank, as described i Part IV., Sections 2 and 35, the adjutant as usual marking the outer flanks battalions. 3. To a Flank in an oblique Direction, — If the line is t be formed in an oblique direction to the original alignmenl the battalions of the mner or pivot wing of the brigade \vi be brought up to the alignment, as described in Part IV Section 16, No. 3, the adjutants marking the flanks farthei from the centre of the brigade, after which they will I wheeled into line ; the outer wing at the same time wi advance, changing direction at once, and will form to tb reverse flank, as described in Part IV., Section 36, No. 2. ri.— THE BRIOADI OR LINK. t distance on their leading companin I the alignment, and then deployin);; ! or, if necessary, the whole may close larter distance and then deploy. 2. To a Flank at Right Angles.— brigade in double column of companii will form line to a tiank in the san manner as a battalion If on the marcl it should first be halted, and as th contpanies will in general be of unequi strength, the captains of the inner win of the brigade, who will be on the out* flanks of their companies, should first li covered from the *;ont, by the brigadt major previously to forming ; this don the inner wing of the brigade will whe into line, and the outer wing will fori to the reverse flank, as described i Part IV., Sections 2 and 35, the adjutunt as usual marking the outer flanks battalions. \ an oblique Direction, — If the line is t )li^ue direction to the original alignmenl he mner or pivot wing of the brigade «i the alignment, as described in Part IV the adjutants marking the flanks farthei it the brigade, after which they will I ; the outer wing at the same time wi ; direction at once, and will form to tb sscribed in Part IV., Section 36, No. 2, MOVKMBNT8 IN DOUBLE COLUMN. 481 ■y' TOiiysu>fek';afeka^^v>fe.:t- ' ' ' '.'. ' , a^^i"; .^.^^'-i^ ^Wi.ij^ - --'"jwiJ ""■ ■ --S T /ii CIIANOISS OP PRONT AND POHITION. AliVANCINO OK RiCTIUINO IN CoMTMN. 483 I, 15. A Briffnde adraitrinr/ in open Colnrnn of Compmiies from either FIniik, or retirinij hy Companies from one Flank in rear of the other. THK UKiuAUi!i f A brij^ude will advance in ojicn \rii.i. AUVANCK column of companies from tithcr IN OPEN COLUMN flank, or retire from one flunk in roar OF coMi'ANiEH of tho otluT, on precisely the same I'UoM ITS uiuilT principles as a, battalion. When ad- (or left). vanciiiff, iho captain of tho leadinj^f company of each battalion (except TIIK nRioADH -^ the ii rat) will he rfsponsilde for his WILL iiETiHK IN company's wheeling distance and six OPEN COLUMN pHces from the battalion in front of OF COMPANIES him; when retirinjf, the captain of the FROM ITS RIGHT leadinj? company of each battalion (or left), will be responsible for the wheeling IN REAR of ITS distance of the company tlien in front LEFT (or right). (_of him and six paces. Chanoeh of Front and Position. S. 16. A Brii/ade in Line changing Front on n named Company of a named Battalion. — Plate LIX. 1 . If all the Battalions are to move in Echellon. — The brigadier will name the battalion and the company on which he intends the change to be made, and will point out the direction change front required ; the base company or com- ON N° — panies will then be wheeled into tho COMPANY or — new alignment, the base points will be '' y i »J!t'Kt»m,-;iH'feittfa!toiiaj^:jij^ ^ m 494 PART VI. — THE BRIQADB OR LINE. REGIMENT RIGHT (or LEPT) THROWN FOR- WARD, THE WHOLE IN ECHELLON. COMPANIES WILL WHEEL — PACES. CHANGE FRONT ON N° — COMPANY OF — REGIMENT, RIGHT (or left) THROWN FOR- WARD. — REMAINING BAT- TALIONS FORM QUARTER DIS- TANCE COLUMN. placed, and the distant point or pointi will be selected. The brigadier, if thi remaining companies are to wheel into echellon on halted pivots, will also name the number of paces they are to wheel; the commanders \vill whee their battalions into echellon of com panies, and on the signal from thi brigadier the new line will be foi-med as described in Part IV., Section 56, 67, or 68, the a4iutants marking tht alignment for their respective batta- lions. 2. If the outward battalions are t« move in quarter distance columnQ, the brigadier will proceed as above de- scribed, except that he need not nami the number of paces to be wheeled. Thi battalion of formation will be wheeled into echellon (6, c,) and the remaining battalions will be formed in quartei distance columns in rear of their inner companies (d), or in double column! of companies or subdivisions in reai of their centres (e) by their respectivi commanders, and on the signal fron the brigadier, the former will fom line, and the latter will move into thi new alignment and deploy, as de scribed in Part IV. I. — THE BRIQADB OR LINE. placed, and the distant point or pointi will be selected. The brigadier, if the remaining companies are to wheel into echellon on halted pivots, will also name the number of paces they are to wheel; the commanders \vill whee their battalions into echellon of com panies, and on the signal from the brigadier the new line will be formed, as described in Part IV., Section 56, 67, or 68, the a4jutants marking the alignment for their respective batta- lions. 2. If the outward battalions are to move in quarter distance columns, the brigadier will proceed as above de- scribed, except that he need not name the number of paces to be wheeled. The battalion of formation will be wheeled into echellon (6, c,) and the remaining battalions will be formed in quarter distance columns in rear of their inner companies (d), or in double column! of companies or subdivisions in rear of their centres (e) by their respective commanders, and on the signal fron the brigadier, the former wll fora line, and the latter will move into thi new alignment and deploy, as de scribed in Part IV. CHANGER OF FRONT AND POSITION. 486 CHANGES OF PHONT AND POSITION. 487 S, 17. A Briaade changing Position on detached Points. — Plate LX. 1. in Quarter Distance Column or Double Columns of Subdivirion. — ^The commander will give the gen ?ral direc- tion of the future jjosition, and will siffnify on what battalion the new line will he formed, which in this move- ment will usually be a flank one. The brifjadc-mnjor will pliice himself at the jjoint of apiuii and will select a distant point, the major of the battalion of formation and the adjutantswill follow to mark the alignment for their re- spective battalions in succession. At the same time, the whole will form columns at quarter distance on the right or left companies (a), or on the centre subdivisions of battalions (6), as may be ordered, and on the signal from the brigaditr they will move by the shortest hnes to their places in the new alignment, where they will deploy in succession as they arrive, or wait for the brigadier's command, as may be directed. When thought expedient, the battalions may move off at once in open column from the ilanks or centre, and close to quarter distance on the march. 2. By the Flank March in Fours. — The change of position may also be effected by the nank march of com- panies in fours (c, c, c), companies moving across and forming in open H H CHANGE I'OSI- TION TO THE itKiHT (or left) ON DKTACHEU POINTS. DATTALIONSWIM^ I'ORM QUARTER DISTANCK COLUMNS IN HEAR^ OF THEIR RIGHT (or left) com- panies, OR uattalions will form double column of subdivisions in rear of their centre. CHANGE POSI- TION TO THE RIGHT (or left) ON DETACHED 488 PABT VI. — THE BRIGADE Oil LINE. POINTS. I column (ff, , or 40 ; the other battalions will move by the ilank march of fours, and deploy when at the proper interval from the ])rrceding bat- talion, which, as usual, will be marked by the supernumerary serjeant of the inner company. The inner Hunk com- j)any of each battalion will be halted and fronted by the commundiu'j; oflB.- cer, the remaininpf companies by their leaders, as laid down in the above- -named Sections. A brigade in mass n»ay be ordered to dejjloy on any named company of any named battidion without pre^'iously forming line of contiguous columns j in this movement the named battalion, if not already there, will move up at the double to the front ha^fio, and deploy as usual; the remain- ing battalions will move by the shortest lines to the point where their inner flanks are to rest in the line, and will then deploy in the usual manner. S, 19. A Brigade in Mass of Battalion Columns opening out to deploying Distance on detached Points, and deploying into Line. — Plate LXI. In this movement the leading batta- lion will march to its place in the new THE BRIGADE line and will at once give a base and WILL DEPLOY distant point, the remaining battalions INTO LINE will disengage to the flank by fours, OF COLUMNS AT each turning to the front in succession DEPLOYING when in direct echellon (a, b). 'ITie DISTANCE OM brigadc-major (/) will place himself at DETACHED < the point of appui and will dtess the 492 FART VI. — THK BHIQADC OR LINK. POINTS. points of the battalion of formation in REAR COLUMNS the required direction ; the remaining DISENGAOK adjutants will move out to mark tiie TO THK RIGHT alignment for their respective battalions (or left) in the i:sub1 maimer ; the commanders DY FOURS. will lead their battalions to their places in the new alignment by the shoi-test L lines. The battalions may be ordered to deploy into line in succession, as they come up to their i)laces in the new ali^n ment, or simultaneously, after the line of columns is com' pleted. ^_ The Flank March in Fours. S. 20. The General App1'?ntion of Uie Flank March in Fours to the Advance of a Brigade. Tlie principles laid down in Part IV., Section 25, maj frequently be adopted with great advantage in the move raents of a brigade, especially where the advance of parts of the line is likely to be interrupted by obstacles. In this movement a battalion of direction must be named as usual, and a company of that battalion will also be named, by which the rest will march. ITie battalion least likely to be interrupted by obstacles should be selected to direct. If a single battalion in the brigade has to close to quartei or close distance, its full distance in the line must bi kept by its mounted oflBcers, in the same manner as ir line of columns at deploying distance. The direction of tin advance may be changed, by altering the direction of th( regulating company, the remaining companies and batta' lions conforming. During this movement the companie: may at any moment form to the front into line, or bat talions may form square on their flank or cehtre companies I. — THB BHIOADB OR LINK. points of the battalion of formation in the required direction ; the reinaiiiiiig adjutants will move out to mark tii alignment for their respective battalions in the usual maimer ; the commanders will lead their battalions to their jilaccs in the new alignment by the shortest lines. nay be ordered to deploy into line m come up to their i)laces in the new alifjii susly, after the line of columns is com •"lank March in Fours. ml Appl'?ntion oj Uie Flank March in 'o the Advance of a Brigade. lid down in Part IV., Section 25, may ted with great advantage in the move I especially where the advance of parts of 3 be interrupted by obstacles. In this ion of direction must be named as usual, that battalion will also be named, by inarch. ITie battalion least likely to be tacles should be selected to direct. If in the brigade has to close to quartet its full distance in the line must bi Led officers, in the same manner as ir deploying distance. The direction of tin langcd, by altering the direction of tbi y, the remaining companies and batta' During this movement the companiei it form to the front into line, or bat- }uare on their flank or celitre companies. .MOVRMBNTS OP DIVIfllONB, SuUAHES. S. 21. A Briyude forming Squares. Brigade squares, or squares consisting of several bat- talions, cun seldom be necessary, although they may be formed from columns on the same principle as a battalion square; if formed from double columns of companies, sub- divisions will wheel outwards to form the side faces instead of sections. Battalion squares flunking e^ch other in direct cchellon afford the readiest and most efficient defence. When time will admit, the battalions of a brigade in line siiould be advanced in direct cchellon to any required dis- tance before foiiiiing squares. Movements op Divisions or larger Bodies. S. 22. Application of Brigade Drill to Divisions or large Bodies. 1. In the explanations contained in the preceding sections reference has only been made to a brigade, but the same j)iinciple8 are equally apjjlicable to the manoeuvres of divisions or larger bodies, which are performed simply by a succession of brigade movements. 2. Generally speaking, the orders of the general com- manding a division or line will be conveyed to the brigadiers by staff officers, unless the whole body is in mass or line of contiguous columns, in which case the general may give his own words of command, 3. In all movements, a brigade must move undev the direction of its own brigadier, in the same manner as a battalion moves under the direction of its own commander. When deploying from mass into line of contiguous columns, each brigade will move across in mass (as far as possible by the diagonal march) to the alignment, and will then 494 l>AUT VI. — TUK BRIUAUB OR LINE, •k'ploy by command of its biitjadier. ^Vhen a line of con. tigiious columns chanj^cs front, tach brigade will advance to its proper distance in direct ecbellon of brigades, aiiil then change front by word of command from the brigadier, the columns moving up to the general alignment in suc- cession, or forming on the inner flank of the brigade, and then moving up into the general line, as may be ordered, In this movement distance must be shortened as much as possible by the application of the diagonal march. SECOND LINES. Ubnkkal Pkinciplks. I. Formation. — Second lines arc usually composed of single or double quarter distance colunms of battalions at deploying distance. II. ..•«"»*j»!>i»(yv Ueguhtinij Column. — Second lines will be directed by tin column wliich is in rear of the battalion of direction of tin fu-Mt line. If that coluniii be single and right in front, it will be in rear of the right company of that battalion, if it is a single column left in front, it will be in rear of the left company, and if it is a double column, it will be in rear of the ceutre of that battalion ; the remaining columns of the second line will keep their deploying distances from the rcgulatiug battalion. III. Distajice. — The distance between lines should be sufil cient to prevent any liability to disorder by the unforeseen retreat of the first Ime ; it should, in general, be equal to the front of two battalions. IV. Movements. — ^The movements of the secoiid line must correspond with those of the first. If the first line makes a r.— TUK URIUAUB OR LINE. 1 of its biiijadier. ^Vh£Il a line of con hanj^es front, each brigade will ndvante lice in direct echellon of brigades, and )y word of commiind from the brigadier, g up to the general alignment in sue- on the inner ilunk of the brigade, and to the general line, as may be ordered, iistoncc must be shortened as much as hcation of the diagonal march. ECOND LINES. GNEKAL PkINC1PLU8. I. md lines ate usually composed of single stance columns of battalions at deploying II. n. — Second lines will be directed by tlic rear of the battalion of direction of tin jlnmii be single and right in front, it will ght company of that battalion, if it is a in front, it will be in rear of the loft is a double column, it will be in rear uf >attalion ; the remaining columns of tlie ;ep their deploying distances from tlic III. distance between lines should be suffi' y liability to disorder by the unforeseen Ime ; it should, in general, be equal to talions. IV. I movements of the secoiid line must ise of the fint. If the first line makes a SECOND LINRfl. ' '** 4% 4»({ PART VI. — THK aKIOAUK Oil LINK. PLATE LXII. TWO tlKEt OBAMOINO KHONT UPON A FLANK OP THE FIKoT LINK, — TUB SKCONI) LINK IN COLUMNH OF BATTALIONS AT UDAHTER DI8TANCR. ^ K. <• '^^ .' '^ ■' \>c> \ %i'f/? .'■ m m -THB UKIOAUIS Oil LINK. PLATE LXII. INO KHONT UPON A FLANK OP THE PlReT ;CONI> LINK IN COMJMNH OP BATTAI.IONB I8TANCK. f !mnge of front, the Necond line must make a com-spondin^ ihango and form narallel to it, on a point j- ..ced perpen- dicularly in rear or the point of appui of the first line. V. Relieving Front Line. — ^Vh^■n the second liii.^ is required to reliwe the first, it will he di-iiloyed, and tht movement lierformed as described in I'urt IV., Hection 10. Movements. S. 2.'J. Two hints chanqiittj Front on the Flank qf the First Liiie.—Vhitc LXII. The first line will chunne its front to the ffivcn direction («, «), as directed in Section 16 of this Part; a point {b) will then he iiUiced by a staff officer at 11k' required distance, in a line perpcn- di(uUir to the flank of the first line. CIIAN(iE FRONT I'l'ON THK lUUIlT I'l.ANK Ol' THE •< I'inST LINE, LEFT Til now N FOnWARU. THE 8UC0ND LINE WILL CHANGE POSITION ON DRTACHKD POftJTS IN HEAR OP THE FIRST LINE. A point (o) of direction may also be given if rc(iiiired on Ihe proloiifjation of the Vne passing through the point (b) purall i tf; the front line, or a distant point may be selected on which to dress the line. ** On the caution from the commander of the second lir.c, the adjutants will move out to mark the alignment for their respective l)attaHons. On the usual signal from the brigadiers, the battalions of the second line will be formed at de- ploying distance, in the new alignment, on the principles already described. -»-^ 498 PART VI. — THE BRIGADE OR LINE. CHANGE FRONT UPON THE CENTRE OF THE FIRST LINE, RIGHT or LEFT THROWN BACK. THE SECOND LINE WILL CHANGE POSITION ON DETACHED POINTS IN REAR OF THE FIRST LINE. S. 24. Ttoo Lines changing Front upon a Central Point o the First Line.— Plate LXIII. The point (a) in the first line on whici the change is to be made having beei determined, another point (b) will b taken at the distance required in rear o the ])oint (a), in a direction perpendicula to the new front ; the distant points (o, o. will also be placed or selected to mark th direction of the second line, care beiii| taken that it is placed parallel to the first and a point of direction may be placed i _ required. The first line wU change its front a directed in Section IG of this Part, am the second line will form in columns al > deploying distances on the central poini of appui (b), on the principles alreadj described, dressing on the outward pointi (o, o). Position of Artillery. S, 26. Position of a Battery of Artillery when moving wit a Brigade. The usual position of a batte-y of artillery, when in line is on the right, with an interval of 22i yards, 28J yards, o 34^ j-urds, according to the number of horses in the guns whether four, six, or eight. When the battalions are in contiguous quarter-distanc columns, the battery will be on a nauk, as ordered, at . — THE BRIGADE OR tINK. •hanging Front upon a Central Point o '^irst Line,— Plate LXIII. The point (a) in the first line on whici he change is to be made having beei letermined, another point (b) will h aken at the distance required in rear o he jjoint (a), in a direction peqjendicula o the new front ; the distant points (o, o. I'ill also be placed or selected to mark th lirection of the second line, care beiii| aken that it is placed parallel to tlie first ind a point of direction may be placed i equired. The first line will change its front ai lirected in Section IG of this Part, am he second line will form in columns al leploying distances on the central poini )f appui (6), on the principles alreadj iescribed, dressing on the outward pointi 0, a). siTioN OP Artillery. a Battery of Artillery when moving kI a Brigade. )n of a batte-y of artillery, when in line h an interval of 22i yards, 28J yards, o ig to the number of horses in the guns )r eight. lions are in contiguous quarter-distano iry ^vi11 be on a flauk, as ordered, at 'T f POSITION OP ARTILLERY. 4!)!» PLATE LXIII. TWO LINES CHASQINO FRONT UPON A C2NTRAL POINT OF TUB FIRST LINE. — THE SECOND LINE IN DOUBLE COLOITN OP SUBDIVISIONS. i #'-\.;^^ •\/7 500 FART VI.'-a'HB BRIGADB OR LINR. (li re ; a, . •• 1)1 li) ■-•-:, . ■ ' ■■-..' .;> w I . 1-' . \f ■'.' h (1 b re '' '"■ /^h- i I if' ■ -V,J ,;:■,; r U—^HZ BRIOADB OR LINB. POfllTION OF ARTILLERY. 601 distance equal to the depth of the strongest column in rear of the alii^nment, unless they are fonned for inspection, or review, in which case thev will be dressed with the leaders lieads on the alignment. ' In echellon the battery will be on a flank. , ^, , .^ When squares are formed m echellon, and the battery is brought into action, the muzzles of the guns should be m line with the rea" base of the rear square. N.B.— A battery on all occasions to keep its full interval when possible. It is the duty of the commander of the artilleiy to keep his battery zo well in hand that he may never interfere with deployments, or other movements of the brigade; and the brigadier should impress upon the officers conimandiiii;? regiments, that they should at all times give way to the guus when the latter have occasion to advance or retire through the line, by smartly wheeling back a section or company. Should skirmishers be in front of the battery and be obliged to retire, they should only retire to the guns, and remain with them as long as they continue hi action, retiring with them. . , „ , , • i ^ Should the battery be detached from the brigade, two companies at least should accompany it as an escort. These remarks ajiply equally to horse artillery when working with cavalry. 502 PAET VII. MISCEI^ ANEOUS SUBJECTS. INSPECTIONS OH REVIEWS. iS. 1. Inspection or Review of a Battalion. Formation. — ^The battalion will be drawn up in line open order as explained in Part IV., Section 4, and a cau!] will be placed -t 80 or 100 paces in front of it illo pas! R! TA colour centre. GENERAL SALUTE. PRESENT — ARMS. ROYAL SALUTE. PRESENT — A"MS. SHOULDER — ARMS. < 1. Receiving the General. — When th reviewinpr ^encal arrives vi front of th centre of the battalion, ai a diistance o about 50 or 60 paces, he nill be ceived with a salute, the men presentiii| arms, the officers saluting, the colour flying, the band playing, and the drum _ beating. }2. To members of the Royal Fnmilr and persons entitled to that honour, tli colours will be dropped. 3. On the word arms, the men will shoulder and the officers .yill bring thei ^j'^ swords to the port. Riding down the Ranks. — The general, accompanied bj the commanding officer of the regiment, will then ride dow the front of the line ; commencing on the right, he will pass round the left flank and return along the rear, the mei standing with shouldered arms. While he is going round th „ battalion, the band will play until he returns to the right o "^ the line, and the divisions of drums will beat the prescribe! compliment as he passes them ; the colours will be hel( '^i steady, gathered in under the right hand, they are not to b °* OPl FR( AB Wli H RLi Pa tai Ihi th( th( me 502 ART YII. \NEOUS SUBJECTS. KCTIONS OK REVIEWS. tion or Review of a Battalion. battalion will be drawn iip in line i led in Part IV., Section 4, and a can; d .t 80 or lOO paces in front of it 1. Receiving the General. — When th riewinpr pene'-al arrives 'n front of th litre of the battalion, ai< a diistance o out 50 or 60 paces, he nill be u ived with a salute, the men prescntiii| ms, the officers saluting, the colour ing, the band playing, and the drum ating. 2. To members of the Royal Family id persons entitled to that honour, tin lours will be dropped. 3, On the word akms, the men wil oulder and the officers '•trill bring thei ■ords to the port. ^anks. — The general, accompanied h] cer of the regiment, will then ride dowi e ; commencing on the right, he will ank and return along the rear, the mei ered arms. While he is going round thi i^ill play until he returns to the right o isions of drums will beat the prescribci lasses them ; the colours wiU be hel( nder the right hand^ they are not to h 1N8PBCTION8 OB REVIEWS. 503 jllowcd to fly, nor will they be dropped when the general passes. BEAR KANK f ToHnff Clost Or«fer.— The battalion TAKE CLOSR J Will take ckie order while the general is proceeding to the camn colour, placed in front of the centre of the Une. Wheelinfi into O^in Column, — The battalion will break into open column of companies right in front, and the jiionecrs, band, an.i diums will move to the head of the column, the pioneers forming in a single rank in front, the band' forming in two ranks next, and the drums in two ranks in rear of them ; this is an exception to thi; general rule laid down in Part IV., Section ) . The men will slope arms. Points for Marching past. — Four points will be jilaccd by the adjutant to mark the ground, as described in Part II., Section l."j, one point at about the wheeling dis- tance of a company in front of the column, one at two or three paces in rear of the column, the two points marking the saluting base will be covered in a line four paces from the camp colour, at which the general will usually place himself to receive the officers' salutes, and see the companies march past. — ORDEU. MARCH. OPEN COLUMN RIGHT IN FRONT, RIGHT ABOUT — FACE, RIfilll — •< WHEEL aUICK — MARCH. Halt — Front, Dress. SLOPE ARMS. Marching })ast in Slow Time. 1. On the word march, the column will step off and march past, each compai'y moving as directed in Part II., Section 13. 2. When marching past the reviewing (general, the colonel will be about eight paces in front of the right centre section of tho leading company, the senior major in front of the left centre section, a little in rear of the colonel ; Uic re- 604 I'AWT VII.— MIHCKLLANROtS SUBJECTS. maining field officers will follow in rear of the column at ft^' ^^^ BIX paces distance, the lieutenant-colonel on the rieht ""^ »f the junior major next, and the adjutant on the left. When "* P''e\ the colonel is absent, the lieutenant-colonel will take liis '"' ™0" place, the other mounted officers remaining in the places «t be ci above-named. All the mounted officers will salute as thev attal: approach the general. The commanding officer, after he "al lias saluted, will move out and place himself near the i-kpt w S'^o*™!; *? remain there till the column has passed. into— i d. ITie band will commence playing as soon as the leadins uick-j conipany has completed its second wheel. "When it arrive* fIalt—1 in front of the general it will turn to the left, wheel to the Eyes—j right, and halt and front ojiposite to him, continuing to A batt play until the rear of the column has passed. n.arch j: 4. The colours, carried by the two senior ensigns, will be narched placed as described in Part IV., Section 1, and will change 'ARCH i flank during the second wheel. When the right centre company takes open order, they wiU dress with the super numerary rank at three paces from the rear rank. The colours will be cast loose when passing the general, and will be lowered to persons entitled to that honour. \l ^1^1 "^'^^l^' excepting the adjutant, do not march past, but the musketry instructor wU march past with the company to which he belongs. The quartermaster-Serjeant, the schoohnaster, the hospital Serjeant, the armourer-serjeant, the orderly-room clerk, and the paymaster's clerk will not be required to inarch past. Marching past in Quick Time.—\ . The commanding officer will order the coluniu to break into quick time, as directed m Fart 11., Section 13. On the word Forward, by .he Right on entering the saluting alignment, the rear and supemu- r^^fr"^V"" .1°°VP/ *^^ f'"™^'" «*^PPinff out three paces, the latter six. Both ranks will regain their usual distances by stepping short on the word Forward, by the L^t DRDEll — DKFH BAYON TAND-AT MANHAL LATOON C18E, TA HE WORl THE 8E1 VAJO ATTEN1 8H0ULE ARM FOR MA EXERC REAR I TAKE O: ORDE MARC )y the two senior ensijrns, will be t IV., Section 1, and will change wheel. When the right centre •, they will dress with the super- aaces from the rear rank. The hen passing the general, and will led to that honour, ting the adjutant, do not march tractor Avill march past with the igs. nt, the schoolmaster, the hospital ant, the orderly-room clerk, and lot be required to march past INSPECTIONS OR HEVIK'.Vh. 506 CKLLANEOLS SUBJECTS follow in rear of the column at ft^' ^^^ ^•»''<1 wheel. When marchinj past in quick time heutenant-colonel on the right, ""^ "^ *l>e officers will salute, unless the battalion has I the adjutant on the left. When "* previously marched past in slow time, in which case, ! lieutenant-colonel \vill take his ^o mounted officers alone will salute. The colours ^vili officers remaining in the places o* ^^ '"'*''* loose, nor will they be lowered onnted officers will salute as thej attahon— "^ he commanding officer, after he halt. out and place himself near the ^^^"^ wheel till the column has passed. "^to — line, nee playing as soon as the leading uick-march s second wheel. When it arrives ''«" — Dress. will turn to the left, wheel to the Eyes— Front. ^ opposite to him, continuing to A battalion halted in open column may be ordered to olumn has passed. |n.arch past in quick time, without having previously 2. When the battalion arrives on its > original ground, it will be halted and wheeled ir.to line. iiarched past m slow time, the command will then hf IARCH past IN QUICK TIME, QUICK — MARCH. 'ime.—l. The commanding officer eak into quick time, as . directed the word Forward, by ..he Right, lignment, the rear and supernu- I, the former stepping out three h ranks will regain their usual m the word Forward, by the loft. DRDER — ARMS. DKFIX — bayonets. tand-at-ea8e. manual AXD latoon exer- cise, takino :nBWORrfrROM THE SENIOR MAJOR. ATTENTION, SHOULDER — ARMS. FOR MANUAL EXERCISE, REAR RANK TAKE OPEN — ORDER, MARCH 1. Manual and Platoon Exercise. — After having directed the men to order arms and unfix bayonets, the command- >ing officer will give the annexed caution, and then proceed to the rear of the line, the senior major moving out to the front to take command. 2. The senior major will order the men to take out their stoppers ; he will then call the battalion to attention, give the words shoulder — arms, and pro- ceed to open the ranks as follows : — On the word order, the captains will face to the right, the subaltern officers remain- ing tjteady in their places ; on the word march, the rear and supernumerary PART VII. — MIBCELLA.NBOU8 SUBJECTS. 5U6 ranks will step back as usual, and tli^i u v captains will moye to six paces in rear JP?!? the centre of their companies. ''J, "* ^ rm , . . ... the rev .5. Tlie coverers and pivot men will move as m takin in tl open order for the general salute. 4. The junior mnjor and adjutant, the colours (which \vi ^ line t he kept at the order and furled), and the pioneers, ban(i office and drums will reniaiu, throughout the manual and platooi colou exercises, posted as in close order. take 5. The major will put the battalion through the maniis in hi exercise, direct the rear rank to take close order (the captain ori remaining in rear), and will then proceed with the platom Office exercise in slow and quick time, ns directed in Part HI Colour Section 8. After which, having directed the men to replac Pi"' their stoppers, unless they are going to load, he will fal Quick- hack to his place in the line, the captains resuming tliei 3. 'i'h posts at the snme time. Tiie commanding officer will the 'he cole take the orders of the reviewing general regarding the n he line mainder of the inspection. Advancing in E.evirw Order.- -At the end of the review '"^ 1"' nandin if required to do so by the general, the battalion will Ii '^^3**^,! fonned in line at open order, on its original position, an , on the command, the line will advanck in review ? ORDER, SLOW-MARCH, it will advance, the band and drum '"P* playing, till within uO or 40 paces of the reviewing genera |^ "y when it will be halted and ordered to salute, in the san ®,"".?, • - . ind will ( manner as when receiving the general, «fter which it wi RliniiM<>r Aimti niiH nrni'f finr nvrlsva " ''' d :. , , •Tt.-it,*. 5. Th anks 01 tith the When two or more battalions arc inspected together, the 7' r™ will either be fonned in line with intervals of six paa J.i- fJ between them and proceed in the same manner as a smgPJJ'*' ! S. 2. Review of 'I\do or more Battalions. ront of ol P-"^ anks ICELLA.NEOUS SUBJECTS. I .„ . , , , J „ I INSPECTIONS OR BBVIKWS. 507 Will step back as usual, and tlA ♦+ v t • i. ns will moye to six paces in rear JP?"*"**"* observing the additional directions that ore given ntre of their companies. "V*'" re?peot to regiments in brigade, or be formed, should • . .„ • . , . '"^ reviewing geiierul think proper, in a line of columna alsatuTe'" '"'"'' "^ '" '" ^" '^'' ^"*'°" '^' commJnds'^L; prinS as in PrVI. ,1 „,,.„x i. i\ 1 / 1 • 1 ■ ^- formation in Columns. — The troops will be fomed in manders, the oificers of each battalion will recover their swords, and on the IN HEviEW word March they wilt move up to the OKDBR. ^ "- — '■ - ' ' ' ■ "^ Officers and Colours to the Front. --J--------, --— •;•- \.....«" ... H line oi conug a Juried), and the pioneers, bam dpficerb and ;hroughout the manual and platoo colouhswill TAKE I'OST oae order, the battalion through the manna ink to take close order (the captain ivill then proceed with the platooi lick time, ns directed in Part HI having directed the men to replac I front, and place themselves two paces in front of the column, the colours being in the centre, and the officers sized from flanks to centre, and at equal distances « .....«v^„ ............ „„ .ci/.oi 7 -"' , \ "»wivo lu ucuue, uiiu ai equal uistances ley are going to load, he will fal mwk— -March. L ^om eaeh other, the adjutant on their left. = line, the captains resuming thei 3. The commanding officer will be three paces in front of Tiie commanding officer will the Hie colours, the i-emaining field officers two paces in front of eviemng general regarding the n lie line of officers, dividing the distances between the com- ™- nandmg officer and the flanks; the paymaster, surgeons, ')rder.— At the end of the review '" . q""tennaster will be in rear of the battalion, the staff the general, the battalion will I '^'jeants m rear of them. Drdcr, on its original position, an . ^•. ^^e general officer commanding will be stationed in LINE WILL ADVANCE IN REViE*"": c'^ Centre of the line, the generals of divisions ii. it will advance, the band and drum t *1 i*l ""*''^ of their divisions, and the brigadiers 40 paces of the reviewing genera 1* v ■I'rf ^^'^^^^ *^^ ^^^^'^ brigade; their distances from nd ordered to salute, in the san "^ line wiU depend on the strength of the body of troops, ng the general, ftfter w^cU it wi '"'* ^^ "^ detemuned by the general commanding, brorders. ^f ,i-' S; The band and drums wiU move up and form in several i • *v . anks on the right of battalions, their front being in line ^'I\co or more Battalions. ^>tli the leading company. :talions arc inspected together, th. y ^' P'^'" ^" be m two ranks m rear of the drums. 1 line with intervals of six naa V ^5f «^e^ns R^eral vviU be saluted without opening Bd in the same manner as a smg ^Vi'^'.fl ."®" presenting arms, the officers saluting, the » olours flying or bemg lowered, according to regulation, and I I 508 PART VII. — MIHCKtLANKOVB RUBJKCT8. the bands playing. After the salute the troops will b«ordcre( akb org to shoulder arms, and the general will go ao>vn the line. '^ tiik ri IN rot'i 8. On the command Officers and Colmn form take Post, the officers of each battalini (.>,urs Ki will face outwards from the centre, tli( j„ip)t j^. OFFICERS AND COLOUR8WILL TAKK POST WITH TIIF.IR BATTALIONR. Officers and Colours take Post. Quick — March, ensigns carrying the colours facing tJ .j p^pj^ the left; and on the words QuicA; — MarcK y^^^ point the whole will move back to their placei , ' „,* „,i„ in column, the bands, drums, and pio • j^fj. j, neers taking post in rear. j^,,,^ ^^^^^ 9. When the bonds of a brigade have been practise! "^se'^ed together, they should form as one band thirty paces in resi '^''^''"■y of the centre of the line, the pioneers of the brigade tei *'" *"'' " paces in their front, and before marching past, they shoultf'*^"*'?^', Doth move to the head of the leading column. J*" ill* Ui 10. When troops are drawn up in line for inspectioi ^r the or review, after the salute has been paid to the reviewinj \y /yje ij^f officer, the generals of divisions, brigadiers, and officers com ^ 'pjjg j manding battalions, will i)ost themselves upon that flan) .^j^j^ j,p \ of their divisions, brigades, or battalions to wnich he repaini ^j commai where they will receive him and will accompany him to thi ^jjj j^g „, extent of their respective commands, after which they wil (jj^^ j^flg resume their original posts. trailed an: When troops are reviewed in line of contiguous columns 5. Whe the generals of divisions and the brigadiers only will accom mounted pany the reviewing general to the extent of their respectir division, ( commands, the commanding officers of battalions renuuninj viewed, w at their posts. near the r 6. Afte 1. MarcUn^ past in Co/unif.*.— Points will be placed b «" *'^^ °" a staff officer in the same manner aa they are placed for ^^°"' ^P°' ' *^ order the with hie ysmr-^ ■ingle battalion. CLLANK0U8 R0BJICT8. e salute the troops will be ordcrtif * eneral will go aovm the line he command Officers and Coloun , the officers of each battalini outwards from the centre, tin :arrying the colours facing U »nd on the words Quick — March ! will move hack to their nlacei n, the bands, drums, and pio ing post in rear. a brigade have been practisei as one band thirty paces in rei the pioneers of the brigade tei fore marching past, they shouli le leading column. rawn up in line for in has been paid to the reviewing ons, brigadiers, and officers com )st themselves upon that fianl sr battalions to which he 1 and will accompany him to th :ommands, after which they '' ispeotioi Iter ■wil d in line of contiguouB columna 1 the brigadiers only will accom mounted to the extent of their respectir d; g officers of battalions remaininfviewed; umtit.— Points will be placed oanner u they ue placed for 531'ffiH-j^"ijSBi^.--/ -^S' INBI'KCTIONH OR RBVtEWB. 509 KB ORGUND f 2. On the caution from the general, O THK RIGHT TAKK GHGUNU TO TUB RIGHT IN IN rouRB. J FOLKS, the commanders will order their Form 1 battalions to form fours to the right, and yours — Right. on his signal they will give the words itick — March. |_ Quirk — March. 3. Each battalion in succession, when it has cleared the ret point, will receive the words Fromt — Turn, from its ommander, and at every succeeding angle will wheel to he left in double time, receiving the words Fonvard — iuick when square, an interval of twenty-five paces being ireserved between tlie columns. It may sometimes be ecessary to continue at the double for a short distance fter the word Forward, to prevent crowding or to correct istances. The officers should be ordered to change their ianks before commencing the wheel which brings them into he saluting bu.sp, and will return to their former places fter the following wheel, on the words Forward — Quick >y the Left. 4. The battalion having wheeled into the sahiting base, and ;aken up the quick time, will come to the shoulder by word " command. Each column, when it has passed the general, vill be ordered to slope arms. Troops armed with the ihort rifle will march past in quarter-distance column, with trailed arms. 5. When marching past in quarter-distance column, the ited officers only will salute; and each general of a ivision, or the brigadier, if a single brigade is being re- iewed, will move out after he has saluted and place himself near the reviewing general whilst his columu is passing. 6. After marching past, the leading col imn will be halted ^.i the original alignment, and the remaining columns will close upon it to six paces' interval j the general will then order the mass to wheel into line of columns, and proceed with his intended movements; or the columns may be I I 2 b on h AO I'AHT VII. — MIHCKLLANKOUH SUBJECTS. al rei I w)ie«-lcd into line in succession as they nrrivu at their iilocc in the aliffninent. Marching past in Open Column. — After e»ch uulutnti lit, wheeled into the sahiting base, in (|uarter distance, it m» be halted and ordered to open from the front and mure pasi; in onen column. Marching Pant in " Grand Divinons," — Battaliona im^ march past in columns of double companies, which will b called " Grand Divisions ;" they will bo fonned as follows the left comimnies will move up on the left of the righ companies, that is, No. L' on the left of No. 1, No. 4 on th left of No. 3, and so on, the captains will be posted on thi outward ilanks of their companies ; the grand divisions wi' march past b^ the right at company distance from e other. This is an exce])tional formation, only to be useil in marching past ; the ordinary column will be re-forme( l before the manoeuvres commence. ^ Advancing in Review Order,— At the end of the review, •■ required to do so by the reviewing general, the cohmiD will be formed on theur original ground in review order, tlir officers and colours in front, as described in the first part o this section ; they will then advance in slow time, the band and diiims playing, and when at a convenient distance froii the reviewing general, which must vary according to thi extent of the line, they will be lialtcd and ordered to salute as described in paragraph 7 of the first part of this section after which they will be ordered to shoulder arms and wil proceed as directed by the general. Thr POLLOWINO IS THE OrOER OP MaRCU TO BB OB' BERVKD AT RbVIEWS PERFORMED BEFORE THE SoVK reign; and 18 also to be observed, in as far as it is applicable, at all reviews before general OfpioeKs. T I. DetochAient of life guards, or other cavalry, precede by an officer of the quftrtermaster-geneJmPs departmeiit. 2. The 3. Aide 4. Aidf 6. Dep ', and ci 6. A(^i •chief, q 7. Com 8. Prin 9. The 10. Gol sent. 11. Foi n the St miority, e staff, on the 12. As eneral, n 13. Ai ifflctTS Ol 14. Ro 15. De 1. The neasure narch ob 2. Tro lanies, si ormed i itances a P' IKLLANBOUH 8UBJKCT8. ision aa they arrive at their iilact lia Column. — After e^ch uulumn base, in ({uarter distance, it ma i)])en from the front and marc and Divinona," — Battalions mi dmible companies, which will 1) ' they will bo fonned as followi lOve uj) on the left of the righ an the left of No. 1, No. 4 on th lie captains will be posted on thi mpanies ; the grand divisions wil at company distance from ead ional formation, only to be U8e( •dinary column will be re-formei l imeuce. der. — At the end of the review, reviewing general, the coluniD ginal ground in review order, it, as described in the flrst part o i advance in slow time, the band len at a convenient distance from ich must vary according to 1 be halted and ordered to salute ' of the first part of this section lered to shoulder arms and wil general. Order op March to be oB' erformbd before the sove' o be observed, in as far as LL Reviews before General lards, or other cavalry, precede naster^genel^rs department. ROUTR MARCHING. 511 2. The Sovereign's led horses. 3. Aides-de>camp to the commander-in-chief. 4. Aides-de-camp to the Sovereign. 6. Deputy adjutant-general, deputy quartermaster-gcne- al, and equerries in waiting? to the Sovereign. 6. Ac^utant-general, military sccretaiy to the coinmander- i-chief, quartermaster-general. 7. Commander-in-chief. 8. Princes of the blood, 9. The Sovereign. 10. Gold stick in waiting, and master of the hors , if resent. 11. Foreign general officers, general officers and colonels n the staff in successive order, according to rank and miority, followed by such other general officers, not upon e staff, OS may be present, and equerries and attendants on the foreign jirinces. 12. Assistant a(ljutant-general, assistant quartermaster- eneral, and deputy assistants. 13. Aides-de-camp and majors of brigade to general ffictTS on the staff. 14. Royal carriages. 15. Detachments of cavaliy. ip. route marching. S. 3. The Order of March. 1. The success of military operations depends in a grejit neasure upon the compact and well-regulated order of narch observed by an army in its several parts or columns, 2. Troops may march, either in open columns of com- lanies, subdivisions, or sections, in quarter-distance columns ''urmed in mass or line, or in fours, according to eiicum- *'%tance9 and the iiat\ire of the country. 512 PART VII. — MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS. 3. The rear companies, subdivisions, or sections of a ba talion or more considerable column, will follow every tui which the head may make, each successively changing direction at the same point as the leading company, or pa of a company, without word of command. 4. Troops marching on a road will keep to the side ne to the reverse flank, in order that the pivots may be ke clear, and that staff oflBcers may be able to pass backwari and forwards to circulate orders. 6. In route marching, the baggage should be in the rea No impediments whatever should be permitted in the lii of march, except the artillery, which will generally be fomif between the divisions, or brigades of an army. When tl admission of a portion of the baggage of an army in the line of march becomes unavoidable, it should be plao between the brigades, but never between the battalions of brigade. S. 4. Places of Officers. 1. All officers are to remain constantly in their plac during the march, unless required to move as stated paragraph 5. 2. The majors, when marching at ease, are to march rear of their respective wings ; namely, the first major rear of the right, and the second m^or in rear cf the 1( wing ; if there is only one major, his post is in the rear the battalion. 3. The captains, or officers commanding companies, whi marching at ease, are to march in rear of their companif a subaltern officer or serjtant moving up to lead. 4. Commanding officers of corps, assisted by their a4j tants, will move from one part to another as occasi( requires particul 6. In of com] presena panics, which tl S. 5. A 1. C quarter march, with m 2. T step, ai EASE, and re] 3. A ease tc the me or trai perfect again J 4. 1 fromt are giA berept to be in col each 5. ^ the fill ■twsw BCBLLANEOUS SUBJECTS. , subdivisions, or sections of a b« ible column, will follow every tui tke, each successively changing Jit as the leading company, or pa 'ord of command. II a road will keep to the side ne order that the pivots may be ke cers may be able to pass backwari J orders. the baggage should be in the rea er should be permitted in the lii illerjr, which will generally be fonnf r brigades of an army. When tl of the baggage of an army in es unavoidable, it should be placi it never between the battalions o{ Places of Officers. remain constantly in their plac ;s8 required to move as stated marching at ease, are to march wings; namely, the first major le second m^or in rear of the 1 ae major, his post is in the rear Rcers commanding companies, whi I march in rear of their companif jtant moving up to lead. ers of corps, assisted by their adj one part to another as occa«i( ROUTE MARCHING. 513 requires their presence, for the preservation of order, and pMticularly for the prevention of unnecessary defihng. 6. In like manner, the majors and commanding olfacers of companies will quit their habitual stations when their presence is required in any other part of their wngs or com- panies, but wm return to them as soon as the purpose for which they quitted them shaU be effected. S. 5. Marching off, MarcMng at Ease, and passing Words of Command. 1 On all occasions, when marching out of camp or quarters, or when moving after a regular halt upon the march, each corps wiU march off by word of command, and with music, unless particularly ordered to the contrary. 2 The men must be perfectly silent, dress, and keep the step* as if moving on parade, until the word march at BASE, is given by the commanding officer of the regiment, and repeated by the captains. ,. i. 3 All words of command addressed to men marching at ease must be preceded by the word ^«en<«o», upon which, the men wiU slope their arms, if armed with the long ntie, or trail if armed with the short rifle, and take up the steii; perfect order and silence being resumed, until the word is airain given to march at ease. 4 "file words attention and march at ease, coming from the commanding officer of the battalion, unless they are iriven as a command to the whole of the battalion, will be repeated by all the captains, who must speak loud enough to be heard distinctly, at least by the captains next to them in column, as they will have to take the command trom each other in succession. , , . .j .„j 5 When marching at ease, the ranks may be opened ana the ffles loosened j but each rank, section, or company must 614 PART VII,— MISCBLLANBOUS SUBJECTS. be kept perfectly distinct, and every man miist remaiJany baA in his place. ' 6. When either of the majors or officers commanding companies want to pass any notice to the commandinK otfacer of the battalion or to any other company or section the word must be passed by the officers, or officers Serjeants only. S. 6. Halting when on the March. 1. Whenever the bugles sound the halt, the head of each battalion will halt and stand fast, although it may not be closed up to the preceding one, but the foUowing compaaies of each battalion must close up to half or quarter distance, unless the column is entering an alignment, or making any other movement preparatory to a formation to a flank. •2. When it is intended that the whole column should close up, the head will be halted without sound of bugle and the word of command, quahteh, half, or wheeling DISTANCE, will be passed from front to rear; and when the rear IS closed up, the bugle of the rear battalion wiU sound the halt as a notice. 3. When at the end of a maroh it happens that a line is to be taken up by a successive formation, each company may slope arms as soon as it is halted, byword of command from its own officer; but the companies should not order arms, or stand at ease, until they are directed to do so by the commanding officer of the battalion, which wiU not be done until the whole is formed. S. 7. Defiling, and increasing and diminishing Front. 1. No battalion, company, or section is> at any time, to defile er diminish its front, or attempt in any way to avoid g f«j^aif:ag^^;w.j~!s^).»^ ■' .^- -- P iK I company 2. Wl with ord by the ] an^Attentioti 3. Wl or bad p' for the ; the alert 4. Wl to be crc defiUng I be doiiC; open out but eve panics. 6. Wl captains compani given ar remain i panics h their rea 6. It: on the n practical the defi would tl the wint Suent, 1 efiling whereas, have go 7. Th -'*—t«3&« BLLANEOV8 SUBJECTS. and every man miist remain any bad spot in the road, linlesa the preceding battalion or company has done so. 2. Whenever defiling is necessary, it must bo executed with order and precision, as in manoemTing at a field day, by the proper word of command, preceded by the word majors or officers commanding my notice to the commanding o any other company or section, by the officers, or officers and Attention when on the March, sound the halt, the head of each nd fast, although it may not be me, but the following companies ie up to half or quarter distance, ng an alignment, or making anj y to a formation to a flank, that the whole column should halted without sound of bugle, aUARTEH, HALF, or WHEELING •om front to rear ; and when the of the rear battalion will sound . march it happens that a line is ssive formation, each company t is halteia, byword of command le companies should not order they are directed to do so by the battalion, which will not be mng and diminishing Front. r, or section is> at any time, to )r attempt in any way to avoid ROUTE MARCHING. 515 3. When a battalion or company comes to a defile, stream, or bad place in the road, where it might be more convenient for the men to defile individually, the officers must be on the alert, to keep their men from so doing. 4. Whenever a stream, ditch, bank, or other obstacle is to be crossed, it will be generally found that, instead of defiling or diminishing the front, the very contrary should be done, not only by causing the files of each section to open out gradually before they arrive at the ditch or obstacle, but even by increasing front to subdivisions or com- panies. 5. When a bad place is to be passed the majors and captains will go to the head of their respective wings and companies, to see that any orders which may have been given are obeyed with regularity and steadiness. They will remain at the spot till the whole of their wings or com- panies have passed, and will then resume their stations in their rear, and give the words March at Ease. 6. It has been proved that the defiling of one battalion on the march, even if done with as much promptitude as is practicable on such occasions, causes a delay of ten minutes ; the defiling of a brigade, consisting of three battalions, would therefore cause a delay of at least half an hour. In the winter, when obstacles such as pools of water are fre- Suent, and the days short, a column which is constantly efiling wi^out cause will arrive at its quarters after dark ; whereas, if it had performed the march regularly, it would have got in, in good time. 7. This order respecting defiling is, therefore, m much t ^^"* ^ '^ ' S ! ^ ' g'fyj ' ,g' ' ; ' Sv;; 616 PART VII. — MISCBLLANBOU8 RUBJKCT8. calculated to provide for the personal ease and comfort of the men, as it is essential for the due performance of the movements of an army. S. 8. Regulations concerning Stragglers. \. No man is to remain behind or quit the ranks for any purpose, or on any account whatever, without permission from the captain or offi . commanding; the company. 2. Officers are never to give permission to any man to quit the ranks excepting on account of illness, or for the purpose of easing themselves, or for some other absolutely necessary purpose. 3. The oflScers must be particularly attentive to prevent the men from going out of the ranks for water. When this is required the regiment or column will be halted. 4. Men who obtain permission to fall out for a tem- poral^ purpose, or for any other cause than illness, must invariably leave their packs and arms, to be carried by the section they belong to, until they return. I?. 9. Hurry and Stepping out to be prevented, 1. It is of the greatest importance that the men should not on any account be hurried on the march ; they are to be iiistructv'd that they are never to step out beyond the regular step, still less to double, unless by word of command. 2. When the proper distances of companies, or sections, cannot be preserved without an alteration in the step, it must always be effected by making the head of each battalion or company step snort, instead of allowuig the others to step out. Companies must invariably be kept in- tact, and the leading company o'' each battalion will, when necessary, step short until the laat company of the battalioi. has clo occasin 3. V keep u at too { out " the off of the to the the he obstac to No. is reti contin 4. I up wi< willfo files a 5. it ma each the U! com pi but allow* passe( may 1 comp I Wl a coi ;BLLANB0U8 RUDJECT8. ;he personal ease and comfort o( for the due performance of the 5 concerning Stragalers. behind or quit the ranks for any nt whatever, without permission commanding; the company, give permission to any man to on account of illness, or for the ves, or for some other absolutely particularly attentive to prevent f the ranks for water. When this column will be halted, rmission to fall out for a tern- y other cause than illness, must :s and arms, to be carried by the til they return. epping out to be prevented, importance that the men should irried on the march; they are to e never to step out beyond the uble, unless by word of command, itances of companies, or sections, out an alteration in the step, it by making the head of each p snort, instead of allowing the lanies must invariably be kept in- )any o^ each battalion will, when the last company of the battalior. RINQLE HANK AND SKELETON DRILL. 617 has closed up, even though a large interval should be thereby occasioned between it and the preceding battalion. 3. When the head of a company, ouppose No. 4, cannot keep up wthout overstepping, or leaving its own sections at too great a distance, the officer commanding it must call out " No. 4 cannot keep up," which must be repeated by the officers or Serjeants on the flanks of the leading sections of the companies in front of No. 4 until it comes up to the commanding officer, who will shorten the step at the head of the column, unless he perceives that some obstacle, ascent, or difficult ground in front will give time to No. 4 to close up ; in the meantime No. 4, if no answer is returned to the notice of its having lost distance, will continue at the regular step. 4. In like manner, if the head of a battalion cannot keep up with the preceding battalion, the commanding officer will forward a notice to the head of the column, detaching flies at the same time, to preserve the communication. 6. When obstacles which delay the march are frequent, it may be desirable, in order tu avoid loss of time, that each company, after passing an obstacle, should march on at the usual rate, without shortening its step, as the following company may overtake it at the next .bp^cleor ascent; but the leading section of a company sho id never be allowed to march on until the rear section has completely passed and closed up. The intervals between companies may be occasionally increased with advantage, but each company in itself must be kept intact. ^S? I SINGLE BANK AND SKELETON DRILL. S. 10. Battalion Drill in Single Rank. When there is not a sufficient number of men to form a complete battalion, the companies may be fonned, for 618 PART VII. — HISCELLANK0U8 SUBJECTS. retice, in single rank; in like manner a battalion may divided into two, each formed in single rank, for the purpose of practising brigade movements. S. 11. Skeleton Drill. 1. The following method of forming a skeleton battalion, for the instruction of officers and non-commissioned ofiBcers, will be adopted when a sufficient number of men cannot be collected to form a battalion iii single rank. 2. A skeleton battalion wiii be formed of companies com- posed of two, four, or eigiio men each j representing, if there are two, the flanks of the company ; if there are four, the flanks of subdivisions ; if there are eight, the flanks of sec- tions ; the inter\'al between the flanks wUl be preserved by means of a piece of rope held at the ends, which musi at all times be kept at its full extent. 3. The ropes may be made to represent any number of Mez; the space for each (namely, 21 inches) being marked by a siiiUll piece of red cloth. Short pieces of wood should be fastened across the ends of the ropes, to enable the men to hold them. 4. When there are a sufficient number of men, sevieral skeleton battalions may be formed, with which all the manoeuvres of a brigade may be practised. GUARDS. 5. 12. Chtard mounting md trooj^ng the Colour. For guard mounting, the guards will be told oflf in equal drrisions by the adjutant of the day, and fo^nedin itANCOUS SUBJECTS. I like manner a battalion may formed in single rank, for the e movements. keleton Drill. of forming a skeleton battalion, and non-commissioned officers, 3ient number of men cannot be ill single rank. ii be formed of companies com- nen each j representing, if there company ; if there are four, the lere are eight, the flanks of see- the flanks will be preserved by 1 at the enc]^, which musir at aU le to represent any number of tmely, 21 inches) being marked Short pieces of wood should )f the ropes, to enable the men Scient number of men, several 5 formed, with which all the r be practised. ARDS. ' md trQopmg the Colour. e guards will be told o£F in Mnt of the day, and fo^ed in QUAROS. 519 open column vith unfixed bayonets ; the senior serjeant of each division taking command of it. The cavalry (if any are present) will be m front. Tne guards will be wheeled into line by the adjutant of the day, a seneant being on the left of the line. The colour will be placed at a distance of about two divisions in front of the left of the line, in charge of a seneant with double sentries. The walk of these sentries will be at right angles to the line, and their front inwards ; all their movements must correspond, the man nearest the line, who will be the front rank man of the file, giving the time ; they must turn outwards together when at three paces from the colour, and inwards when at ten paces from it, always turning towards the front, right, or left about, as the case may De ; these seutries wiil order arms, stand at ease, come to attention, and shoulder with the men in the line. The men of the right file of the first division will always be mounted as sentries on the colour, and they will resume their places while that division is wheeling to th- left after receivirg the colour, as will hereafter be desi n . " } the Serjeant will also join that division. The band will be formed in front of the right of the line, at right angles with it, facing inwards opposite the colour; the drums will be in front of the left of the line, a short distance in front of the colour, facing the baud. Thj guards will take open order by command of ihe adjutant, and will be handed over by mm with shouldered arms to the town, or brigade, major. The adjutant will then take post on the right of the line. The tov/n, or brigade, m^jor will inspect the guards and take command. NON-COM- r All the seijeants commanding guards MISSIONED will recover arms and move Out two 0FPI0BS8 paces in imai of the line^ the right-hand Mi 520 PART VII. — MIHCRLLANR0U8 SUnJKCTfl. OOMMANDINQ-^ men of the rear ranks of divisions fiU- ouARDS — TO ing up the intervals left by their com- THK FRONT. [_nianiler8. The seijeants will step oflf in quick time, and when near the salutine ba.sc on which the giiards are to march past, they will receive the words inwards- turn, on which the seijeant W tho centre will halt, and face to ■ r«ht about, brinp^ing his rifle ' .LANROUS SUDJECTfl. e rear ranks of divisions fiU- le intervals left by their coni- jeants will step ofiF in quick when near the salutina base the guards are to march past, receive the words inwards — which the serjeant W the II halt, and face to ■ rJ«ht )rinp;ing his rifle outwards, the former recovering swords, the latter their rifles. FACE. TAKE POST IN FRONT OF YOUR RESPEC- TIVE GUARDS. QUICK — MARCH. TO YOUR GUARDS. BLOW — MARCH. 1 The officers and Serjeants will step off and will halt and face towards the line, the officers opposite their proper posts in line, the Serjeants opposite the right of their guards or divisions ; the former will po-^ their swords, and the latter shoulder their rifles, as they halt. On the word march, the officers and seijeants will step off in slow time, re- covering their swords and rifles, as they take the first pace. 'ITie band will play a slow march as the officers and Serjeants march to the lin^, and cease playing as the latter arrive at their places. When the officers arrive at three paces firom the line they will mark time; the tenior ■.jT»a"?s!i'W(Jva3r5 ■ '' 622 PART VII. — MIHCKLLANSOUS SUBJECTS. seijeants of divisions will mark time when on the right of their divisions,' the remainder will move through the line to the supernumerary rank. r The officers and Serjeants will halt and < front, the former portin^^ their swords, L the latter shouldering their rifles. HALT — FRONT. ORDER — AnM8. FIX- BAYONETS. HIIOULDKR — ARMS. 1 According to regulation. OFFICERS AND NON-COM- MIHHIONED OPFICERH, INSPECT YOUR GUARDS. COLLECT THE REPORTS. The officers and non-commissioned officers commanding divisions will pnss down the front rank, and back between the ranks, inspecting the men, and will then resume their positions in front of the line, the remaining nou-comniissioned _ officers standing fast. The adjutant of the day will ride down the front of the line of officers, and, having received the reports of the officers and non-commissioned officers commanding divisions, will make his report to the field officer of the day, and then place himself oit the left of the front ^ rank, six paces from it. The field officer will take his post nine paces in front of the centre of the line, with hi« back to it. " The band and drums will play a slow TROOP - ™*'''''* ^°™ *^^ n^fit to the left of the line, and on arriving near the colour, they .'vill change firont, halt, aind cease playing. MLOPB The b left to ri front of The" call the recover front of during 1 and plac division, front of will be 1 major, v file. Thef — ARMS MAINUl the colo USCOR THE C( REAR TAKE C ORDER, auii MA] Fon Halt Rank ti Order- ■KLLANBOUS SUBJECTS. I of divisions will mark time n the right of their divisions,' ainder will move through tlie lie supernumerary rank. fticera and Serjeants will halt and le former portin^f their swords, r shouldering their rifles. ding to regulation. ifilcers and non-commissioned commanding divisions will pnss le front rank, and back between iS, inspecting the men, and will lime their positions in front of the 3 remaining noii-commiasioned itanding fast. idjutant of the day will ride le frcnt of the line of officers, ving received the reports of the and non-commissioned officers ding divisions, will make his ) the field officer of the day, and ce himself on the left of the &ont : paces from it. e his post nine paces in firont of hu back to it. )and and drums will play a slow om tU0 rigli^ to the left of the [ on arriving near the colour, they ige ftont, halt, aind cease playing. { (iUAUua. 62>i The guards will slope arms by com- MLOi'E ARMH. \ mand of the field officer, the sentries on the colour supporting at the sam'.- time. The band and drums will then play a (piick march from left to right, change front, halt, and ccaso playing when in front of the right of the infantry. The " Drummers call " will beat. On the first tap of the call the captain and lieutenant of the right division will recover swords and face inwards, the ensign who will be in front of the centre of the company will step back one pace ; during the call, the captain will move across in quick time and place himself in front of the right ffie of the second division, and the lieutenant will place himself two paces in front of the ensign, both carryin':? their swords. The bond, will be placed in l.cnt of the first division, and the scrjt ,nt major, with his sword drawn, four paces in nv of the cciure file. The field officer will then give the commands riiouldbr — ARMS, ESCORT FOB THE COLOUR, STAND FAST; RE- MAINDER, ORDER-ARMS, STAND AT BASK — the sentries on the colour remaining with shouldered arms. U8C0RT FOR "1 nciAiiiiAiuir' L The escort vnW take close order, the KBAK HAI>ia. C res • ' • o i TAKE CLOSE- ( officers remaining m front. ORDER,MARCH. aUICK — MARCH. Left— Wheel. Forward. Halt, Rear Rank take Open Order — March. The escort, preceded by the band play- ing the " British Grenadiers," will move out the distance of a division and a half from the line, then wheel to the left, and march straight to the colour ; the officer commanding the escort will halt his divi- sion at rather more than wheeling distance from the colour and will open the ranks. K K I 5'2'i PART VII. — MI8C«LLAN«OU8 SUBJKCTB. OUARDH ATTENTION BHOULDBR— ARMS. The band when near the coloxir will wheel to the left, cease playing, halt, and face to the right about. }The field oflRcer of the day will call the guards to attention, and shoulder armg. The serjeant-major will move in quick time, by the left flank, to the front, receive the colour, and return towards the escort ; the ensign will move out four paces in front of the lieutenant, passing by his ri(?ht, and having saluted and returned his sword, will receive the colour from the seijeant-m^or, place it in his belt, and face about; the escort will then be ordered to present arms, the seijeant- major saluting, the remaining seijeants porting arms and facing outwards; the band will play " God save the Queen ;" the sentries will also present arms. " The escort will shoulder arms, the en- sign will resume his post in rear of the Shoulder — J lieutenant, passing by his left; the ser- Arms, ^ jeant-major will move to the rear of the division, still keeping his sword drawn, and the band will front. The escort will step off in slow time and wheel to the left preceded bv the band, playing the "Grenadier's March;" the Heutenant keeping his sword at the port ; the sentries and Serjeant who had charge of the colour joining the escort. When the band approaches the left of the line it wiL cease playing, turn to the right, and countermarch to the left, passing between the officers and front rank and the front and rear ranks. On the Move, Left Wheel, Slow March. The The b reaches To the Left- Left- OUi PRE AV The will m( second the col The of the of the I Wh( remain port, > with t his ori by th( remair halt-fi give t before The iKLLANIOUB SUBJKCTR. \\e colour will wheel to the left, ;e to the right about. ield officer of the day will call the ;o attention, and shoulder armg. move in quick time, by the left the colour, and return towards move out four paces in front of y his right, ana having saluted will receive the colour from the I his belt, and face about; the d to present arms, the seijeant- ling seijeants porting arms and wiU play " God save the Queen ;" nt arms. iscort will shoulder arms, the en- 1 resume his post in rear of the nt, passing by his left; the ser- yor will move to the rear of the , still keeping his sword drawn, band will front. loort will step off in slow time and ) the left preceded bv the band, the "Grenadier's March;" the nt keeping his sword at the le sentries and Serjeant who had )f the colour joining the escort, iches the left of the line it wiL right, and countermarch to the officers and front rank and the Ol'ARUH. 536 The drummers will move in rear of the rear rank. The band and drums will mark time until the cBcort reaches them. To the Right — C The lieutenant whou at four paces from Turn the line of ollicers will give the words To Left— Wheel J the Right Turn, Left Wheel, and on the ] leading file of the escort arriving at the left file of the front rank of the line. Left — Wheel. l_will again give the words Left — Wheel. As soon as the lieutenant has given OUARD8 the second word Wheel, the field ofiicer PRESENT < of the day will order the guards to ARMS. present arms, and the band will recom- _mence playing. The lieutenant of the escort, with his sword at the port, will move along the front of the line of officers, abreast of the second file from the right of the escort ; the ensign carrj'ing the colour following him, abreast of the centre of the escort. The front rank of the escort will file between the ranks of the guards, the rear rank, one pace behind the rear ranks of the guards. When the head of the escort arrives at the right of the remainder of the line, the captain with his sword at the port, will take the place of the lieutenant, and move on with the division, the lieutenant will mark time when at his original post, and the ensign will move on, passing him by the proper front; when the escort has cleared the remainder of the hne, the lieutenant will give the words halt-front, dress, eyes-front, after which the captain will give the words present-arms i the band ceasing to play before the escort is halted. The band will form up on the right of the line of infantry. K k2 5 526 PART VXI. — MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS. SHOULDER- ARMS. The field officer will then order the guards to shoulder arms. If a general officer is present, the field officer wiU order a general salute. After this, the guards will take close order, the colour taking post in rear of the fourth file from the left of the right company, the seijeant-major placing himself in rear of it, and one serjeant on each side. The guards will then break into open column, and march jiast in slow and quick time, as described in Section 1 of thia part, the colour changing flank during tha second wheel. Having arrived on the original aUgnment, the guards wU be halted and wheeled mto line, and will then be directed to order arms and stand at ease. The coverers of guarJa will be called to the front, and when they arc properly covered in open column, the line will be called to attention by the town, or brigade, major, and will be ordered to face to the left and form guards. " On these commands, the guards will form fours to the right and march off to their posts ; except those of less than four files, which will move to the front in line, or face to the right and move in file according to the order of the garrison. When the guard mounting parade is dispensed with, the guards may be ordered to mount from their regimental private parades, or may be assembled in open column on the usual garrison parade, and then be wheeled into line and inspected by the town, or brigade, major, who will also march them off to their posts. FORM FOURS — RIGHT, TO YOUR RESPECTIVE GUARDS. QUICK MARCH. Whe or thir advanci New Halt- Bear J Open- Mc Oldi Preaern New Preseni Old Shoidde New Shouldi Old Order Stand New Order Stand The out; \ take 0' the lis Old Att Shouk New Att Shouli LLANB0U8 SUBJECTS. ;ld officer will then order the I shoulder arms. jent, the field officer wiU order a 'ill take close order, the colour 'ourth file from the left of the -major placing himself in rear of side. ak into open column, and march I, as described in Section 1 of this ank during tha second wheel. original aUgnment, the guards jd into line, and will then be stand at ease. will he called to the front, and Bred in open column, the line will he town, or brigade, major, and le left and form guards. lese commands, the guards will rs to the right and march off to ts ; except those of less than four ch will move to the front in hnc, to the right and move in file I to the order of the garrison. ng parade is dispensed with, the ) mount from their regimental i assembled in open column on and then be wheeled into line , or brigade, major, who will also its. wiMfiMtfMMlAMMM GUARDS. 627 S. 13. Relieving Guard. When practicable, the new guard will form line at twenty or thirtjr paces in front of the old guard, and will then advance in slow time. New Guard | , „„ n xi Hdtr-Dress. When at ten or fifteen paces from the Bear Rank take >>old guard, the new guard wiU be halted. dressed, and directed to take open order. The old guard, drawn up at open order on its parade, will receive the new guard . with the prescribed salute. The new guard will return the salute. Open — Order, March, Old Guard Present— Arms, New Guard Present— Arms. Shoulder-Arms. J to shoulder, and the commander of the old New Guard ) guard will hand the duplicate of his guard Shoulder— Arms. [ report to the commander of the new guard. Old Guard Order — Arms. Stand at-Ease. New Guard Order — Arms. TTbe guard will then be told ofP and the first relief sent out; while the reUef is going round, the commander will take over the property in charge of the guard, according to the hst in the old guard report. Old Guard 1 ^ i j n Atfetition When the rehefs have returned, and all Shoulder-Arms. I the men of the old guard have fallen m, New Guard { both guards will be called to attention. Attention. and ordered to shoulder arms. Shoulder-Ami^. _ After which, both guards will be ordered The guards will order arms and stand j at ease. f 528 PART Vtl. — MI8CELLANBOU8 SUBJECTS. The " order. old guard will then take close The old guard will form fours (or face) > to its right and march off in slow time, the new guard presenting arms. Old Guard Rear Rank take Close Order — March. Old Guard Form Fours — Right (or To the Right — Face.) Slow — March. New Guard Present — Arms. _ Old Guard ^ When the left of the old guard is clear Quick. _ of the ground on which it stood, the New Guard j guard will break into quick time, and the Shoulder-Arms. J new guard will shoulder arms. Guard, Form 1 The new guard will form fours to the Fours — Right. I right and wheel to the left in quick time ; Left Wheel, >■ when its leading files arrive at the left of Quick — March, the ground on which the old guard was Left — Wheel. J formed, it will again wheel to the left. When the new guard is on the ground which was occupied by the old guard, the commander \vill order it to halt, front, order arms, and stand at ease. He mil then read the orders of the guard to his men, after which he will dismiss them in the usual manner; when the first relief comes in, the ordsrs must be _read to the men who have been on sentry, where the new guard cannot advance in line towards the front of the old guard, it will move up in fours or files in slow time and will be halted and fronted opposite to the latter, or if necessary on its left, in the same line, leaving an interval between them of fou> or six paces. Halt — Front, Dress, Order — Arms, Stand at Ease, Attention. Shoulder Arms, To the Right- Face. Lodge — Arms. In situations Relief! when of ranks, a: streets, ( in singh poral wi] or files, will carr When poral b« bring in he will 1 will be : files. A ivill cha take con Onth with sh "orporal Shouldei Relief— Senti Port— i> iiiwiTr) i r ' M *.. n - SLLANBOU8 SUBJECTS. d guard will then take c1o3p (1 guard will form fours (or face) ht and march off in slow time, j[uard presenting arms. the left of the old guard is clear round on which it stood, the U break into quick time, and the d will shoulder arms, sw guard will form fours to the 1 wheel to the left in quick time ; leading files arrive at the left of od on which the old guard was it will again wheel to the left, the new guard is on the ground as occupied by the old guard, lander \vill order it to halt, front, ns, and stand at ease. He will d the orders of the guard to , after which he will dismiss the usual manner; when the f comes in, the orders must be le men who have beeii on sentry. new guard cannot advance m le old guard, it will move up in and will be halted and fronted necessary on its left, in the same tween them of fou> or six paces. OUARDR. 529 S. 14. Marching Reliefs. Reliefs of lesc than four men will be formed in single rank, when of four men, or upwards, they will be formed in two ranks, and may be marched in line, in open ground ; but in streets, or in narrow places, reliefs should always be marched in single rank, or files. When marching in line, the cor- poral will be on the right of his reUef ; when in single rank or files, he will be on the proper front of the rear file ; he will carry his arms advanced, with his bayonet fixed. When the first reUef of a new guard is sent out, a cor- Soral belonging to the old guard will accompany it, to ring in the reheved sentries. If the relief moves in line, he will be on the left flank ; if in single rank or files, he will be in front, leading the single rank, or front rank of files. As soon as all the sentries are relieved, the corporals (vill change places, and the corporal of the old guard will take command. S. 15. Relieving or posting Sentries. On the approach of the relief, a sentry will place himself with shouldered aims in front of his sentry , box. The "orporal of the relief will proceed as follows : — „j , , . r At about ten paces before the reUef Shoulder Arms. ^ ^^^^ opposite the sentry. Relief— Halt. At about six paces from the sentry. The old sentry and the man who is to reheve him will port arms, the latter moving out from the relief and placing Sentries J himself at one pace from the former, Port— Arms. "^ facing him; the old sentry will then give over his orders, the corporal referring to the board of orders to see if they are ^correctly given. mmtmgsmm^ } m 530 PART Vn.— MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS, Pass. Front. Shoulder — Arms. Relief Quick — March. Support — Arms. On tliis word, tlie old sentry will take trail hM ne Dace to h\n Ipft ..,.1 +l.«„ *„ ' . "'. , ^ one pace to his left and then move to his place in the relief, facing to the rear, and the new sentry will take one pace to his front. The sentries will then front and shoulder arms. be ordered to The relief will be marched on, and "When it has proceeded about, ten paces J will be ordered to support arms. The proper front of a sentry's post should be pointed out to hmi when he is posted, as well as the extent of hia walk. Sentries walking backwards and forwards on their posts must do so in a brisk and soldier-like manner; they must on no account quit their arms, lounge, or converse with anv one, nor must they stand in their sentry boxes in good or even in moderate weather. Sentries are permitted to sup- port anns (or to sUng, or trail, with the short rifle), or to order their arms and stand at ease; but they are not to slope them unless specially ordered to do so. 5. 16. Sentries paying Compliments. On the approach of un officer, when he is at least fifteen paces distant, a sentry, if on the march, will halt, front, and shoulder arms ; if standing at ease with ordered arms he wUl come to attention and shoulder. To field officers and other officers of the army and navy entitled to the salute, ne will present arms. To all armed parties, whether they axe commanded by an officer or not, a sentry ^viU present arms, and the party ,vi]l well, sho return the compliment, wten marching at the si .4 or' as thev t) support, by shouldering arms, but when marchin, at the couSs^ shoulder side arm To all they are j)rescnt ; the wor( having p Partie with sid armed pi Sentri: but as Ic '.J their shoulder Sentrii Knartly i For se No. 32. When following sentry w comes thi made up< person a] say Pass m he h ROUNDS, 'the reply countersi well, sho' mj^ BLLANROUS SUBJECTS. in the relief, facing to the rear, new sentry will tako one pace nt. jntries will then I shoulder arnid. be ordered to elief will be marched on, and has proceeded aboiiii ten paces 'dered to support arms. try's post should be pointed out I, as well as the extent of his rds and forwards on their posts, soldier-like manner; thejrmust. ns, lounge, or converse with anv n their sentry boxes in good or Sentries are permitted to sup- rail, with the short rifle), or to i at ease; but they are not to ordered to do so. oaying Compliments. Ecer, when he is at least fifteen I the march, will halt, front, and at ease with ordered arms, he shoulder. To field officers and ind navy entitled to thra salute, ther they axe commanded by an present arms, and the party wll len marching at the sl^pe or' n«, but when marchin; at the GUARDS. 631 \Z''wA°'^^ ^^Tu"^ will take, trail, by advancing arms if armed with long rifles, or to h.3 left and then move tofshouldeVing arms if armed with short rifles. Arties ;ith side arms are to be considered as armed parties. To all unarmed parties a sentrv will shoulder arms, unless they are commanded by field oiiicers, in which case he will j)rescnt ; in return, the commander of the pai-ty will f;ivo the word eyes right, or I'ycs left, as the case may be, and having passed him, eyes front. Parties marching with arms at the secure, and parties with side arms, will pay and return compliments as un- armed parties. Sentries will not present arms to any officer after sunset ; but as long as they can discern an officer, they will come '.a their front on his approach, anQ stand steady with shouldered arms till he has jiassed. Sentries in their sentry boxes will salute by coming finartly to ftttention. For sentries on out-post dnty, see Part IV. Section 2?>, No. 32. S. 17. Sentries Chn.U»nging. When it gets dark tire s itnes will challenge in the following manner: — On the ftpproach of any person the sentry will port arms and call out in a sharp tone, who comes there; wl pn on a post 'here a sud'len rush could be made upon him, ho will it ;.xe come to the charge; if the person approaciiiii- lii-fs a - •'-isfactory reply, the sentiy will BAj Pass friend, "f: ^ well, emaining at the port or cWge till he has p' .V If \ j person approaching answers ROUNDS, the n'.rj will demand What rounds; and trfter Vihf reply ora:vi' ''or vts'tino) bounds, when there is no countersign, he / f,ay Pass grand {^.i visiting) rovnds, all's well, shouldering ins ,»;'Ui. at the same time, and prcsnting as they pass if tl.ey ai , ?;!"ind rounds; but when there is a counterBign he .1 say -tand grand (or visiting) rounds. n "1 532 VART VII. — MISCBLLANBOU8 8UBJRCT8. J • *!. ^ • i. iu ^' bovenext M'vance one ana give the counterngn, at the sanio tune i^^^j ^Y^^ coining down to the charge ; in this position he will receive ^^^ j^^^ the countersign, and if it is correct will say Pass grand iq^nds (or visiting) rounds, and proceed as above described. Stand arm If the sentry is on or near the guard-room door, he will -.Q^jitersigr proceed as described in Section \\). , iccomnani S. 18. Instruction of Recruits as Sentries. '^^ advanc( Recruits should be instructed ;n their duties as sentries, tq ^^qI^ ^^ The instructor will post them in different parts of the bar- jjg truard, rack yard, giving each of them some particular orders to /rand rou attend to, and will teach them all the principles described jommissio in the preceding Section. jjg ^len ^ ivards, an( lass betw< vill be 01 ;o grand ri lavc passi nissioned nwards, n »king up ;he preseni lescribed i S. 19. Guards Turning out. When guards turn out they will fall in with shouldered arms at open order, and will pay the compliments lud down in the " Queen's Regulations ;" guards wU not turn out after sunset, except on the approach of a body of troops, in cases of alarm, or to receive visiting rounds, or grand rounds ; in the latter case only paying compliments. The following form will be /derved when a guard is visited by the field oflBcer or captain of the day, called grand or visiting rounds. On the approach of the rounds the sentry at, or near, the guard-room door will port arms, and challenge who comes there; the officer wll answer rounds ; what rounds? grand (or visiting) rounds. Stand grand (or visiting) rounds, guard turn out; the guard will then turn out, and if there is no countersign, as soon as it has }f the de: fallen in, the commander will call out advance grand (or "anks and visiting) rounds, all's well; to grand rounds he will present i*here the to visiting rounds he will remain at th3 shoulder. parch in ; If there is a countersign to be given, a corporal or ser- pne side pf jeant will be sent oat with the right or left file of the^Sut, the of guard, according to the position of the rounds ; he will prbskn The pari FUNERALS. 533 LLANBOU8 8UBJBCT8. , . , .. movenextto the front rank men; when at about ten paces caunterngn,^t the saino tune ^^ the rounds he wiU order his men to halt and port in this position he wiU receive ^ms, and will then repeat the challenge who comes thL? .8 correct wiU say Pms grand ^^^^^^^ j^^^f ^^„/,^ ^^^^^ (or visiting) rounds; :eed as above described. g^^^j ^ (or vmtinff) rounds, advance one and give the u- the guard-room door, he will ,„„„;^,i^„^. ^^^^ ^^^^^ „, the non-commissioned officer '"" (ccompanying the rounds, will then advance and give the f RprrniN a? Sentrip', countersign, the two men of the file charging bayonets as r necrmis asjsenines. ^^ advances ; the non-commissioned officer of the escort will ted ;n their duties as sentries, ^q back and repeat the countersign to the commander of n in different parts of the bar- ;he j^uard, who (if the word is correct) will call out, Advance lem some particular orders to ,jrand rounds (or visiting rounds), all's well. The non- im aU the pnnciples described .ommissioned officer of the escort having returned to lis men, will then order them to Shoulder Arms, face in- is Turning out ivards, and step back three paces each. The rounds will iywill fall in\vith shouldered Pafs between them. If thvill answer rounds ; siting) rounds. Stand grand urn out; the guard will then FUNERALS. S. 20. Directions for Funeral Parties. „ The party appointed for the escort, according to the rank countersign, as soon as it has Jf the deceased, will be drawn up two deep, with opened iU call out advance grand (or "anks and unfixed bayonets, lacing the house or n. vrquee o grand rounds he will present ^|(here the corpse is lodged. Small ]}arties that are to [lain at tha shoulder. parch in files will be formed with their files extended at to be given, a corporal or ser- (one side pace from each other. When the corpse is brought the right or left file of the' ition of the rounds ; he will yut, the officer commanding will proceed as follows :- PRESENT — ARMS. According to regulation. .;rl J 534 PART VII. — MIflCELLANEOUS BUBJECTB, Throw the rifle out to the front to th( full extent of the left arm, give the but a cant with the right hand towards tin ii< body, bringing the butt inside the lefi arm, and turning the muzzle straigh over to the front j seize the rifle witli the right hand under the lower bant? ' barrel to the front, muzzle pointirij; down, guard as liiijrh as the chin, an( seize the cock witli the left hand withoul moving the rifle, arms close to the body. Two.— Give the rifle a cant under thi left arm, bringing the muzzle to thi rear, sling uppermost, and with the righl p, hand behind the body seize the rifle. The officers' swords are reversed undei the right arm, the point of the swore downwards, the hilt being grasped with the right hand. The Serjeants' rifles are reversed alio under the left arm. REVERSE — ARMS. SCAB BAinC takk close order — march. by coupanies (subdivisions or SECTJOSS) rEFT WHEEL, Or ON THE RIGHT BACKWARDS WHEEL. QUICK — MARCH. HALT — DRESS. REAR RANKS TAKE OPEN ORDER— MARCH. Large funeral parties will march bj companies, subdivisions, or sections which will be wheeled forwards or back u wards into column, as circumstances ma; >• require, and will be placed left in froni face at the head of the procession; wher formed, the ranks will again be opened and the files will be extended to oik side pace distance from the right. TUB FACE 8LOW- MARCI The rei bllows:— ALL BBJ 3FFICERS, TWO, AC COMPANIl lUBDIVIB TO THE 1 TURN — B — WHEl ALT — R. INWAB — Fl RANK W ^PACBS 8 BACK- MARCl If the mtwards. i^wn !LLANEOUS 8UBJECTB, the rifle out to the front to th( it of the left arm, give the but th the right hand towards thi if inging the butt inside the lefi 1 turning the muzzle straigh the front j seize the rifle witli i hand under the lower bant? ' > the front, muzzle pointing uard as liifjrh as the chin, am cock with the left hand withoul he rifle, arms close to the body. ■Give the rifle a cant under thi , bringing the muzzle to thi ( uppermost, and with the righl p, linu the body seize the rifle, fleers' swords are reversed undei t arm, the point of the swore . ds, the hilt being grasped with hand. iijeants' rifles are reversed alio a left arm. funeral parties will march bj !8, subdivisions, or sections 11 be wheeled forwards or back u ;o column, as circumstances ma; md will be placed left in froni lead of the procession ; wher :he ranks will again be opened files will be extended to om distance from the right. :&-U"WI JP -,. FUNERALS. In small parties, after the men have reversed arras, they will simply be faced ;o TUB LEFT J ^^^ tj^g igft^ ^nj ,noye(i ^ the head of the procession, both ranks countermarching inwards, if necessary. The party will move o£F in slow time followed by the music, with drums muflled, playing the Dead March. The remainder of the procession wiU be formed as bllows ; — FACE. BLOW — MARCH. THE CORPSE. ALL BEARERS OF EQUAL RANK WITH THE DECEASED ON EACH SIDE OF THE CORPSE. CHIEF MOURNERS. .< • 3FFICERS, OR NON-COMMISSIONED OFFICERM, TWO AND TWO, ACCORDING TO RANK, THE JUNIORS IN FRONT. COMPANIES (or SUBDIVISIONS) TO THE LEFT TURN— RIGHT — WHEEL. ALT — RANKS INWARDS, FACE — FRONT RANK FOUR PACES STEP BACK — MARCH When the head of the procession arrives near the spot where it is to meet the clergyman, if the escort is formed in companies or subdivisions, they will be ordered to turn to the left and wheel ^to the right. When the wheels are completed the escort will be halted, the ranks faced inwards, and the front rank ordered to step back four paces, or more if necessary, forming a lane for the corpse to pass through. If the party is formed in files the ranks will incline mtwards, and will then be halted and faced inwards. r The rifle will be quitted hj the right I hand and brought to a perpendicular 5.'»6 PART VII. — MISOBLLANKOUtt SIJBJKCTH. RRMT ON YOUB ARMS REVBR8BU. STAND AT BASE. ATTBNTION. REVBRSB ARMS. AUG-1 IJ position; the muzzle placed upon t\\ toes of the left foot. The right and Id hands open, are placed upon the but end of the rifle. The soldiers' heads lean on the back o the left hand, so as to look towards tb corpse. The corpse and the remainder o the procession havinj? passed through thi lane, the word attention is given, oi which the soldiers raise their heads. Lay hold of the rifle with the righ hand under the lower band, fingers rouD( the barrel, and raise it under the left arm, muzzle slanting' to the rear; sein 4he cock at the same instant with tlii ^eft hand, move the right hand smartb to the rear of the body, and grasp tb rifle. The ranks will then be faced toward the grave and will move in slow tiin^ the front rank inclining towards th rear rank till at two paces distance Iron it ; the escort will l)e halted and fronted in open order, near the grave and faciD( towards it. RANKS right and left kacb — slow •< halt— front. MARCH. RBBT ON YOUR ARMS REVERSED. STAND AT BASE. The funeral service will be performed, after which tl escort will proceed as follows : — ATTENTION. As already described >• As before described. 8H< / WlTl CAI 1 riRi VOL TJ B PR Aft order be clo or bai in qui In 1 to bee srouni ** W.f of the differe tthe necesB PRBSBNT ARMS. 1st. Seize the rifle vnth the left ham at the swell, thumb in front, back of tl hand towards the body. 9mm 0BI.LANBOU8 RUBJBCTH. n; the muzzle placed upon tli the left foot. The right and lei open, are placed upon the but the rifle, soldiers' heads lean on the back o t hand, so as to look towards tb ■ The corpse and the remainder a acession havinj? passed through th he word attrntion is given, oi the soldiers raise their heads. hold of the rifle with the righ mder the lower band, fingers rouni trrcl, and raise it under the left nuzzle slanting to the rear; seiit ick at the same instant with th ,nd, move the right hand smartl rear of the body, and grasp tin ranks will then be faced toward ave and will move in slow tiin^ ont rank inclining towards ink till at two paces distance Iron B escort will be halted and ftronted n order, near the grave and faciof Is it. lefore described. ill be performed, after which Hows : — ilready described. Seize the rifle \rith the left ham swell, thumb in front, back of tbi towards the body. T a RHOVLDKR ARMS. WITH BLANK CARTRIDOB LOAD. riRE THRBB VOLLEYS IN THE AIR. READY. FUNBRALH. 637 2nd. Seize the small of the butt with the right hand, the back of it to the left, thumb pointing down. 3rd. Turn the rifle with the butt do e to the outside of right arm, inclining the muzzle to the front, to the position of presented arms. According to regulation. According to regulation. According to regulation. {Elevating the muzzle in the air, fire and proceed to load according to regula- tif . tion. After firing three rounds the men will be directed to order arms, fix bayonets, shoulder arms, and the ranks will ti4.be closed. The escort will then be marched back to camp or barracks, in fours, subdivisions, or sections right in front in quick time. In marching back, the music is not to play, or the drums to beat, until the party is entirely clear of the burying ground. N.B. In the funerals of general officers, the arrangements of the prescribed number of pieces of cannon, and of the different troops, must be made under the superintendence c& the general officer commanding the whole, and must tit necessarily depend on local oiroumstancefl. 'iT i Ti- jnm AmmmMUi m m » tu t mn LONDON! Printed by OflOBOR B. Kmn »nd Win. 1''pTTl*W00l>H. PrlntorB to tlio Quooii'ii most Exci Mnjenly. For Her Majesty '• tutlouon «<>• DaMMMMMawMM ■I r LONDON! lOBOR B. Etrr and WiLt 4 to tlU! QUUOll'll l>l(«t ElCl ur lUr Mnjpsty". t»tlonon IrOTTlBWOODB, I M^enly. "eril 1^|*>>' IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) W ,-"r>v.' ■■■ ■f-.-. ■■.1 -i;':v,iffi'r.-* ^-•,Jf-r''ir' '"'''mm '/. s s* ^ CIHM/ICMH Microfiche Series. CIHM/ICMH Collection de microfiches. Canadian Institute for Historical MIcroreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiques <^ff^0ii^0s^^^^efmi'^^^^^^^i^^Sztms-'!<-^'i- v- ■»*--^ M^c tys-v - fr* ''.;->*'. nut pubHxIttdJ t))W>((2». fW. PROt)EEDINGS I ^t '^idmd "^S&t ^0$0dati0n, FOB THE EHCOUSAaCMINT OT TOLCMTESB Kin.1 COUt O rat PKOMOTIOH OF BIFLB SHOOrriNO TBBOCaBODT OBBAT ■BITAIM AND TBI COLOMIES. 1861. H, A C0tITAINI^O PROGRAMME AND FULL ACCOUNT. The HEETIN« at WlHBLEiON im JVLY Int, with Prize Lista, Details Aiid Analysis of Shooting, Names of Wiuners, and Rifles used, and Plan of Ground; Also a Statement qf BECEIPTS and EXPBNDiTVME, EULES OF ASSOCUTION. BYE-LAWS, LIST OF SUBSCRIBERS, AND HEHBEKS OF COUNCIL, BTO. WITH CONDITIONS OF SHOOTING IN %H92, tan NATIONAL RIFLE DERBY AMD THE ST. CEORCE'S CHALLENGE VASE. TO WHICH IS AFPINDF.D FULL lEPORT* OF eOUNTY AND COLONIAL AtOOOIATIONO, iND STATrSTICS OF THE SBOOTIKOS AT TBEIB I'BIZB MlXTINQS. LONDON: BOID BY ■ AKKBB, Son, and Bocek, «5, West Strand ; W. Clowto and Sous, 14, Charing Cross ; Habhison and Sons, 69, Pall Mall ; W. H. Smith and Son, 184, Strand ; and at The Office op thb National Bivui Association, 11, Pal) Mall East. i^iso by Adam and Cbaxlxs Black, BdinbuMh ; And Alex. Tuom and Sons, 87 and 88, Abbey Street, Dublin. MILITARY lOOKS FOR Till USE OF VOLURTEERS. REGULATIONS VOB THE VOLUNTEER FORCE. Dated War Office, 19th Jmtuary, 1861. CONTAININO:— Conatltntlon and E>Ubli»hmeiit<. I Admlnlstratiro Orgsnlntlon. Formation ol Corps. Attaohmentot'CorM. Precedence. Astembliea for Drill. Knrnlled Memliera. Clothinx and Accoutrement), tlonorary Memtiera. Auistant Inap/wton. Rulea. . kc. *o. fco. Court! of Inqutry. I Demy 8v'o., cloth boards. Price Iff. DRILL AND RIFLE INSTRUCTION rok TUB CORPS OF RIFLE VOLUNTEERS, Bjl Authority of the Secretary of State for War. Tenth Edition, with Diagrams. Price W. i Post free, M. INSTRUCTiONS roB MOUNTED RIFLE VOLUNTEERS, By Authority of the Secretary of State for War. CONTAIMING PftBLiMiNA'iir, Squad, and Gohfakt DBitt ; Genkbal BbmabkbI OK TKB UUIIBS OF MOUMTKO KlFLB VOLUNTBBBB; BWOSD EXBRCISE, &C., &C. Demy 12ino., cloth boards. Price 6d, LONDON: PrinM under the Superintendence qfff.3l. Stationery Office, AND SOLD BT Pabkes, Son, and BoimN, as, West Strand ; W. CtowBS and SoHS, 14, Charing Cross ; Hasbison and Sows, 59, Pall Mall ; and W. H. Axlbh and Co., 18, Waterloo Place. Also by Ai£X. Tboh and Sobs, Abbey Street, Dublin. 8 FOR Till USE OF VOLURTEERS. |lt\%ntg. EGULATIONS VOB >LUNTEER FORCE. IFar Office, nth January, 1861. CONTAININO:— hmenki. Admlnlatratire Organiution. Attachment ot'Oor|». Astemblies for Drill. Clothinx and Accoutrement!. Auistant InapiKton, ki. *o. ke. r 8v'o., cloth boards. Price It. ) RIFLE INSTRUCTION rOk THE F RIFLE VOLUNTEERS, of the Secretary of State for War. rith Diagrams. Price 6d. ; Post fh>e, Qd. fsfRUCTIONS roB RIFLE VOLUNTEERS, < of the Secretary of State for War. COMTAIMINO t, Ain> COMPAK Y DBII.1, ; Genkbal Bbmabkb F Mounted Kifle VoLUNTBasg; Swobd EXBRCISE, &C., &C. ISino., cloth boards. Price 6d, LONDON: SuperintendeHce qfHM. Stationery Office, \ AND SOU) BT urns, MS, West Strand ; W. CtowBS and SoHS, IS8 ; Hasbison and Sows, 69, Pall Mall ; AXLBH aod Co., 13, Waterloo Place. Tboh and Sobs, Abbey Street, Dublin. I I KSBE* -^